Reference Guide ShopTrac Pro v2.

ShopTrac Pro

A guide to installing and setting up the ShopTrac Pro system

Documentation Part Number: 4702576-001 Document Revision: A.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Kronos Incorporated. Kronos Incorporated assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual. This document or any part thereof may not be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Kronos Incorporated. All rights reserved. Copyright 19972001. CardSaver, Datakeeper, Datakeeper Central, Gatekeeper, Gatekeeper Central, Imagekeeper, Jobkeeper, Jobkeeper Central, [Link], Kronos, the Kronos logo, ShopTrac, the ShopTrac logo, Solution In A Box, [Link], TeleTime, Timekeeper, Timekeeper Central, TimeMaker, and VisionWare are registered trademarks of Kronos Incorporated. CommLink, [Link], DKC/Datalink, HyperFind, Labor Activity Manager, Labor Plus, Prism, ShopTrac Pro, Smart Scheduler, Starter Series, [Link], [Link], [Link], Tempo, the Tempo logo, Workforce Activities, Workforce Central, Workforce Central Suite logo, Workforce Express, Workforce Manager, Workforce Smart Scheduler, Workforce TeleTime, Workforce Timekeeper, and Workforce Web are trademarks of Kronos Incorporated. Adaptive Server is a trademark of Sybase, Incorporated. AS and WebSphere are trademarks, and AIX, AS/400, and IBM are registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Carbon Copy and Carbon Copy 32 are trademarks, and OpenVMS is a registered trademark of Compaq Computer Corporation. Cognos, Impromptu, and PowerPlay are registered trademarks, and PowerCube is a trademark of Cognos Incorporated. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. INFORMIX-OnLine is a registered trademark of Informix Software, Inc. Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. INTERSOLV is a registered trademark of MERANT Solutions Inc. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, Windows 95, and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. Net8 is a trademark, and ORACLE, SQL*Net, and SQL*Plus are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation. PeopleSoft is a registered trademark of PeopleSoft, Inc. [Link] is a trademark of Pervasive Software Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Seagate Crystal Reports is a registered trademark of Seagate Software, Incorporated. Show N Tel is a registered trademark of Brooktrout Technology. Solaris is a trademark and Sun is a registered trademark of Sun MicroSystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Ltd. Velcro is a registered trademark of Velcro Industries B.V. Visual DataFlex is a registered trademark of Data Access Corporation. When using and applying the information generated by Kronos products, customers should ensure that they comply with the applicable requirements of federal and state law, such as the Fair Labor Standards Act.

Published by Kronos Incorporated 297 Billerica Road, Chelmsford, Massachusetts 01824-4119 Phone: 978-250-9800, Fax: 978-367-5900 Kronos Incorporated Global Support: 1-800-394-HELP (1-800-394-4357) For a complete list of the international subsidiaries, see the following Kronos Incorporated Web page:
[Link]

Document Revision History

Document Revision New A Product Version ShopTrac Pro 2.0 ShopTrac Pro 2.1 Release Date October 2001 December 2001

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCING SHOPTRAC PRO .............................................................................................................................................. 1 ABOUT SHOPTRAC PRO .................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 WHAT IS SHOPTRAC PRO? ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 WHAT IS A DATA COLLECTION DEVICE? ............................................................................................................................................................... 1 WHAT IS DATA COLLECTION MANAGER (DCM)? ................................................................................................................................................. 2 WHAT DOES A TYPICAL DAY LOOK LIKE WITH SHOPTRAC PRO?............................................................................................................................ 3 SHOPTRAC PRO MENUS -- BRIEF DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 4 DATA COLLECTION MANAGER (DCM)......................................................................................................................................................... 5 TRANSACTION PROCESSOR ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6 SHOPTRAC PRO MENUS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 TIME/LABOR EDITOR:............................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 REPORTS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 8 EMPLOYEES ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12 CHANGE PASSWORD ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 12 SETUP .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12 ELECTRONIC TIMECARD (ADD-ON).................................................................................................................................................................. 15 MACHINE TIME EDITOR ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15 TEAM BUILDER (ADD-ON) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 15 UTILITIES ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 TRANSACTION ENTRY ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 16 HELP .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16 SHOPTRACPRO TIME AND ATTENDANCE ONLY .................................................................................................................................... 17 HELP .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21 B2B & WEB REPORTING.................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 WEB REPORTING ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 21 B2B ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 EVENT MANAGER ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 ADDING AN EVENT............................................................................................................................................................................................... 23 [Link] ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26 FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26 TYPES OF TRANSACTIONS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 26 Key Transactions............................................................................................................................................................................................. 26 Keyless Transaction ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 27 Supervisor Transactions.................................................................................................................................................................................. 27 MAPPING ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 27 TRANSACTIONS.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27 ASCII FILE FORMAT ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 27 DATABASE TABLE FORMAT ................................................................................................................................................................................. 28 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................................................................................... 29 SETUP.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW....................................................................................................................................................................... 29 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................................................................................................... 31 FLAGS (ALL) CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................................................................ 33 USER-DEFINED LABELS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 34 TIME & ATTENDANCE CONFIGURATION .............................................................................................................................................................. 35 General............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 35 Signoff ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 35 Audit Trail ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 36 Pay Rules......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 37 Reports ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 38 LABOR CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................................................................................... 38

-i-

General Flags.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 38 Sign Off ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39 Audit Trail ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39 Timecard ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40 TIME/LABOR EDITOR ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 41 Time/Labor Editor Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................... 42 EVENT SCHEDULING CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................................................................ 44 General Flags.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 44 Nightly Batch................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45 Personnel Archive ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 47 MACHINE UTILIZATION CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 49 DATE DETERMINATION.................................................................................................................................................................................. 51 NEXT DAY SHIFT ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 54 DEFAULTS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 55 EMPLOYEE DEFAULTS ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 56 Home ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 56 Absence ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 56 Labor............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 57 WORK ORDER DEFAULTS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 58 OPERATION DEFAULTS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 60 DAILY SCHEDULE DEFAULTS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 62 SHIFT DEFAULTS ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 62 Rules................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 63 Rounding ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 65 Meal/Breaks .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 66 Restriction/Enforcement .................................................................................................................................................................................. 67 Premium Zone ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 68 Exceptions ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 68 SCHEDULE DEFAULTS.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 71 General............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 72 Consecutive Day Pay Scales............................................................................................................................................................................ 73 Day of Week Pay Scales .................................................................................................................................................................................. 74 PAY RULE DEFAULTS .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 74 Pay Rule .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 74 Hours Level/ Pay Category ............................................................................................................................................................................. 75 TRANSACTION DEFAULTS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 76 General............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 76 Employee Access ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 77 WORK PERIOD ENFORCEMENT ................................................................................................................................................................... 78 DEVICE CONFIGURATION.............................................................................................................................................................................. 80 IMPORT DEVICES ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 80 DEVICES .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 81 EXPORT TRANSACTION ASSIGNMENTS ................................................................................................................................................................ 82 TRANSACTIONS.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 83 Transaction Programs..................................................................................................................................................................................... 85 Adding a New Transaction .............................................................................................................................................................................. 87 Prompts ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 89 TRANSACTION PROMPTS...................................................................................................................................................................................... 91 TRANSACTION MAPPING ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 95 Using Multiple Mappings ................................................................................................................................................................................ 95 Using Validation.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 95 TRANSACTION MAPPINGS AND CUSTOM CODES .................................................................................................................................................. 96 NEW/EDIT CUSTOM CODES ............................................................................................................................................................................... 96 CODE TABLES .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 97 DEPARTMENT/GROUPS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 98 JOB CLASSES ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 100 LABOR CODES ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 101 RATE CLASSES................................................................................................................................................................................................... 102 General Information...................................................................................................................................................................................... 103 Calculation Order ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 103 Rate Class Usage........................................................................................................................................................................................... 103 WORK CENTER .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 104 ABSENCE CODES................................................................................................................................................................................................ 106

- ii -

Extra Hours................................................................................................................................................................................................... 107 ACCRUAL CODES ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 108 COMPLETION CODES.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 108 AUDIT TRAIL REASON CODES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 109 MACHINE STATUS CODES .................................................................................................................................................................................. 109 General Reason Codes .................................................................................................................................................................................. 110 SCRAP CODES .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 111 CUSTOMER STATUS CODES ............................................................................................................................................................................... 111 AUTOMATIC DEDUCTION OVERRIDE CODES...................................................................................................................................................... 112 WORK ORDER STATUS CODES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 112 FLAGS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 113 DAILY SCHEDULE TYPES ................................................................................................................................................................................... 114 CUSTOMER TYPES ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 115 DATE RANGE TYPES .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 115 EMPLOYEE ACCESS TYPES ................................................................................................................................................................................ 116 JOB CLASS TYPES .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 116 LABOR CODE TYPES .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 116 MACHINE TYPES ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 117 OPERATION TYPES ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 117 PART NUMBER TYPES ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 118 PAY RULE PROFILE TYPES ................................................................................................................................................................................. 118 RATE CLASS TYPES ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 119 SCHEDULE CHARACTERS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 119 SHIFT TYPES ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120 TEAM TYPES ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120 TRANSACTION TYPES ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 120 WORK CENTER TYPES ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 121 WORK ORDER TYPES ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 121 WORK SCHEDULE TYPES ................................................................................................................................................................................... 122 HOURS ALLOCATION RULES ...................................................................................................................................................................... 123 CONFIGURING HOURS ALLOCATION RULES....................................................................................................................................................... 124 CONSECUTIVE DAY SCALE ................................................................................................................................................................................ 125 DAILY SCHEDULE SCALE ................................................................................................................................................................................... 125 DAY OF WEEK SCALE ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 126 PAY CATEGORIES .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 126 Hours Categories .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 128 PAY RULES ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 129 Counting Towards Limits, Examples ............................................................................................................................................................. 131 Additive Rules................................................................................................................................................................................................ 131 PAY RULE PROFILES .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 132 Pay Rule Tab ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 133 Hours Level and Pay Category Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 134 WORK ORDER, ABSENCE CODE PAY SCALE ...................................................................................................................................................... 134 DEFAULT TRANSACTION CODE TABLE................................................................................................................................................... 136 RECALCULATE HOURS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 140 ERROR CHECKING ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 142 WIP (WORK IN PROGRESS) ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................................................................................................... 144 AUTOMATIC FUNCTIONALITIES................................................................................................................................................................ 146 AUTOMATIC CLOCK-IN/OUT ............................................................................................................................................................................. 146 AUTOMATIC QUANTITY COMPLETE ................................................................................................................................................................... 149 CONFIGURING AUTOMATIC QUANTITY COMPLETE............................................................................................................................................ 150 AUTOMATIC RECALCULATION UTILITY ............................................................................................................................................................. 151 AUTOMATIC REPORT PROCESSING .................................................................................................................................................................... 154 EMPIDFILL and RESSEL Parameters.......................................................................................................................................................... 155 AUTOMATIC REPORT PROCESSING WITH EVENT MANAGER .............................................................................................................................. 156 AUTOMATIC REPORT PROCESSING WITH A SHORTCUT ...................................................................................................................................... 157 QUERY TRANSACTIONS................................................................................................................................................................................ 158 QUERYDAY TRANSACTIONS........................................................................................................................................................................... 160 QUERYWIP TRANSACTIONS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 165 CHAPTER 3 DEFINING WORK IN PROGRESS AND WORK SCHEDULES .......................................................................................... 169

- iii -

LABOR/WORK IN PROCESS.......................................................................................................................................................................... 169 CUSTOMERS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 170 SUPPLIERS ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 171 PART NUMBERS ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 171 UNIT OF MEASURE CONVERSIONS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 172 WORK ORDERS .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 172 Operations list ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 176 Operations sub-menu..................................................................................................................................................................................... 176 Direct Work Orders....................................................................................................................................................................................... 181 Indirect Work Orders .................................................................................................................................................................................... 181 Using Quantity Validation............................................................................................................................................................................. 181 Using Sequence Validation............................................................................................................................................................................ 182 ROUTERS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 182 TEAMS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 186 MACHINES ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 190 REWORK OPERATION ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 WORK ORDER SPLIT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 WORK SCHEDULES......................................................................................................................................................................................... 192 DAILY ASSIGNMENT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 193 ABSENCE SCHEDULING ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 195 DATE RANGES ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 195 SCHEDULES ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 196 SHIFTS ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 201 SHIFT RESTRICTION-ENFORCEMENT DIFFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................... 217 Daily Overtime Limit..................................................................................................................................................................................... 217 Period Overtime Limit................................................................................................................................................................................... 217 PREMIUM ZONE ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 218 CHAPTER 4 USING TIME/LABOR EDITOR................................................................................................................................................ 220 TIME/LABOR EDITOR - EMPLOYEE DISPLAY ........................................................................................................................................ 220 TIME/LABOR EDITOR - SELECTION CRITERIA WINDOW .................................................................................................................. 224 TIME/LABOR EDITOR - EDITING MULTIPLE RECORDS ...................................................................................................................... 233 TIME/LABOR EDITOR - EDITING TIME RECORDS ................................................................................................................................ 235 TIME FILES ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 242 TIME/LABOR EDITOR - EDITING LABOR RECORDS............................................................................................................................. 244 LABOR FILE ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 251 QUANTITY SYNCHING ................................................................................................................................................................................... 253 LHOURS FILE.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 253 TIME/LABOR EDITOR - AUDIT TRAIL ....................................................................................................................................................... 254 AUTOMATIC HOURS RECALCULATION................................................................................................................................................... 255 ELECTRONIC SIGNOFF ................................................................................................................................................................................. 256 CHAPTER 5 MAINTAINING EMPLOYEE FILES ....................................................................................................................................... 258 EMPLOYEES...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 258 PARTIAL DAY ABSENCES (PDA).................................................................................................................................................................. 264 PDA LOGIC ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 265 EMPLOYEE ID NUMBER LOGIC .................................................................................................................................................................. 267

- iv -

ACCRUALS FUNCTIONALITY ...................................................................................................................................................................... 267 CHAPTER 6 PROTECTING THE SHOPTRAC PRO SYSTEM .................................................................................................................. 269 SECURITY.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 269 SECURITY ACCESS PROFILES..................................................................................................................................................................... 269 SECURITY GROUP PROFILES ...................................................................................................................................................................... 270 USER PROFILES - SECURITY........................................................................................................................................................................ 273 CHANGE PASSWORD...................................................................................................................................................................................... 276 CHAPTER 7 GENERATING REPORTS......................................................................................................................................................... 279 REPORTS............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 279 REPORT PRINTING OPTIONS....................................................................................................................................................................... 280 AUDIT TRAIL ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 280 Labor Audit by ID (AUD301)........................................................................................................................................................................ 282 Labor Audit by Date (AUD300)..................................................................................................................................................................... 284 Labor Audit Whole Record (AUD305)........................................................................................................................................................... 285 Time Audit by ID (AUD311).......................................................................................................................................................................... 287 Time Audit by Date (AUD310) ...................................................................................................................................................................... 289 Time Audit Whole Record (AUD315) ............................................................................................................................................................ 290 BARCODES ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 293 Departments (DPT020) ................................................................................................................................................................................. 294 Employee Badge Labels (EMP033)............................................................................................................................................................... 295 Employee ID Labels (EMP031)..................................................................................................................................................................... 295 Job Class (JCL020) ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 296 Labor Code (LBRC020) ................................................................................................................................................................................ 297 Labor Code Labels (LBRC030) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 298 Machine (MAC020)....................................................................................................................................................................................... 299 Rate Class (RCL020)..................................................................................................................................................................................... 300 Reason Codes (COD020) .............................................................................................................................................................................. 301 Supervisor Cards (SupvCard)........................................................................................................................................................................ 302 Transactions (TRX020) ................................................................................................................................................................................. 303 Travelers (TRV015)....................................................................................................................................................................................... 304 Work Center (WKC020) ................................................................................................................................................................................ 307 Work Order (TRV020)................................................................................................................................................................................... 307 Work Order Labels (TRV030) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 308 DAILY ASSIGNMENT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 310 Assignment Schedule Chart (PRS090)........................................................................................................................................................... 310 Assignment Schedule Summary (PRS092) ..................................................................................................................................................... 312 Personnel Archive Chart (PRS080)............................................................................................................................................................... 314 LABOR REPORTS ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 317 Employee Activity (LAB420).......................................................................................................................................................................... 317 Labor Hours Summary (LAB475).................................................................................................................................................................. 323 Period Timecard (LAB451) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 326 Rate Detail by Employee ID & Date (LAB423) ............................................................................................................................................. 330 Rate Detail by ID & Work Order (LAB427) .................................................................................................................................................. 333 Team Status (LAB440)................................................................................................................................................................................... 338 Work Order Detail (LAB402) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 339 EXCEPTIONS ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 344 Daily Exceptions (ADM900).......................................................................................................................................................................... 344 Signoff Exceptions (TAA560)......................................................................................................................................................................... 348 LISTS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 350 Access Profile Listing (ACCESSPR).............................................................................................................................................................. 350 Customer (CUSTOLS1) ................................................................................................................................................................................. 350 Device Listing (TTX917) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 351 Employees (EMPLOLS1)............................................................................................................................................................................... 351 Export Field Listing (EXFILLS1) .................................................................................................................................................................. 353 Export Format Listing (EXFMTLS2)............................................................................................................................................................. 354 Group Profile Listing (GROUPPR)............................................................................................................................................................... 356

-v-

Import Format Listing (IMPFMLS1)............................................................................................................................................................. 356 Pay Rule Profiles (PRPROLS1)..................................................................................................................................................................... 357 Prompts (PROMPLST).................................................................................................................................................................................. 358 Shifts Detail (SHIFTLS2)............................................................................................................................................................................... 358 Transactions (TRANSLST) ............................................................................................................................................................................ 360 Transaction Programs (TTX920)................................................................................................................................................................... 360 User Profile Listing (USERPR) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 361 Work Schedules Detail (WRKSCLS1)............................................................................................................................................................ 361 LOGS.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 362 Transaction Log (BCL015)............................................................................................................................................................................ 362 Batch Log by Date Run (BCH070) ................................................................................................................................................................ 365 MACHINE UTILIZATION ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 367 History by Work Center (MAC211) ............................................................................................................................................................... 367 In Progress by Work Center (MAC213) ........................................................................................................................................................ 369 Usage by Machine (MAC218) ....................................................................................................................................................................... 370 QUALITY CONTROL ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 373 Quality Control By Employee/ID (QC353).................................................................................................................................................... 373 By Scrap Code (QC351)................................................................................................................................................................................ 374 Quality Control By Scrap Code Summary (QC381) ...................................................................................................................................... 376 By Work Center (QC352) .............................................................................................................................................................................. 377 Quality Control By Work Order (QC354) ..................................................................................................................................................... 378 Quality Control By Work Order Summary (QC384)...................................................................................................................................... 380 TIME & ATTENDANCE ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 382 Absentee (TAA510)........................................................................................................................................................................................ 382 Approaching Overtime (TAA519).................................................................................................................................................................. 384 Clock In Detail (TAA500).............................................................................................................................................................................. 386 Pay Category Amounts Summary (TAA132).................................................................................................................................................. 390 Weekly Schedule (TAA133)............................................................................................................................................................................ 391 Accruals Details (ACR001) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 393 WORK IN PROCESS (WIP).................................................................................................................................................................................. 394 WIP by Work Center (WIP105) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 394 WIP Hours & Efficiencies (WIP111)............................................................................................................................................................. 396 WIP Movement (WIP112).............................................................................................................................................................................. 399 WIP Summary (WIP103) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 403 WIP W/O Top Assembly (WIP199)................................................................................................................................................................ 405 CHAPTER 8 USING SHOPTRAC PRO UTILITIES................................................................................................................................... 409 UTILITIES OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................................................................... 409 ADDING DELIMITERS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 409 DATABASE BUILDER ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 409 DATABASE EXPLORER .................................................................................................................................................................................. 410 IMPORT EMPLOYEES PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................................................................ 411 IMPORTING UTILITIES.................................................................................................................................................................................. 412 FORMATS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 412 DATA ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 416 EMPLOYEES ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 417 WORK ORDER .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 418 OPERATIONS ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 419 EMPLOYEES - ACCRUALS .................................................................................................................................................................................. 420 EMPLOYEE EXPORT ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 421 EXPORTING ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 423 FORMATS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 425 CUSTOM FIELDS................................................................................................................................................................................................. 436 TIME .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 438 LABOR ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 440 LABOR HOURS (PAYROLL) ................................................................................................................................................................................ 444 MACHINES ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 447 WORK SCHEDULES ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 448 Work Schedule Export ................................................................................................................................................................................... 448

- vi -

Work Schedules Listing Parameters .............................................................................................................................................................. 449 UTILITIES GKC EXPORT............................................................................................................................................................................... 450 EMPLOYEES ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 450 KAT EXPORTS .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 451 KAT EMPLOYEE ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 451 Employee Export ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 451 KAT Work Schedules ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 453 Work Schedule Export ................................................................................................................................................................................... 453 KAT HOURS ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 453 Hours Export................................................................................................................................................................................................. 454 KAT PAY CATEGORIES ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 456 NEXTRAK EXPORTS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 457 NEXTRAK EXPORTS EMPLOYEES....................................................................................................................................................................... 458 NEXTRAK EXPORTS SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................................................................................... 460 NEXTRAK EXPORTS HOURS............................................................................................................................................................................... 461 NEXTRAK EXPORTS PAY CATEGORIES .............................................................................................................................................................. 464 MISCELLANEOUS UTILITIES....................................................................................................................................................................... 465 NIGHTLY BATCH UTILITY .................................................................................................................................................................................. 465 MARK RECORDS FOR CALCULATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 466 RECALCULATION OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................................. 467 ON-LINE VS. FULLY-QUALIFIED RECALCULATION ............................................................................................................................................ 468 WHEN TRANSACTIONS COME IN DURING RECALCULATION ............................................................................................................................... 469 RECALCULATION TRIGGERS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 469 TRIGGERS-BATCH HOURS ONLY ....................................................................................................................................................................... 470 CALCULATING HOURS IN BATCH-ONLY MODE ................................................................................................................................................. 471 CHANGE OF HOURS ALLOCATION DATA AT LOG-OFF-ONLY LOG-OFF ................................................................................................................. 471 CHANGE OF WEIGHTING DATA AT MULTIPLE-JOB LOG-OFF ................................................................................................................................ 473 CLOCKING IN WITH A PREVIOUS DAY MARKED FOR RECALCULATION ................................................................................................................ 473 ELECTRONIC TIMECARD .................................................................................................................................................................................... 474 EXTRA HOURS RECORDED AT BEGINNING OF DAY ............................................................................................................................................. 474 HOURS ALLOCATION ON PREVIOUS DAYS .......................................................................................................................................................... 474 LATE LABOR ROUNDING AT CLOCK-OUT TIME ................................................................................................................................................... 476 PARTIAL DAY ABSENCE TARDY PERIOD ........................................................................................................................................................... 476 USE OF PREMIUM ZONES WITH BATCH QUALIFIERS .......................................................................................................................................... 477 USE OF PREMIUM ZONES WITH EXPANSION ZONES ........................................................................................................................................... 477 CLEAR LOCAL TEMP FILES......................................................................................................................................................................... 479 CLEARING TEMPORARY FILES ........................................................................................................................................................................... 479 CLEAN-UP SHARED TEMP FILES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 479 CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT STATUS................................................................................................................................................................. 480 PURGE UTILITY............................................................................................................................................................................................... 480 AUDIT DATA ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 482 BATCH LOG ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 482 CLEAR TRANSACTION LOG ................................................................................................................................................................................ 483 DAILY ASSIGNMENTS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 483 LABOR EVENT ORPHANS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 484 LABOR/EVENTS ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 484 MACHINE UTILIZATION ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 485 TIME RECORDS .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 486 TRANSACTION LOG ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 486 WORK ORDER .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 486 CHAPTER 9 USING MACHINE TIME EDITOR AND TRANSACTION ENTRY .................................................................................... 489 MACHINE TIME EDITOR............................................................................................................................................................................... 489 TRANSACTION ENTRY................................................................................................................................................................................... 492 CHAPTER 10 USING SHOPTRAC PRO ADD-ON PROGRAMS ................................................................................................................ 496

- vii -

TEAM BUILDER -- ADD-ON ........................................................................................................................................................................... 496 TIME-BASED VS. HOURS-BASED ................................................................................................................................................................. 497 ELECTRONIC TIMECARD -- ADD-ON......................................................................................................................................................... 498 APPENDIX A ACCESS PROFILES AND REPORT PARAMETERS.......................................................................................................... 503 SECURITY ACCESS PROFILE PARAMETERS........................................................................................................................................... 503 TIME/LABOR EDITOR PARAMETERS........................................................................................................................................................ 504 REPORT TABLE LISTING .............................................................................................................................................................................. 510 REPORT PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 513 AUDIT TRAIL ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 513 Labor Audit By Date Parameter (AUD300) .................................................................................................................................................. 513 Labor Audit By ID Parameter (AUD301)...................................................................................................................................................... 514 Labor Audit Whole Record Parameter (AUD305)......................................................................................................................................... 515 Time Audit By Date Parameter (AUD310) .................................................................................................................................................... 516 Time Audit By ID Parameter (AUD311)........................................................................................................................................................ 517 Time Audit Whole Record Parameter (AUD315)........................................................................................................................................... 518 BARCODES ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 520 Department Parameter (DPT020) ................................................................................................................................................................. 520 Employee Badge Labels Parameter (EMP033) ............................................................................................................................................. 520 Employee ID Labels Parameter (EMP031) ................................................................................................................................................... 520 Job Class Parameter (JCL020) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 521 Labor Code Parameter (LBRC020)............................................................................................................................................................... 521 Labor Code Labels Parameter (LBRC030) ................................................................................................................................................... 521 Machine Parameter (MAC020) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 522 Rate Class Parameter (RCL020) ................................................................................................................................................................... 522 Reason Code Parameter (COD020) .............................................................................................................................................................. 522 Transaction Barcodes Parameter (TRX020) ................................................................................................................................................. 523 Travelers Parameters (TRV015).................................................................................................................................................................... 523 Work Center Barcodes Parameter (WKC020)............................................................................................................................................... 525 Work Order Barcodes Parameter (TRV020) ................................................................................................................................................. 525 Work Order Labels Parameter (TRV030)...................................................................................................................................................... 525 DAILY ASSIGNMENT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 526 Assignment Schedule Chart Parameters (PRS090)........................................................................................................................................ 526 Assignment Schedule Summary Parameters (PRS092).................................................................................................................................. 527 Personnel Archive Chart Parameter (PRS080) ............................................................................................................................................. 529 EXCEPTIONS ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 530 Daily Exceptions Parameters (ADM900) ...................................................................................................................................................... 530 Signoff Exceptions Parameters (TAA560) ..................................................................................................................................................... 531 LABOR EVENTS.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 533 Employee Activity (LAB420).......................................................................................................................................................................... 533 Labor Hours Summary (LAB475).................................................................................................................................................................. 535 Period Timecard (LAB451) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 537 Rate Detail by ID, Date (LAB423)................................................................................................................................................................. 540 Rate Detail by ID, Work Order (LAB427) ..................................................................................................................................................... 541 Team Status Parameters (LAB440) ............................................................................................................................................................... 544 Work Order Detail Parameters (LAB402)..................................................................................................................................................... 544 LISTS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 547 Access Profile Listing Parameter (ACCESSPR)............................................................................................................................................ 547 Customer Parameter (CUSTOLS1) ............................................................................................................................................................... 547 Device File Parameters (TTX917)................................................................................................................................................................. 548 Employee Listing (EMPLOLS1) .................................................................................................................................................................... 548 Export Formats Listing (EXFMTLS2) ........................................................................................................................................................... 549 Import Format Listing Parameter (IMPFMLS1)........................................................................................................................................... 550 Pay Rule Profiles (PRPROLS1)..................................................................................................................................................................... 550 Prompts Parameter (PROMPLST) ................................................................................................................................................................ 550 Shifts Listing Parameters (SHIFTLS2) .......................................................................................................................................................... 551 Transactions Listing Parameter (TRANSLST)............................................................................................................................................... 551 Transaction Programs Listing Parameters (TTX920) ................................................................................................................................... 552 User Profile Listing Parameter (USERPR) ................................................................................................................................................... 552 Work Schedules Detail Listing Parameters (WRKSCLS1)............................................................................................................................. 552 LOGS.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 554

- viii -

Transaction Log Parameters (BCL015) ........................................................................................................................................................ 554 Batch Log by Date Run (BCH070) ................................................................................................................................................................ 555 MACHINE UTILIZATION ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 557 History by Work Center Parameter (MAC211) ............................................................................................................................................. 557 Machine In Progress by Work Center Parameter (MAC213)........................................................................................................................ 557 Usage by Machine Parameter (MAC218) ..................................................................................................................................................... 558 QUALITY CONTROL ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 560 Quality Control By Employee/ID Parameter (QC353).................................................................................................................................. 560 Quality Control By Scrap Code Parameter (QC351) .................................................................................................................................... 560 Quality Control By Scrap Code Summary Parameter (QC381)..................................................................................................................... 561 Quality Control By Work Center Parameter (QC352)................................................................................................................................... 562 Quality Control By Work Order Parameter (QC354).................................................................................................................................... 563 Quality Control By Work Order Summary Parameter (QC384).................................................................................................................... 563 TIME AND ATTENDANCE .................................................................................................................................................................................... 565 Absentee Parameter (TAA510) ...................................................................................................................................................................... 565 Approaching Overtime Parameters (TAA519)............................................................................................................................................... 566 Clock In Detail (TAA500).............................................................................................................................................................................. 567 Reports T A Pay Category Amounts Summary Parameter (TAA132) ............................................................................................................ 569 Reports T A Weekly Schedule Parameter (TAA133) ...................................................................................................................................... 570 Accruals Detail Parameter (ACR001) ........................................................................................................................................................... 570 WORK IN PROGRESS .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 572 WIP by Work Center Parameter (WIP105) ................................................................................................................................................... 572 WIP Hours and Efficiencies (WIP111) .......................................................................................................................................................... 572 WIP Movement Parameter (WIP112)............................................................................................................................................................ 573 WIP Summary Parameters (WIP103)............................................................................................................................................................ 574 Reports WIP W/O Top Assembly Parameter (WIP199) ................................................................................................................................. 575 FILEMODE PARAMETER............................................................................................................................................................................... 576 FILENAME PARAMETER............................................................................................................................................................................... 576 SETUP PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 577 WORK SCHEDULES FILE PARAMETERS .............................................................................................................................................................. 577 SHIFTS FILE PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 577 UTILITIES PARAMETERS.............................................................................................................................................................................. 578 SCHEDULES (STEXPORTWRKSCH.VD5) - PARAMETER ...................................................................................................................................... 579 EMPLOYEES (STEXPORTEMP.VD5) - PARAMETER.............................................................................................................................................. 580 HOURS KAT (STEXPORTKAT.VD5) - PARAMETER ........................................................................................................................................... 581 PAY CATEGORIES (STEXPORTPAYCAT.VD5) - PARAMETER .............................................................................................................................. 582 SCHEDULES (STEXPORTWRKSCH.VD5) - PARAMETER ...................................................................................................................................... 583 HOURS NEXTRAK (STEXPORTNXTHRS.VD5) - PARAMETER .............................................................................................................................. 583 PAY CATEGORIES NEXTRAK (STEXPORTNXTPCABS.VD5) - PARAMETER ........................................................................................................ 585 SCHEDULES NEXTRAK (STEXPORTNXTSCH.VD5) - PARAMETER ...................................................................................................................... 586 HOURS EXPORT ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 588 HOURS EXPORT ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 588 PAY CATEGORIES EXPORT ................................................................................................................................................................................. 591 IMPORTING ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 592 Import Data File Parameters ........................................................................................................................................................................ 592 EXPORTING ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 593 Export Formats File Parameters................................................................................................................................................................... 593 Time Export Parameters................................................................................................................................................................................ 593 Labor Export Parameters.............................................................................................................................................................................. 595 Labor Hours Export Parameters ................................................................................................................................................................... 598 Machines Export Parameters ........................................................................................................................................................................ 600 Employees Export Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................... 600 Hours Export Parameters.............................................................................................................................................................................. 602 Pay Categories Export Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................... 604 Work Schedules Export Parameters .............................................................................................................................................................. 604 MISCELLANEOUS ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 605 Nightly Batch File Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................... 605 Mark Records for Recalculation - Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 606 TRANSACTION ENTRY................................................................................................................................................................................... 607 AUTOMATIC RECALCULATION PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................................... 608

- ix -

TRANSACTION PROCESSOR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 610 ELECTRONIC TIMECARD PARAMETERS................................................................................................................................................. 610 DATE RANGE VARIABLES ............................................................................................................................................................................ 612 TODAY............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 612 MONTHBEG AND MONTHEND ..................................................................................................................................................................... 612 YEARBEG AND YEAREND ............................................................................................................................................................................ 613 DRBEG AND DREND....................................................................................................................................................................................... 613 INDEX.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 614

-x-

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCING SHOPTRAC PRO

ABOUT SHOPTRAC PRO

What is ShopTrac Pro?
The ShopTrac Pro system is a package of applications that gives users the initial functionality needed to set up a data collection system. It contains the fundamental tools, including capabilities to track time, labor, work in process, quality control and system security. ShopTrac Pro tracks word orders and operations through the production cycle, time and labor information by department, group, work center and/or team and raw materials to completed products. ShopTrac Pro is a rich library of program modules and tools designed for efficient shopfloor data management. The software provides automatic data processing and flexible hardware communications in an easy-to-use, easy-to-maintain system. The three primary elements in the ShopTrac Pro system are data gathering, communications and validation and reporting. The data-gathering application continuously retrieves employee and job-related information and passes this data (called transactions), via the communications component, to the validation and reporting application to verify and record the information. The hardware communications component also enables the user to transfer up-to-the-minute data to other locations, such as payroll and project managers.

What is a Data Collection Device?

A data collection device is a time clock or computer that collects data from the shopfloor and translates it for use by the ShopTrac Pro system. Devices can be used by employees to input information or can interface directly to machines or other computers. The devices are typically connected to a network, using wire-based communication. This network is then connected to one or more computers attached to the ShopTrac Pro system. Some devices are permanently located in the user work area, while others are designed to be portable. Consult the ShopTrac Pro Installation Guide for more information about devices supported by the ShopTrac Pro system.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 1 of 613

What is Data Collection Manager (DCM)?

Data Collection Manager, the communications portion of the system where the devices are initially defined, is a flexible suite of programs designed to configure, collect, transfer and monitor the flow of data between an application and Kronos data collection devices. DCM communicates over a variety of physical layer links Ethernet, serial and modem. Collected data is then posted to a standard interface where the data is made available to the application. DCM is fully scalable; it can run on a standalone PC, an application server or across multiple PCs in an enterprise network Utilities such as Open Database Connectivity (ODBC), shared files and named computers enable DCM to achieve network visibility. DCM provides the following capabilities: Configuration and test of data collection devices Network-visible storage of transactions, functions occurring at the device and messages (information such as status and errors generated by the DCM modules) Simultaneous connection to different device types (Ethernet, serial and modem) Reliable file-based storage of transactions at key transfer points

The device database is created in two applications, Data Collection Manager (DCM) and ShopTrac Pro. These applications should already be installed on the system, as well as the ODBC driver that is being used to store the database for DCM. Use DCM Device Manager to define a unique domain and communications channel for each device. For more information on setting up devices, refer to the Data Collection Manager (DCM User's Guide).

Kronos Incorporated

Page 2 of 613

What does a typical day look like with ShopTrac Pro?

The system records the attendance of your employees, and also offers you other benefits. Consider what happens within the system when one employee, Randy Dalton, clocks in at 7:03, three minutes late for his shift. The system functions on the following levels: A data collection device collects Randy's clock-in data. Communications software transfers the data from the device to the ShopTrac Pro application. ShopTrac Pro validates and processes the data. When Randy clocks in, the system checks the Employee file for his Employee ID number. The Employee file identifies the employees in your system. Only employees with valid Employee ID numbers can perform transactions. Some menu options require passwords to control access. The system also checks the Shift file to see when Randy was scheduled to clock-in. The Shift file defines all different schedules your employees work. The system compares Randy's actual clock-in time with his scheduled clock-in time. To emulate your company's policy for tardy arrivals, the system can compare his arrival time to the grace periods defined for employees who arrive late. You can define grace periods (known as variances) in the Shift file. The Shift file defines Randy's shift as having a five-minute late clock-in variance, so the system rounds Randy's clock-in time back from 7:03 to 7:00 am. The Shift file gives you the capability to note his arrival as tardy, or not mark him as tardy because he arrived within the grace period. The system tracks events entered by employees to record how they spent their workday. At any time of the day, Randy can perform a daily change transaction, changing the department, labor code, job class or work center to which his hours are charged. ShopTrac Pro modules record and report these events, providing an additional level of information to administrators and managers. The system delivers employee information (the processed data) to supervisors and managers. By running reports, supervisors and managers can determine at any time who is absent, see the hours that have been worked by employees, and review many other types of time and attendance information. For example, a supervisor can run a report listing tardy employees, or listing those employees approaching their premium limit for overtime. Or, a supervisor can run reports on all the employees in Randy's department. (The departments in a facility are defined by identifying them in the Department file and assigning an employee to a department in the Employee file.) In addition, the hours an employee like Randy Dalton works can be automatically transferred to your company payroll or MRP system.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 3 of 613

ShopTrac Pro Menus -- Brief Description

The opening menu in ShopTrac Pro accesses all functions to set up, maintain and use the ShopTrac Pro system. To see the complete menu structure, see ShopTrac Pro Menu. The main ShopTrac Pro menu includes: Time/Labor Editor Accesses time and labor records to enter and edit punches. Selections can be made by employee, departments, groups, work centers, labor codes, job classes, teams, date ranges and work schedules. Accesses system data for screen preview and/or print to paper or text file. Accesses personnel records to view, edit or add employees. Files can be searched by name or Employee ID number. Accesses system password security. Used to initialize the ShopTrac Pro system, change defaults, set parameters for data entry and shopfloor transactions, create and maintain work schedules and shifts and configure resources for use throughout the system. Allows ShopTrac Pro users to enter transactions at a PC, just as they might at a device. Without the Terminal Emulator addon, these are limited to supervisor transactions only. Stores the collected machine data in the Machine Time file. Contains a menu of programs used to purge files, import and export records, schedule events and clear temporary files. Used to access an index linked to all aspects of ShopTrac Pro. Select a topic and view detailed information to help you use ShopTrac Pro more effectively.

Reports Employees

Change Password Setup

Transaction Entry

Machine Time Editor Utilities

Help

Kronos Incorporated

Page 4 of 613

Add-on ShopTrac Pro programs include: Electronic Timecard Terminal Emulator Team Builder Supports hours-based transaction entry on a PC and is typically used by salaried employees. Allows the Transaction Entry module to accept ALL transactions at a PC. Used to quickly add and remove employees from teams, collectively or individually.

DATA COLLECTION MANAGER (DCM)

Data Collection Manager (DCM) is a flexible suite of programs designed to configure, collect, transfer, and monitor the flow of data between an application and Kronos data collection devices. DCM communicates over a variety of physical layer links (Ethernet, serial, and modem). Collected data is then posted to a standard interface where the data is made available to the application. DCM is fully scalable; it can run on a standalone PC, an application server, or across multiple PCs in an enterprise network that uses Microsoft networking. Utilities such as Open Database Connectivity (ODBC), shared files, and named computers enable DCM to achieve network visibility. DCM provides the following capabilities: Configuration and test of data collection devices Network-visible storage of transactions, functions occurring at the device, and messages (information such as status and errors generated by the DCM modules) Simultaneous connections to different device types (Ethernet, serial, and modem) Reliable file-based storage of transactions at key transfer points

The device database is created in two applications, Data Collection Manager (DCM) and ShopTrac Pro. These applications should already be installed on your system, as well as the ODBC driver that you are using to store the database for DCM. DCM is the communications portion of the system where the devices are initially defined. Use DCM Device Manager to define a unique domain and communications channels for each device. For more information on setting up devices, refer to the Data Collection Manager User Guide.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 5 of 613

TRANSACTION PROCESSOR
There are several different pieces that work together to take the data from the collection devices and transform it into useful information in the ShopTrac Pro database. When an employee performs a transaction at a device, there are several pieces of data that are supplied by the device and, depending on the transaction, several more supplied by the employee in reply to the prompts. The data collection device sends this data to the Data Collection Manager (DCM), the communications piece of the data collection system. DCM in turn sends the data to the Transaction Processor, which is another main menu option. The TrxProc utility decodes the data stream and uses the information to update the ShopTrac Pro database. If there is a problem with the data, such as an invalid work order, a corrective message is sent back to the device. The input criteria can be controlled with the use of parameters, set up in the Access Profiles option. For the ShopTrac Pro system to perform regular duties such as backups, the system must be set to halt processing long enough for the elected duties to be executed. This is set at the Transaction Processor. When ShopTrac Pro is installed, a separate icon is created for the Transaction Processor. Click on that icon to bring up the Transaction Processor screen.

FIELD
Domain

DESCRIPTION
This is the name used to identify a group of devices connected to the ShopTrac Pro system. This domain name is set up in the DCM program when the system is installed. If there is more than one domain created, select the proper one from the drop-down list. Enter the date you wish to have the processor halt operations. Use a date from the calendar or enter "Today" or today plus a number (e.g., "Today+1"). Once the date is entered, enter the time of day when the processing will halt. Remember to use the 24-hour clock and that midnight is [Link]. If this field is filled in, the processor checks for the existence of the file and when found, the processor shuts down. This is useful when an external process needs to turn the processor off. Use this field to identify the file location (directory) so the system can find the file.

Exit date

Exit time

Exit file

Exit file location

Use the Save Settings button to save the settings you have set up. Then, to start the process,

Kronos Incorporated

Page 6 of 613

click the Start button. The Exit button is used to leave the Transaction Processor screen without saving and settings or starting the actions. Once Start is clicked, the screen opens to display the processing data. These fields can only be viewed, not changed:

FIELD
Valid transactions Invalid transactions Previous Current Processing status

DESCRIPTION
This is the number of valid transactions processed since the processor was last activated. This count includes both transactions and data requests. This is the number of invalid transactions processed since the processor was last activated. This count includes items that returned an error or otherwise did not process successfully. The name of the transaction completed just before the last transaction at the time the processing was halted. The name of the last transaction completed before the processing was halted. If the system is processing data at the time of system halt, it will display the transaction in this field and wait for the transaction to be completed. When it is completed, that transaction will move up to the Current field and "Waiting for transaction from DCM..." will be displayed in this field.

Also available is a Shutdown button that can be used to halt the processing.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 7 of 613

SHOPTRAC PRO MENUS

Time/Labor Editor:
Employee Selection Exceptions Options Recalculate Hours Error Checking WIP Adjustments

Reports

Audit Trail Labor Audit by ID (AUD301) Labor Audit by Date (AUD300) Labor Audit Whole Record (AUD305) Time Audit by ID (AUD311) Time Audit by Date (AUD310) Time Audit Whole Record (AUD315)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 8 of 613

Barcodes Departments (DPT020) Employee Badge Labels (EMP033) Employee ID Labels (EMP031) Job Class (JCL020) Labor Code (LBRC020) Labor Code Labels (LBRCO030) Machine (MAC020) Rate Class (RCL020) Reason Codes (COD020) Supervisor Cards (SupvCard) Transactions (TRX020) Travelers (TRV015) Work Center (WKC020) Work Order (TRV020) Work Order Labels (TRV030)

Daily Assignment Assignment Schedule Chart (PRS090) Assignment Schedule Summary (PRS092) Personnel Archive Chart (PRS080)

Exceptions Daily Exceptions (ADM900) Sign-Off Exceptions (TAA560)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 9 of 613

Labor Reports Employee Activity (LAB420) Labor Hours Summary (LAB475) Period Timecard (LAB451) Rate Detail by ID & Date (LAB423) Rate Detail by ID & Work Order (LAB427) Team Status (LAB440) Work Order Detail (LAB402)

Lists Access Profile Listing (ACCESSPR) Customer (CUSTOLS1) Device Listing (TTX920) Employees (EMPLOLS1) Export Field Listing (EXFILLS1) Export Format Listing (EXFMTLS2) Group Profile Listing (GROUPPR) Import Format Listing (IMPFMLS1) Pay Rule Profiles (PRPROLS1) Prompts (PROMPLST) Shifts Detail (SHIFTLS2) Transactions (TRANSLST) Transaction Programs (TTX920) User Profile Listing (USERPR) Work Schedules Detail (WRKSCLS)

Logs Transaction Log (BCL015) Batch Log by Date Run (BCH070)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 10 of 613

Machine Utilization History by Work Center (MAC211) In Progress by Work Center (MAC213) Usage by Machine (MAC218)

Quality Control By Employee/ID (QC353) By Scrap Code (QC351) By Scrap Code Summary (QC381) By Work Center (QC352) By Work Order (QC354) By Work Order Summary (QC384)

Time & Attendance Absentee (TAA510) Approaching Overtime (TAA519) Clock In Detail (TAA500) Pay Category Amounts Summary (TAA132) Weekly Schedule (TAA133) Accruals Detail (ACR001)

Work In Process WIP by Work Center (WIP105) WIP Hours & Efficiencies (WIP111) WIP Movement (WIP112) WIP Summary (WIP103) W/O Top Assembly (WIP199)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 11 of 613

Employees

Change Password

Setup
Configuration System Flags (All) User Defined Labels Time & Attendance Labor Time/Labor Editor Event Scheduling Machine Utilization Security Group Profiles User Profiles Access Profiles Defaults Employee Work Order Operation Daily Schedule Shift Schedule Pay Rule Transaction Device Configuration
Kronos Incorporated Page 12 of 613

Import Devices Devices Export Transaction Assignments Transactions Transaction Prompts Transaction Mappings Code Tables Departments/Groups Job Classes Labor Codes Rate Classes Work Center Absence Codes Accrual Codes Completion Codes Audit Trail Reason Codes Machine Status Codes General Reason Codes Scrap Codes Customer Status Codes Automatic Deduction Override Codes Work Order Status Codes Flags Customer Types Daily Schedule Types Date Range Types Employee Access Job Class Types Labor Code Types Machine Types Operation Types Part Number Types Pay Rule Profile Types
Kronos Incorporated Page 13 of 613

Rate Class Types Schedule Characters Shift Types Team Types Transaction Types Work Center Types Work Order Types Work Schedule Types Hours Allocation Rules Consecutive Day Scale Daily Schedule Scale Day of Week Scale Pay Categories Pay Rule Profiles Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale Work Schedules Date Ranges Daily Assignment Schedules Shifts Labor/WIP Customers Suppliers Part Numbers Unit Of Measure Conversions Routers Work Orders Teams Machines Rework Operation Work Order Split

Kronos Incorporated

Page 14 of 613

Electronic Timecard (ADD-ON)

Machine Time Editor

Team Builder (ADD-ON)

Utilities
Import Formats Import Data Employees Work Orders Operations Employee Accruals Export Formats Custom Fields Time Labor Labor Hours (Payroll) Machines GKC Export Employees Schedules KAT Export Employees

Kronos Incorporated

Page 15 of 613

Schedules Hours Pay Categories NexTrak Export Employees Schedules Hours Pay Categories Miscellaneous Nightly Batch Mark Records for Calculation Clear Local Temp Files Cleanup Shared Temp Files Clock-In/Clock-Out Status Purge Audit Data Batch Log Transaction Log Clear Transaction Log Daily Assignments Labor Events Orphans Labor Events Machine Utilization Time Records Work Orders

Transaction Entry

Help

Kronos Incorporated

Page 16 of 613

SHOPTRACPRO TIME AND ATTENDANCE ONLY

Menu Items Removed The following items will not be displayed on the menus listed: 1) Main Menu a) Machine Time Editor b) Team Builder 2) Report Menu a) Machine Utilization b) Quality Control c) Work In Process 3) Barcodes Reports a) Machines MAC020 4) Labor Reports a) Work Order Detail LAB402 b) Detail by Work Order LAB424 c) Team Status LAB440 Transactions Transactions using the following transaction programs can be performed with no restrictions: CLOCKIN CLOCKOUT DAILYCHG DEDUCTOV EXTRAHRS FLDAYABS PTLDYABS QUERYDAY SCHEDTRX [Link]

Kronos Incorporated

Page 17 of 613

Transactions using the following transaction programs can be performed with the restrictions listed: LOGON When a transaction uses LOGON or LOGOFF, Execution Option B (Indirect Log On) must be selected and saved (as in BKS and BKP) and an indirect work order (IBREAK, IMEAL or IDIRECT) must be entered as a default. The work order prompt used must have an entry requirement of F (Fill Prompt). When a transaction uses LOGON or LOGOFF, Execution Option B (Indirect Log On) must be selected and saved (as in BKS and BKP) and an indirect work order (IBREAK, IMEAL or IDIRECT) must be entered as a default. The work order prompt used must have an entry requirement of F (Fill Prompt). When a transaction uses LOGJOB, an indirect work order (IBREAK, IMEAL or IDIRECT) must be entered as a default. The work order prompt used must have an entry requirement of F (Fill Prompt).

LOGOFF

LOGJOB

If an employee attempts to perform one of these transactions and is not using Execution Option B, the following error message will be generated: <TRXPROGRAM> use indirect option for T&A mode. If an employee attempts to perform one of these transactions and is not using an indirect default work order, the following error message will be generated: <TRXPROGRAM> use default W/O for T&A. Transactions using the following transaction programs will not be allowed: ACTIVATE INSPECT LOGOFFAL LOGQTY MACCHG MACSTART MACSTOP OPCHANGE QTYMOVE QUERYWIP TEAMCHG TEAMOFF TEAMON WOCHANGE

Kronos Incorporated

Page 18 of 613

Setup The only three work orders that can exist in the Work Order table are IDIRECT, IBREAK and IMEAL. The setup utility will not allow the New, Copy or Delete function for work orders. Time/Labor Editor If a work order, other than IDIRECT, IBREAK or IMEAL is entered, the following error message will be displayed: Valid work orders are IBREAK, IMEAL or IDRECT. The labor-editing screen does not contain fields relevant to quantities completed, quantities scrapped or quantity destination. Quantity Destinations, Labor Text and Work Instructions tabs are not available on the labor-editing screen. Import Utility Imports to WORKORDR and OPN tables are not allowed. If an import to these tables is attempted, the following message will be displayed: Time and Attendance Only. Cannot import work orders or operations.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 19 of 613

Access Profiles The TAONLYEDITOR Access Profile was added as an example of the way the Editor can be configured to minimize the amount of changes that must be made to edit Time and Attendance data. This profile is defined to allow users to make changes only to employee labor data and have the recalculation function adjust the Time records. The following are the Keys and Values for the TAONLYEDITOR Access Profile:

KEY
ACTIVEAFTERLASTOUT ACTIVEAFTERLASTOUTMARK ACTIVEBEFOREFIRSTIN ACTIVEBEFOREFIRSTINMARK ACTIVEONDTMARK ALLOWMIDDAY AUTOPROCESSMARKED DAYLEFTOPENMARK DTSTARTEDOPENLABORMARK GAP GAPMARK LATESTDAY MIDDAYOUTONDTMARK MIDDAYOUTOPENLABORMARK MISSINGCLOCKOUTMARK NOEDITACT ONSAVERECALC OUTFORDAYOPENLABOR OUTFORDAYOPENLABORMARK PREVIOUSDAY SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
B Y B Y N Y Y N N A Y Y N N N A A Y Y DRBEG (WKLY) DREND (WKLY)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 20 of 613

Help
The positive aspect of Online Help over printed documentation is the ability to locate specific information quickly and to be able to jump back and forth between relevant information references. You can search for help based on context, index and content. Context Help is available from anywhere in the program, specific to the topic on the screen. Index Help is available by entering the topic name or reference. Content Help is available by entering a key topic and referencing related subjects.

Any information contained in the available help items is subject to change. Subsequent program releases will contain updated help information.

B2B & WEB REPORTING

WEB Reporting
WEB Reporting allows company employees to access the report function of ShopTrac Pro via an Internet connection. This functionality is permitted via the installation of the WEB Reporting software as described in the Software Installation Guide located on the ShopTrac Pro CD ROM. Audit Trail Barcodes Daily Assignment Exceptions Labor and Time record details are reported by date, Employee ID, or code. Prints Travelers barcodes. Reports details of rescheduling or reassignments employees for the day. Exceptions are transactions that fall outside the limits set for clocking in and out at the beginning and ending of shifts or meals and breaks. Reports for individual employees, teams, work order and period payroll. Print listings that include employees, schedule and shift details, import and export formats, and devices. Reports transaction and batch log information. Reports machine usage by work center, machine. Reports activity on shopfloor by employee, work center, work order and scrap code.

Labor Lists Logs Machine Utilization Quality Control

Kronos Incorporated

Page 21 of 613

Time & Attendance Work In Process

Reports sign-off exceptions, clockin details, absentee and overtime status. Reports work status by product movement, work center and hours/efficiencies.

B2B
The B2B functions of ShopTrac Pro start with the installation of the WEB Reporting software as documented in the Software Installation Guide located on the ShopTrac Pro CD ROM. These instructions allow the user to take the necessary steps to configure the system(s) allowing the users clients to access the reporting system via the WEB. The B2B starts with the users client accessing the users Web Site and registering information concerning their company. The end user of the process first will be asked to register via a registration button setup during the software install. The information includes the following: Name Company Name Address 1 & 2 City State Zip Code Phone Number Email Address

The user selects the submit button at the bottom of the screen the client will process the information and email the client number and a temporary (one time use) password to the end user. Once the end user has logged into the system, they are requested to change the password, confirm the password, select a password hint, if needed, and enter their email address. The first screen that appears after the login is the selection criteria screen 1. The end user will be asked for the number of days they wish to have covered during their selection of the report(s). End user are given several choices: Last 30 Days Last 60 Days Last 90 Days Date Range All Orders

The second selection criteria screen shows a list of reports available to the end user. These may
Kronos Incorporated Page 22 of 613

be selected using the Control Key for individual selections or the Shift Key for a range of selections. For lengthy, random selection select all reports using the Shift Key and deselect individual reports using the Control Key. Below the Report selection window are a series of five additional Work Order Status options that may be selected. They include: Complete Incomplete Split On Hold Cancelled

When the end user has completed their selection and submitted the request a preview screen will appear. The end user is given several view options at this point or the reports may be printed via the Internet to the end users printer.

EVENT MANAGER
Event Manager in Data Collection Manager (DCM) is used to schedule activities for DCM to perform at specific times. You can schedule events for the present and/or future dates. Event Manager, which must be running during the time for the scheduled event(s), launches the event automatically at the exact scheduled time. This is used primarily for: Starting a Transaction Processor operation Launching an import and/or export operation Specifying a Nightly Batch operation Automatic report processing

Adding an event
Before defining the event in DCM, first create an access profile in the ShopTrac Pro system. Refer to the appropriate parameters to use to create the profile. The parameter AUTO must be defined as a key in profile that will be defined in Event Manager. The name that you give to the profile will be used to define the event. Once the profile is saved, define the event. To add an event: Step 1. Open the DCM Event Manager and select Add... from the Edit drop-down menu. The Add Event window has three tabs: General, Frequency and DDE or Run Program (depending on the event type you select below). Step 2. Step 3. Step 4. On the General tab click on the Enable event box. Enter a Description for the event that can be easily identified among a list of events. Select Run Program from the Event type drop-down box.
Page 23 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Command Line:

For Transaction Processor, Nightly Batch and Import/Export use this format. For reports, see Automatic Report Processing. <Path to [Link]>{sp}<Path to ShopTrac Pro Programs> {sp}[ACCESSPROFILENAME in ALL CAPS] C:\Kronos\ShopTracPro\VDF\Bin\[Link]{sp} AUTOTRXPROC

Example:

Startup Directory: Example: Run Style: Step 5.

Enter the folder where [Link] resides C:\Kronos\ShopTracPro\VDF\Bin\[Link] Depending on how you want to view your event, select Normal, Minimize or Maximize Define Time (in 24-hour format), Date, (MM/DD/YYYY) for the event and whether to Disable or Remove the event after firing (event started). Use Minutes if you want the event to run and then rerun minutes apart. Enter the Minutes (MM) interval to define the number of minutes between each event. Select Hourly to have the event run every hour on the scheduled minutes of the hour. Enter the Minutes (MM) of the hour, e.g., if you want to run an event at ten minutes past the hour, enter 10. Define Time of day for the event and select Days of the Week. You may hold down the Crtl key and select multiple days.

On the Frequency tab, define the frequency of the event in the When box.

One Time:

Minutes:

Hourly:

Daily:

Note:

Do not close Event Manager. Closing Event Manager prevents it from performing your scheduled events. When you finish scheduling events, click the minimize button. Do not click the Exit button or press the Esc key.

Sample Event: To define an automatic Transaction Processor event to be launched every workday at midnight, first create an Access Profile named AUTOTRXPROC with the desired parameters. Below are the sample minimum parameters required for this example: AUTO
Kronos Incorporated Page 24 of 613

DOMAIN = AETHERNET STARTDC = y The settings in the Event Manager would be as follows: Enable Event: Description: Event Type: When: Time: Command line: Yes TRXPROCAUTO Run Program Daily: Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday 24:00 <Path; to [Link]>{sp}<Path to ShopTrac Pro Programs>{sp}[ACCESSPROFILENAME] Ex: C:\Kronos\ShopTracPro\VDF\Bin\[Link] {sp}C:\Kronos\ShopTracPro\Programs\sttrxproc.vd5 {sp}AUTOTRXPROC Startup Directory: Run Style: Note: <Folder for [Link]> Ex: C:\Kronos\ShopTracPro\VDF\Bin\ Normal, Minimize or Maximize Access Profile name and Report Name must be in ALL CAPS.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 25 of 613

[Link]
A feature of the ShopTrac Pro system is the ability to collect and store user-defined information that users can export to other systems. This feature is called [Link]. For example, ShopTrac Pro can collect information that relates to parts inventory and store it in an ASCII file. Users can export the ASCII file to an Inventory system so that it is up-to-date for real-time activity on the shop floor. In this way, ShopTrac Pro users can utilize their software by collecting data unrelated to Time, Attendance and Labor activities with minor administrative activity.

Features
Data Output Options: KeepTrac has the ability to output collected data to either a database table or an ASCII text file. The data can be used for reporting or exporting to host systems. Each KeepTrac transaction writes the collected data to a separate database table or ASCII file." Building transactions is very easy. All options are clearly spelled out and it is possible to have up to 15 prompts per transaction. Prompts can be mandatory, optional, or filled with a default value. Prompts can be defined as any of five different types: alphanumeric, formatted badge, date, numeric, or time. There are several pre-defined ShopTrac Pro prompts that can be used in the transactions. It is also possible to define up to 4999 additional prompts that can be used in transactions. [Link] uses standard DCM software that interfaces with the data collection devices to collect transactions from the bar code terminals. Each transaction that comes in from the terminal contains the badge of the user, the date and time the transaction was performed and the transaction data that was given in reply to the prompts.

Transaction Builder:

Terminal Communications:

Types of Transactions
When you design a ShopTrac Pro system, you must decide which of the transaction types best suits the data collection needs of the user. You can use all of the transaction types in a data collection device, mixing them as necessary for the maximum advantage. Every transaction that is stored in the data collection device or posted in real-time to ShopTrac Pro contains the date and time that the transaction was started. This is called the time stamp of the transaction. ShopTrac Pro supports these three transaction types: Key Transactions As the name implies, Key transactions are initiated by pressing a function key. For example, to initiate a Receive Part transaction, press F4 and respond to prompts for Part Number, Quantity,
Kronos Incorporated Page 26 of 613

and Shipment to complete the transaction. Keyless Transaction Keyless transactions refer to the fact that a function key is not pressed to initiate the transaction. Instead, they are initiated using bar codes, badges, or the keypad. Once you enter an initiating entry from a keyless entry list, ShopTrac Pro selects the transaction automatically. For example, to initiate a "Move Part" transaction, just enter a part number, which is validated against the Keyless Transaction List. ShopTrac Pro displays the current transaction name automatically: Move Part. Respond to prompts for Quantity and Released by to complete the transaction. You can use a wand reader to enter all values in bar codes, and never have to press a key. Supervisor Transactions A Supervisor transaction is the one special transaction assigned to a data collection device that only a supervisor can access. It can be initiated only in Supervisor Mode and ShopTrac Pro allows only those with an encoded supervisor badge to enter Supervisor Mode.

Mapping
[Link] program has no assigned mappings because it does not update the ShopTrac Pro system database. It is not necessary to include mappings when defining the prompts. Execution Options: A Create ASCII Text File This option creates an ASCII text file in the STPro/Data\Upload directory. The name of the file is [Link], where XXX is replaced by the therecharacter transaction code. The file is fixed offset format. This option creates a table in the ShopTrac Pro database. The name of the table is STPTRACXXX where XXX is replaced by the three-character transaction code. This option creates both types of files described above.

Create Database File Create ASCII and Database File

Transactions
There are no standard transactions that use the [Link] program.

ASCII File Format

The format of the ASCII file created by the [Link] program will certainly vary with the data that is collected. However, the first part of the file is the same regardless of the data collected. The file is named [Link], where XXX is the three-character transaction code. All
Kronos Incorporated Page 27 of 613

subsequent transactions for the same code are appended to the file, making the file a collection of transactions in chronological order. The file format appears below

BEG LENGTH POS

DATA TYPE

FIELD NAME

COMMENTS

1 3 A TRANCODE 4 6 N PCID 10 10 N TRANSNBR 20 2 N/A N/A Future Enhancements 22 10 D TRANDATE mm/dd/yyyy 32 8 T TRANTIME hh:mm:ss 40 9 N TRANBADGE 49 62 N/A N/A Future Enhancements 111 255 A DATAIN The data entered in response to the prompts begins at offset 111. To find the offset of a particular piece of data, use the length of the prompts in the transaction.

Database Table Format

The format of the database table created by the KEEPTRAC program will vary based on the transaction definition. The first several columns are general transaction data and are fixed in format. The following table lists the format of the general data:

COLUMN
RECNUM ST_DEVICEID

DESCRIPTION

Record Number Device ID at which the transaction was performed. ST_TRANDATE Transaction Date ST_TRANTIME Transaction Time ST_TRANEMPID Transaction Badge or Employee ID The remainder of the table structure will be dependent on the transaction definition. One column will be added for each prompt and the column name and type will be dependent on the prompt definition. After creating the transaction, review the table using your database utilities to determine the complete table definition.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 28 of 613

CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED

SETUP
The System Setup module contains the system defaults and configurations needed to initialize the ShopTrac Pro system, and to maintain and update it. The Configuration settings control how the system functions as a whole. The Default values allow you to define certain fields so these values always appear to the user when creating a new record. The fields are filled in by default when the system is first implemented, but values can be changed, if needed. Before you begin to set up all the files necessary for the system, first define your system default values, particularly the values that affect the Shift file. By setting default values for shifts, creating new records is easier. NOTE: It is important to remember that setting the system defaults, after records have been created, does not change information previously entered. These records must be edited manually. The sub-menus of the Setup menu include: Configuration Security Defaults Device Configuration Code Tables Flags Hours Allocation Rules Work Schedules Labor/Work In Progress

CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW
System Configuration settings control how the system functions as a whole. Values set here define certain fields so those values always appear in the appropriate field when creating a new record. The fields are filled in by default when the system is first implemented, but values can be changed if needed. Before you begin to set up all the files necessary for the system, you should first define your system default values, particularly the values that affect the Shift file. You can set the various values in the Shift to defaults, which makes the creation of new records easier.
Kronos Incorporated Page 29 of 613

Be aware that setting system defaults fields will not affect existing records. Changes to fields in these records must be made manually. To access the Configurations menu, select Setup from the Main Menu and then click on the Configuration option. When the menu tree opens, select by double-clicking on the desired option. The Configuration menu tree contains the following selections: System Used to set system-wide defaults. Flags (All) Used to access all flags system-wide. Those users who have programming-level ability to add flags should only use this function. Time & Attendance Used to set parameters displayed in the purge function screen, for supervisor and employee sign off approvals, for tracking altered time records, pay rule factors used to allocate hours for time records, and define the report headers for hours data presented in related reports. Labor Used to set the defaults that will control the upload of Labor information and the audit trail for Labor records. User-defined fields are also set here for the Labor file. Time/Labor Editor Used to set defaults for the Time/Labor Editor. Event Scheduling Used to set defaults for Nightly Batch and Personnel Archive. Machine Utilization Used to set the defaults for Machine Utilization that is designed to collect and report on machine time.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 30 of 613

System Configuration
This option is used to configure system-wide defaults. After any changes are made to any field, click Save to save the changes. Click Cancel to exit without saving any changes. User-defined fields can also be set up here for collecting information not covered by existing fields. Included on the Configuration/System screen are three tabs (General 1, General 2, UserDefined Fields) with the following fields: General 1

FIELD
Company Name 1 Company Name2 Condensed Name Date determination: From clock-in variance Date determination: From clock-out variance

DESCRIPTION
Enter the name of your company as it appears on reports. Enter the second line or address of your company name, if necessary. Enter the shortened version of your company name as it appears on employee badges. Enter the maximum number of hours, after an employee clocks in, that tells the system to use the same Reference Date in the Time record for any transactions. The default value is 12 hours. Enter the maximum number of hours, after an employee clocks out, that the system will record any transactions with the same Reference Date in the Time record. The default value is 4 hours.

If neither the Clock-In nor Clock-Out Variances apply, Date determination: Shift enter the value to be used to determine the Reference marker percentage Date. This is the percentage of time beyond that set for each variance during which the same Reference Date will be used. The default is 25%. General 2

FIELD
Indirect hours allocation method

DESCRIPTION
Select A or B: A - Allocates hours to all jobs your employees are logged onto. B - Allocates hours to Direct jobs only. This causes all Labor records created for Indirect work orders to have an Hours Requirement of Z (Zero Hours).

Next batch number

This is the next batch number used for exports. Do not change this value unless the software is reinstalled.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 31 of 613

System hours accuracy: 1/100 or 1/10 Options: Activate badge mapping

This can be set to 100 (0.01) or 10 (0.1). The default is 100. Check the appropriate option. Check box if Kronos standard badges are in use. See Employee ID Number Logic for more information on badge mapping. Clear if ShopTrac Pro system printed badges are in use. If this option is used, set any transaction prompts which contain "Employee Badge" to prompt #1 rather than prompt #198, to accommodate the badge number length.

Options: Use function numbers system-wide

Check box to enable function entry in the work order file, and to print function numbers as barcodes on the travelers for your system. Clear to default function entry in the work order file and suppress printing on the traveler.

User- Defined Fields

FIELD
Department

DESCRIPTION
Enter a field label for data to be collected in the userdefined department field that appears in the Department File. Used for miscellaneous information not collected at any other field. Enter a field label for data to be collected in the userdefined work center field that appears in the Work Center File. Used for miscellaneous information not collected at any other field. Enter a field label for data to be collected in the userdefined labor code field that appears in the Labor Code File. Used for miscellaneous information not collected at any other field. Enter a field label for data to be collected in the userdefined job class field that appears in the Job Class File. Used for miscellaneous information not collected at any other field. Enter a field label for data to be collected in the userdefined work order field that appears on the Work Order and in various labor and WIP reports. Used for miscellaneous information not collected at any other field.

Work Center

Labor Code

Job Class

Work Order

Kronos Incorporated

Page 32 of 613

Operation

Enter a field label for data to be collected in the userdefined operation field that appears in the Work Order File. Used for miscellaneous information not collected at any other field. Enter a field label for data to be collected in the userdefined employee fields that appear in the Employee File. Used for miscellaneous information not collected at any other field. To prevent unused fields from displaying in the Employee File, delete the default name (Misc 1, 2, etc.) and leave the field blank.

Employee Fields 1-6

Flags (All) Configuration

This option is used to add, edit, or delete flags, system-wide. This function should only be used by those users who understand the programming implications. For existing flags, only the edit function is available. You can access a flag file along with its file name, field name, value and description. But only the description can be changed. It is recommended that to add, delete or edit flags, the user should use the Flags sub-menu on the Setup menu. To add a flag: Right-click on the mouse and select New from the menu, or click the New option on the toolbar. Enter the filename of the new flag, the fieldname, the value and description. Click on the Save button, which saves the new flag and returns the user to the tree view of the Flags-all screen. Highlight the flag to edit. Right-click on the mouse and select Edit from the menu, double-click on the flag to change, or click the Edit option on the toolbar. Enter the new description. Click on the Save button, which saves the new description and returns the user to the tree view of the Flags-all screen. Highlight the flag to copy. Right-click on the mouse and select Copy from the menu. Enter the new file, name, and value. These are required fields to complete. Changing the description is optional.

To edit a flag:

To copy a flag:

Kronos Incorporated

Page 33 of 613

Click on the Save button, which saves the new flag and returns the user to the tree view of the Flags-all screen. Highlight the flag to delete. Right-click and select Delete from the menu, or click the Delete option on the toolbar. Confirm the action by clicking Yes, or No to cancel without deleting. Either response returns the user to the tree view of the Flags-all screen.

To delete a flag:

Use the Flags (All) option to add delimiters that can be used to import and export data. For more information on the format to use when adding delimiters, see Adding Delimiters.

User-Defined Labels
Users may edit but not delete or add new user-defined labels. Users may change the long (up to 20 characters including spaces) and short (up to 5 characters including spaces) labels used throughout the ShopTrac Pro program. The labels that the user is allowed to edit are as follows: Department Group Job Class Labor Code Work Center Work Order Operation Function

The first character and the first character after each space will be capitalized when the label is used as a title. i.e., Job Number The first character will be capitalized with the label is used alone or at the beginning of a label to a text box, etc. i.e., Job The label is usually used as is, without any capitalizing, when used within a message box or for an error message. i.e., Please enter a valid job number. Note: It is suggested that the user only capitalize letters used as initials, as in "WO" as the short label for "Work Order." Note: When the user saves changes the following message appears: "To see user-defined label changes reflected in System Setup you must exit and re-enter
Kronos Incorporated Page 34 of 613

System Setup." This is true for any ShopTrac Pro program the user may having running while making changes to the user-defined labels.

Time & Attendance Configuration

The Time and Attendance Configuration selections appear within five tabs: General, Signoff, Audit Trail, Pay Rules, and Reports. The defaults within each tab are: General Sets a parameter displayed in the purge function screen. This default sets the parameter used as a guideline for purging Time records. Indicate the number of days back that will be included in the purge. Purging is performed to free up storage space on your computer system for future records. Respond to the prompt Time records purge cycle (days). The default is 60 days. Enter the number of days to set as a parameter for the Time & Attendance Purge screen. The date is arrived at by taking the current date and subtracting the number of days set here. This date can be manually changed at the purge screen, if you want to include more or fewer days. Signoff Sets parameters for supervisor and employee signoff approvals When Labor Records are uploaded to payroll, each record consists of time and attendance data and labor data. For instance, an employee can be clocked in from 8:00 am until 5:00 pm and, during that time, work on three jobs. The option to approve these records prior to upload is set in two places in ShopTrac Pro, here in the Time & Attendance Signoff and in the Labor Signoff. These settings are separate from each other and therefore, can be set differently. For instance, if you want to require approval on clock-in and out, but not for job allocations, set the two-signoff configurations accordingly. This selection is used to set defaults for approval/clock-out transactions. The configuration options available are set, depending on who is required to sign off (approve) records and when. Also consider how will corrections to records be made as a result of reviewing the signoff (approval) records, and after the records have been signed off.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 35 of 613

The following table lists the configuration options:

PROMPT
Supervisor signoff required prior to upload Employee signoff required prior to upload Employee signoff required prior to supervisor signoff

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether the Labor Upload will send up records that are not approved by the Supervisor. Check box if yes, clear box if no. Determines whether the Labor Upload sends up records that are not approved by the employee. Check box if yes, clear box if no. Determines the order in which approval must occur. Check box if employee must approve before the supervisor does; clear box if supervisor is able to approve records regardless of the status of the employee signoff fields. Determines the order in which approval must occur. Check the box if the employee must clock out prior to approval, clear box if the employee does not have to clock out prior to approval.

Employee must be clocked-out prior to signoff

Audit Trail Sets parameters for tracking altered time records These options are used to set default values that affect the Audit Trail file. Included in the defaults that can be set are:

PROMPT
Create time audit trail Audit detail when time record is added Audit detail when time record is updated Audit detail when time record is deleted Audit whole image record when time record is updated

DESCRIPTION
Check box if you want to create a time audit trail, clear box it if you don't want to create a time audit trail. Check box if you want the detail of any added time record to be a part of the audit trail, clear box if detail is not necessary. Check box if you want the detail of any updated time record to be a part of the audit trail, clear box if detail is not necessary. Check box if you want the detail of any deleted time record to be a part of the audit trail, clear box if detail is not necessary. Check box if you want the entire record of any updated time record to be a part of the audit trail; clear box if this is not necessary.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 36 of 613

Audit whole image record when time record is deleted Require audit trail reason code

Check the box if you want the entire record of any deleted time record to be a part of the audit trail; clear if this is not necessary. Select from the options available: No prompt, Optional prompt or Mandatory prompt. Select no prompt, if reason code not necessary; optional, if reason code can be entered, but is not necessary; mandatory, if reason code is required. Select from the options available: 1 - No prompt, 2 - Optional prompt or 3 - Mandatory prompt. Select no prompt, if reason comment not necessary; optional, if reason comment can be entered, but is not necessary; mandatory, if reason comment is required.

Require audit trail text

Time audit records purge cycle (days)

Enter the number of days to set as a parameter for the Time Audit Records Purge screen. The date is arrived at by taking the current date and subtracting the number of days set here. This date can be manually changed at the purge screen. Suggested entry: 60.

Pay Rules Sets pay rule factors used to allocate hours for time records The Pay Rule Configuration selections specify the Pay Rules Factors used in determining hours allocation, and the order each factor is compared against the time record. These are system factors and not changeable. For your purposes, select the order from the most specific rule to the most general. The Pay Rule Factors available are: C - Consecutive Day Pay Scale D - Daily Schedule Pay Scale L - Labor Type P - Work Order - Code Pay Scale W - Day of Week Pay Scale Highlight the desired factor, one at a time, from the Available window and click the right-arrow icon to move it to the Selected window. If there is a factor you do not want included, don't select it. If you want to select all the factors, in the order they are presented, click the double rightarrow icon. Once selected, move each factor up or down in the order by highlighting the factor and clicking
Kronos Incorporated Page 37 of 613

the up- or down-arrow icon. De-select any factor by highlighting it and clicking the left-arrow icon. All factors are de-selected by clicking the double left-arrow icon. Select Profile Designate the default Pay Rule Profile. This is the rule that will apply if no other profile is selected for the time record. Select the default profile by clicking the [...] icon at the end of the profile name field. Select from the list of profiles that are displayed. For more information on Pay Rule Profiles, see Pay Rule Profiles.

Reports Defines the report headers for hours data presented in related reports This option is used to designate the text that will appear on the column headers in the Hours section of relevant reports (e.g., Time & Attendance, Labor). The contents of those columns are set up in Pay Categories. Therefore, the text you chose should reflect the data contained in the columns. The first column in the Hours section of these reports (Allow) is system-set. It contains hours allocated to the employee according to their work schedule. The ShopTrac Pro system is shipped with example headers to illustrate potential uses. To enter the desired headers for each column by clicking in the Column 1, Column 2, Column 3, or Column 4 header field and typing in the header text. The field limit is nine (9) characters. Click the Save button to save the header text. Click Cancel to exit the option without saving. If canceling, a prompt will be displayed to confirm "Changes Exist. Abandon changes and exit this window?" Click Yes to confirm or No to return to the option screen.

Labor Configuration
The Labor Configuration screen is used to set the defaults that will control the upload of Labor information and the audit trail for Labor records. User-defined fields are also set for the Labor file. To set these defaults, select the Setup/Configuration/Labor menu. The Labor Configuration screen has four tabs for the Labor file defaults, General Flags, Signoff, Audit Trail and Timecard. The fields on these tabs are as follows: General Flags Create up to four user-defined fields for the Labor file, and set a full-day absence standard Create up to four user-defined fields to collect miscellaneous information not collected at any other field. Enter a field label for these fields that appear in the individual employee's labor record in the Time/Labor Editor. Only those fields that are set up will be displayed on the employee labor record.
Kronos Incorporated Page 38 of 613

This screen is also used to tell the system to "Create labor records for full-day absences". Check box if you wish to create an employee record for each full-day absence. Clear if you don't want a record created. Sign Off Sets conditions for approving time record uploads. When Labor Records are uploaded to payroll, each record consists of time and attendance data and labor data. For instance, an employee can be clocked in from 8:00 am until 5:00 PM and, during that time, work on three jobs. The option to approve these records prior to upload is set in two places in ShopTrac Pro, the Time & Attendance Signoff and here in the Labor Signoff. These settings are separate from each other and therefore, can be set differently. For instance, if you want to require approval on clock-in and out, but not for job allocations, set the two sign off configurations accordingly. This selection is used to set defaults for approval of labor (jobs worked on) transactions. The configuration options available are set, depending on who is required to sign off (approve) records and when. Also consider how will corrections to records be made as a result of reviewing the sign off (approval) records, and after the records have been signed off The following table lists the configuration options:

PROMPT
Supervisor signoff required prior to upload Employee signoff required prior to upload Employee signoff required prior to supervisor signoff

DESCRIPTION
Determines whether the Labor Upload will send up records that are not approved by the Supervisor. Check box if yes, clear box if no. If yes, unapproved records will not be uploaded. Determines whether the Labor Upload sends up records that are not approved by the employee. Check box if yes, clear box if no. If yes, unapproved records will not be uploaded. Determines the order in which approval must occur. Check box if employee must approve before the supervisor does; clear box if supervisor is able to approve records regardless of the status of the employee signoff fields. Determines the order in which approval must occur. Check box if the labor record must closed prior to approval; clear box if the labor record does not have to be closed prior to approval.

Labor record must be closed prior to signoff

Audit Trail Sets parameters for tracking altered labor records This selection is used to set default values that affect the Labor File Audit Trail. Included in the defaults that can be set are:
Kronos Incorporated Page 39 of 613

PROMPT
Create labor audit trail Audit detail when labor record is added Audit detail when labor record is updated Audit detail when labor record is deleted Audit whole image record when labor record is updated Audit whole image record when labor record is deleted Require audit trail reason code

DESCRIPTION
Check box if you want to create a time audit trail, clear box if you don't want to create a time audit trail. Check box for condensed details of any added labor record to be a part of the audit trail, clear box if not. Check box for only the specific details of any updated labor record to be a part of the audit trail; clear box if not. Check box for condensed details of any deleted labor record to be a part of the audit trail, clear box if not. Check box for the complete record (including time and labor) of any updated labor record to be a part of the audit trail, clear box if not. Check box for the complete record (including time and labor) of any deleted labor record to be a part of the audit trail; clear if this is not necessary. Select from the options available: 1-No prompt = reason code not necessary 2-Optional prompt = reason code accepted, but not necessary 3-Mandatory prompt = reason code required.

Required audit trail text

Select from the options available: 1-No prompt = reason comment not necessary 2-Optional prompt = reason comment accepted, but not necessary 3-Mandatory prompt = reason comment required

Labor audit records Enter the number of days to set as a parameter for the purge cycle Labor Audit Trail Purge screen. The date is arrived at by taking the current date and subtracting the number of days set here. This date can be manually changed at the purge screen. Suggested entry: 366.

Timecard Sets parameters for using the Electronic Timecard add-on program Used in conjunction with the Electronic Timecard program, this option sets up the program's configuration flags.
Kronos Incorporated Page 40 of 613

These defaults are:

FLAG
When creating new operation, increment last operation by... Return WIP error messages

DESCRIPTION
Enter a value to add to the previous operation number to assign to new operations when they are created. This is only functional if the CREATEOPN parameter is loaded. The default value is one (1). Check box this option if user should get the same messages that would be received at a terminal when incorrect completion codes and/or quantities are entered. Clear if messages should not be transmitted for incorrect completion codes or quantities. Check box for this option if audit entries should be created when records are added. Clear if entries should not be created. If activated, be sure the Audit Trail configurations are also set to create records. See Time File Audit Trail or Labor Audit Trail for details.

Create labor and/or time audit trail when adding labor records

Time/Labor Editor
After the Shift, Employee, Date Range, and other data entry files are built, and employees are using the system, the ShopTrac Pro system starts collecting information on the hours the employee spends at the facility. Many events taking place in the day such as clock-ins, clockouts, shift changes, department changes and any other information related to scheduling and transactions are recorded in various files. These files are referred to as system-generated files because they are created by the ShopTrac Pro system as transaction data is collected. As transactions data is processed, the system creates and updates the files. The Time/Labor Editor allows you to view, edit, or delete data in Time, Labor, and LHours records. The Time/Labor Editor displays much of the data in formats that are user-configurable. The Time/Labor Editor allows you to edit one or several employee records at a time. CAUTION: Make sure that the users of the Editor do not use the same log-on User IDs. This could cause a conflict if users with the same ID are working in the Editor at the same time. Even though temporary IDs can be set up for new employees or employees who forget their password, these IDs should be unique, and not assigned to more than one person at a time. When beginning a session, define the criteria at the Selection Criteria screen to narrow the list of employees you will be editing. Once selected, an Editor screen is displayed. From this screen, changes can be made to any of the three areas covered by the Editor data, Daily Time, Labor, and Period Hours. Audit Trail data can also be viewed in the Time/Labor Editor. Defaults settings can be defined for the Editor in Time/Labor Editor configuration file. Options can also be set in the configuration file to limit the Editor user's ability to alter default settings.
Kronos Incorporated Page 41 of 613

Time/Labor Editor Configuration Used to set default values for the Time/Labor Editor. The defaults are divided only four tabbed screens: Options, Recalculate Hours, Error Checking, and WIP Adjustments. On each of the screens, there are option boxes which, when checked, prevent users from making manual changes to specific fields in the Editor. Leave those boxes clear if you want to allow manual changes to be made on the Time/Labor Editor selection screens. Options

DEFAULT
General settings: Users cannot change Only select not signed off Quantity synching

DESCRIPTION
Check the box if you do not want users to be able to make changes to any of the general settings while working in the Time/Labor Editor. Give the user the option of signing off for the day. It filters out employees who haven't signed off for the day. Check this box to move quantities to the next operation as soon as they are completed, when automatic moves in a work order are turned on. Labor records always show both a quantity Complete and a quantity Moved. Quantity synching is related to the Quantity Complete field in the Labor record, which reflects the cumulative quantity completed moved in this operation. When Quantity Synching is activated you can see the moved data updated when the Work Order, Operation, Function or Quantity Completed fields change. Leave this box clear if you do not want automatic quantity movement.

Adjust weighing data

Check this box if Weighting Factors and Values will follow with changes made to Work Order Operations. If box is checked, the system should automatically adjust work order, operation or function fields whenever changes are made, to accommodate weighting factors and values. Leave this clear if these adjustments are not necessary.

Automatically move through employee list

Check box if, when editing multiple employees, clicking Save at the employee screen will display the next employee without going back to the selection screen. If checked, the next two prompts are not relevant and therefore, not accessible. Clear box to return to the selection screen after each employee change has been saved. If this box is clear, the

Kronos Incorporated

Page 42 of 613

next two prompts are accessed Initial display Determine how the selected employees will be displayed. The options are to display the First Employee from the selected list or to display a selected Employee List. If changes will be made to all selected employees, it would likely be more efficient to move directly through the list. If changes will only be made to specific employees on the selected list, it might make more sense to display the list and select the relevant employees. See Editing multiple employee records for more information on this function. Check box to save your edits and automatically display the employee list. Clear box to save and not return to list.

Display employee list after save

Sign off settings: Check the box if you do not want users to be able to User cannot change make changes to any of the signoff settings while working in the Time/Labor Editor. Automatic signoff on save Specifies whether you want records that are edited to be automatically signed off when the edits are saved. The options are: A - Auto, prompt for access to fix. This option asks you to edit records if errors are found. N - Don't sign off on save. No signoff occurs when the records are saved. Y - Auto, don't stop on errors. Sign off the records, regardless of errors. Controls how many records are affected by the signoff. The options are: A - Signoff day highlighted. Only those days the user highlights in the hours browse are signed off. B - Signoff all days in range. Specifies what actions should be taken if an error occurs during the signoff process. Use this only if you selected option B for the Signoff option above. The options are: A - Sign off non-error days. The days that created errors are not signed off until the errors are corrected. B - Don't sign off any days. Controls the permission to edit records once they are approved. Check the box to permit the user to make more edits to records after signoff. You can change a record without the knowledge of the person who originally signed off on the record. Leave clear if records cannot be edited once they are signed off.

Signoff option

If error during 'All days' option

Allow editing of signed-off days

Kronos Incorporated

Page 43 of 613

To prevent the editing of signed off records, you must also check the Supervisor signoff required prior to upload and Employee signoff required prior to upload boxes in the Time & Attendance Configuration file. If those boxes are not checked, editing will not be permitted, regardless of a checked box here.

Event Scheduling Configuration

This configuration screen is used to set up defaults for the end-of-day, end-of-period processing of data. This includes purging and archiving of data, for existing data files, which accumulate over time. To set these defaults, select Configuration/Event Scheduling from the Setup menu and define the default values. The configuration setup is divided into three tabs: General Flags, Nightly Batch and Personnel Archive. General Flags The fields on this tab include:

FIELD

DESCRIPTION

Record tardy after Check the box if you want the system to record tardies start of pre-shift OT during a pre-shift overtime period as a partial day period absence. This will only work if a pre-shift overtime period has been set up, with a tardy grace period. Leave clear if you don't want these tardies recorded as partial day absences. Daily Assignments Indicate the number of days from the current day that the records purge cycle daily assignment records purge will normally take place. (days) Purging is performed to free up storage space on your computer system for future records. The system calculates that date by taking the current date and subtracting the number of days set here. This date can be manually changed at the purge screen. The default is 366 days.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 44 of 613

Nightly Batch These defaults set up the events that occur each evening after the system processes the day's transactions. These parameters tell the system which shift files to include in batch processing, the date to use, whether is create absence records and automatically process clock-outs, how to add extra hours, and how to handle open labor records. You do not need to be present when the Nightly Batch is run, if you have used the Event Manager in DCM to set up Nightly Batch as an automatic process. Set these fields depending on your company's policies. If necessary, the items on the Options selections can be manually changed at the time the nightly batch is run.

DEFAULTS
Run nightly batch for shifts ending at or before

DESCRIPTION
This will be the default time used by nightly processing as a determining factor for selecting shifts to process. Shifts starting after this time will be processing the next time the batch is run. Use military time, e.g. noon = 12:00, midnight = 24:00. This default controls the date that appears on reports and records when the Nightly Batch is run. The options are: Today (according to the time set above) Yesterday (the prior day according to the time set above) For example, if the nightly run is before midnight, choose Today; if the run is after midnight, choose Yesterday. Set the parameter to handle hours added to an employee's day, in addition to hours that the employee may have already worked. Extra Hours conditions are set in the Absence Code file. The options to chose from tell the system where to attach the extra hours, if applicable, are: Beginning of day End of day The most common usage is to pay holiday hours in addition to hours worked, for those who may work on a holiday. Since these conditions are preset, this function will only perform when the appropriate criteria is met.

Nightly batch to date

Attach extra hours records

Kronos Incorporated

Page 45 of 613

Option: Create absence records

Option: Perform automatic clock-outs

Option: Fill non-worked hours

Option: Flag missing clockouts

Option: Print nightly batch activity

Check box if you want to create absence records for the day. This tells the system to use the Absence Scheduling records and the default employee absence codes to create absence labor/event and Time records for employees who were scheduled to work but did not clock in. A report with this data will be printed after the nightly run is completed, if you have checked the Print Nightly Batch Activity option below. Leave the box clear to decline this option. NOTE: If necessary, this can be manually changed at the time the nightly batch is run. Check box to tell the system to process shifts set up for automatic clock-out. Log-offs and clock-outs will be processed as configured in the Shift file. Leave box clear if you do not want this function to be performed. NOTE: If necessary, this can be manually changed at the time the nightly batch is run. Check box if you want to create labor/event records to fill the employees' day based on full-day codes in the Employee (Partial Day Absence) and Shift (Non-Worked Hours) files. Leave clear to decline this option. NOTE: If necessary, this can be manually changed at the time the nightly batch is run. Check this option if you want a list printed, in badgenumber order, of all employees who clocked in, but did not clock out. This list will be printed when the nightly run is completed and can be used for error corrections. Leave the box clear if you don't need this list. Again, this does not interfere with the automatic clock-out process. NOTE: If necessary, this can be manually changed at the time the nightly batch is run. Check this box if you want a summary of the activity completed during the nightly batch run. This includes a copy of the Nightly Batch screen showing the date and time, as well as the settings for each option. Also printed are any reports you requested above (Absences, Processed Clock-Outs, Missing Clock-outs). Leave the box clear if you do not want printed reports. NOTE: If necessary, this can be manually changed at the time the nightly batch is run.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 46 of 613

Personnel Archive These defaults are used to create a summary archive of system time and attendance data. The archive stores absence periods, minutes late, hours allocated and qualified, and other data, in an easily accessible format with reports. The archive is created at the same time the time and attendance data is purged, so there are no extra steps to archive data. The archive files also take up less disk space than retaining original records. The Personnel Archive performs the following tasks: Provides historical personnel reporting. Removes data from "live" system files. How many days was this employee late this year? How much overtime has this employee worked since July?

Personnel Archive reports provide the answers to such questions as:

How does archiving work? The Personnel Archive is created when the Time records are purged. For each Time record purged, that day's data is added to an archive database. This data is actually "daily" data, not just data from the Time record being purged. Some data, such as Partial Day Absence periods, is from the Labor file. The data archived for each day includes: Absence periods, both partial and full-day Minutes late Code from any supervisor transactions passed Total hours allocated Total hours qualified (hours spent on work orders or absence codes classified as qualifying for consecutive days and premium zones) Overtime hours (any period or daily hours beyond straight time)

Enough data is archived to describe the day, but no more. This conserves disk space, which is important if large amounts of data are being archived. In cases where archive data is redundant, only one piece of data is archived. Rules for archiving To minimize the number of archive records, two special rules address the situations above: If the total Hours Allocated equals the Hours Qualified, archive only the Hours Allocated. If the day was a full-day absence and the Absence Hours equal the Hours Allocated, store only the absence data.

These rules allow for the complete reporting of hours worked and total daily hours and absence hours, while minimizing the number of records in the archive database. Therefore, it uses as little disk space as possible.
Kronos Incorporated Page 47 of 613

You cannot change archive data once it is recorded. There is no data entry screen for the Archive file; however, there are reports available. If you Archive files and plan to manually purge the Labor/Events or Work Order/Operations files, to maintain the integrity of these files, manually run the Time & Attendance Purge first. The Labor/Events Purge and Work Order/Operations Purge delete Labor records that are used in creating the Archive records. Running them first may delete records before they can be archived. Default Prompts Default prompts for setting the Personnel Archive defaults are:

DEFAULT
Archive daily data from the time & attendance purge Purge nonarchiveable days

DESCRIPTION
Check this option if data deleted according to the parameter set in the Time & Attendance Configuration (General Tab) should be archived. Check this option if days predating the current file (perhaps added manually for a date earlier than the latest purge), or previously archived, should be deleted. Leave clear if records should be retained. This would permit the user to review the records and delete the data manually. Check this option if a listing of non-archiveable days should be printed, along with the reason for rejection. Leave clear if a printed list of non-archiveable days is not required. This would permit the user to review the records and delete the data manually. Check this option if you want to maintain an index of your archived records. Leave clear if this is not necessary. Select the Monthly or Annual option to schedule a backup of your archive file. The selection will be affected by the number of records in the archive file that affects the time it will take to make the backup. Another factor will be how desired protection level for your archives. Obviously, if the current archive file is somehow lost or corrupted, you would be forced to go back to your last saved file to retrieve information. Any data added after the last backup date would not be retrievable. The best option is Monthly. If you selected the Annual backup schedule above, enter the anniversary date that the system will refer to for performing a backup. Indicate the path to the directory where you want the system to store your archive files, current and backup.

Report nonarchiveable days

Backup archive index file Backup archive files: Monthly or Annually

Date year begins

Archive path

For example, on a normal day, an employee has only two archiveable data items (Hours
Kronos Incorporated Page 48 of 613

Allocated and Hours Qualified), which are usually equal. Therefore, it is redundant to archive both. On paid full-day absences, an archive record is created for the absence. However, it is also redundant to archive an Hours Allocated record because the hours are the same as in the absence archive record.

Machine Utilization Configuration

The Machine Utilization feature is designed to collect and report on machine time. Machine time is tracked similar to how ShopTrac Pro tracks employee time on Work Orders. Unlike employees, machines are not tied to a shift or schedule and not limited in the time they can be in operation. This machine-utilization configuration screen is used to set the defaults for the system. As there are no predefined schedules for machines, the ShopTrac Pro system records the actual start and stop times from the transactions; no adjustments are made to machine time. Machine time can also be linked to labor records through the Work Order/Operation file, where employees would log onto a machine at the same time they log onto their jobs.

DEFAULT
Maximum hours allowed between machine suspend and resume

DESCRIPTION
This is the length of time in which the system will accept the Machine Resume transaction to place the machine back into service on the same job after a Machine Suspend transaction has been performed. The Machine Resume transaction assumes the machine is to continue on the same job it was on when suspended. After the number of hours set here has passed, the system will not accept the resume transaction to place the machine back into services on the same job. If the maximum hours have passed, the user must pass a transaction to close the machine time record before being able to start the machine again.

Maximum hours for considering a machine closed (not idle)

Used to group "periods" of machine operation together based on the start and stop times of the machine time records. When the time between the stop time of one record and the start time of the next record exceeds this value, the system reports that a new period has started and reports it as such. The time between these periods is reported as IDLE time on the Usage by Machine report.

Machine time records purge cycle (days)

This sets the initial purge date when the user enters the Machine Utilization Purge utility. The date displayed in the purge utility screen is the number of days set here, minus the system date. The date displayed there can be changed at the time of purging, if needed.
Page 49 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Kronos Incorporated

Page 50 of 613

DATE DETERMINATION
This feature is always at work throughout the system and can be fine-tuned to best meet your needs. Settings can be defined in the Setup / Configuration / System program. For more information, see System Configuration. Date Determination is used every time a transaction is processed that creates or updates a Time or Labor record. Most of the time when transactions occur during an employees regularly scheduled shift, the date determination process is trivial. However, in certain situations, the process is not so trivial. Consider the following examples: An employee's shift begins at 23:00 on 9/11 and ends at 7:30 on 9/12. In this case, it is clear that the reference date for a 1:00 am transaction should be 9/11, since the transaction falls directly inside the shift that began on 9/11. An employee's shift begins at 9:00 and ends at 17:00. In this case, a 1:00 am transaction is not close to the employee's shift, so the decision as to which Reference Date to use is not so clear. Date Determination parameters are usually global in nature. They affect all shifts equally. There are, however, some features in the Shift file that let you define when meals and breaks should be taken.

Another aspect of Date Determination is the ability to define a Shift as a Next Day Shift. That is, Mondays first shift may actually begin at 23:00, 11:00 PM, and Sunday night. Normally, the system uses Date Determination to come up with a reference date of Sunday when the desired result is actually Monday. Next Day Shifts, described later in this chapter, answers this problem. Whenever a reference date is required on a Time or Labor record, Date Determination is used. Reference dates are used to keep related information together. When employees clock out and then in from lunch, the system must determine if this transaction belongs to the current Time record, or if the system needs to create a new one. The same situation occurs when labor transactions are involved. Every Labor record is tied to an associated Time record through the reference date. The system uses Date Determination whenever these records are created. Examples The following examples describe the basics of Date Determination. Remember these conditions for these examples: Date Determination may possibly consider three days when calculating which date to use as the Reference Date, Yesterday, Today, and Tomorrow. Each day in the ShopTrac system begins at midnight, 00:00. Scheduled shift begin times and actual clock-in/out times are also given.

Example 1 An employee comes in at 7:55 on 9/12 for the regular 8:00 shift. It is clear that the employee is coming in for the days 8:00 shift and that the reference date is the same as the transaction date.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 51 of 613

Example 2 This example is not as clear as the previous one. The employee clocked in at 1:00 in the morning. This transaction is not close to either Todays or Yesterdays shift. Which Reference date should be used? Example 3 Temporary shifts also add to complexity. An employee is usually on a shift that begins at 23:00, but is scheduled for a temporary shift on September 12 that begins at 02:00 in the morning. Is this employee late for Yesterdays 23:00 shift or early for todays 2:00 shift? As you can see, determining which date to use is more complex when: The employee's transaction is not close to any scheduled shift. The scheduled shifts themselves are close together.

Date Determination looks at the transaction time. If it is close to the last Time record, that reference date is used. If it is not close, Date Determination builds a representation of the employees schedule and checks to which shift the transaction time is closest, and uses that time. What is "close"? "Close" is a relative term that is sometimes difficult to determine. To assist in this task, the system uses three variables that are defined in the System Defaults file. To determine how "close" the transaction is to the last Time record for an employee, the system uses the variables from the defined system defaults and compares it to the last record, determining that: If the employee has not clocked out on this Time record, and the Transaction Time is within the defined From Clock-In Variance from the last clock-in, then the system determines that the Reference Date for the Time record will be the same as the clock-in date. If the employee has clocked out on this Time record, and the Transaction Time is within the defined From Clock-Out Variance from the last clock-out, the system determines that the Reference Date for the Time record will be the same as the clock-out date.

Example 4 An employee clocked in at the beginning of the 9/12 shift and the Adjusted Clock-In Time is 8:00. The From Clock-In Variance is set to 12 hours providing a 12-hour "window" during which all transactions are assigned the Reference Date of the clock in time record. At 10:00 a LON/DCH transaction was completed. Which date is assigned to the transaction record? The following logic was followed in determining the reference date: Get the employee's latest Time record. Confirm that the record shows the employee as clocked in. Use the From Clock-In Variance parameter to calculate the end of the variance period 20:00 in this case. Confirm that the transaction time is within the variance period. Assign the Time record's Reference Date, 9/12, as the Reference Date for the transaction.
Kronos Incorporated Page 52 of 613

The variance period begins at the Adjusted Clock-In time. If the employee had clocked in early at 6:00, the variance period would have extended only to 18:00. What if the transaction falls outside the variance? If the transaction time does not fall within the variances discussed earlier, the system performs a more detailed analysis of the employees schedule to make the best selection for a reference date. Information for determining the date comes from the following sources: The employees regularly scheduled shift Any scheduled temporary shifts Existing Time records

Only the shift begin times are used in any of the above sources. You need to know how the schedule is built to understand the logic used for Date Determination when the From ClockIn/Out variances do not apply. First, Date Determination checks the Schedule file for any temporary shifts. If none are found, it uses the shift in the Employee record. Using Temporary Work Schedules If an employee is scheduled for a temporary Work Schedule, the primary shift for the date is selected. If an employee is scheduled for both a temporary work schedule and a temporary shift, the temporary shift is used when building the schedule. The system also takes into account any shifts that were actually worked on the three possible dates (Yesterday, Today, and Tomorrow). The shifts actually worked are from existing Time records and could have originated from any of the following sources. A shift specified during a clock-in transaction A temporarily scheduled shift, either from a temporarily scheduled shift or work schedule An alternate shift from the work schedule based on clock-in time

The system uses existing information from Time records over information found in the Schedule file. For example, if an employee worked a noon - 21:00 shift on 9/11 (yesterday), and the regularly scheduled shift is 8:00 to 17:00, the schedule would be built as follows: Yesterday Today Tomorrow Using Flex Shifts With flex shifts, the system uses the adjusted clock-in time as the starting time of the shift to build the schedule. Once the schedule is determined, the system compares the Transaction Time with the Shift Begin Time. It performs the following logic: If the Transaction Time is after tomorrow's Shift Begin Time, return tomorrow's date as the reference date. If the Transaction Time is after today's Shift Begin Time, choose today's or tomorrows
Page 53 of 613

9/11 9/12 9/13

12:00 - 21:00 8:00 - 17:00 8:00 - 17:00

Kronos Incorporated

date, based on the Transaction Time to which the Shift Begin Time is closest. If the Transaction Time is before today's Shift Begin Time, choose between the dates associated with the two Shift Begin Times and the Transaction Time that is between them.

Example 5 The schedule is the shift (8:00 - 17:00) found in the Employee record. The employee clocks in at 9:03. The system checks if the Transaction Time is after Tomorrows Shift Begin Time. It is not, so it checks todays Shift Begin Time. The Transaction Time is after todays Shift Begin Time, so the system does not check yesterday. The system knows that the Transaction Time is between todays Shift Begin Time and tomorrows Shift Begin Time. The Transaction Time is closer to todays Shift Begin Time. "Closest" is not always obvious. Date Determination makes this decision by placing a marker between the two Shift Begin Times, and checking on which side of the marker the Transaction Time falls. In this case, the mid point between 8:00 am today and 8:00 am tomorrow is 20:00 (hours between 8 am and 8 am = 24, divided by 2 and added to 8:00).

Next Day Shift

Next day shifts are shifts that begin on one day but, for some reason, need to have the next days date as the Reference Date on the Time and Labor records. This is usually required for payroll purposes. Next Day Shifts are generally used on cross-midnight shifts where the Shift Begin Time may be on the 12th but logically the shift should have a Reference Date of the 13th. The field to designate Next Day Shifts is on the Shift Rules tab. A Y in this field forces the Reference Date of the Time record to be one day later than the scheduled Shift Begin Date. The system checks the Next Day Shift setting after it uses the Date Determination logic to determine a Reference Date. With the Next Day Shift set to Y, the system adds one day to the date. The system arrives at a correct Reference Date under the most difficult situations.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 54 of 613

DEFAULTS
Default values allow you to define certain fields so these values always appear to the user when creating a new record. The fields are filled in by default when the system is first implemented, but values can be changed if needed. Also included are system operations or processes that will be performed by the programs. Unless a default is changed manually, the default criteria will be enacted. To access the defaults menu, select Setup from the Main Menu and then click on the Defaults option. When the menu tree opens, select by double-clicking on the desired option. The Defaults menu tree contains the following selections: Employee - Sets defaults used in the Employee file. Work Order - Sets defaults used in the Work Order file. Operation - Sets defaults used in the Operations files within Work Order. Daily Schedule - Sets defaults used in the Daily Schedule file. Shift - Sets defaults used in the Shift file. Schedule - Sets defaults used in the Work Schedule file. Pay Rule - Sets defaults used in the Pay Rule file. Transaction - Sets defaults used in the Transaction file.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 55 of 613

Employee Defaults
The Employee file identifies all the employees in your company. An Employee record contains basic information about a worker, such as Employee ID number, name, Social Security number, and access level. The Employee Defaults should be completed prior to setting up employee files, which will contain more detail. However, setting standard fields through the default screen lessens the chance of incorrect data being entered into the employee files and saves entry time. Any default set on the default screen can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file. The Employee Defaults are displayed on three tabs, including Home, Absence and Labor. The defaults to define are: Home

DEFAULT
Work schedule

DESCRIPTION
Enter the name of the Work Schedule used most often for most employees. This name can be changed in the Employees file if the employee's work schedule differs from the default. Enter the access level or transaction capability used for most employees. This can be changed in the Employees file if the access level is different for a specific employee. For instance, most employees would not be able to complete supervisor transactions, therefore, the likely default would be N - No supervisor transactions. But when an employee with supervisor status is entered, the Access Level field can be changed to A - All supervisor transactions. Enter the most common rate class, which determines how rate premiums are applied. If individual employees fall into a different rate class, the default can be changed in the Employees file.

Access level

Rate class

Absence

DEFAULT
Full day: Absence code Full day: Option

DESCRIPTION
Enter the absence code used for most employees for a full-day absence. This code can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file. Enter the option for charging the absent time used for most employees. Enter A if the time is charged to an Absence account or D if the time is charged to the employee's default job. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file. Enter the absence code, used for most employees, to fill
Page 56 of 613

Partial day:
Kronos Incorporated

Tardy

the time between the shift start time and the employee's actual arrival time. If left blank, the system does not fill the time. If the shift at the time of the tardy is a flex shift, the tardy code is not used. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file. Enter the absence code, used for most employees, to fill the time between the shift end time and the employee's actual clock-out time. If left blank, the system does not fill the time. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file. Enter the absence code, used for most employees, to fill the hours not covered by Tardy or Early Out (absences which occur in the middle of the day). If left blank, the system does not fill the time. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file.

Partial day: Early Out

Partial day: Fill Day

Labor

DEFAULT
Jobs: Labor status

DESCRIPTION
Enter the status code used for most employees. Other than the T (Terminated) code, none of these codes are used elsewhere in ShopTrac Pro. The options are: A = Time and attendance only L = Log on only M = Multiple jobs O = Log off only T = Terminated Y = Multiple jobs - supervisor This default cannot be left blank. It can be changed for individual employees in the Employee file.

Jobs: Maximum multiple jobs Jobs: Maximum indirect jobs Work order default

Enter the maximum number of direct jobs that most employees are limited to log onto at the same time. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file. Enter the maximum number of indirect jobs that most employees are limited to log onto at the same time. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file. Enter the work order or account used by most employees to be charged with downtime or time between jobs. In most cases, this will be an indirect job. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees
Page 57 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

file. Operation Enter the Operation sequence number for the work order above. If the default above is an indirect job, this field is not applicable. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file. Enter the Function for the operation for the default work order. If the default above is an indirect job, this field is not applicable. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file.

Function

Meal/Break overlap Check the box to indicate that the system will permit concurrent meals and breaks with other jobs, when creating labor records. Leave the box clear if this is not permitted. This default can be changed for individual employees in the Employees file.

Work Order Defaults

A Work Order is a request to fulfill a demand for a product or tool used to track time not directly attributed to fulfilling the demand for a product. There are two kinds of Work Orders, Direct and Indirect. There is always either a work order or an absence code associated with every labor record. The Work Order Defaults screen is used to set standard fields to lessen the chance of incorrect data being entered and to save entry time. Any default set on the default screen can be changed for individual work orders in the Work Order file. The defaults to set include:

DEFAULT
Pay scale

DESCRIPTION
Enter the pay scale that will apply to most employees. This represents the Work Order, Absence Pay Scale. This default can be changed in the individual Work Order record. Enter the condition that will fit the work order status most of the time. Options are: <Undefined> = Leave the field blank; status option is set in each work order record. C - Complete = Use when the work order is finished. H - On Hold = Use when the work order has been placed on hold. I - Incomplete = Use when the work order is in progress, but not finished. S - Split = Use when the work order is split into more than one job. This would be the case when the work

Status

Kronos Incorporated

Page 58 of 613

order product is used in more than one job. X - Canceled = Use when the work order was entered into the system and subsequently canceled. This default can be changed in the individual Work Order record. Decimal accuracy Specify a number between 1 and 6 for how many decimal places will be used for quantities on work orders most of the time. This default can be changed in the individual Work Order record. This determines if hours spent on the work order are used towards Minimum hours requirement for consecutive days and premium rules. Enter the condition that describes most situations for most employees. Check the box to indicate Yes; leave clear if No. This default can be changed in the individual Work Order record. This determines if the system will validate quantities against those quantity-validation parameters set in the work order operation record. Set the default to fit most situations. Check this box if the system should validate using these parameters, leave it clear to ignore these parameters, regardless of their settings. See Using Quantity Validation for more information regarding the rules of validation. This default can be changed in the individual Work Order record.

Qualifying hours

Quantity validation

Sequence validation This determines if the system will validate that the steps in an operation are performed in sequential order. Once set, this controls validation for all operations in a work order. See Using Sequence Validation for more information regarding the results of validation. This default can be changed in the individual Work Order record. Automatic quantity moves This determines if quantities are automatically moved from one operation to the next. If set to Yes, transactions reporting the completion of an operation, automatically moves the operation quantity to the next operation. The quantities related to Rework Operations, if defined, are also automatically moved to the next rework operation, when reported as complete. There can be no automatic moving of quantities from rework operations into normal operations. If set to No, a transaction to move quantities must be manually entered. This default can be changed in the individual Work Order record.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 59 of 613

Operation Defaults
Operations are the individual steps or details of the Work Order. The Operations Defaults screen is used to set standard fields to lessen the chance of incorrect data being entered, and to save entry time. Any default set on the default screen can be changed for individual work orders in the Work Order file. The defaults to set include:

DEFAULT
Validate against quantity ordered

DESCRIPTION
This determines whether the system will validate that quantities completed for an operation do not exceed allowable variances from the quantity ordered on the work order. Use the condition that is most likely for most situations. If yes, the system will validate; if no, validation will not be performed. This default can be changed in the Work Order/Operation file. Enter as standard percentage of quantity completed, over the order amount, which will be accepted and the operation automatically marked as complete. For instance, if the order is for 1000 items and the Over is set for 10%, the system will accept up to 1100 items. More than that will not be accepted, and the operation will reported as incomplete. (To alter this outcome, the supervisor will have to manually change the ordered amount, the completed amount or the Over percentage in the Work Order/ Operation file.) Acceptance or rejection will only work if the previous Validate against quantity ordered selection is Yes. Enter a standard percentage of quantity completed, less that the order amount, which will be accepted and the operation automatically marked as complete. For instance, if the order is for 1000 items and the Under is set for 10%, the system will accept as few as 900 items. Less than that will not be accepted, and the operation will reported as incomplete. (To alter this outcome, the supervisor will have to manually change the ordered amount, the completed amount or the Under percentage in the Work Order/Operation file.) Acceptance or rejection will only work if the previous Validate against quantity ordered selection is Yes. This determines whether the system will validate that quantities received for an operation do not exceed the quantity ordered on the work order. Use the condition that is most likely for most situations. If yes, the system will validate; if no, validation will not be performed.
Page 60 of 613

Over

Under

Validate against quantity received

Kronos Incorporated

This default can be changed in the Work Order/Operation file. Over Enter a standard maximum percentage over the quantity ordered, which will be accepted. For instance, if the order is for 1000 items and the Over is set for 10%, the system will accept receipt of up to 1100 items. More than that will not be accepted, and the device will return an error message. (To alter this outcome, the supervisor will have to manually change the ordered amount, the received amount or the Over percentage in the Work Order/ Operation file.) Acceptance or rejection will only work if the previous Validate against quantity received selection is Yes. Enter a standard maximum percentage under the quantity ordered, which will be accepted. For instance, if the order is for 1000 items and the Under is set for 10%, the system will accept receipt of as few as 900 items. Less than that will not be accepted, and the device will return an error message. (To alter this outcome, the supervisor will have to manually change the ordered amount, the received amount or the Over percentage in the Work Order/ Operation file.) Acceptance or rejection will only work if the previous Validate against quantity received selection is Yes. This option specifies which factor will be used in most work order operations. When hours are allocated among labor records, this factor is used to group the labor records by factor type. The valid choices are: A - Evenly divided hours B - Standard time per piece C - Quantity available for work D - Operation user-defined field E - Work order quantity ordered F - Work order user-defined field G - Extended standard H - Time to complete Decimal accuracy Enter the standard number of decimal places that will be used for quantities on most work orders. This number can be changed in the Work Order/ Operation file, if necessary for an individual operation.

Under

Hours allocation weighting: Factor

Kronos Incorporated

Page 61 of 613

Daily Schedule Defaults

The Work Schedule file is used to define or edit work schedules, which are collections of different shifts on different days, repeated on a periodic basis. A work schedule consists of data pertaining to the schedule as a whole, such as overtime rules, and Daily Schedule records which describe each day in the schedule, including the shift for that day and whether the day is a scheduled work day. Use the Daily Schedule Defaults screen to set standard information which will save time when setting up the various Daily Schedule files.

DEFAULT
Scheduled day

DESCRIPTION
Set the standard response for this option which denotes whether most days are scheduled to be worked or not. Check the box to set the default as Yes; leave clear to set the default to No. Set the pay scale that denotes the base hours allocation level for most days. Pay Scales can be set to be used with day of the week and are associated with the Pay Rule Factors. They are set up in Day Of Week Scale. Set a standard number of hours that will qualify employees for consecutive day conditions of pay and/or benefits. CAUTION: If this default is left blank, and the same field is also left blank in the Daily Schedule portion of the Work Schedule, any worked hours for a day will record the day as a consecutive day. This can be a factor in any special consecutive day benefits. For instance, this Consecutive Day factor would be considered if there were special pay rates for working the eight consecutive days in a pay period. To cover this potential oversight, enter a default number here. This default can be changed when work schedules are set up.

Pay scale

Hours to be consecutive day

Shift Defaults
The Schedule and Shift files function to store the data the system needs to determine when an employee should be working. The Shift file describes each shift worked by an employee by providing basic information, such as shift start and stop times, and when meals and breaks are taken. The rounding function provides grace periods allowed for clocking in and out. Premium Zones and enforcement Use the Shift Defaults screen to set defaults values that will save time when setting up the Shift file. The fields for the shift defaults are contained on six tabbed screens, Rules, Rounding,
Kronos Incorporated Page 62 of 613

Meals & Breaks, Restrictions/Enforcement, Premium Zones and Exceptions. Rules

DEFAULT
Daily overtime limit

DESCRIPTION
Set a standard number of hours used in most cases to qualify an employee for overtime rates. When this number of hours in one day is exceeded, those hours count toward daily overtime. CAUTION: If this default is left blank, and the same field is also left blank in the Shift file, any worked hours will count towards overtime. To cover this potential oversight, enter a default number here. For instance, if you normally consider all hours over eight to be overtime hours, enter 8 into this field. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up.

Daily doubletime limit

Set a standard number of hours used in most cases to qualify an employee for double-overtime rates. When this number of hours in one day is exceeded, those hours count toward daily double overtime. CAUTION: If this default is left blank, and the same field is also left blank in the Shift file, any worked hours will count towards double overtime. To cover this potential oversight, enter a default number here. For instance, if you normally consider all hours over twelve to be double-overtime hours, enter 12 into this field. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up.

Flex shift

Enter the default for identifying a shift as a flex shift. This a shift with a variable starting time. If shift is a flex shift, all clock-in and out, and meals and break time windows (over/under) will be applied to actual times. If checked, shifts are set as flex shifts; leave clear if shifts are not set as flex shifts. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Set the default for identifying shifts to be referenced with the following day's date on Time and Labor records. If checked, the shift will be referenced with the date following the worked shift; if clear, the reference will be the date of the worked shift. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default that is used for most employees who log on a job with or without clocking in. Check the box if
Page 63 of 613

Next day shift

Automatic clock-in

Kronos Incorporated

the first transaction of the day automatically clock employees in. Leave clear if no automatic clock-in occurs. The employee will be then forced to clock in and reenter the transaction. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Clock-out Enter the default that will be used with the Nightly Batch to clock out employees after their shift is over. The options for this default are: 1 - Auto clock-in at last logoff 2 - Later of last logoff/shift end N - No automatic clock-outs This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Action option Select the default that will be used in most cases when employees clock out while still logged onto jobs. The options are: A - Clock out/must be off jobs [permits clock-out only if all jobs are logged off; error message alerts employee if still logged on jobs] B - Off all jobs and out [if still logged onto jobs, system logs employee off jobs and clocks out] This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Rate operator Enter the default value for the operation to be used with the rate calculator. Valid values are: * Multiply rate + Add to rate - Subtract from rate < Minimum (current rate vs. rate calculated) = Set (replace with rate calculated) > Maximum (current rate vs. rate calculated) This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Calculator Enter a number used most often in conjunction with the Operator above, to compute an employee's rate of pay. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Non-worked hours are time allocated to the employee's
Page 64 of 613

Non-worked hours:
Kronos Incorporated

Tardy

records for on-call time (paid to be available), a minimum-hours schedule, or for travel time. Set the default absence account to charge when a non-worked hours tardy is registered. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Non-worked hours are time allocated to the employee's records for on-call time (paid to be available), a minimum-hours schedule, or for travel time. Set the default absence account to charge when a non-worked hours early out is registered. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up.

Non-worked hours: Early out

Rounding

DEFAULT
Variances: Early in (minutes)

DESCRIPTION
Enter the most commonly used grace window, prior to the regular shift start time, in which employee punch times are automatically rounded to the shift start time. Punches prior to this grace period are recorded at actual time, unless restrictions (see Work Period Restrictions below) are set. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the most commonly used grace window, after the regular shift start time, in which employee punch times are automatically rounded back to the shift start time. Punches after this grace period are recorded at actual time, unless restrictions (see Work Schedule Restrictions below) are set. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the most commonly used grace window, before the regular shift end time, in which employee punch times are automatically rounded to the shift end time. Punches before this grace period are recorded at actual time, unless restrictions (see Work Schedule Restrictions below) are set. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the most commonly used grace window, after the regular shift end time, in which employee punch times are automatically rounded to the shift end time. Punches after this grace period are recorded at actual time, unless restrictions (see Work Schedule Restrictions below) are set. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the most commonly used amount of time allowed between the clock-in and the first job log-on. If this time is exceeded, a default labor record is created. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are
Page 65 of 613

Variances: Late in (minutes)

Variances: Early out (minutes)

Variances: Late out (minutes)

Variances: First job (minutes)

Kronos Incorporated

Variances: Between job (minutes)

Variances: Last job (minutes)

If overtime is authorized: Allow early-in

If overtime is authorized: Allow late-out

set up. Enter the most commonly used amount of time allowed between jobs. If this time is exceeded, a default labor record is created. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the most commonly used amount of time allowed between the last job and clock-out. If this time is exceeded, a default labor record is created. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. This option controls what rounding occurs in the situation where an employee's clock-in occurs within the early-in variance period, and there is pre-shift authorized overtime. Should the rounding use the shift start time or the actual time? Check the box if clock-in uses actual time; clear if shift start time is used. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. This option controls what rounding occurs in the situation where an employee's clock-out occurs within the late-out variance period, and there is post-shift authorized overtime. Should the rounding use the shift end time or the actual time? Check the box if clock-out uses actual time; clear if shift end time is used. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up.

Meal/Breaks

DEFAULT
Early Variance

DESCRIPTION
Set the default value for the early variance associated with a meal or break. It functions by rounding the length of the period to its scheduled length. If the punch falls outside this variance, the actual length of the period is used. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Set the default value for the late variance associated with a meal or break. It functions by rounding the length of the period to its scheduled length. If the punch falls outside this variance, the actual length of the period is used. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Set the default value used to determine if the employee took this meal or break period. If an employee clocks out or logs on a meal or break job with this time window, the period is marked as taken in the time file. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Set the default value used to determine if the employee took this meal or break period. If an employee clocks in
Page 66 of 613

Late Variance

Window Before

Window After

Kronos Incorporated

Auto

Work order

or logs off a meal or break job with this time window, the period is marked as taken in the time file. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Check the boxes if you wish hours to be automatically allocated; leave clear if variances and windows are still used for rounding purposes when the employee punches. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default indirect work order in this field. When a meal or break is defined and this field includes a work order (always indirect), a punch will create a labor record for the period and time will not be deducted. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up.

Restriction/Enforcement

DEFAULT
Restriction In/Out

DESCRIPTION
Set the default which will be used in most situations where the clock-in and/or out is restricted. The options are: B - Restrict both clock-ins and outs I - Clock-in restriction O - Clock-out restriction If both restrictions and enforcements are set, restrictions overrule enforcements. For more information on the difference between restrictions and enforcements, see Restriction-Enforcement Differences. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Set the default that will be used in most situations where unlimited roundings are desired. If a shift clock-in time is set to 7:00, the clock-ins is rounded to 7:00, regardless of the actual time. If a pre-shift overtime clock-in time is set, then the clock-in time is rounded to the beginning of this pre-shift overtime period. If both restrictions and enforcements are set, restrictions overrule enforcements. For more information on the difference between restrictions and enforcements, see Restriction-Enforcement Differences. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Set the default that will be used in most situations where infinite roundings are desired. If a shift clock-out time is 5:00 PM, the clock-outs are rounded to 5:00, regardless of the actual time. If a post-shift overtime clock-out time is set, then the clock-out time is rounded to the end of this pre-shift overtime period. If both restrictions and enforcements are set, restrictions overrule enforcements. For more information on the
Page 67 of 613

Work period enforcement: Enforce before

Work period enforcement: Enforce after

Kronos Incorporated

Work period enforcement: No logon before

Work period enforcement: No logon after

difference between restrictions and enforcements, see Restriction-Enforcement Differences. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Set the default that will apply to most situations where work period enforcements are in force. This confines employees to logging onto jobs only after the shift start time. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Set the default that will apply to most situations where work period enforcements are in force. This confines employees to logging onto jobs only before the shift end time. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up.

Premium Zone

DEFAULT
Authorization required

DESCRIPTION
Set the default that will apply most often. Check the box if the Premium Zones must be authorized through Event Scheduling, before taking effect. The specified pay rule profile is applied only if the Zone is authorized and the employee meets all qualification criteria. Leave clear if the Zone does not require any authorization. The specified pay rule profile is applied whenever the employee meets the qualification criteria. Set the default that will apply for most Premium Zones, when batch qualifiers are defined for the zone. Check the box if the system should assume the employee qualifies for the zone, and hours are allocated according to the zone's pay rule profile. Leave clear if the system should wait until the employee has satisfied all batch selections before allocating hours according to the pay rule profile. A Premium Zone is a special time during the day when different pay rules apply. This placement default tells the system how to record transactions for zones set with flexible or specific start and stop times. Options are: A - Date after reference date B - Date before reference date R - On reference date X - Applies to all dates For more information about these options, see Premium Zone Placement.

On-line, assume employee will qualify

Zone placement

Exceptions (See Shift Exceptions/Variances for more information.)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 68 of 613

DEFAULT
Very early in (min) - Actual/Adjusted

DESCRIPTION
Enter the default minutes, relative to clock-in, which will trigger exceptions. For example, if the shift start time is 8:00 and the Very early in time is 60 minutes, any clockin prior to 7:00 will appear on an exception report. Also, indicate whether to compare this value against actual or adjusted time. Adjusted time refers to the recorded time after any conditions, set for the shift, are activated. For instance, if the shift is set to round to the closest quarter-hour, a punch at 6:57 (actual time) will be recorded to 7:00 (adjusted time). In this case, actual time will place the punch into the exception report, while the adjusted time would not. Enter 9999 to disable this exception. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default minutes relative to clock-in, which will trigger exceptions. For example, if the shift start time is 8:00 and the Early in time is 30 minutes, any clock-in prior to 7:30 will appear on an exception report. Also, indicate whether to compare this value against actual or adjusted time. Adjusted time refers to the recorded time after any conditions, set for the shift, are activated. For instance, if the shift is set to round to the nearest quarter-hour, a punch at 7:43 (actual time) will be recorded to 7:45 (adjusted time). In this case, actual time will place the punch into the exception report, while the adjusted time would not. Enter 9999 to disable this exception. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default minutes relative to clock-in, which will trigger exceptions. For example, if the shift start time is 8:00 and the Late in time is 30 minutes, any clock-in after 8:30 will appear on an exception report. Also, indicate whether to compare this value against actual or adjusted time. Adjusted time refers to the recorded time after any conditions, set for the shift, are activated. For instance, if the shift is set to round to the nearest quarter-hour, a punch at 8:32 (actual time) will be recorded to 8:30 (adjusted time). In this case, actual time will place the punch into the exception report, while the adjusted time would not. Enter 9999 to disable this exception. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default minutes relative to clock-in, which will trigger exceptions. For example, if the shift start time is 8:00 and the Very late in time is 45 minutes, any clock-in
Page 69 of 613

Early in (min) Actual/Adjusted

Late in (min) Actual/Adjusted

Very late in (min) Actual/Adjusted

Kronos Incorporated

Very early out (min) - Actual /Adjusted

Early out (min) Actual/Adjusted

Late out (min) Actual/Adjusted

after 8:45 will appear on an exception report. Also, indicate whether to compare this value against actual or adjusted time. Adjusted time refers to the recorded time after any conditions, set for the shift, are activated. For instance, if the shift is set to round to the nearest quarter-hour, a punch at 8:48 (actual time) will be recorded to 8:45 (adjusted time). In this case, actual time will place the punch into the exception report, while the adjusted time would not. Enter 9999 to disable this exception. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default minutes relative to clock-in, actual or adjusted, after which exceptions will be triggered. For example, if the shift end time is 5:00 and the Very early out time is 60 minutes, any clock-out before 4:00 will appear on an exception report. Also, indicate whether to compare this value against actual or adjusted time. Adjusted time refers to the recorded time after any conditions, set for the shift, are activated. For instance, if the shift is set to round to the nearest quarter-hour, a punch at 3:56 (actual time) will be recorded to 4:00 (adjusted time). In this case, actual time will place the punch into the exception report, while the adjusted time would not. Enter 9999 to disable this exception. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default minutes relative to clock-in, actual or adjusted, after which exceptions will be triggered. For example, if the shift end time is 5:00 and the Early out time is 45 minutes, any clock-out before 4:15 will appear on an exception report. Also, indicate whether to compare this value against actual or adjusted time. Adjusted time refers to the recorded time after any conditions, set for the shift, are activated. For instance, if the shift is set to round to the nearest quarter-hour, a punch at 4:13 (actual time) will be recorded to 4:15 (adjusted time). In this case, actual time will place the punch into the exception report, while the adjusted time would not. Enter 9999 to disable this exception. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default minutes relative to clock-in, actual or adjusted, after which exceptions will be triggered. For example, if the shift end time is 5:00 and the Late out time is 45 minutes, any clock-out after 5:45 will appear on an exception report.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 70 of 613

Very late out (min) - Actual/Adjusted

Meals Long/Short (min)

Breaks Long/Short (min)

Daily hours Long/ Short (min)

Also, indicate whether to compare this value against actual or adjusted time. Adjusted time refers to the recorded time after any conditions, set for the shift, are activated. For instance, if the shift is set to round to the nearest quarter-hour, a punch at 5:47 (actual time) will be recorded to 5:45 (adjusted time). In this case, actual time will place the punch into the exception report, while the adjusted time would not. Enter 9999 to disable this exception. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default minutes relative to clock-in, actual or adjusted, after which exceptions will be triggered. For example, if the shift end time is 5:00 and the Very late out time is 60 minutes, any clock-out after 6:00 will appear on an exception report. Also, indicate whether to compare this value against actual or adjusted time. Adjusted time refers to the recorded time after any conditions, set for the shift, are activated. For instance, if the shift is set to round to the nearest quarter-hour, a punch at 6:05 (actual time) will be recorded to 6:00 (adjusted time). In this case, actual time will place the punch into the exception report, while the adjusted time would not. Enter 9999 to disable this exception. This default can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default for the maximum or minimum number of minutes, for manually clocked meals, that will activate an exception. These defaults can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default for the maximum or minimum number of minutes, for manually clocked breaks, that will activate an exception. These defaults can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up. Enter the default for the maximum or minimum number of hours, for shift length reported, that will activate an exception. These defaults can be changed on individual shifts when they are set up.

Schedule Defaults
A Work Schedule is an overview of different shifts on different days that repeat in time cycles. Although a Shift file defines each unique schedule worked by employees, the Work Schedule
Kronos Incorporated Page 71 of 613

lists data about every shift. A Work Schedule is made up of the number of days in the shift, the shift description, beginning and ending times, length, non-scheduled days, whether the day is scheduled or not, pay scales based on straight, double, or overtime, etc. Define the defaults for the Schedule and Daily Schedule files before building the files themselves. It will save time. Located in the Setup/Defaults/Work Schedules file, the defaults are included in three tabs, General, Consecutive Day Pay Scales and Day of Week Pay Scales. General

DEFAULT
Days in cycle

DESCRIPTION
Enter the number of days that will make up most new work schedule cycles. This default can be changed on individual Work Schedules when they are set up.

Anchor date

This default establishes the begin date for the defined work schedule. This provides a reference point for which daily schedule to use on a given day. This default can be changed on individual Work Schedules when they are set up.

Non-scheduled day display

Set the default for how non-scheduled days will be displayed on the Schedule Detail screen. Select A = Show non-scheduled day text, to include the text, defined in the next field, on the screen. Select B = Show shift schedule, to include the shift schedule for proceeding scheduled days, on the screen. This default can be changed on individual Work Schedules when they are set up.

Non-scheduled day text

Set the default text which will be displayed on all days not scheduled, when the A = Show non-scheduled day text option is selected above. This default can be changed on individual Work Schedules when they are set up.

Overtime Rules: Period overtime limit

Set the default for the most commonly used point at which employees begin to accumulate overtime hours. When the number of hours specified here is passed, additional hours will be counted toward overtime. If you enter 9999 in this field, it means that the overtime limit will never be reached, in effect, disabling the field. This would act as a safety in case this field is accidentally left blank in a work schedule, making all

Kronos Incorporated

Page 72 of 613

time overtime. This default can be changed on individual Work Schedules when they are set up. Overtime Rules: Period double time limit Set the default for the most commonly used point at which employees begin to accumulate double time hours. When the number of hours specified here is passed, additional hours will be counted toward double time. If you enter 9999 in this field, it means that the double time limit will never be reached, in effect, disabling the field. This would act as a safety in case this field is accidentally left blank in a work schedule, making all time double time. This default can be changed on individual Work Schedules when they are set up. Overtime Rules: Reset on date range Set the default number of days before the work period cycle is reset. Cumulative hours are reset on this cycle. This field is separate from the Work Schedule reset value. This permits overtime rules to be based on the work period rather than the Work Schedule. This default can be changed on individual Work Schedules when they are set up. Consecutive Day Pay Scales

DEFAULT
Day number

DESCRIPTION
Set up to three default pay scales for employees who work consecutive days. The number of days set here determines the point at which the consecutive day pay scale will begin. These pay scales can be set up with any work schedule. This day count begins with the pay period start and does not carry over into the next pay period. This default can be changed on individual Work Schedules when they are set up.

Pay scale

Set up the default pay scales that match the consecutive day value(s) above. The options for this field are set up in the Hours Allocation Rules file for Consecutive Day Scale.

Reset on date range

Set the default number of days before the consecutive day period cycle is reset. Cumulative hours are reset on this cycle. This field is separate from the Work Schedule reset value. This permits consecutive day rules to be based on the work period rather than the Work Schedule.
Page 73 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

This default can be changed on individual Work Schedules when they are set up. Day of Week Pay Scales

DEFAULT
Sunday- Saturday

DESCRIPTION
Set up the default pay scales for each day of the week. This feature allows employees to be paid differently based on the day of the week. These scales are useful when a work schedule is not based on a weekly cycle, but pay rules are applied on a weekly basis. For instance, Saturday and Sunday may be paid differently even though they fall on different numbered days of the schedule. The options for this field are set up in the Hours Allocation Rules file for Day of Week Scale.

Pay Rule Defaults

Pay Rules allow you to get further detail from your labor hours and assign codes to those categories. As employees perform transactions, the system attempts to find a Pay Rule that matches the characteristics of the hours that need to be allocated. It searches from these Pay Rules in a Pay Rule Profile, always searching from the highest level of detail to the lowest. This ensures that the most specific match for your particular rule is found. Once the system finds a match, it uses the information to create the Hours records for the time allocated. The Pay Rule Defaults are used to set conditions which will apply to most Pay Rule Profiles you will set up. Completing these defaults will save time when you define specific profiles. The same pay rule codes can be used for several different categories. The codes required depend on the requirements of your payroll system. For example, the code for double time could be used anytime there is either period or daily DOUBLETIME involved. The Pay Rule Defaults are included on two tabs: Pay Rule and Hours Level/ Pay Category. Pay Rule

DEFAULT
Apply rule

DESCRIPTION
Set the default for this mandatory field which defines whether this is a Main Rule or an Additive Rule. Additive rules allocate hours to a subsequent set of pay category in addition to the codes mandated by the main pay rule. The options are: M = As a main rule P = In addition to profile rules (Additive Rule) Y = In addition to any main rule (Additive Rule)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 74 of 613

These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Override more general levels Set the default for this mandatory field that determines whether a rule takes precedence over more specific rules at more general levels. Check the box if the rule takes precedence, leave clear if the rule does not take precedence over more specific rules at more general levels. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created.

Hours Level/ Pay Category

DEFAULT
Straight time

DESCRIPTION
Enter the default pay category used to calculate pay for hours accumulated as straight time. The pay categories are set in the Hours Allocation Rules as Pay Categories. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Enter the default pay category used to calculate pay for hours accumulated as daily overtime. The pay categories are set in the Hours Allocation Rules as Pay Categories. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Enter the default pay category used to calculate pay for hours accumulated as daily double overtime. The pay categories are set in the Hours Allocation Rules as Pay Categories. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Enter the default pay category used to calculate pay for hours accumulated as period overtime. The pay categories are set in the Hours Allocation Rules as Pay Categories. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Enter the default pay category used to calculate pay for hours accumulated as period double overtime. The pay categories are set in the Hours Allocation Rules as Pay Categories. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Enter the default pay category used to calculate pay for hours accumulated as daily overtime and period overtime. The pay categories are set in the Hours Allocation Rules as Pay Categories. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Enter the default pay category used to calculate pay for
Page 75 of 613

Daily overtime

Daily doubletime

Period overtime

Period doubletime

Daily overtime and period overtime

Daily doubletime
Kronos Incorporated

and period overtime

hours accumulated as daily double overtime and period overtime. The pay categories are set in the Hours Allocation Rules as Pay Categories. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Enter the default pay category used to calculate pay for hours accumulated as daily overtime and period double overtime. The pay categories are set in the Hours Allocation Rules as Pay Categories. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Enter the default pay category used to calculate pay for hours accumulated as daily double overtime and period double overtime. The pay categories are set in the Hours Allocation Rules as Pay Categories. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created. Indicate, by checking the box, for each pay rule which pay category counts towards the higher limits, if more than one can be applied. If they do not count toward the higher category, don't check the box. For a detailed example of this feature, see Counting Towards Limits, Examples. These defaults can be changed when Pay Rule Profiles are created.

Daily overtime and period doubletime

Daily double overtime and period doubletime

Counts toward... Daily...Period...

Transaction Defaults
A transaction is a method for an employee to enter data into the ShopTrac Pro system. The data that enters the system contains information that is the same for all transactions, and information that is unique to each particular transaction. The Transaction Defaults are set to apply to any new transactions created in the Transaction file. The defaults are included on two tabs: General and Employee Access. General

DEFAULT
Rounding method

DESCRIPTION
Available only for programs related to log-on/off and clock-in/out, this default sets the rounding method, using three options: B = Rounds time back to the last hours division, regardless of how close the time is to the next division. F = Rounds time forward to the next hours division, regardless of how close the time is to the last division. R = Rounds to nearest hours division. Blank = select no default

Kronos Incorporated

Page 76 of 613

This default can be changed when Transactions are created. Hours division If a value is selected in the Rounding method above, this option becomes functional. This default defines how the hour is divided for rounding calculations. Valid values are 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20 and 30. For example, if 4 is selected, the hour is divided into four parts (15-minute segments). If the method rounding to the nearest next division were selected, a transaction entered at 8:07 would be adjusted to 8:15. This default can be changed when Transactions are created. Set the default for a response to be sent to the terminal device. Check this box if a response is desired, or leave it clear to omit the message, and make the device immediately available for the next person. This might be the choice for a transaction executed during high-volume times. This default can be changed when Transactions are created.

Option: Respond to terminal

Employee Access This option has interactive selection windows for available and selected options. Highlight the desired option, one at a time, from the Available window and click the right-arrow icon to move it to the Selected window. If there is a factor you do not want included, don't select it. If you want to select all the factors, click the double right-arrow icon. Once selected, move each factor up or down in the order by highlighting the factor and clicking the up- or down-arrow icon. De-select any factor by highlighting it and clicking the left-arrow icon. All factors are de-selected by clicking the double left-arrow icon. Be sure to click Save before exiting this screen, if you wish to save your selections.

DEFAULT
Available

DESCRIPTION
All access levels set up in Flags/Employee Access are displayed. Select one or more as the default. Remember that the N=No special access required option permits access to anyone, even if other, more selective, access levels are chosen. Indicates which access levels have been selected.

Selected

Kronos Incorporated

Page 77 of 613

WORK PERIOD ENFORCEMENT

Work period enforcement lets the user restrict the hours the system will record to the length of the employee's authorized work period. The authorized work period is the period of time that employees are cleared to be working, consisting of their usual shift, plus any scheduled overtime. This is done by rounding transactions passed before the scheduled start of the employee's work period to the shift start time, and all transactions after the period will be rounded to the end of the work period. Work Period Enforcement can only be activated in the Shift file. No other files are affected. Two settings in the Shift file control this functionality. You can control the beginning and end of the work period separately, and you can decide if you want rounding on both ends of the work period or just one. Consider these factors related to Work Period Enforcement: Schedule overtime properly and in a timely manner if work period enforcement is to record accurate time. If overtime is not scheduled, the time worked is rounded to the shift begin/end time, resulting in unrecorded time. Decide which shifts will be enforced. The enforcement can be overridden using the ROV (restriction override) transaction. Work period enforcement is applied after any clock-in/out restrictions.

Enforcements are different from Restrictions. For more information on the differences, see Restrictions-Enforcements Differences. Work Period Enforcement Examples Example 1 - Bob Smith's shift runs from 7:00 to 15:30, and the work period enforcement is turned on both before and after the shift. This shift time is also his authorized work period. The following table reflects Bob's transactions for the day and how they are rounded:

TRANSACTION
Clock-in Log-on Job A Log-on Job B Log-on Job C Log-off Job B Log-off Job A Log-off Job C Clock-out

ACTUAL TIME
6:15 6:21 6:48 7:35 15:00 15:45 16:15 16:33

ADJUSTED TIME
7:00 7:00 7:00 7:35 15:00 15:30 15:30 15:30

All transactions outside the authorized work period, no matter how far outside they are rounded forward or backward so that all transactions are forced into the authorized period. Example 2 - Betty Brown's shift runs from 7:00 to 15:30, and work period enforcement is turned
Kronos Incorporated Page 78 of 613

on both before and after the shift. Betty is authorized for 1.5 hours of post-shift overtime and her authorized work period is 7:00 to 17:00. The following table reflects Betty's transactions for the day and how they are rounded:

TRANSACTION
Clock-in Log-on Job A Log-on Job B Log-on Job C Log-off Job B Log-off Job A Log-off Job C Clock-out

ACTUAL TIME
6:15 6:21 6:48 7:35 15:00 17:05 18:45 19:03

ADJUSTED TIME
7:00 7:00 7:00 7:35 15:00 17:00 17:00 17:00

All transactions outside the authorized work period, no matter how far outside, are rounded forward or backward so that all transactions are forced into the authorized period, including authorized overtime. Note that using this feature may result in an inaccurate allocation of hours to jobs. The time recorded may not reflect the true amount of time spent on a job. If the shift is set up to disallow job logons outside the authorized work period, the data collection device will return a message and the time will not be processed.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 79 of 613

DEVICE CONFIGURATION
Several different information sources work together to send and receive data from the collection devices, and transform it into useful information for the ShopTrac Pro database. When an employee performs a transaction at a device, the transaction transfers data from ShopTrac Pro to the device and, depending on the transaction, receives data, supplied by the employee from the device, which it must process, verify and store in reply to the transaction prompts. The device sends this data to the Data Collection Manager (DCM), the communications piece of the data collection system. The DCM, in turn, sends the data to the Transaction Processor. The processor utility decodes the data stream and uses the information to update the ShopTrac Pro database. If there is a problem with the data, such as an invalid work order, an error message is sent back to the device via DCM, awaiting a correct data response. This whole process is immediate and best represents the on-line benefits of the ShopTrac Pro system. The process of setting up communications is simple. Just follow these steps: Define the devices in DCM Import device information to the ShopTrac Pro system (Import Devices) Assign transactions to the device (Devices) Download to the device (Export Transaction Assignments) To access the Device Configuration menu, select Setup from the Main Menu and then click on the Device Configuration option. When the menu tree opens, select by double-clicking on the desired option. The Device Configuration options include: Import Devices - used to import devices into ShopTrac Pro. Devices - used to define devices and, assign function keys and transactions to devices. Export Transaction Assignments - used to download transaction functions to devices. Transactions - the program used to build transactions for the devices, including prompts for the device display. Transaction Prompts - the program used to create or edit prompts which are used in the transactions, displayed at the device. Transaction Mapping - controls where the data goes in the files, and what validations take place.

Import Devices
This function is used to import devices, once they are set up in the Data Collection Manager (DCM). It is part of the device-defining process. The fields on this screen (other than the error checking box) are not accessible, since the information comes from DCM. If you add a device in DCM, use this option to import the new devices from DCM to ShopTrac Pro.
Kronos Incorporated Page 80 of 613

The window contains the following fields:

FIELD
Format Destination file Input from file

DESCRIPTION
This is the name of the user-defined import format. Enter the filename where the imported data will reside in the ShopTrac Pro system. The ASCII file name located in the \DOWNLOAD\ subdirectory entered in the Import From Field in DCM. If the file name is invalid, the system displays an error message. If valid, the system displays the directory and file name to the right of the field. Check this box to turn on error checking for the following errors, an attempt to add, update or delete a record that already exists. If you are testing your imports, check this box. If the system has been running for some time, leave this box clear.

Error checking

When the import is launched, the screen displays the import activity along with the errors encountered. If error checking is requested, any errors in the import are automatically printed on an Errors Report. In order for devices to be imported to ShopTrac Pro, they must first be defined in DCM to function properly. The Import Devices is used to select the devices and link them to ShopTrac Pro. Once the devices have been imported, define the transactions that will be used on each device using the Devices option. Then export the device assignments using Export Transaction Assignments. Use the Transactions option to create new transactions to assign to function keys. Use the Transaction Prompts option to edit transaction prompts to your specific needs. These are the prompts that are displayed at the device.

Devices
Devices are defined in the Data Communications Manager (DCM) program to correlate the location of a transaction and store the data in ShopTrac Pro databases. There are two different classes of terminal records that are used by the ShopTrac Pro system. Devices on the work floor which collect information by swiping a badge or entering codes into a keypad. Emulator devices that allow a computer with access to ShopTrac Pro to act like devices on the floor.

This Device menu option is used to assign the desired transactions to function keys on specific devices. Once the function keys have been defined, the information is downloaded to the specific device. The descriptive information related to the device (Model, Comm. Method, Active, Max Trx Definitions, Number F-Keys) is set in DCM when the devices are defined.
Kronos Incorporated Page 81 of 613

The Devices option screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
Device ID Description Active

DESCRIPTION
The identification number for the device as set up in the DCM file. The description of the device as set up in the DCM file. If the box is checked, the device is active. If clear, the device is inactive. This information comes from the system. This specifies how many function keys are on the keypad of the device. The maximum number is 12. This field defines how many transactions fit in the memory of the device. If a value is filled in here, it is necessary to assign the selected transactions to the device. An optional field. The type of device as set up in the DCM file. Types include: E Ethernet. S Serial communication.

Number of F-Keys Max Trx Definitions

Comm. Method

Model

The device model identifier as set up in the DCM file.

The function keys are defined by selecting a transaction function from the drop-down list for each function key. For the device with F1-F12 function keys, select the desired functions that will be automatically executed when the related function key is clicked. For the devices that require more commands than the 12 function keys can handle, define the additional functions to be available using the Keyless tab screen. These commands must be entered from a keyboard.

F1-F12 TAB
F1...F12 Select a function from the drop-down list for each function key. A maximum of 12 keys can be defined. A listing of all available functions, along with their threecharacter code. Select from the Available listing to be used at the device to enter transactions. The three-character code is entered at the keyboard to access the available command.

KEYLESS TAB
Available Selected

A field at the bottom left of the key assignment tabs indicates how many key transactions are currently assigned to the system.

Export Transaction Assignments

Once the devices have been defined and assigned transactions, the user must export that information to the devices. This is also true whenever a transaction or a transaction prompt is
Kronos Incorporated Page 82 of 613

added, changed or deleted. This new information must be sent to the devices to update the information related to the transactions that will occur at the devices. Follow these steps to transfer information to the devices: Access the Export Transaction Assignments option on the Device Configuration menu. Select the device(s) that will be exported from the Available Devices list and move them to the Selected Devices list. Click OK to begin the export process. The export process will end with a "Sent to DCM" message. However, the fact that the transactions assignments have been sent does not automatically mean that the export is troublefree. To check the integrity of your export, prior to launching the export, open the DCM Viewer. After the export has been completed, check the viewer for any error messages. Refer to the DCM User Guide for more information about specific error messages.

Transactions
Every transaction is associated with a transaction program that contains the logic to process information received from the devices, and to create and update the necessary files and records. Some transaction programs have execution options that tell the program to process the data in a different way. Some suggested ways that transactions can be used are listed in transaction prompts option information. The transaction is made up of the data entered in response to the prompts displayed to the user at the device. Since there are different prompts for each transaction, the data coming in will be unique. The Transaction Processor uses the definition of the transaction to separate, or parse, this data into distinct pieces used by the system to update the various related files. Each piece of data is "mapped" as a particular piece of information. For example, the data entered in response to a ShopTrac Pro standard LON (Labor Log On) transaction would include: Work Order number Operation ID Function to be performed

Each of these pieces of data is separated and assigned according to its Mapping, which tells the Transaction Program how to handle it. The system determines where each piece of data begins and ends, based on the length set up in the transaction. For instance, the transaction program LOGON contains all the logic for processing this data -- validating, updating, and returning corrective messages to the device. Each transaction program may have several mappings that it can use. A list of these programs and mappings can be printed in the Transactions report. There are several prompts predefined and loaded into the ShopTrac Pro program for your use. To view these prompt examples, click on the drop-down list on the Prompt# field on the Prompt tab. Each prompt selected is added to a list of prompts that are displayed on the device when a user performs a transaction. Each prompt line also contains information on mappings, prompt offset, validation settings and whether or not to repeat the prompt. Use any of these prompts to help build your own transactions or as a guide to develop your own transaction prompts (See Creating a User-Defined Prompt)
Kronos Incorporated Page 83 of 613

NOTE: Anytime an existing ShopTrac Pro transaction is modified, you must download all changes to the devices, using the Export Transaction Assignments for the changes to take effect. If you create a new transaction, you may need to assign the new transaction to a device. When Transaction is selected, a list of existing profiles is displayed. To create a new transaction, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing transaction, highlight the schedule to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing transaction, highlight the transaction to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the copied transaction are displayed, with a blank transaction name field. Enter a new name and make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings. Change the Transaction code, because if you save this record at any point without changing the code, the existing transaction will be replaced. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing transaction, highlight the transaction name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 84 of 613

Transaction Programs These are the programs that are used by the system to generate transactions. They are standard programs that are a permanent part of the ShopTrac Pro system and cannot be changed, deleted or added to. Three-character transaction prompts can be created to use with these programs. The transaction programs include the following: ACTIVATE Activates specified work orders, operations. Generally used in a new ShopTrac Pro system when work orders are imported or do not have a status or quantity received. Clocks employees in at the beginning of a shift. It creates and updates time records. Can be used with shift Rounding. Clocks employees on at the end of a shift. It creates and updates time records. Can be used with Automatic Quantity Moves, Shift Rounding and with Recalculation Triggers for future days. Records daily changes such as department, job class, labor code or work center. It creates and updates time and labor records. Can be used with Shift Rounding and with Recalculation Triggers for future days. Used to marks the time record so that deductions for meals and breaks can be overridden to accommodate an altered work schedule. Four prompts are included in ShopTrac Pro to use this program. They are OV1 to override the next deduction, OV2 to override all deductions, OV3 to override a specific deduction and OVC to cancel any existing override deduction transactions. Records extra hours for employees that are not a part of the workday. Can be used with Recalculation Triggers for future days. Records a full-day absence transaction. Creates and updates time records. Used to record quality control data against a direct work order. Scrap quantities entered are added to the operation record or in a looping transaction. Can be used with Shift Rounding. Processes all user-defined transactions. Used to log job information at any time during the day for multiple jobs. The employee will be prompted to enter job information such as hours, quantities, etc. Can be used with Automatic Quantity Moves, Shift Rounding
Page 85 of 613

CLOCKIN

CLOCKOUT

DAILYCHG

DEDUCTOV

EXTRAHRS

FLDAYABS INSPECT

[Link] LOGJOB

Kronos Incorporated

and with Recalculation Triggers for future days. LOGOFF Logs employees off a specific direct or indirect work orders at the end of a shift or for a break. Can be used with Automatic Quantity Moves, Shift Rounding and with Recalculation Triggers for future days. Logs employees off multiple jobs with one transaction. Can be used with Automatic Quantity Moves, Shift Rounding and with Recalculation Triggers for future days. Logs employees onto a specific direct or indirect work orders at the beginning of a shift or returning from a break. Can be used with Shift Rounding and with Recalculation Triggers for future days. Used to create a zero hours labor record when an operation has been marked as complete and, therefore, cannot have quantities logged. Quantities added with this transaction are added to the specified operation. Can be used with Automatic Quantity Moves and Shift Rounding. Used with the existing prompt MCH to make changes to the machine data file record. Used with the existing prompt MST to start machine records. A machine can only be logged onto one job at a time. Used with the existing prompt MSP to stop machine records. To record downtime, an indirect work order must be used. Used to change an operation on a work order. Used to record partial day absences. Creates and updates time records. Can be used with Recalculation Triggers for future days. For more information on partial day absences, see PDA. Used to update the Moved fields in a work order from one operation/function to another. Can be used with Shift Rounding. Used to check information about an employee's workday. Used to check information about work orders and/or operations. Used to perform scheduling functions by creating and updating the schedule and other files.

LOGOFFAL

LOGON

LOGQTY

MACCHG MACSTART

MACSTOP

OPCHANGE PTLDYABS

QTYMOVE

QUERYDAY QUERYWIP SCHEDTRX

Kronos Incorporated

Page 86 of 613

TEAMCHG TEAMOFF TEAMON WOCHANGE Adding a New Transaction

Used to change the employees current team. Used to log a team off a specific direct or indirect work order. Used to log a team on a specific direct or indirect work order. Used to change work order information.

Select Transaction from the Device Configuration menu. Right-click on the transaction list and select New. Enter a new transaction name in the Transaction Code field. Complete the field prompts on the Description screen as explained below. Specify the information you want to collect by completing the Prompts screen. Up to 15 prompts can be specified. If you have developed a special program to perform a specific action within the transaction, the Breakpoints screen is used to identify the settings for that action. Note: This screen was developed only for the use of programmers and should not be used by those unfamiliar with programming functions.

Once you create a new transaction, assign it to a Device and Export Transaction Assignments to send it to the devices. The transaction setup fields are contained on three tabbed screens including Description, Prompts, and Breakpoints: Transaction code The unique 3-character code for the transaction. Enter the transaction code of an existing transaction to display the file record for that transaction, or enter an unused and non-reserved 3-character code to create a new transaction. The 3-characters may be a combination of letters and numbers, but cannot contain special characters. For a complete list of the codes included in the system, see System Transaction Codes.

Description

FIELD
Name

DESCRIPTION
The name of the transaction up to 30-characters long. This is the name of the transaction that appears on the device prior to the first prompt. This field is required. The one-character, user-defined field that helps group transactions. Transaction Types are helpful when printing transaction barcodes, because it is possible to select a particular transaction code type and print all

Type

Kronos Incorporated

Page 87 of 613

transaction codes of that type. This field is optional. Chain Execution option The Transaction Program called to process the transaction. If the program selected has execution options, this field is displayed. Execution options are different for each program. If there are no options available for a program, this field does not display. Execution options are included on the TTX920 report. Note: Refer to the [Link] section for additional information concerning the functionality of the Execution option. Host response Determines the response of the system to the completed transaction. The options are: Y If a message must be returned to the device N If no response is required. This makes the device immediately available to the next user. Employee access level This field sets permission levels for those who can perform this transaction. This is directly related to the Access field in the Employee record. It is used to limit access to supervisors to perform transactions that involve setting of date and time for labor or time and attendance purposes. Define up to 5 unique access levels for a transaction. This gives employees with 5 different access levels the ability to perform the transaction. Entering an N means No special access and any employee may perform this transaction. Three access levels are defined: A (Supervisor), B (Lead person), and N. You may define others in the Flag file. Rounding method Displays only for those programs that use time rounding, e.g., the LOGON, LOGOFF, CLOCKIN and CLOCKOUT programs. A Y in the Round column of the Chain drop-down menu denotes the time-rounding programs. The options are: B Back -- Rounds the adjusted time back to the last hours division, regardless of how close the time is to the next division. F Forward -- Rounds the adjusted time forward to the next hours division, regardless of how close the time is to the last division. R
Kronos Incorporated

Round to nearest -- Rounds the adjusted time to

Page 88 of 613

the closest division. Hours division Hours Division. Only appears if the Rounding Method field is completed. This tells the system how to divide the hour for rounding. If set to 4, the hour is divided into 15 minute segments; set to 6 and the hour is divided into 10 minute segments. Valid values are: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, and 30. Hours division rounding only occurs if no other rounding, such as clock grace periods, is applied. Prompts You can select an existing predefined prompt or user-defined prompt to accompany the transaction. To change those prompt parameters, you can edit an existing user-defined prompt or create a new prompt, using the Transaction Prompts option.

FIELD
Prompt #

DESCRIPTION
Select a prompt from the list or enter the prompt number. There are two kinds of prompts: ShopTrac Pro system prompts and user-defined prompts. The numbers 1-4999 are reserved for ShopTrac Pro system prompts. Userdefined prompts use the numbers 5000-9999. These numbers are assigned by the system as they are defined. Based on the prompt selected, the prompt text that will appear on the device display. This text cannot be changed in a predefined prompt. Based on the prompt selected, what is expected from the device user in response to the prompt text? This cannot be changed on a predefined prompt. The options are: M Mandatory -- The data collection device does not advance to the next prompt without valid input. O Optional -- The user at the terminal can skip this prompt by clicking ENTER. If no default value is assigned for the prompt, blanks are entered in the file. F Fill -- At the terminal you never see this prompt. The data assigned to default is entered automatically.

Prompt text

Entry

Type

This field contains a two-part entry, based on the prompt selected: 1) One of the following types: Alphanumeric Badge Date Numeric Time

Kronos Incorporated

Page 89 of 613

2) The character length of the expected response to the prompt. The prompt type and length cannot be changed on a predefined prompt. Map1, 2 Specify the field the prompt maps to, if a predefined prompt is selected, this mapping is provided. Map2 is available if the prompt is mapped to more than one location. See Transaction Mapping for more information. If a Map2 entry is made, the user must indicate where the second entry will begin, using this field. For instance, if the Prompt Length is 15 and Map1 is a five-character field, then Map2 must begin at the sixth position. Therefore, the offset entry would be 6 (no blank spaces are permitted). Specify a validation option. Choose V if the system should verify if the data exists, C to create a new record for new data, or, leave the option blank, if no validation is required and any data entered will be accepted. Default values for Optional and Fill entry types. In an Optional field, this value is used only if the prompt is skipped at the device. Fill prompts display the default value in the field. This field can be used in conjunction with the Automatic Quantity Complete feature to simplify movement activities. Specify if the prompt should be repeated or "looped". For example, if the transaction includes a request for a work order number and some employees work on multiple jobs at the same time, a log off transaction would require the request for a work order to be repeated until a blank value is returned. There may be multiple loops in a given transaction.

Offset

Validate/Create

Default

Loop (Repeat)

Breakpoints CAUTION: This screen is reserved for programmer's use. For more information on the subject, contact ShopTrac Pro Technical Support.

FIELD
Number

DESCRIPTION
Enter the number of the breakpoint to be executed. The options are 1, 2, 3 or 4. Breakpoint 1 is executed before validation. Breakpoint 2 is executed after validation and breakpoint 3 occurs during processing. Breakpoint 4 is executed after all the transaction prompts have been concluded. Breakpoint 5 occurs at the end of a looping

Kronos Incorporated

Page 90 of 613

transaction. Type Select the type of action to be taken. The options are C for a chain or R to run a program. Chain is used if the program called is part of ShopTrac Pro. Run is used if the program is external to ShopTrac Pro. Enter the programming string to be executed by the breakpoint. If a chain is used, indicate the ShopTrac Pro program to execute. If an external program is to be run, enter the path to the executable file.

Program text string

Printing a list of transactions To print a list of all ShopTrac Pro transactions, select the Reports option on the main menu, and then select Lists. Select the Transactions option and enter the desired selection criteria to print a list of transactions.

Transaction Prompts
There are several predefined transactions activated with the ShopTrac Pro system. These are typical for most users; however, you may want to define your own transaction to incorporate one or more of the changes described below. Some of these changes require the creation of new prompts. There are limited ways (mapping, offset, validation, default fill and repeating actions) to modify a predefined ShopTrac Pro prompt to meet your particular needs. If you want a prompt that contains different information for the settings you can't change (prompt text, type, entry requirements or prompt length), you must create a new prompt. Once you create a new prompt, all components of this user-defined prompt can be edited as required. Suggested Transaction Uses Change the wording of the transaction name or the prompt You can change the transaction name in a predefined or user-defined to clarify it for use in your company. However, since you can't change the text in a predefined prompt, you must create a new prompt to use terminology unique for your facility. For example, you might want to create a new prompt with the same settings as Prompt# 4, but that replaces the term "Work Order" with "Repair Number". Add, edit or remove prompts from existing transactions If a predefined transaction contains a prompt that does not apply to your procedures, remove it from the prompt list. You can also fine-tune any existing transactions by editing any of the current fields. For instance, if you do not track labor or quantities by function, you can delete that function prompt from all predefined labor and WIP transactions, or use function as a fill prompt. Create repeating prompts for transactions If you have situations where multiple responses can be made to a single request, create or alter a
Kronos Incorporated Page 91 of 613

transaction that repeats that request for data. By clicking on the Repeat box, the transaction lets you repeat one, or several, prompts in a transaction without repeating others or repeating the entire transaction. This speeds up repetitive entry of data. Define default values for transactions Automatically enter settings that are usually, or always, the same in every new transaction by utilizing the Transaction Default feature. Change the access levels Limit access to transactions that are intended for specific people or groups of people. Create the access level, enter that access level in the employee file and select the access code into the transaction. Use rounding and hours division Change how transactions divide hours, to meet your requirements, using the Hours Divisions field. Change mandatory prompts to optional or fill Lets you fill prompts that always contain the same data, accept any data, and otherwise change the transaction to meet the specific needs and terminology used at your facility. You cannot change the prompt text, entry requirements, type or length of an existing predefined prompt. To change those prompt parameters, you must create a new prompt. To create a new prompt, click New on the prompt window and enter the settings for the new prompt. Prompts are used in the Transaction file to specify what information is required by a user at a device. The Prompt appears on the Device display. Although the ShopTrac Pro system provides many standard prompts, you may want to create your own prompts to match the terminology used in your facility. Creating a user-defined prompt: Select the Transaction Prompts option on the Device Configuration menu tree. Right-click on the prompt list and select New from the options. The system displays the Prompt Entry screen. Complete the prompt fields on the Prompt Entry screen. These fields include:

FIELD
Prompt number

DESCRIPTION
The system accepts new prompt numbers between 5000 and 9999. The number cannot be changed once assigned. Prompts numbered 1 - 4999 are reserved for default ShopTrac Pro prompts. The text displayed at the terminal when the transaction is entered. This field may be up to 17 alphanumeric characters, and is a required field. An optional description of the prompt. This field can be up to 30-characters long. This field is for informational purposes only and will never appear at the terminal.
Page 92 of 613

Prompt string

Description

Kronos Incorporated

Type

The type of data to be entered. This is a mandatory field. The valid data types are: A Alphanumeric B Formatted badge (produces a 6-digit number from the scanned barcode) D N T Date (mm/dd/yy) Numeric Time (hh:mm:ss)

Prompt length

The number of characters in the data field awaiting a response to the transaction prompts at the terminal. This field is required. The entry requirements for the prompt. This field is required. The valid modes are as follows: M Mandatory -- The data collection device does not advance to the next prompt without input. O Optional -- This prompt can be skipped by clicking ENTER. If no default prompt value is assigned, blanks are entered in the file. F Fill -- The data assigned the as prompt default is entered automatically.

Entry requirement

Check position...for

Checks a single character of the response to the prompt to verify that it contains one of up to three possible characters. To determine which character to check, enter the character by position (1,2,3,etc.) and in the second field indicate which characters to check for in this position. For example, if defined as Check position 3 for 5, only accept a response to the prompt that includes the number 5 in the third character position. Or if defined as 1 for ABC, only accept a response to the prompt that includes the letters A, B, or C in the first position. Of, if defined as 1 for YN (requesting a yes/no response), only a 'Y' or 'N' will be an acceptable response. If a character position is selected, this field determines what the system to do with the character. The options are: N - Do not strip check character S - Strip check character

Check handling

Usual Mapping 1

The field in the database that is the destination for this data.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 93 of 613

Usual Mapping 2

This field allows more than one destination (data splitting) for the prompt data. If you enter a map here, the system prompts you for an Offset, or split point, at which the second mapping starts. This field appears only if the Usual Mapping 2 field is completed. It specifies the character at which the data for the second mapping begins.

Offset

When all the fields for the new prompt are completed, click Save to record the prompt. Editing or deleting a user-defined prompt: There are two types of transaction prompts, predefined system prompts and user-defined prompts. The system prompts cannot be changed or deleted. To edit a user-defined prompt: Select the prompt to edit from the list, and double-click or click Enter. Select the prompt field to edit and make the desired changes. Click Save to record the changes to the prompt. NOTE: Be aware that this will change the actions of the prompt in all transactions where it appears. To delete a user-defined prompt: Select the prompt to delete from the list. Right click and select Delete from the options. A confirmation box will be displayed with "Delete promptname?" Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel the deletion. NOTE: Be aware that if the prompt appears in any transactions you cannot delete it. An error box will be displayed "This prompt in used in x transactions and cannot be deleted."

Kronos Incorporated

Page 94 of 613

Transaction Mapping
Mappings control where the data goes in the files, and what validations take place. For example, even if the wording of a field was changed from Work Order to Repair Order, the response to that prompt should still is treated as the work order. Therefore, the mapping to select is WKO. Using Multiple Mappings You can also have multiple mappings for a single barcode. For example, a barcode contains the Work Order Number and the Operation Number. The LOGON transaction has one prompt that maps to two pieces of data the Map> Pos column shows: WKO OPN 11 This means that the data found in the first 10 characters of the data input is mapped to WKO (Work Order) and the remainder (beginning at position 11) is mapped to OPN (Operation). If adding a prompt from the Prompt pull-down window, use the same procedure. The only difference is that, within the Prompt Entry screen, the Mapping pull-down window displays all active mappings, not just those available for a given Chain program. This is because the prompt may be associated with several transaction programs. The Transaction Program Listing lists all the Transaction Programs in the ShopTrac Pro system. All the mappings available for a transaction program are in the report. Using Validation The V column on the Transaction screen has the following options: C -- Create If the data does not exist in the database, the system creates the appropriate record. If the entry already exists, the system simply processes the input and updates the records accordingly. This feature is available only for certain mappings. V -- Validate If the data does not exist in the ShopTrac Pro database, the system generates and returns an error to the terminal if the Response flag is set to Y. If an error has occurred, the system does not update any files. If the Response is set to N, the system places the error in the barcode log. If the system is not collecting data from the terminals, no direct feedback to the terminals occurs. If there are no validation characters in the Mapping choices, a blank is the only available choice. If you enter anything other than the allowable characters, the system generates an error. Only certain Mappings have the V and C options. These are listed on the Transaction Programs report.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 95 of 613

Transaction Mappings and Custom Codes

This option allows the user to add mappings to the system to be used for transactions. Custom codes can then be associated with the mapping to allow for validation of data collected via the transactions. A mapping may be up to three characters and cannot be blank. The description may be up to 30 characters including spaces. Users are allowed to perform the following functions for user-defined Mappings: New - Create a new user-defined mapping. Edit - Modify an exiting user-defined mapping. Copy - Copy an exiting user-defined mapping. Delete - Remove an existing user-defined mapping. View Only - Review the mapping definition. Note: The user cannot add new, edit, or delete codes for standard mappings as designated by the 'Y' in the Standard field. Copy and View Only are the only options available for Standard mappings. Mappings created by the user have a Standard value of 'N' to distinguish them from the pre-defined system mappings. Configuration Tip: The message that will be returned to the data collection device in cases of a validation error uses the prompt description as the identifier for the field. Keep this in mind when creating the transactions that use these user-defined mappings and custom codes. NEW/EDIT CUSTOM CODES This option allows the user to add a new custom code or edit an existing custom code for a particular transaction mapping. This code is what gets validated against during processing of a transaction with a prompt using the mapping related to this custom code and set for validation. If the prompt is set to use validation type "C" and the code entered does not already exist in the custom code definitions, the value will be created in the custom code table. A code may be up to 99 characters including spaces and cannot be blank. The description and all user values (1-10) may be up to 50 characters including spaces and are for reference purposes only.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 96 of 613

CODE TABLES
Included in this menu option are: Department/Groups Used to identify different departments, and groups within those departments, in your company. After these are defined, employees can be assigned to home departments and groups in the Employee file. Job Classes Used to establish classes of work activity within a company. Once defined, employees can be assigned to a home job class in the Employee file. For example: electricians, welders, dock. Labor Codes Used to establish levels of work activity within a company. Once defined, employees can be assigned to a home labor code in the Employee file. For example: Exempt, Hourly, and Contract. Rate Classes Used to establish groups of employees who may be eligible for Rate Premiums. Once defined, employees assigned to special shifts or jobs can be designated for special bonuses. For example: Workers on the graveyard shift may receive an additional 50 cents per hour. Work Center Used to establish centers of work activity within the company. Can be associated with Work Orders. Employees assigned to a work center can be a sub-group of a department or can a combination of employees from several departments. Can be used to track special projects or sub-contracted jobs. Absence Codes Used to create reason codes for employees who are absent from work or how to process absence records. Accrual Codes Used to define labels for groups of accrued hours, e.g., vacation, sick time, etc. Completion Codes Used to create and edit codes used for complete and incomplete labor records. Audit Trail Reason Codes Used to help identify personnel or system errors over time that may need to be corrected to maintain the integrity of your system and data. Machine Status Codes Used to identify the reason for the status state of a machine or piece of equipment. General Reason Codes

Kronos Incorporated

Page 97 of 613

Used as explanations for a variety of occurrences in the system. Scrap Codes Used to classify reasons for scrapping parts. Customer Status Codes Used to identify work in progress from the customer perspective. Automatic Deduction Override Codes Used in the Time/Labor Editor when a manual adjustment is made to the employee's time record to override an automatic deduction. Work Order Status Codes Used to identify the reason for a canceled or hold status in a work order. This menu selection contains options used to create, edit and delete files associated with Employee, Time and Labor files. Records in these files can be sorted by primary and supplemental fields. Many of those supplemental fields originate from the files found here. These files are optional to the ShopTrac Pro system, but all customers generally use some of the files. Determine if their use would be appropriate for your company's shopfloor operations. Reports can be generated which are sorted by any information created in these files. To access the Code Tables menu, select Setup from the Main Menu and then click on the Code Tables option. To add a code, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, right-click on the list. Select New from the options on the drop-down menu. Complete the fields according to the explanations found in the help section for each type and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To edit a code, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to edit and click Enter or right-click with your mouse and select Edit from the option list. Make the desired changes and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To copy a code, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to copy, right-click with your mouse and select Copy from the option list. Make any desired alterations and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To delete a code, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to delete and right click with your mouse. Select Delete from the option list. The system will prompt for a confirmation of the deletion. Click Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting.

Department/Groups
A Department/Group Code identifies different department and/or groups functioning in your shop. Once defined, employees can be assigned to home departments and groups from the Employee file. Employees can be assigned to temporary departments using the Daily Change

Kronos Incorporated

Page 98 of 613

transaction. Reports can be generated to detail this information about all employees in your facility. When the Department/Group File option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Department/Group File: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. The fields in the Department/Group file are listed and explained below.

FIELD
Department

DESCRIPTION
A five-character alphanumeric name identifying a department. Enter the name of an existing department or an unused name to create a new department. A three-character alphanumeric name identifying the group within the department. If not defining groups, enter 1. Use up to 30 characters. Optional field. Use up to 30 characters. If no groups, leave this field blank. Department or group supervisor. Optional field. Used with the Rate Calculator. * Multiply with Rate + Add to Rate - Subtract from Rate < Lesser of Current Rate and Rate Calculator > Greater between Current Rate and Rate Calculator = Set with Rate Calculator amount

Group

Department description Group description Supervisor Rate operator

Rate calculator Misc

The amount/percentage to be used with Rate Operator. This field stores any additional piece of data the user d i Th f h fi ld b d fi d i h
Page 99 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

desires. The name of the field can be user-defined in the System Configuration file.

Job Classes
Establishes the general job title for an employee within a company. For example, Joe is an Expediter while Jane is an Electrician. Once defined, employees can be assigned to a home job class using the Job Class field in the Employee file or change to a temporary job class using the Daily Change transaction. Job class codes can be used to sort by when reports on work being performed are generated. When the Job Class Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. The fields in the Job Class Codes file are explained below.

FIELD
Job class

EXPLANATION
Alphanumeric 3-character code identifying a workactivity classification. Enter an existing code to display the record or an unused code to create a new job class. This is a mandatory field. A single-character code defining the job class type. This field is user-defined in Flags and is optional. Describe the class (up to 30-characters). An optional field. Used with the Rate Calculator. (Optional field) * Multiply with Rate + Add to Rate - Subtract from Rate < Lesser of Current Rate and Rate Calculator > Greater between Current Rate and Rate Calculator

Type Description Rate operator

Kronos Incorporated

Page 100 of 613

= Set with Rate Calculator amount Rate calculator Misc Amount/percentage to be used with the Rate Operator. (Optional field) This field stores any additional piece of data the user desires. The name of the field can be user-defined in the System Configuration file. (Optional field)

Labor Codes
Establishes the employment levels of employees within a company. For example, Joe is an Hourly employee while Jane is Exempt (salaried). Once defined, employees can be assigned to a home labor code using the Labor Code field in the Employee file. Employees can change to a temporary labor code using the Daily Change transaction. When the Labor Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. The fields in the Labor Code file are explained below.

FIELD
Labor code

DESCRIPTION
A 5-character alphanumeric code identifying an employee level. Enter an existing labor code to display the file record, or an unused code to create a new labor code. This is a mandatory field. A single-character code defining the labor code type. This field is user-defined in Flags and is optional. Describe the rate code (up to 30-characters). Optional field. Used with the Rate Calculator. * Multiply with Rate + Add to Rate - Subtract from Rate

Type Description Rate operator

Kronos Incorporated

Page 101 of 613

< Lesser of Current Rate and Rate Calculator > Greater between Current Rate and Rate Calculator = Set with Rate Calculator amount Rate calculator Misc Amount/percentage to be used with the Rate Operator. This field stores any additional piece of data the user desires. The name can be user-defined in the System Configuration file.

Rate Classes
Used to determine how Rate Premiums are applied. Create Rate Classes if you have assigned any Rate Premiums (Rate Operator and Rate Calculator) to your optional data sorting files and if you are assigning a base rate to an employee. If you are not using an employee base rate, skip the Rate Class function. Rate Premiums are often associated with the employees Shift, the Work Center, working on a special day or in a special capacity. For example, employees working the graveyard shift may get an additional 25 cents per hour. Or employees may get an extra 5% if they work as a team leader rather than a team member. Refer to the Rate Premiums section for more information. The Rate Premiums can be assigned to Department, Group, Work Center, Labor Code, and Job Class. ShopTrac Pro will use Rate Premiums as follows: Up to five Rate Premiums can be created Multiple rates can be used in a single day User-configurable rate can be calculated automatically on data entry screens

When the Rate Class Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. The fields in the Rate Class file are explained below: Rate class
Kronos Incorporated

A 5-character alphanumeric code identifying a rate class. E i i l di l h d d

Page 102 of 613

Enter an existing class to display the record, or an unused code to create a new rate class. This is a mandatory field General Information

FIELD
Type Description Calculation time

EXPLANATION
A single-character code defining the class type. This field is user-defined in Flags and is optional. Describe the class (up to 30 characters). Optional field. The time when Rate Premiums are applied. For example, T applies when Time Records are created, L when Labor Records are created.

Calculation Order

FIELD
Calculation order: Available

EXPLANATION

The order in which multiple premiums are applied. Possible selections are: D - Department or Group J - Job Class L - Labor S - Shift W - Work Center Calculation order: Select the desired calculation criteria from the Available Selected list and move them over to the Selected side. Select the criteria in the order in which they will be used to select data, from most important to least important. If you need to move a criteria up or down in the order, highlight the criteria and select the up or down arrow to the right of the Selected window. For more information on using Rate Classes and use of Calculation Order Field and Calculation Time Field, see Rate Class Usage. Rate Class Usage Following are examples of how Rate Class is used: Example 1 A Rate Class named RC001, described as "Work Center based", is created to contain a rate based on an employee's Work Center premium. The Calculation Time is L, so the Work Center premium is applied whenever a Labor record is created. Work Centers can be specified per operation, so rates may be manipulated based on the jobs worked. Example 2 A Rate Class named RC002, described as "Shift/Labor/Center Rate", is created to calculate a rate based on the Shift, the Labor Code and then Work Center. If there is a rate created for the shift, that rate is used. If none exists, the system checks to see if a rate exists for the Labor Code or the
Kronos Incorporated Page 103 of 613

Work Center. Each rate is calculated before moving to the next rate. The Calculation Time is also L, so the premium is applied whenever a Labor record is created. The rate is calculated from the Shift, Labor Code and Work Center premiums in each Labor record. Using the Calculation Order Field This field defines the order in which Rate Premiums are to be applied for employees assigned to this Rate Class. You may enter any of the following characters, representing the ShopTrac Pro files that contain Rate Premiums: D J L S W Department Job Class Labor Code Shift Work Center

These allow the user to define Rate Premiums based on more factors than just the employee's shift. When rates are calculated, the Rate Premiums are applied in order of the characters in this field. If the Calculation Order field is empty, it is skipped over. With several Rate Premiums, the issue of order to apply them arises. For example, suppose there is a Shift premium of 10% and a Department premium of +50 cents. Note the difference that calculation order makes to the pay rate. Clearly, it is important that the premiums be applied in the correct order. Base Rate Dept. Premium Sub-total Shift Premium 10% Total Rate Using the Calculation Time Field This field defines the time at which the Rate Premiums are applied to an employee's rate. There are two valid entries, L and T. Select L and the employee's base rate is put into the employees time record each day. The Rate Premiums are applied each time a Labor record is created. In this configuration each Labor record may have a different rate, depending on the Department, Work Center, etc. If T is selected, the Rate Premiums are applied when the employees time record for each day is created. Each Labor record created for the day has this rate stored in it, regardless of the Labor records Department, Work Center, etc. $10.00 Base Rate .50 Shift Premium 10% 10.50 Sub-total 1.05 Dept. Premium $11.55 Total Rate $10.00 1.00 11.00 .50 $11.50

Work Center
Kronos Incorporated Page 104 of 613

The Work Center file establishes project centers of work activity. Once defined, employees can be assigned to home work centers using the Work Center field in the Employee file. Work centers can also be linked to work orders. Employees can change to a temporary work center at Transaction Entry, using the Daily Change transaction. When the Work Center Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. The fields in the Work Center file are listed and explained below.

FIELD
Work Center

DESCRIPTION
A 5-character alphanumeric code identifying a work center. Enter an existing code to display the record, or an unused code to create a new center code. This is a mandatory field. A single-character code defining the labor code type. This field is user-defined in Flags and is optional. Describe the center (up to 30-characters). Optional field. Used with the Rate Calculator. (Optional field) * Multiply with Rate + Add to Rate - Subtract from Rate < Lesser of Current Rate and Rate Calculator > Greater between Current Rate and Rate Calculator = Set with Rate Calculator amount

Type Description Rate Operator

Rate Calculator Misc

Amount/percentage to be used with the Rate Operator. (Optional field) This field stores any additional piece of data the user desires. The name can be user-defined in the System Configuration file. (Optional field)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 105 of 613

Absence Codes
Absence codes are used to define reasons for time spent away from work. There are several predefined absence codes in the system, however you are free to define your own codes to fill special needs or edit an existing code to conform to your policies. You can also set up a code to handle special situations such as employees who work on a holiday. This is set up as an Extra Hours absence code. When the Absence Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change an Absence Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. The absence reason codes fields are:

FIELD
Code name Description Pay scale Allocation

DESCRIPTION
The five-character alphanumeric code name The code definition. The pay scale. This may be used as one of the factors in hours allocation. This field applies to both the absence and completion codes. Select X - Apply even if worked or leave the field blank. Used with the Daily Assignment option. Characters included with a new system install are: B C E F H J L Bereavement Plant Closure Excused Absence Funeral Holiday Jury Duty Leave of Absence

Scheduling character

Kronos Incorporated

Page 106 of 613

M P S U V W

Military Leave Personal Day Sick Unexcused Absence Vacation Bad Weather

The descriptions of these characters can be changed or deleted, and new ones can be added. Use qualifying hours Check this box if hours allocated to the absence count towards minimums for Premium Zones and consecutive day pay rates. Leave clear if they do not.

The codes available in the system are described below.

CODE
BEREV CLOSE FUNER HOLID JURY LOA MILIT NOPAY PRS SICK VACAT WEATR TRAVL ONCLL Extra Hours

DESCRIPTION
Bereavement Plant Closure Funeral Holiday Jury Duty Leave of absence Military Unpaid absence Personal day Sick Time Vacation Weather Travel
On Call

An additional code, called EXTRA - Extra Hours, is a special instance of an absence code. It differs in that it includes an allocation option. If the Allocation field is set to X - Record Even If Worked, the system will add any hours scheduled with this code to any hours that were already worked on that date. This could be used when an employee is called in to work while on a scheduled vacation or holiday. The employee could be paid his or her regular vacation or holiday pay and for any worked hours. If the Allocation field is left undefined, scheduled

Kronos Incorporated

Page 107 of 613

absences are disregarded if the employee already has a time record for the date.

Accrual Codes
There are several predefined Accrual Codes in the system; however, users are free to define their own codes to fill special needs or to edit an existing code to conform to policies or handle special situations. When the Audit Trail Reason Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. Reason codes are requested when adjustments or corrections to time records are processed.

FIELD
Code name Description

DESCRIPTION
Enter the five-character identifier for the desired audit trail reason code. Make it as descriptive as possible. Enter up to 30 characters to describe the desired code. This description will be displayed with the code when the code list is opened.

Completion Codes
Completion codes are used to indicate the status of an operation as Complete or Incomplete. Once an operation is marked as Complete, no hours or quantities can be passed against it. When the Completion Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the
Kronos Incorporated Page 108 of 613

erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. Completion codes fields include:

FIELD
Name Description Allocation

DESCRIPTION
The five-character alphanumeric code name. The code definition. This is used for all codes. Used to select a C - Complete or I - Incomplete code

Audit Trail Reason Codes

The Audit Trail Reason codes are used, over time, to help identify personnel or system errors that may need to be corrected to maintain the integrity of your system and data. Consideration must be taken when developing audit trail codes to make sure they are understandable and fit your organization's needs and requirements. Some possible reasons are "Supervisor change", "Missing clock-out", "Machine down". These codes are not static and may be changed or added as needed. When the Audit Trail Reason Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. Reason codes are requested when adjustments or corrections to time records are processed.

FIELD
Code name Description

DESCRIPTION
Enter the five-character identifier for the desired audit trail reason code. Make it as descriptive as possible. Enter up to 30 characters to describe the desired code. This description will be displayed with the code when the code list is opened.

Machine Status Codes

The machine status codes are used to identify the reason for the status state of a machine or piece
Kronos Incorporated Page 109 of 613

of equipment. If the status of the machine is either Hold or Suspend, the machine cannot be assigned to a work order. This field helps the user by assigning a reason for the hold or suspend. A code can be defined any way the user desires. When the Machine Status Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. The fields in the Machine Status Code file are explained below:

FIELD
Code name Description

DESCRIPTION
Use up to five characters to identify the machine status code. It should be as descriptive as possible. Use up to 30 characters to expand on the description of the machine status code. It will be displayed when the list of codes is opened.

General Reason Codes These codes are used as explanations for a variety of occurrences in the system. These are generally not changed by the user, although you are free to do so. These are found in the transactions as default values for the reason codes. This type of code contains only a description and type. For example, codes are in the system for NOIN and NOOUT. These codes are used for "Employee forgot to clock in" and "Employee forgot to clock out". When the General Reason Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc.
Kronos Incorporated Page 110 of 613

Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. You can create other codes, using the fields below:

FIELD
Code name Description

DESCRIPTION
Use up to five characters to identify the reason code. Be as descriptive as possible. Use up to 30 characters to describe the reason code. This will be displayed with the code name when the code list is opened.

Scrap Codes
Scrap Codes are used to classify reasons for scrapping parts. These codes are used in the Scrap Detail Report to categorize scrapped totals. When the Scrap Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. The fields in the Scrap Codes file are explained below:

FIELD
Code name Description

DESCRIPTION
Enter the five-character identifier for the desired scrap code. Make it as descriptive as possible. Enter up to 30 characters to describe the desired code. This description will be displayed with the code when the code list is opened.

Customer Status Codes

The customer status code is used to identify work in progress from the customer perspective. Status codes included with the ShopTrac Pro system are C=Complete and I=Incomplete, but codes can be added that fit the need of your company. This could categorize companies as active or inactive, prospects with proposals in process or customer with suspended accounts. The Customer Status Code appears on most work order reports.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 111 of 613

When the Customer Status Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. This option contains the following fields:

FIELD
Code name Description

DESCRIPTION
Use up to five characters to identify the status code. It should be as descriptive as possible. Use up to 30 characters to expand on the description of the status code. It will be displayed when the list of codes are opened.

Automatic Deduction Override Codes

The Automatic Deduction Override code is used when an employee is authorized to work through a meal or break set up to be automatically deducted. This code will be entered in the Time/Labor Editor when a manual adjustment is made to the employee's time record. Once this adjustment is made, the employee's time during that period will be added to their labor record. The code defined here labels the reason for the override.

FIELD
Code name Description

DESCRIPTION
Use up to five characters to identify the override code. It should be as descriptive as possible. Use up to 30 characters to expand on the description of the override code. It will be displayed when the list of codes are opened.

Work Order Status Codes

When a work order is given a status of Canceled or Hold, this Work Order Status Code is used to identify the reason. This code may be used to denote whatever state the user desires. The code can be entered into the work order file or through a transaction. Once entered, employees who attempt to log onto an affected job will receive a message as to the status of the work order. The code will appear on some work order reports.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 112 of 613

When the Work Order Status Codes option is selected, a list of all existing codes is displayed. To change a Code: To change a specific record, highlight the record and right-click. Select 'New' to create a new record, 'Edit' to modify an existing record's information, 'Copy' to duplicate all information and edit specific fields to create a new code, or 'Delete' to erase record from the file. The Delete function will always ask for confirmation of the erasure. Complete your additions, changes, etc. Be sure to click Save to save a new or revised record, or click Cancel to exit without saving. The fields in the Work Order Status Codes file are listed and explained below:

FIELD
Code name Description

DESCRIPTION
Use up to five characters to identify the status code. It should be as descriptive as possible. Use up to 30 characters to expand on the description of the status code. It will be displayed when the list of codes are opened.

FLAGS
A one-character code that can be used for queries, listings, etc. Used to identify a variety of categories and types of employees, schedules, and jobs for screen and printed reports. For more information about flag types, select the desired flag type from list below: Customer Types - set up customer types, which are used in Labor/WIP/Customer option. Daily Schedule Types - set up daily schedule types, which are used in work schedule files. Date Range Types - set up date range types, which are used in Work Schedule/Date Range option. Employee Access Types - set up employee access types, which are used in Employee files. Job Class Types - set up job class types, which are used in Job Class Code files. Labor Code Types - set up labor code types, which are used in Labor Code files. Machine Types - set up machine types, which are used in work-in-process Machine files. Operation Types - set up operation types, which are used in Work Order/Operations files. Part Number Types - set up part number types, which are used in Part Number files. Pay Rule Profile Types - set up pay rule profile types, which are used when defining Pay Rule Profile files.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 113 of 613

Rate Class Types - set up rate class types, which are used in reports for sorting. Schedule Characters - set up schedule characters, which are used with Absence Codes. Shift Types - set up shift types, which are used in Shift files. Team Types - set up team types, which are used in work-in-process Team files. Transaction Types - set up transaction types, which are used in Device Transactions. Work Center Types - set up work center types, which are used when defining Work Centers. Work Order Types - set up work order types, which are used when defining Work Orders. Work Schedule Types - set up work schedule types, which are used when defining Work Schedules. To access the Flags menu, select Setup from the Main Menu and then click on the Flags option. To add a flag, select a flag type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, right-click on the list. Select New from the options on the drop-down menu. Complete the fields according to the explanations found in the help section for each flag type and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To edit a flag, select a flag type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to edit and click Enter or right-click with your mouse and select Edit from the option list. Make the desired changes and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To copy a flag, select a flag type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to copy, right-click with your mouse and select Copy from the option list. Make any desired alterations and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To delete a flag, select a flag type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to delete and right click with your mouse. Select Delete from the option list. The system will prompt for a confirmation of the deletion. Click Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting.

Daily Schedule Types

A one-character code that can be used for queries, listings, and sorting for reports. Can be used to define employee groups (e.g., Administrative) or labor classifications (e.g., Inspection). New Daily Schedule Types can be entered or existing types edited by accessing the Setup option from the main menu, then selecting Flags. Daily Schedule Types can be selected from the menu tree. The Daily Schedule Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a daily schedule type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 114 of 613

Value Description

A one-character code used to identify the daily schedule type. A 30-character field used to further explain the daily schedule type.

Daily Schedule Types are included in the Work Schedule file on each daily schedule.

Customer Types
A one-character code that identifies customer types for report and work order file sorting. Typically, customer types could include Active, Inactive, Prospect, Cash only, Credit, or any other designation you need. The Customer Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a customer type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the customer type. A 30-character field used to further explain the customer type.

Customers can be added to ShopTrac Pro by selecting Setup then Labor/WIP. Click on the Customers option and a list of existing customers is displayed. The Customer Type created here can be added to the customer file by selecting the desired code from the drop-down list in the Type field on the Customer screen.

Date Range Types

A one-character code that is defined by the user to link to a date range, such as Weekly, Daily, Monthly. Used to sort records for reports. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu then Flags. Select Date Range Types from the menu tree. The Date Range Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a date range type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the date range type. A 30-character field used to further explain the date range type.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 115 of 613

Employee Access Types

A one-character code that is defined by the user to indicate an employee security access type. Predefined types are set for A (Supervisor), B (Lead Person), and N (No Special Access). New types can be added by selecting Setup on the main menu, then Flags. Select Employee Access Types from the menu tree. The Employee Access Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as an employee access type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the employee access type. A 30-character field used to further explain the employee access type.

You can add as many new access types as desired, however only a maximum of five can be used when defining a transaction. All access types have access to the N type (No Special Access), however, other types, predefined or newly defined, have access only to transactions that carry their specific access type flag. For example, an employee with a B access type can only access transactions defined as a type B or a type N. An employee with an A access type would not be able to access the B accessed transaction. The Employee Access Type is used in the Employee record.

Job Class Types

A one-character code that is defined by the user to indicate a job class, such as Apprentice, Supervisor, Assembler, etc. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Job Class Types from the menu tree. The Job Class Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a job class type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the job class type. A 30-character field used to further explain the job class type

Labor Code Types

Kronos Incorporated Page 116 of 613

A one-character code defined by the user to link with Labor Codes that are entered in the Employee file, such as E = Exempt, H = Hourly, P = Part time. The labor code type is used to sort records for listings and to search for barcode printing. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Labor Code Types from the menu tree. The Labor Code Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a labor code type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the labor code type. A 30-character field used to further explain the labor code type.

Machine Types
A one-character code defined by the user to link with shop floor machines. The machine type is used to sort records for listings and to search for barcode printing. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Machine Types from the menu tree. The Machine Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a machine type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the machine type. A 30-character field used to further explain the machine type.

Operation Types
Operations are the individual steps or details of the work order. For example, the job may be to attach two parts of a door together and the operational steps for this might be drilling, attaching and finishing. Operation Types are single-character codes linked to those steps or details, for list sorting or for reports. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Operation Types from the menu tree. The Operation Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as an operation type.
Page 117 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Field Value Description

This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the operation type. A 30-character field used to further explain the operation type.

Part Number Types

A Part Number Type is a single character that is linked to a component part number. For instance, the part may be a metal screw, part number X05. The Part Number Type may be S (screw) or M (metal). The part number type is used to sort for reports or listings. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Part Number Types from the menu tree. The Part Number Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a part number type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the part number type. A 30-character field used to further explain the part number type.

Pay Rule Profile Types

A Pay Rule may require that employees are paid straight time for all hours worked during the week that total 40 or less. A Pay Rule Profile defines a specific list of requirements that qualify employees to be eligible for a pay rate. For instance, a Pay Rule Profile may combine the 40hour rule with one that exempts the rule during weeks with holidays. A Pay Rule Profile Type is a single character code that is linked to the profile for purposes of sorting for reports or listings. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Pay Rule Profile Types from the menu tree. The Pay Rule Profile Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a pay rule profile type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the pay rule profile

Kronos Incorporated

Page 118 of 613

type. Description A 30-character field used to further explain the pay rule profile type.

Rate Class Types

A one-character code that is defined by the user to indicate a rate class type, such as Exempt, Hourly, etc. New types can be added through the Data Entry Files/Flags/Rate Class Types screen. The type code is used by the system to sort for reports or listings. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Rate Class Types from the menu tree. The Pay Rule Profile Type screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a pay rule profile type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the pay rule profile type. A 30-character field used to further explain the pay rule profile type.

Schedule Characters
Schedule Characters are linked with Absence Codes to be used by the system in sorting for reports and listings. For example, a Bereavement absence code may have a schedule character of B. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Schedule Characters from the menu tree. The Schedule Characters screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a schedule characters type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the schedule characters type. A 30-character field used to further explain the schedule characters type.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 119 of 613

Shift Types
A one-character code that is linked to defined Shift categories. The shift type is used by the system to sort for reports or for listings. The Shift Type is set up in the Flags menu and then entered in the Shift file. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Shift Types from the menu tree. The Shift Types screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a shift type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the shift type. A 30-character field used to further explain the shift type.

Team Types
A one-character code that is linked to defined Teams categories. The shift type is used by the system to sort for reports or for listings. The Team Types is set up in the Flags menu and then entered in the Teams file. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Team Types from the menu tree. The Shift Types screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a team type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the team type. A 30-character field used to further explain the team type.

Transaction Types
One-character codes that are linked to transactions completed at a terminal or clock. Used to sort records for reports or for listings. Transaction types are set up in this Flags file and then entered into the transactions files, using the Transactions option on the Device Configuration menu. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Transaction Types from the menu tree.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 120 of 613

The Transaction Types screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a transaction type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the transaction type. A 30-character field used to further explain the transaction type.

Work Center Types

The Work Center file establishes hubs of work activity within a company. Once the centers are defined, employees can be assigned to home work centers. Work centers can also be associated with work orders. Employees can change to a temporary work center using the Daily Change transaction. The Work Center Type is a single-character code defining the work center type. This field is user-defined; no values are given. This field is optional. Examples of work center types are Milling, Assembly, Welding, Engineering, etc. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Work Center Types from the menu tree. The Work Center Types screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a work center type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the work center type. A 30-character field used to further explain the work center type.

Work Order Types

A single-character code that is linked to defined Work Orders. The work order type is used by the system to sort for reports or for listings. The Work Order Type is set up here and then entered into the work order file. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Work Order Types from the menu tree. The Work Order Types screen includes the following fields:
Kronos Incorporated Page 121 of 613

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a work order type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the work order type. A 30-character field used to further explain the work order type.

Work Schedule Types

A Work Schedule is an overview of different shifts on different days that repeat in time cycles. Although a Shift file defines each unique schedule worked by employees, the Work Schedule lists data about every shift. A Work Schedule is made up of the number of days in the shift, the shift description, beginning and ending times, length, non-scheduled days, whether the day is scheduled or not, pay scales based on straight, double, or overtime, etc. Work Schedule Type is a single-character user-defined field linked to Work Schedules and used for queries, listings, reports, etc. Examples of work schedule types are Administrative, Supervisory, Inspection, etc. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Flags. Select Work Schedule Types from the menu tree. The Work Schedule Types screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a work schedule type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the work schedule type. A 30-character field used to further explain the work schedule type.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 122 of 613

HOURS ALLOCATION RULES

Hours Allocation allows the transfer the accumulated labor records into Hours records where, for payroll purposes, it is calculated according to a Pay Category code. Pay Category code examples are STRAIGHT, OVERTIME, DOUBLETIME, and ABSENCE. (See Hours Categories for a complete list.) This is done by the application of pay rules that examine the characteristics of the hours being processed to determine what rule to apply. You can define different rules for different situations. Set up the pay categories, profiles and scales in this section of ShopTrac Pro. Included in the Hours Allocation Rules menu is: Consecutive Day Scale Daily Schedule Scale Day of Week Scale Pay Categories Pay Rule Profiles Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale Hours Allocation provides a great deal of flexibility in deciding how time is allocated in your facility. If your rules are simple, you can be able to use the Hours Allocation default settings with very little or no modification. The ShopTrac Pro system can handle more complex rules, if that is required to build your data files. As employees perform transactions, the system looks at the various characteristics of the worked hours, attempts to find a Pay Rule that matches, and allocates them accordingly. It searches for these Pay Rules in a list called Pay Rule Profile, always searching from the highest level of detail to the lowest. Also considered are the special pay scales that are set up for consecutive days, day of the week, daily schedule and work order absence situations. This ensures that the most specific match for your particular rule is found. Once the system finds a match, it uses the information to create the Hours records for the time allocated.
Hours Allocation Issues

Configuring this part of the software requires a thorough understanding of your payroll policies and procedures. There are several aspects that need to be addressed in the configuration of hours allocation. If needed, consult your company payroll experts to answer questions concerning the following: Five unique factors can affect how hours are allocated. One-character fields available in various files represent the pay scales. These factors are: Work order or absence code Labor record type Consecutive day Daily Schedule Day of the week

Any of these can control how hours are allocated in a companys operation.
Kronos Incorporated Page 123 of 613

If you use more than one of these factors, then you need to decide which one is more important. You can use all of them, but a priority must be assigned to each one. Combine these factors into Pay Rules that describe special situations, such as, an absence labor record (Labor record type) occurring on a Sunday (day of the week) will receive a particular pay code. Do you foresee any special type of combinations in your operation? What kind of data or pay code will your payroll export expect to see associated with the hours? The system is capable of assigning two different pay codes to the same set of hours. This is usually done when you want to allocate the same hours to two different categories. Is this something you are likely to do? Pay rules are combined to create pay rule profiles. These are associated with a shift or a premium zone within a shift. Pay rule profiles are used when different sets of pay rules apply during different times. The system has nine categories of time that you can track. Assign these nine categories to different pay codes based on the pay rule. (See Hours Categories.) You must consider what pay codes you want associated with each category. For each of these nine categories, you need to decide what category counts toward the next category. For example, does daily overtime count toward the period overtime?

Configuring Hours Allocation Rules

To access the Hours Allocation Rules menu, select Setup from the Main Menu and then click on the Hours Allocation Rules option. To add a rule, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, right-click on the list. Select New from the options on the drop-down menu. Complete the fields according to the explanations found in the help section for each type and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To edit a rule, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to edit and click Enter or right-click with your mouse and select Edit from the option list. Make the desired changes and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To copy a rule, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to copy, right-click with your mouse and select Copy from the option list. Make any desired alterations and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To delete a rule, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to delete and right click with your mouse. Select Delete from the option list. The system will prompt for a confirmation of the deletion. Click Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 124 of 613

Consecutive Day Scale

Consecutive Day pay scales refer to a different rate of pay, based on the number of days of consecutive work periods. These scales are set by the user to be applied when an employee works the prescribed number of consecutive days. The Consecutive Day Scale Type uses a one-character value or code that can be used for queries, listings, and sorting for reports. This code will be linked to the Consecutive Day Scale (e.g., S=Seventh Day Pay, T=Tenth Day Pay) in the Work Schedule file. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Hours Allocation Rules. Select Consecutive Day Scale Types from the menu tree. The Consecutive Day Scale Types screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a consecutive day scale type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the consecutive day scale type. A 30-character field used to further explain the consecutive day scale type.

Daily Schedule Scale

Daily Schedule pay scales refer to a different rate of pay for a specific day in the employee's work schedule. These scales are set by the user to be applied when an employee works on that specific day. The Daily Schedule Scale Type uses a one-character value or code that can be used for queries, listings, and sorting for reports. This code will be linked to the Daily Schedule Scale (e.g., W=Week Day Pay, E=Weekend Day Pay) of the Work Schedule. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Hours Allocation Rules. Select Daily Schedule Scale Types from the menu tree. The Daily Schedule Scale Types screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a daily schedule scale type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the daily schedule scale type. A 30-character field used to further explain the daily h d l l
Page 125 of 613

schedule scale type. Daily Schedule Scale Types are used in the Work Schedule file.

Day of Week Scale

Day of Week pay scales refer to a different rate of pay for a specific day of the week, regardless of the employee's work schedule. These scales are set by the user to be applied when an employee works on that specific day. The Day of Week Scale Type uses a one-character value or code that can be used for queries, listings, and sorting for reports. This code will be linked to the Day of Week Scale (e.g., S=Saturday Pay, M=Monday Pay) in the Work Schedule. New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Hours Allocation Rules. Select Day of Week Scale Types from the menu tree. The Day of Week Scale Types screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a day of week scale type. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the day of week scale type. A 30-character field used to further explain the day of week scale type.

Day of Week Scale Types are used in the Work Schedule file.

Pay Categories
The ShopTrac Pro system supports various categories of hours. These include "straight time", "overtime", and "double time". However the ShopTrac Pro system expands these basic categories and provides for them to be used in combination to track both daily and period hours. These categories of hours are associated with Pay Category codes in the LHours file. The same Pay Category code may be assigned to more than one of the various hours categories. In order to understand these hours categories, it is necessary to understand the concept of "daily" and "period" limits. As an employee works and accumulates hours, they may be classified differently depending on how many hours the employee has accumulated. Setting Pay Category Codes These are the fundamental pieces of the ShopTrac Pro system. As hours are allocated to various work orders or absence codes, they are further detailed in a separate file called the "LHours" (Labor Hours) file. Each LHours record has a single code and number of hours associated with it. There may be several LHours records for each Labor record, or there may be only one. In fact the use of Pay Categories and the LHours file is optional. For more information, see LHours
Kronos Incorporated Page 126 of 613

Files. You will need to define Pay Category codes if you are using the LHours file to store detail of the hours breakdown. This is typically used in payroll situations where the hours are paid at a certain rate, depending on the code. You may have all hours credited to a single code or to several codes depending on your requirements. This is typically used in conjunction with an external payroll application. You should know the requirements of the external application. The ShopTrac Pro system also uses Pay Category codes to determine where hours belong on its four-column reports. This is also part of the Pay Category codes record. For more information, see Reports. The Pay Category Codes screen includes the fields below:

FIELD
Pay category Type

DESCRIPTION
This is the Pay Category code. It must be unique. Uses up to 10 characters, alphanumeric. Alphanumeric, one character, optional field. This is a user-definable field intended for queries and other miscellaneous uses. Alphanumeric, 30 characters, optional field. This is the description of the Pay Category code. It appears on several screens and reports. The order the Pay Categories will be listed when multiple ones are found. Used to override the default alphabetic settings. Optional field. Alphanumeric, one character, optional field. This is the operator for the Rate Premium associated with this Pay Code. Pay Code Rate Premiums are applied when hours are stored in the LHours file. Pay Code Rate Premiums are applied to specific times, and applied to a pay code when an employee works during those premium times. The valid entries are: * + < = > Multiply Rate Add to Rate Subtract to Rate Main Current rate vs. Rate Calculated Set (Replaces with current rate) Max Current rate vs. Rate Calculated

Description

Display order

Rate operator

Rate calculator

Numeric, two digits plus two decimal places, optional field. This field is used with Rate Operator, above, to determine the Rate Premium for this Pay Code. Certain reports include four columns of pay data. The
Page 127 of 613

Display as Part of
Kronos Incorporated

Which Columns on Four-Column reports

titles of these columns can be user-defined (e.g., Regular, OT/DT, Total, Special) and the hours contained in each column can be specified. Indicate by checking the box next to each of the data columns, which ones you wish to include on reports related to each pay category. Leaving the box blank will omit that column from the reports.

Hours Categories In all, there are nine categories available. As hours are allocated into these categories, they are assigned codes to describe the hours. All hours in the system fall into one of these nine categories. The hours may then be associated with Pay Categories. The nine hours categories are listed below with their common abbreviations in parenthesis. These categories are set by the system and cannot be added to or changed. Straight Time (ST) Daily Overtime (DOT) Daily Double Time (DDT) Period Overtime (POT) Period Double Time (PDT) Daily Overtime and Period Overtime (DOT + POT) Daily Double Time and Period Overtime (DDT + POT) Daily Overtime and Period Double Time (DOT + PDT) Daily Double Time and Period Double Time (DDT + PDT) This represents hours that have not crossed any of the daily or period overtime limits. These are hours the employee accumulated beyond the daily overtime limit, but below either of the period limits. These are hours the employee accumulated beyond the daily double time limit, but below either of the period limits. These are hours the employee accumulated beyond the period overtime limit, but below either of the daily limits. These are hours the employee accumulated beyond the period double time limit, but below either of the daily limits. These are hours that the employee accumulated beyond both the daily and period overtime limits, but below either of the daily or period double time limits. These are hours that the employee accumulated that were beyond the daily double time and period overtime limit, but below the period double time limit. These are hours that the employee accumulated beyond both the daily overtime and period double time limits, but below either daily double time limit. These are hours that the employee accumulated that were beyond both the daily and period double time limits.

As you accumulate hours in each category, you determine whether or not those hours count towards the next level. This is explained more fully in Pay Rules where hours categories are
Kronos Incorporated Page 128 of 613

used in examples.

Pay Rules
Pay Rules is a concept of the ShopTrac Pro system that allows the user to categorize the hours that are spent on various tasks. The flexibility of this concept allows for very complex customer situations to be handled. Pay Rules uses the hours associated with labor records to further classify those hours into hours records that contain a quantity of hours and an associated Pay Category code. These can be used to classify straight time, overtime, etc. Pay Rules are based on the different factors you have chosen to use in your facility. If you have determined that only the Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scales and Labor Type are the determining factors in your facility, then you will only be dealing with these two factors. Pay Rules are arranged into Pay Rule Profiles. A Profile may contain one or several different Pay Rules. It can be very simple, or as elaborate as needed to meet your needs. Pay Rules combine Labor Type and/or Pay Scales, and the nine Hours Categories together to determine what Pay Category code to use in a given situation. The combination of Pay Rules into Profiles then allows the user to specify when a particular Pay Rule Profile is used; be it for a certain shift or Premium Zone within a shift. The system has logic that determines how the available Pay Rules are searched. In a general sense, the system searches Pay Rules from the most specific rule to the least specific rule. This searching logic allows you to define a basic rule that applies to most situations in your facility. It also allows you to define more specific rules for situations that require special Pay Category codes. Pay Rules are best explained by a few simple examples. Example 1 The chart below is a representation of a single Pay Rule. On the top row, the two columns on the left are the Labor Type/Pay Scales. This example uses the Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale and the Labor Type. The nine columns on the right represent the nine hours categories explained in Pay Categories. On the bottom row, the dash (-) indicates that any Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale and any Labor Type would use the Pay Category codes found in the remaining columns. -------------------------------------------Hours Categories-------------------------------------------W/O Labor ST Absn Type Code --DOT DDT POT PDT DOT DOT DDT DDT + + + + POT PDT POT PDT

REG OVT DBLT OVT DBLT OVT DBLT DBLT DBLT

Notice that the same code is used for several different categories. It is also acceptable to use unique codes for each category. The codes required depend on the requirements of your payroll system. In the example, the DBLT Pay Category code is used anytime there is either "period" or "daily" double time involved.
Kronos Incorporated Page 129 of 613

When the system is allocating hours, it analyzes Pay Rules in the Pay Rule Profiles to determine how the hours should be allocated. If this were the only rule in the profile, all hours would be allocated to the codes shown above. If there were a more specific rule, it would be used if the characteristics matched those of the hours being allocated. Example 2 Here a more specific Pay Rule has been added. It involves a labor type of A, which is assigned to an absence. It also involves a Work Order/ Absence Code with a Pay Scale of P. The P could stand for a "Paid" absence such as vacation time. This combination of factors tells the system that all hours, no matter what hours category they fall in will be allocated to the Pay Category code of PABS (Paid Absence). ----------------------------------------Hours Categories-------------------------------------------W/O Labor ST Absn Type Code P -Example 3 In this example, a Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale of N to is added to represent a Non-paid absence. Once again the Labor Type is A for an Absence code. In this instance, the hours are all allocated to a Pay Category code of NP (Not Paid). ---------------------------------------Hours Categories--------------------------------------------W/O Labor ST Absn Type Code N P -A A -NP DOT DDT POT PDT DOT DOT DDT DDT + + + + POT PDT POT PDT NP NP NP NP A -DOT DDT POT PDT DOT DOT DDT DDT + + + + POT PDT POT PDT

PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS REG OVT DBLT OVT DBLT OVT DBLT DBLT DBLT

NP

NP

NP

NP

PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS PABS REG OVT DBLT OVT DBLT OVT DBLT DBLT DBLT

In each of the above examples the Pay Category codes would need to be created, as would the Pay Scales, the individual Pay Rules, and the Pay Rule Profile. Any external systems receiving this information would also need to be aware of the meaning of these codes, and attach the appropriate rate calculations to them. The Pay Rule on the last line in the chart is called a basic rule. It applies in all instances when a more specific Pay Rule does not apply. The other two rules are specific rules set up for specific situations. NOTE: Whenever Pay Rules are edited; the configuration check should be run to verify that no Pay Rules conflict with one another. Processes affected by changes in the Pay Rules must be rerun to accommodate the changes. For the most comprehensive updating, use the Nightly Batch
Kronos Incorporated Page 130 of 613

function on the Utilities menu option. Counting Towards Limits, Examples The four limits that hours can count towards are: Daily Overtime (DOT) Daily Double Time (DDT) Period Overtime (POT) Period Double Time (PDT)

Daily Overtime limits must be satisfied before Daily Double Time limits can be met. Likewise, Period Overtime limits must be met before Period Double Time hours are allocated. However, these limits may be met concurrently. The same rule applies to period limits. Therefore each hours category can only count towards certain limits. Example 1 Consider the case where daily limits are set at 8 hours for overtime and 10 hours for double time, and the period limits are set at 40 hours in a week for overtime and 50 hours in a week for double time. If an employee works 10 hours per day for four days, he or she accumulates 32 straight time (ST) hours and 8 overtime hours (DOT) based on the daily limits. What happens when the employee works 8 hours on the fifth day? Have the 8 hours of overtime accumulated over the four previous days counted towards the period limit of 40 hours? If the answer is no, then the 8 hours worked on the fifth day would not cross the 40 hour period limit and therefore be classified as straight time (ST). This is a typical policy that only daily straight time hours count towards the period limits. If the answer is yes, then the 8 hours worked on the fifth day would cross the 40-hour period limit and therefore be classified as period overtime (POT). Example 2 There may also be differences when absence time is involved. Certain types of absences may count towards daily or period limits while others may not. This again is a matter of company policy. Vacation time may count towards daily or period limits whereas sick leave may not count towards those same limits, even though both are paid leaves. The ShopTrac Pro system gives you the flexibility to handle each situation separately, determining which hours category counts toward other hours categories.

Additive Rules The system can be configured to apply more than one Pay Rule, allocating the same hours to multiple Pay Categories. The original rule found through the process described above is the "main" Pay Rule, other Pay Rules to be applied are called "additive" Pay Rules. Additive rules allocate hours to Pay Category codes, in addition to the Pay Category codes mandated by the main Pay Rule. This is an option that allows users to accumulate the same hours associated with more than one code. This is sometimes helpful for reporting purposes.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 131 of 613

Example You have been asked to determine how many overtime hours are being paid on the weekends. It is possible to configure an Additive Pay Rule to allocate those hours to a special code for reporting purposes. This code is disregarded by an external payroll system, so the employee is not paid twice for the same work. The hours would not count towards any of the limits in the system, nor would they appear on most reports.

Pay Rule Profiles

Pay Rules are defined as a part of the Pay Rules Profile. If you have configured your system to use only some of the pay rule factors (see Pay Rule Factor Configuration), only those used will be displayed. This kind of data entry screen is called a "parent-child" screen. The Pay Rule Profile is the parent and the individual Pay Rules are the children. The only way to define individual Pay Rules is to define them as part of the Pay Rule Profile parent. The fields that are a part of the Pay Rule Profile screen are:

FIELD
Name Type

DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric, up to 10 characters, a required field. This is the name of the profile. Alphanumeric, one character, an optional field. This is a user-definable field intended for queries and other miscellaneous uses. Alphanumeric, up to 30 characters, an optional field. This describes the profile.

Description

To add a new pay rule, click New on the bottom of the profile screen. To edit an existing pay rule, highlight the rule to change and click Edit. To copy an existing pay rule, highlight the rule to copy and click Copy. To delete an existing pay rule, highlight the rule to erase and click Delete. (A request for confirmation is displayed.) When New, Edit or Copy is selected, a second set of screens is displayed. The fields on those screens include the following: Profile name ID (in upper-right corner of screen) This is the name of the profile, carried over from the previous window. It cannot be changed. Each Pay Rule is assigned a unique identifier. This identifier is automatically set by the system and the user may not edit this value. A unique identifier is needed because several additive Pay Rules could share the same factor configuration, necessitating some other way to uniquely identify each Pay Rule.

The data to make edits is contained on two tabbed screens, Pay Rule and Hours Level and Pay Category. These fields are described below:

Kronos Incorporated

Page 132 of 613

Pay Rule Tab

FIELD
Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale

DESCRIPTION
Alphanumeric, one character, an optional field. Factor used to determine which pay rule applies. Values can be assigned for these factors to show that certain work orders or absence codes are to be considered differently when determining which Pay Rules to use. Pay Scales must be defined before this screen is used. A dash symbol (-) means any value is acceptable. Alphanumeric, one character, a required field. These types are set by the system and cannot be altered or added to. See Labor Types for more details. Alphanumeric, one character, an optional field. Factor used to determine which pay rule applies. Refers to the number of days employees have worked consecutively in a schedule. Pay Scales must be defined before this screen is used. A dash symbol (-) means any value is acceptable. Alphanumeric, one character, an optional field. Factor used to determine which pay rule applies. Refers to the number of the day in the employee's schedule. Pay Scales must be defined before this screen is used. A dash symbol (-) means any value is acceptable. Alphanumeric, one character, an optional field. Factor used to determine which pay rule applies. Refers to a specific day of the week, e.g. Saturday. Pay Scales must be defined before this screen is used. A dash symbol (-) means any value is acceptable. Alphanumeric, up to 30 characters, an optional field. This describes the pay rule. It is output on the printed Pay Rule Profile Listing. Alphanumeric, one character, a required field. This field defines whether this is a Main Rule or an Additive Rule. The valid entries are: Y Apply this rule in addition to any Main Rule. See Additive Rules. M Use this as the Main Rule, it is used in most instances. A Main Rule must be defined before any Additive Rules can be defined. P Use this in addition to the Profile Rules.

Labor Type

Consecutive Day Pay Scale

Daily Schedule Pay Scale

Day of Week Pay Scale

Description

Apply Rule

Override More General Levels

Kronos Incorporated

Check the box next to this field if the rule on the same line should take precedence over more specific rules at
Page 133 of 613

General Levels

more general levels. Leave the box blank if the rule should not take precedence over more specific rules at more general levels. See Pay Rules for further information. This field indicates whether or not this rule should be given precedence when processing the hours allocation algorithm. If selected, this rule will be processed before other rules not marked as taking precedence when allocating hours for a given period.

Precedence

Hours Level and Pay Category Tab

FIELD
Category:

DESCRIPTION
Used to specify which Pay Categories are used for the nine hour-breakdown levels. These levels include: Straight time Daily overtime Daily doubletime Period overtime Period doubletime Daily OT + Period OT Daily DT + Period OT Daily OT + Period DT Daily OT + Period DT Any Pay Category may be entered for any level, and any level may be left blank. If a level is left blank, hours in that category, allocated under this rule, will not be recorded in the LHours file. Once the Pay Category is selected, a description of that category is displayed to the right of the category field.

Counts Toward

The Counts Toward columns have the four possible applications: Daily OT or DT, Period OT or DT. Check the box under each applicable field. In those cases where the combinations do not apply, leave the box clear. These options are available only if a Pay Category code has been entered.

Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale

Every Labor record includes a Work Order or Absence Code, never both. Both have associated pay scales. These scales are set by the user to be applied when an employee works on a specified Work Order or is reported Absent.
Kronos Incorporated Page 134 of 613

The Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale uses a one-character value or code that can be used for queries, listings, and sorting for reports. This code will be linked to the Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale (e.g., P=Priority Work Order, A=Paid Absence). New types can be added by selecting Setup from the main menu, then Hours Allocation Rules. Select Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale from the menu tree. The Work Order/Absence Code Pay Scale Types screen includes the following fields:

FIELD
File Field Value Description

DESCRIPTION
This is a system-controlled field that identifies the flag as a work order or absence code pay scale. This is a system-controlled field that identifies the entry as a flag. A one-character code used to identify the work order or absence code pay scale type. A 30-character field used to further explain the work order or absence code pay scale.

Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scales are used in the Work Schedule file.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 135 of 613

DEFAULT TRANSACTION CODE TABLE

There are 110 default transaction codes included in the ShopTrac Pro system. Additional codes can be defined by the user, using the Device Configuration > Transactions option. Existing transactions can also be changed, including these system prompts. The system transaction codes include the following:

TRX CODE
ABS ACT BKP BKS CJB CLI CLR CQV DCH DLO FDA ILE ILO INL INN INP IOP IRO LFI LF2 LIN LJ1 LJ2 LJ3 LJ5 LOF

DESCRIPTION
Schedule Absence Day Activate Work Order Stop Break Start Break Cancel Work Order Clear Individual Schedule Fields Clear Schedule Change Quantity Validation Daily Change Delete Operation Record Full-Day Absence Stop Indirect Work Order Start Indirect Work Order Inspection Clock In Inspection Insert Operation Insert Rework Operation Timecard Entry - single job entry, no date/time. Timecard Entry - multiple job entry, date/time requested. Lunch clock In End of Day Log Job Log Job - Start Log Job - Stop Log Day - multiple job entry, date/time requested Stop Work Order

Kronos Incorporated

Page 136 of 613

LON LOQ LOT LQ1 MCH MOF MON MOV MPO MRL MRS MSH MSP MST MSU MTO OAJ OAO ODC ODO ODV OFF OIO OON OTA OUT OV1 OV2 OV3 OVC PDA PZA

Start Work Order Log Quantity and Scrap Lunch Clock Out Log Quantity Machine Data Change Stop Work Order and Machine Start Work Order and Machine Quantity Move Machine Stop Only Release Machine Machine Resume Hold Machine Machine Stop Machine Start Machine Suspend Machine Start Only Log Off All Jobs Log Off All Jobs and Clock Out Operation Data Change Log Off Direct Work Order and Clock Out Operation Data Change Stop Work Order (Labor only) Log Off Indirect Work Order and Clock Out Log Off All Jobs, Start New Work Order Overtime Authorization Clock Out Override Next Meal or Break Override all Meals and Breaks Override Specific Meal or Break Clear Remaining Overrides Record Partial Day Absence Authorize Premium Zone

Kronos Incorporated

Page 137 of 613

QCF QCF QL1 QL2 QT1 QT2 QT3 QT4 QVO QW1 QW2 QW3 QW4 RBK REV ROP ROV RWO SAJ SAO SDC SDO SIO SOF STE STF STI STL STN STO TC5 TCH

Stop Work Order - Enter Quality Control Data Stop Work Order - Enter Quality Control Data Query Open Jobs Query Open Jobs - Multiple Employee Current Day Query Employee Current Day Query - Multiple Supervisor Current Day Query Supervisor Current Day Query - Multiple Quantity Validation On/Off Work Order Query Work Order Query - Multiple Operation Query Operation Query - Multiple Record Break Revise Operation Schedule Open or Close Operation Restriction Override Open or Close Work Order Supervisor Log Off All Jobs Supervisor Log Off All Jobs and Clock Out Supervisor Daily Change Supervisor Log Off Direct Job and Clock Out Supervisor Log Off Indirect Job and Clock Out Supervisor Stop Work Order (Labor only) Supervisor Stop Indirect Work Order Supervisor Stop Work Order (Employee and Job) Supervisor Clock In Supervisor Start Work Order Supervisor Start Indirect Work Order Supervisor Clock Out Leave Team Join or Change Team

Kronos Incorporated

Page 138 of 613

TDF TM1 TM2 TM3 TM4 TM5 TM6 TM7 TMD TMP TMW TON TST TSW WDC WOH WOR WSC XHR

Join Default Team Team Start Indirect Work Order Team Start Work Order with Date and Time Team Stop Work Order with Date Team Stop Work Order with Quality Control Data Team Stop Work Order with Date and QC Data Team Stop Indirect Work Order Team Stop Indirect Work Order with Date Schedule Temporary Employees Schedule Temporary Shift Schedule Temporary Work Schedule Team Log Off All Jobs, Start New Work Order Team Stop Work Order Team Start Work Order Work Order Data Change Hold Work Order Release Work Order Work Order Status Code Change Record Extra Hours

To view the list of transactions along with mappings and prompts, select the Reports option on the main menu, and then select Lists. Select the Transactions option and enter the desired selection criteria to print a list of transactions with details on each.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 139 of 613

RECALCULATE HOURS
The Recalculate Hours process frees you from manually having to edit all the fields in the Editor. You only need to change the times, and the recalculation process performs all the math calculations and error checking. When the Recalculate button is clicked in the Time/labor Editor, the system scans time and labor records to produce a transaction list of in/out, start/stop times and checks the list for errors according to configuration selections. Errors are documented and automatically corrected, before recalculation proceeds. See Error Checking below for information on setting up the correction options. Once error-free, processing is completed. It recalculates all hours-related data in the time and labor records and regenerates the Hours records for the days processed.

FIELD
Users cannot change recalculation settings Recalculate on save

DESCRIPTION
Check this box if you do not want users to be able to make changes to any of the recalculation settings while working in the Time/Labor Editor. This option governs automatic recalculation when the user has completed employee changes. The options are: A - Automatic recalculation. When you leave the employee, the system automatically begins the Recalculate Hours routing, using the default dates. N - No automatic recalculation. The system does not do recalculation when you leave an employee. U - Ask user whether to recalculate or not. Select the range of dates to recalculate. The options for the From field are: B - Beginning of edit range D - Displayed reference date L - Latest reference date The options for the To field are D and L. Indicate the number of hours past the normal work period before the employee is eligible for Premium Zone rates. If the hours recorded are less than this number, the employee time will be considered for overtime rates, but not Premium Zone. Check this box if the user should be prompted for a date range when saving. Leave clear if the system should begin recalculating immediately, without giving the user the opportunity to change dates.

Default date range:

Hours past work period for full Premium Zone qualification Prompt for date range on manual recalculation

Kronos Incorporated

Page 140 of 613

Recalculate if latest day is still open

Check this box if recalculation should proceed even if the employee's latest day is still open. Leave clear to return an error if the latest day is not properly closed, e.g., no clock-out, open labor records. Check this box if recalculation should proceed even if a day before the employee's latest day is still open. Leave clear if the user should be alerted when a previous day is not properly closed, e.g., no clock-out, open labor records. Check this box if recalculation allows open labor records across clock-outs. Leave clear if the user should be alerted when an open labor record is found. Check this box to automatically correct errors, automatically marked for calculation that may exist after the user begins recalculations. After all marked errors are corrected, recalculation is automatically run again. This process repeats until recalculation succeeds or there are no other marked errors to correct. Leave this box clear if recalculation does not automatically correct any errors, marked or otherwise.

Recalculate if a previous day is still open

Allow mid-day clock-out with open labor Automatically Process Marked Corrections

Error Printing Option

This option determines whether a recalculation error list, including any corrections made, is printed before the list is processed. The options are: A - Automatically print. Each recalculation transaction list is printed automatically after it is compiled, whether errors were encountered or not. Printing occurs before any automatic corrections are made and, if there are no errors, before the transactions are processed. This option provides a record of all recalculation activity. B - Automatically print, errors only. Recalculation transaction lists that contain errors are printed automatically after being compiled. Printing occurs before errors are automatically corrected. This option provides a record of all automatically corrected errors. N - No automatic printing. No automatic action is taken in regard to printing the error list. The user may still print the list manually. U - Ask user. After recalculation begins, a print box come up, allowing the user to choose whether to print or not. Select where the printing option, chosen above, sends its output, the Printer or to an ASCII File.

Output to

Kronos Incorporated

Page 141 of 613

File mode

If File is selected in the Output to option above, this tells the system to either Append (add to the end of existing data) or Overwrite (replace existing data with new data) when transferring data to a file. By appending, old data is retained. By overwriting, old data is lost. If Printer is selected above, this field is not applicable. If File is selected in the Output to option above, this tells the system what to name the file. Take care that, if you want to retain old files, do not give this file the same name as an existing one. If Printer is selected above, this field is not applicable.

File name

Error Checking
While completing the recalculation process, the system tracks out-of-sequence events (errors) from Time and Labor records that were edited by the user. For example, if you change an employees clock-in to an hour later but do not adjust the Labor records to match, the system detects Labor activity before the employee is clocked in. When errors are detected, the system will perform the following actions, according to the options defined on this tab: Examine each error individually and select a correction. Once corrected, the system automatically processes the corrections and performs a recalculation. Move to the next employee, if appropriate.

NOTE: Correcting data in the system does not correct data that has already been exported from the ShopTrac Pro system to an external computer system. If this records data has been exported, a number appears in the Batch field. In that case, any corrections you make to a Time, Labor, or LHours record in the ShopTrac Pro system also has to be made in that external system. All selections on this screen can be MARKed by checking the box to the right of the selection. This means that the error correction will appear on the Error recap screen. Leave the box clear if you do not need to view the correction on the Error recap screen.

ERROR
Users cannot change error checking settings Gap

DEFAULT CORRECTION OPTION

Check this box if you do not want users to be able to make changes to any of the error checking settings while working in the Time/Labor Editor. This error occurs when no error record shows when you clocked in or out, or took a break. There are three options: A - Fill the gap with the default job. B - Move the labor stop time forward. C - Move the labor start time back.
Page 142 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Activity Before First Clock-in

This error occurs if an error record starts before a clockin. Events should reside only between clock-ins and clock-outs. There are two options: A - Move clock-in events back. B - Move all pre-clock-in events forward. This error occurs when a Labor record extends thorough an entire shift and neglects to record breaks or clock-ins or clock-outs. There are three possible corrections: A - Break labor records in two. B - Move labor start times forward. C - Move labor stop times back. This error occurs if you are recorded as absent for the day and clock out anyway, although you are on a regular shift. There are three possible corrections: A - Break labor records in two. B - Move labor start times forward. C - Move labor stop times back. This error occurs if you are recorded as absent for the day and clock in anyway. There are two possible corrections: A - Move labor start times forward. B - Move labor stop times back. This error occurs if you are working and clock in for the day record as absent while clocked in. There are two possible corrections: A - Move labor start times forward. B - Move period stop time back. This error occurs if you clock out before your shift has ended. The only correction for this error is to: A - Close Labor records at out time. This error occurs if an error record starts after a clockout. Events should reside only between clock-ins and clock-outs. There are two options: A - Move clock-out forward. B - Move post-clock-out back. This error occurs if you did not clock out at the end of the day. There are two possible corrections: A - Clock-out at last activity. B - Clock-out at shift end time. This error occurs if you did not clock out at the end of the day. There are two possible corrections: A - Close day at last activity.
Page 143 of 613

Mid-day out, open labor

Mid-day out, on DT (downtime) /M (meal) /B (break) /A (absence)

A (absence) /DT (downtime) started with open labor

Activity While On DT (downtime) /M (meal) /B (break) /A (absence) Out for day, open labor Activity after last out

Missing Clock-out

Day Left Open

Kronos Incorporated

B - Close day at shift end time.

WIP (Work In Progress) Adjustments DESCRIPTION FIELD

Users cannot change WIP adjustment settings Include quantities moved in WIP adjustments list Automatically mark all processable adjustments Automatically process marked adjustments Check this box if you do not want users to be able to make changes to any of the WIP adjustment settings while working in the Time/Labor Editor. Check this box if the all Quantities Moved should appear in the WIP Adjustments detail. Leave it clear if only the adjustments to Quantities Completed and Scrapped are displayed. Check this box if all entries, except No Update items, are marked for processing immediately when the browse is displayed. Leave clear if all entries are unmarked when the browse is displayed. This selection is only applicable if the Automatically mark all processable adjustments box above is checked. If checked, all WIP adjustments are processed automatically after the list is displayed, without any intervention required from the user. Leave clear if the adjustment is not processed automatically and must be manually processed. Check this box if, after all adjustments are processed, the user is returned to the main selection screens. Leave clear if the system should remain on the selected record after processing. This option determines whether a WIP list, including any changes made, is printed after changes are processed. The options are: A - Automatically print. Each WIP list is printed automatically after it is processed, whether changes were made or not. Printing occurs after changes are made and, if there are no errors, before the transactions are processed. This option provides a record of all WIP changes. N - No automatic printing. No automatic action is taken in regard to printing the WIP changes list. The user may still print the list manually. U - Ask user. After processing is complete, a print box come up, allowing the user to choose whether to print or not. Select where the printing option, chosen above, sends its output, the Printer or to a File.
Page 144 of 613

Automatically return to main screen after processing Printing Option

Output to

Kronos Incorporated

File mode

If File is selected in the Output to option above, this tells the system to either Append (add to the end of existing data) or Overwrite (replace existing data with new data) when transferring data to a file. By appending, old data is retained. By overwriting, old data is lost. If Printer is selected above, this field is not applicable. If File is selected in the Output to option above, this tells the system what to name the file. Take care that, if you want to retain old files, do not give this file the same name as an existing one. If Printer is selected above, this field is not applicable.

File name

After the settings have been entered, click Save to record the settings, or Cancel to exit the screen without saving the settings.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 145 of 613

AUTOMATIC FUNCTIONALITIES
Automatic Clock-In/Out
The Automatic Clock-In/Out feature can be used to simplify the employees daily tasks by automating a portion of their tasks. It depends on other events, usually log-on and log-off, to create the automatic transactions. Employees can be automatically clocked-in when they pass their first labor transaction. This eliminates the need for a separate clock-in transaction. At the end of the day, an employee can simply log off the last job and go home. The system generates a clock-out for the employee. As an added feature, the system also logs the employee off any jobs, if desired. The Automatic Clock-In for an employee must be triggered by some other event. The other event can be any of the several listed below. This event will trigger the creation of the clock-in. If employees forget to perform the triggering event and are now outside the shift variance, they should see their supervisor to perform the supervisor equivalent transaction or a Supervisor Clock-In. Automatic Clock-Out can be used independently of the Automatic Clock-In feature. The Automatic Clock-Out is done during the Nightly Batch process. There are several policy questions that you need to address when using this feature: What shifts will have this ability? This feature is configurable by shift. Since this feature requires some sort of event to trigger the clock-in, employees must perform some sort of transaction within the variance of their scheduled arrival time. If an employee does clock in or out, the feature is ignored. Employees with a Status of O (Log Off only) may use this feature. The Auto Clock-Out feature makes assumptions about an employees day. You may have the system clock the employee out at the time of the last log-off or end of the shift, whichever is later. Like the clock-in, employees who will not clock out must perform some type of transaction to signal the end of their day. Consider how authorized overtime will be handled when Automatic Clock-Outs are generated. See explanation below. Make sure that the Nightly Batch run is later than the end of the shift, to ensure the accuracy of the Automatic Clock-out records.

The Automatic Clock-In/Out feature is set up in the Shift file, using three fields on the Shift Rules tab, as follows:

FIELD
Automatic clock-in

DESCRIPTION
Click on this box if employees on this shift can log onto a job without clocking in. If checked, the first

Kronos Incorporated

Page 146 of 613

transaction of the day automatically clocks the employee in using the shift clock-in time. Transactions which would trigger this action are: Log-on a work order (LON) Log-off a work order (LOF or OFF) Log a quantity on a work order (LOQ or LQ1) Move a quantity on a work order (MOV) Inspect a work order (INP) Daily change transaction (DCH)

Leave this box clear if the automatic clock-in should not be used with this shift. Clock-out Select the option that applies if employees on this shift do not clock out. This option is triggered in relation to the Nightly Batch time. Options are: 1 - Auto clock-out at last log-off (the time of the last transaction related to a work order is used as the clockout time.) 2 - Later of last logoff and shift end time (the later time between the last work order transaction and the time of the shift end.) N - No automatic clock-offs (the shift end time is left open and the open end time will be recorded on the shift exception report to be later completed through the Time/Labor Editor.) Action option Select the option to be enforced for employee's clocking out. The options are: A - Clock out (must be off all jobs). This means that the employee cannot clock out if any opened jobs have not been closed. The employee must enter transactions to close those jobs and then clock out again. E - Off all jobs and out. This means that when the employee clocks out, all open jobs are automatically closed and the clock out request is accepted. Automatic Clock-Off Examples Example 1 Assume the example shift runs from 8:00 until 16:30, with a late-out variance of 5 minutes. Using Option 1 above, Automatic Clock-Outs are processed using the time of the employee's last log-off. This time is the employee's Last Update Time, stored in the Time record.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 147 of 613

An employee clocks in at 8:00 and logs on and off jobs all day. The employee logs off the last job at 16:35 and goes home. Later, the Nightly Batch generates a clock-out for the employee using a time of 16:35. This is equivalent to a supervisor passing a Supervisor Clock-Out for the employee with a time of 16:35. The time is within the late-out variance for the shift, so the clock-out time is rounded to 16:30 and the employee receives an even 8 hours for the day. This scenario applies when using the Daily Change (DCH) transaction in place of the log-on transaction. The last task an employee must do is to perform a DCH before leaving for the day. Example 2 Still using the example shift that runs from 8:00 until 16:30, and Option 1, the employee clocks off the last job at 14:40 and goes home. The Nightly Batch uses the employees time for the clock-out. Because 14:40 is not within any of the variances, the time is not adjusted and the employee does not have 8 hours for the day. Similarly, if the employees last DCH transaction was at 14:40, the time is not adjusted and the employee does not have 8 hours for the day. Example 3 In this example, which uses Option 2 for the Automatic Clock-Out described earlier, an employee clocks in at 8:00 and logs on and off jobs all day. The employee logs off the last job at 16:35 and goes home. In Option 2, Automatic Clock-Outs are processed using the later of the employees last log-off or their usual Shift End Time. Later, the Nightly Batch generates a clock-out for the employee, selecting the later of the last log-off (update) or shift end times. Last Update Time: 16:35 Shift End Time: 16:30 Since 16:35 is the later of the two, Nightly Batch uses that time and the results are the same as in Option 1, Example 1. The time is within the late-out variance for the shift, so the clock-out time is rounded to 16:30 and the employee receives an even 8 hours for the day. This scenario applies when using the Daily Change (DCH) transaction in place of the log-on/off transaction. The last task an employee must do is to perform a DCH before leaving for the day. Example 4 Still using Option 2, suppose the employee clocks off the last job at 14:40 and goes home. Nightly Batch chooses between these two times. The later time, 16:30, is used for the clock-out, giving the employee default job from 14:40 to 16:30 and a full 8 hours for the day. Similarly, if the employees last DCH transaction was at 14:40, the time is adjusted and the employee has 8 hours for the day. Example 5 This example uses Option 2 for the Automatic Clock-Out described earlier. In Option 2, Automatic Clock-Outs are processed using the later of the employee's last log-off or the employees usual Shift End Time. An employee clocks in at 8:00 and logs on and off jobs all day. The employee logs off the last
Kronos Incorporated Page 148 of 613

job at 17:30 and goes home. Later, the Nightly Batch generates a clock-out for the employee, selecting the later of the last log-off (update) or shift end times. Last Update Time: 17:30 Shift End Time: 16:30 Since 17:30 is the later of the two, Nightly Batch uses that time. This scenario applies when using the Daily Change (DCH) transaction in place of the log-on/off transaction. The last task an employee must do is to perform a DCH before leaving for the day. Overtime Considerations Any post-shift overtime that was not worked is not considered when generating automatic clockouts. The times are selected according to Option 1 or 2, described above. Option 2 uses only the shift's regular end time, not the end of the overtime period. It is important to note, however, that an automatic clock-out is identical to a supervisor clockout. Therefore, if the employees Last Update Time is within the variances of the overtime period, the clock-out time is rounded to that time and the employees get the full overtime hours for which they were authorized.

Automatic Quantity Complete

Transaction programs can be configured to automatically calculate the quantity complete based upon the scrap quantity entered during the transaction. This is a specialized function that requires you to modify the ShopTrac Pro standard transactions. Consider the following before using the automatic quantity complete feature: The automatic quantity complete is calculated as the quantity received at the operation minus the quantity entered as scrapped. This assumes that the individual working on the operation will complete the total quantity received at the operation. If this is not a valid assumption, the automatic quantity complete feature may not be a viable option. When automatic quantity complete calculations are involved, the first operation of a work order is treated differently than subsequent operations. You must manually specify the quantity received at the first operation. If you do not specify it, the quantity complete will always be zero because there were no parts available to be worked on. The automatic quantity complete feature lets you enter the actual quantities. This overcomes the problems described previously, but it requires that the prompt not be defined, as a fill prompt and input will be required. It may be necessary to train anyone using the new transaction.

To use the automatic quantity complete feature, modify any or all the log off transactions. To do this, select AUTO as the default value at the Quantity Complete prompt in the log off Transaction files. You can configure the quantity complete prompt in the following transaction programs to automatically complete the quantities: CLOCKOUT LOGJOB LOGOFF
Page 149 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

LOGOFFAL LOGQTY TEAMOFF The LOGOFFAL program does not prompt for Quantity Scrapped. If AUTO is used, the quantity complete is the entire quantity available at that operation.

Note:

Configuring Automatic Quantity Complete

There are several ways in which you can implement this feature, depending upon how your facility will use this capability. You can make the Quantity Complete field: A filled in field -- The prompt for Quantity Complete never appears. The system always calculates the quantity complete based on the Quantity Scrapped. This configuration requires that you always complete the total amount received at an operation. An optional field -- Lets you enter a numeric value if you are completing only a portion of the quantity received. AUTO is still the default; this provides the most flexibility for entering quantities. If you click Enter at the prompt, the system accepts the default value of AUTO and calculates the quantity complete. In this case, replace the default Quantity Complete prompt (27) with prompt 213, which is defined as alphanumeric instead of numeric. This lets you enter the value for AUTO as a part of the transaction. A mandatory field -- Requires that you enter a value (either a number or select AUTO) at the prompt. If you chose this configuration, print the word AUTO and post it as a barcode. Replace the default Quantity Complete prompt (27) with prompt 213, which is alphanumeric. This allows the value AUTO to be entered as a part of the transaction.

Calculating Quantities Complete The system uses the following formula to calculate the quantity complete. This formula allows for completion of partial quantities: Quantity Received minus (Quantity Completed plus Quantity Scrapped) minus Transaction Quantity Scrapped Where: Quantities Received, Completed, and Scrapped represent quantities stored in the operation record. Transaction Quantity Scrapped is the value entered in response to the Quantity Scrapped prompt at logoff Note: Note: If you do not enter a Quantity Scrapped (no prompt or value entered), the entire Quantity Received is the Quantity Complete. Since the ShopTrac Pro system does not allow negative quantities; the Quantity Complete will not be negative. The system records zero or the value of the calculation, whichever is greater. If the system calculates a Quantity Complete equal to zero, the system displays a warning message at the device and records it in the barcode log.
Page 150 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Error Messages

ERROR MESSAGE

DESCRIPTION

0 Qty Completed, An incorrect value was entered at the Quantity Complete Check Qty Received field. The ShopTrac Pro system calculated a value of 0 (zero) for the quantity. Please Enter a Numeric Quantity Complete At the Quantity Complete field, a numeric value (digits 0-9) was not entered nor was AUTO selected.

Automatic Recalculation Utility

The Automatic Recalculation (also referred to as AutoCalc) utility is an optional program that is added when ShopTrac Pro is installed. Its function is to scan the time file for days marked for recalculation and then recalculate their hours, resetting the Hours Allocated in all Labor records for the day, and completely regenerating the days Hours records. The Automatic Recalculation utility functions much like the automatic recalculation Time/Labor Editor function. See Automatic Hours Recalculation for more information on the recalculation internal process. This utility is accessed from the Start button on the desktop task bar. Select Programs, the ShopTrac Pro group and Automatic Recalculation from the options. Features of this utility include: Can run continuously, once in a while or on demand Processes days in an unlimited, user-defined date range Reports errors that prevent recalculation from completing successfully Automatic exit, with exit script, as in Transaction Processor Avoids collisions with transactions that may have come in during processing Avoids collisions with the Editor, which may also have a session going for the day in question Fully auto-processing

To begin the recalculation, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Reference Dates from...to Hours past work period for full premium zone qualification
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
Enter the date or date range when the utility will scan time records and recalculate those marked. Time records outside this range are not recalculated, even if marked. This field determines whether the recalculation performed for a given time record is on-line or fully qualified. An online recalculation is done if the current time is earlier than the end of the employee's work period
Page 151 of 613

qualification

plus the hours entered at this selection. A fully qualified recalculation is done if the current time is later. Entry is displayed as two digits, a decimal, and two digits. Example: 22.30 is 10:30 PM. This governs whether an error is returned if the employee's latest time record is still open. If an error is returned the recalculation is stopped. Check this box if you want no error returned when the utility encounters an open time record while recalculating, permitting the recalculation to continue. Leave the box clear if you want an error returned when an open record is encountered, stopping the recalculation. This works similar to the same option in the Time/Labor Editor, except that the error is reported on each day's record, not just on the last day in the date range.

Recalculate OK if latest day is still open

Recalculate if a previous day is still open

This governs whether an error is returned if an employee's previous time record, prior to latest time record, is still open. If an error is returned the recalculation is stopped. Check this box if you want no error returned when the utility encounters a previous open time record while recalculating, permitting recalculation to continue. Leave the box clear if you want an error returned when a previous open record is encountered, stopping the recalculation. This works similar to the same option in the Time/Labor Editor, except that the error is based on the employee's overall time record, not on the date range.

Allow mid-day clock-out with open labor record

This governs whether an error is returned if an employee clocks out while still logged onto an open job. If an error is returned the recalculation is stopped. Check this box if you want no error returned when the utility encounters a mid-day clock-out with an open job while recalculating, permitting recalculation to continue. Leave the box clear if you want an error returned when this is encountered, stopping the recalculation. This selection is designed to accommodate lunch outs in hours recalculation. The functionality is identical to the corresponding selection in the Time/Labor Editor.

Repeat

Check this box if you want the utility to continually scan the time file. When one pass is finished, it begins another one. Processing continues until interrupted by the user or by any selected error condition being met. Leave the box clear if, once the calculation has

Kronos Incorporated

Page 152 of 613

completed one pass, or if an error condition is met, it will stop. If set to repeat, the utility can be left to run continuously. If the user wants to run the utility once, i.e., at the end of the day, it would be set to complete only one pass. Rolling date range Check this box if you want the date to "roll" forward as the utility processes through midnight to become the new date. Leave the box clear if you want to maintain the same date when processing through midnight. This selection has an effect only if a date range is specified or if "Repeat" is checked above. Retry days with errors every ____ hours This selection is available only if the "Repeat" box is checked. When the utility encounters a record with errors, no recalculation takes place and the record remains marked. When the utility is run in repeat mode, all the days in the time file that can be successfully recalculated will be, skipping the records with errors. In this situation, the utility continually loops, retrying those records and returning the same errors. This continues until a user corrects the errors. This takes up processing time, and also clutters the log with many error messages. To minimize the error entries in the log and keep the scanning process moving, this selection allows the user to configure the utility to retry records only after a specified number of hours, rather than continuously. The "Retry..." parameters are maintained only while the current session is running. If the utility is stopped and then restarted, the "Retry..." parameters must be reentered. If possible, configure this utility in relation to the usual time when corrections are made through the Time/Labor Editor. Running this utility prior to an Editor session would "clean" the records and minimize the number of retries before the recalculation completes successfully. Exit date/ Exit time Optional fields. Specify a date (and a time in the field that becomes active when a date is entered) at which you want the Automatic Recalculation utility to stop processing and close itself. This option functions the same as it does in the Transaction Processor. Optional field. Specify a file name that, when encountered, will halt the recalculation process. For example, if a process to create a payroll data file for export has been set up, you would want to stop
Page 153 of 613

Exit file

Kronos Incorporated

recalculation to let the export file be completed. Enter a filename in this field. Then when the system, during processing, detects the existence of this file, processing is halted. This option functions the same as it does in the Transaction Processor. File location Print Log If a filename is entered above, enter the path where the system can find that file. Check this box if you want a printed copy of the recalculation log to be generated. Leave the box clear if you don't want a printed copy.

When the utility screen has been completely defined, press the [Start] button at the bottom of the screen. To leave the utility without starting an Automatic Recalculation session and without saving the screen settings, press the [Exit] button. Once launched, the utility keeps a running total of the various actions listed below and displays them on the screen:

ACTION
Processed Errors Retries

EXPLANATION
This is the number of days for which recalculation has been attempted. This is the number of days, of those attempted, that returned errors and did not recalculate successfully. This counter indicates the number of days that have been retried after having returned errors at least once during the current session if Repeat selection was checked. If Repeat was not selected, the number remains at zero.

For more information on Recalculation, see one of the following subjects: Recalculation Overview On-Line vs. Fully-Qualified Recalculation Recalculation Triggers When Transactions come in during Recalculation

Automatic Report Processing

Many of the reports included in this appendix have parameters that could be used to eliminate the retyping of values each time the report is run. This includes many selection criteria and dates. Automatic processing can be set up and scheduled in the Data Collection Managers (DCM) Event Manager program. See Automatic Report Processing with Event Manager below. Automated process of reports can be used to perform the following: Create reports that are processed with selection criteria already completed. These reports can be run as long as the Event Manager program is in operation.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 154 of 613

Use restricted selection criteria that cannot be changed. Use default selection criteria to employees department, group, work center, labor code or job class.

The primary difference between the automatic report processing event and others in the Event Manager, is the inclusion of an additional parameter on the end of the command line. The name of the report is added at the end. For example, the name of the Time Audit by Employee ID report is AUD311. Check the Help on the specific report for the name, which is at the top of the screen. Selection Parameters The selection parameters for the various reports are detailed in the Reports section of this appendix (see Access Profile Parameters). In general, if the user can fill in the field, it can be defaulted through the use of parameters. The default value will be in the field when the report is generated. Some parameters are not available to all reports, so consult the individual report parameter list for those that are available. Selection Range Parameters Any of the From/To parameters permit the user to select a range of criteria. If only the From parameter is given a value, that same value is used by the system as the To parameter. Date Parameters Date selections may be filled in with a specific date or with relative dates. Refer to Date Range Variables. The AUTO Parameter The AUTO parameter is the most widely used parameter for both data processing and reports. Whenever this parameter is used to define an operation, it carries out actions set up to run a report, launch an export or process data. Using AUTO in a report format causes it to begin processing immediately after any selections are filled in, without waiting for user input. Reports can also be set to run unattended, using the Event Manager in DCM, when the AUTO parameter is included in the event definition. EMPIDFILL and RESSEL Parameters The EMPIDFILL parameter allows reports to be configured to prompt for the employee ID and PIN, and then fill in selections with data from the employee record. The RESSEL parameter configures a report to block access to certain selections, preventing employees from changing that selection. Using EMPIDFILL When EMPIDFILL is used, employees accessing a report will be prompted for an employee ID number and PIN before the report selection window appears. When the report selection window appears, the department and shift fields are automatically filled in using default information from the employees file. These fields can be changed unless the RESSEL parameter is used (see Using RESSEL below). If a report profile is configured to fill in a field from both the employee file and another parameter, EMPIDFILL takes precedence, and the data comes from the employee file. If the field is blank in the employee file, the data related to the other parameter is
Kronos Incorporated Page 155 of 613

used. Using RESSEL This is a powerful feature that allows administrators to configure reports using selections that the user may not change. This is very useful when users should not have access to other employees or other departments. Reports may be configured so that users may view the only data they should have access to, and block them from viewing unauthorized data. When the report is selected, the fields denoted to be blocked are inaccessible to the user. Combining EMPIDFILL and RESSEL By using these parameters together, it is possible to configure reports that run for one employees own employee ID number only, or one supervisors department only. To restrict employees to running reports for themselves, their department, their shift or any other fillable, restrictive fields, use both the EMPIDFILL and RESSEL parameters. Example - Restricting supervisors to their own work centers You want to configure a report to prompt employees for their Employee ID number and PIN, fill in their work center and prevent them from changing certain selection criteria. To accomplish this, set up a profile to fill Employee ID and work center fields from the employee file, to default the date to yesterday and to block the employee ID range selection, as follows: SELDATE Today-1 EMPIDFILL WB (W=work center, B=Employee ID) RESSEL B (B=Employee ID) When the report selection window appears to the restricted employee, the work center, date, and employee ID fields are completed, and the Employee ID range field is inaccessible. All other fields are available for entry.

Automatic Report Processing with Event Manager

Reports can be automated using Event Manager or by creating a shortcut. To automatically run a Clock in Detail (TAA500) report from Event Manager every workday at 9:00 A.M., first create an Access Profile named CLOCKINDETAIL with the desired parameters. Below are sample parameters: SELDATE MM/DD/YYYY-MM/DD/YYYY SELDEPARTMENT 100,300,500--700 SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST AUTO NOTE: Parameters in Access Profiles for Reports are different from parameters for other ShopTrac Pro programs. For instance, in an Access Profile for Time Labor Editor, parameters of SELFROMDATE and SELTODATE are used. In Reports, SELDATE is used, values as above. For parameters that do not require actual values, such as SELDOUBLESPACE or
Kronos Incorporated Page 156 of 613

SELLASTNAMEFIRST, whether or not the parameters are chosen in the Access Profile depends on whether or not they exist, i.e., if SELDOUBLESPACE exists in an Access Profile for a report, it needs no value because its existence assume a Yes value. Conversely, the absence of these same parameters indicates a No value. For this example, the settings in the Event Manager would be as follows: Yes Enable Event: Clock in Detail Description: Run Program Event Type: Daily: Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday When: 09:00 Time: <Path; to [Link]>{sp}<Path to ShopTrac Pro Command line: Programs>{sp}[ACCESSPROFILENAME]{sp}[REPOR TNAME] Ex: C:\Kronos\ShopTracPro\Programs\[Link]{sp}CL OCKINDETAIL {sp}TAA500 Startup Directory: <Folder for [Link]> Ex: C:\Kronos\ShopTracPro\Programs\ Normal, Minimize or Maximize Run Style: NOTE: Access Profile name and Report Name must be in ALL CAPS.

Automatic Report Processing with a Shortcut

To run this same report from a shortcut, use the above Command Line, Startup Directory and Run Style.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 157 of 613

QUERY TRANSACTIONS
A query transaction allows employees to retrieve information at a device, as opposed to running a utility or report. Queries are supported for three types of records: Time and Attendance Labor Work In Process (WIP) QUERYDAY - related to time and labor data QUERYWIP - related to work orders and operations

There are two query programs used to create query transactions. They are:

Query transactions provide immediate information users need at the device. For example, if a transaction is not being accepted, the employee might run queries to find more information that might determine why a transaction has failed, or to review status information before initiating a transaction. Query Transaction Format ShopTrac Pro's query transactions have a number of messages that may be requested at the device. A query prompt asks what information you are requesting. Using a prompt, rather than an execution option to specify the desired query, is the most flexible method. You can set up one transaction that handles multiple queries (called looping). You can also configure transactions to return just one query by using a fill prompt for the query number, or you can use looping query transactions that allow you to quickly request multiple messages. Error Messages The following error messages can be generated from time and attendance queries: Invalid Employee The Employee ID initiating the transaction is not in the ID employee file. No ShopTrac Pro The employee initiating the transaction has a status of Access "T" (terminated). Invalid Work Work schedule record is not found. Schedule Invalid Shift Shift record is not found. Query Number No query number is specified, or the user enters zero (0) Must be Greater at a query number prompt. Than Zero The following error messages can be generated from labor queries: Labor Request This is returned with Query 12 if the transaction has not Prompt Required been mapped. Labor Request This is returned with Query 12 if the employee is on only Must Be 1 one job. Labor Request This is returned with Query 12 if the employee is zero or

Kronos Incorporated

Page 158 of 613

Must be Between 1 above the number of jobs the employee is on. and nn The following error messages can be generated from work-in-process queries: Invalid Employee The Employee ID initiating the transaction is not in the ID employee file. No ShopTrac Pro The employee initiating the transaction has a status of Access "T" (terminated). Query Number No query number is specified, or the user enters zero (0) Must Be Greater at a query number prompt. Than Zero Available queries with transactions Query transactions available with QUERYDAY include: Query 1 - Last time record Query 2 - Last clock-in or out Query 3 - Current department and group Query 4 - Current work center Query 5 - Current labor code Query 6 - Current job class Query 7 - Schedule for current day Query 8 - Hours allocated today Query 9 - Hours allocated and qualified today Query 10 - Open job counts Query 11 - Open jobs Query 12 - Particular open job Query 13 - Labor last update time Query 14 - Last log-off Query 15 - Last log-on Query 16 - Current team Query transactions available with QUERYWIP include: Query 1 - Work order status Query 2 - Work order schedule Query 3 - Work order actual dates Query 4 - Work order user-defined field Query 5 - Last run operation started Query 6 - Last run operation completed
Kronos Incorporated Page 159 of 613

Query 7 - Operation status Query 8 - Operation schedule Query 9 - Operation actual dates Query 10 - Operation user-defined field Query 11 - Operation quantity available for work Query 12 - Employees on operation

QUERYDAY Transactions
The following time and labor query transactions can be set up using the Transactions and Transaction Prompts options on the Device Configuration menu: Employee Current Day Query Employee Current Day Query - Loop Query Open Jobs Query Open Jobs - Loop Supervisor Current Day Query Supervisor Current Day Query - Loop

Looping transactions can be defined to request more than one query message during the transaction. To set up any of these transactions, refer to the settings below for each of these transactions. Employee Current Day Query This transaction is used to gather information about an employee's day. Settings include:

FIELD
Transaction code Name

FIELD ENTRY

QT1 Employee current day query QUERYDAY Chain (None) Execution option N - No special access Employee access level (Can be changed to suit.) Yes Host response (Message will be returned.) If the prompt below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt # Prompt string Entry
Kronos Incorporated

FIELD ENTRY
235 Query M - Mandatory

Page 160 of 613

Type Length Map1 Employee Current Day Query - Loop

N - Numeric 2 QRY

This transaction is similar to the QT1 transaction, but it loops on the query prompt, allowing the user to quickly request multiple messages. Settings are:

FIELD
Transaction code Name Chain Execution option Employee access level Host response

FIELD ENTRY
QT2 Employee current day query - looping QUERYDAY (None) N - No special access (Can be changed to suit.) Yes (Message will be returned.)

If the prompt below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt # Prompt string Entry Type Length Map1 Loop Employee Query Open Jobs

FIELD ENTRY
235 Query M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 QRY Check this box

This transaction is used when the employee is on several jobs and an open jobs query cannot display all the jobs the employee is on. The employee must tell the system which job it is that he or she requires information for (query 12). This is most frequently used following an open jobs count query (10) returns more than one job. Settings are:

FIELD
Transaction code Name Chain

FIELD ENTRY
QL1 Query open jobs QUERYDAY

Kronos Incorporated

Page 161 of 613

Execution option Employee access level Host response

(None) N - No special access (Can be changed to suit.) Yes (Message will be returned.)

If either of the prompts below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt # Prompt string Entry Type Length Map1 Employee Query Open Jobs - Loop

FIELD ENTRY
236 Query F - Fill Prompt N - Numeric 2 QRY

FIELD ENTRY
237 Labor request M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 LRQ

This transaction is also used when the employee is on several jobs and an open jobs query cannot display all the jobs the employee is on, and then loops on the query prompt, allowing the user to quickly request another messages. The employee must tell the system which job it is that he or she requires information for (query 12). This is most frequently used following an open jobs count query (10) returns more than one job. After the first query is responded to, the user to can request another messages. Settings are:

FIELD
Transaction code Name Chain Execution option Employee access level Host response

FIELD ENTRY
QL2 Query open jobs -looping QUERYDAY (None) N - No special access (Can be changed to suit.) Yes (Message will be returned.)

If either of the prompts below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt # Prompt string Entry

FIELD ENTRY
236 Query F - Fill Prompt

FIELD ENTRY
237 Labor request M - Mandatory

Kronos Incorporated

Page 162 of 613

Type Length Map1 Loop Supervisor Current Day Query

N - Numeric 2 QRY

N - Numeric 2 LRQ Check this box

This transaction is similar to QT1, but also requests a supervisor ID number and is restricted to access level A. This transaction supports supervisors running queries for an employee. Settings are:

FIELD
Transaction code Name Chain Execution option Employee access level Host response

FIELD ENTRY
QT3 Supervisor current day query QUERYDAY (None) A - Supervisor (Can be changed to suit.) Yes (Message will be returned.)

If either of the prompts below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt # Prompt string Entry Type Length Map1

FIELD ENTRY
198 Employee ID F - Fill Prompt N - Numeric 9 BDG

FIELD ENTRY
235 Query M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 QRY

Supervisor Current Day Query - Loop This transaction is similar to QT3, but loops after the query response permitting additional queries. This transaction supports supervisors running queries for an employee. Settings are:

FIELD
Transaction code Name Chain

FIELD ENTRY
QT4 Supervisor current day query - looping QUERYDAY

Kronos Incorporated

Page 163 of 613

Execution option Employee access level Host response

(None) A - Supervisor (Can be changed to suit.) Yes (Message will be returned.)

If either of the prompts below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt # Prompt string Entry Type Length Map1 Loop

FIELD ENTRY
198 Employee ID F - Fill Prompt N - Numeric 9 BDG

FIELD ENTRY
235 Query M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 QRY Check this box

Query requests available with QUERYDAY transactions: Query 1 - Last time record Query 2 - Last clock-in or out Query 3 - Current department and group Query 4 - Current work center Query 5 - Current labor code Query 6 - Current job class Query 7 - Schedule for current day Query 8 - Hours allocated today Query 9 - Hours allocated and qualified today Query 10 - Open job counts Query 11 - Open jobs Query 12 - Particular open job Query 13 - Labor last update time Query 14 - Last log-off Query 15 - Last log-on Query 16 - Current team

Kronos Incorporated

Page 164 of 613

QUERYWIP Transactions
The following work-in-process query transactions can be set up using the Transactions and Transaction Prompts options on the Device Configuration menu: Work Order Query Work Order Query - Loop Operation Query Operation Query - Loop

Looping transactions can be defined to request more than one query message during the transaction. To set up any of these transactions, refer to the settings below for each of these transactions. Work Order Query This transaction allows employees to request messages regarding a specific work order. It is designed to be used with queries 1 through 6. If the user enters a query number higher than 6, he will get an "Operation Not Found" message, since no operation/function was specified. Settings include:

FIELD
Transaction code Name Chain Execution option Employee access level Host response

FIELD ENTRY
QW1 Work order query QUERYWIP (None) N - No special access (Can be changed to suit.) Yes (Message will be returned.)

If the prompt below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt # Prompt string Entry Type Length Map1 Work Order Query - Loop

FIELD ENTRY
4 Work order M - Mandatory A - Alphanumeric 15 WKO

FIELD ENTRY
235 Query M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 QRY

This transaction is similar to the QW1 transaction, but it loops on the query prompt, allowing the user to quickly request multiple queries on one work order. Settings are:
Kronos Incorporated Page 165 of 613

FIELD
Transaction code Name Chain Execution option Employee access level Host response

FIELD ENTRY
QW2 Work order query - looping QUERYWIP (None) N - No special access (Can be changed to suit.) Yes (Message will be returned.)

If the prompt below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt # Prompt string Entry Type Length Map1 Loop Operation Query

FIELD ENTRY
4 Work order M - Mandatory A - Alphanumeric 15 WKO

FIELD ENTRY
235 Query M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 QRY Check this box

This transaction allows employees to request messages regarding a specific operation. Because it uses the WKO, OPR and FNC mappings are handled by all 12 WIP queries. Settings are:

FIELD
Transaction code Name Chain Execution option Employee access level Host response

FIELD ENTRY
QW3 Operation query QUERYWIP (None) N - No special access (Can be changed to suit.) Yes (Message will be returned.)

If either of the prompts below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt #
Kronos Incorporated

FIELD ENTRY FIELD ENTRY FIELD ENTRY FIELD ENTRY

4 5
Page 166 of 613

235

Prompt string Entry Type Length Map1

Work order M - Mandatory AAlphanumeric 15 WKO

Operation M - Mandatory N - Numeric 4 OPR

Function M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 FNC

Query M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 QRY

Operation Query - Loop This transaction is similar to QT3, but loops after the query response permitting additional queries. This transaction supports supervisors running queries for an employee. Settings are:

FIELD
Transaction code Name Chain Execution option Employee access level Host response

FIELD ENTRY
QT4 Supervisor current day query - looping QUERYDAY (None) A Supervisor (Can be changed to suit.) Yes (Message will be returned.)

If either of the prompts below does not exist, you must create a new prompt using the Transaction Prompts option.

PROMPT FIELD
Prompt # Prompt string Entry Type Length Map1 Loop

FIELD ENTRY FIELD ENTRY FIELD ENTRY FIELD ENTRY

4 Work order M - Mandatory AAlphanumeric 15 WKO 5 Operation M - Mandatory N - Numeric 4 OPR 6 Function M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 FNC 235 Query M - Mandatory N - Numeric 2 QRY Check this box.

Query requests available with QUERYWIP transactions: Query 1 - Work order status Query 2 - Work order schedule Query 3 - Work order actual dates

Kronos Incorporated

Page 167 of 613

Query 4 - Work order user-defined field Query 5 - Last run operation started Query 6 - Last run operation completed Query 7 - Operation status Query 8 - Operation schedule Query 9 - Operation actual dates Query 10 - Operation user-defined field Query 11 - Operation quantity available for work Query 12 - Employees on operation

Kronos Incorporated

Page 168 of 613

CHAPTER 3 DEFINING WORK IN PROGRESS AND WORK SCHEDULES

LABOR/WORK IN PROCESS
Managers and supervisors who work in a manufacturing environment must constantly monitor what is happening on their facility. At any given time, a manager may want to know the total hours spent on any job, how many hours were spent on certain operations, and how much time was spent on indirect jobs or as downtime. Managers need to track labor hours by employee, work order, operation, department or other criteria. They need to track downtime caused by machine failure or material shortages as defined by current company policy. They need to accurately pro-rate employee time spent on multiple jobs. There is also a need to track customers, suppliers, parts, etc. The Labor/Work In Process selections are used to setup the components of the work order, including customers, suppliers, parts, teams, machine and operations related to the work order. The Labor/Work In Process menu includes: Customers Suppliers Part Numbers Unit Of Measure Conversions Work Orders Routers Teams Machines Rework Operation Work Order Split

Kronos Incorporated

Page 169 of 613

Customers
The ShopTrac Pro system will track work orders by customers if you set them up and use them in the Work Order file. The details of the customer, including addresses, phone numbers and company contacts are stored in the customer setup file. A customer number that you create for each company identifies customers. This means that existing customer numbers can be used, without changing, because information, including a company name change, can be easily edited without interfering with exiting work orders in progress.

FIELD
Customer number

DESCRIPTION
Use up to ten letters and/or numbers to create an ID for the customer/ company. This ID will remain unchanged even if all other information is changed. Use up to 30 characters to enter the company name. Use up to 30 characters each, on up to three lines, to enter the company address, street, post office box and/or delivery address. Use up to 30 characters for up to three phone numbers for the company. Select a company type from the list of flags that are set up in the Customer Types option. Examples are: E - Established, 1 to 10 years N - New, Less that 1 year V - Valued, over 10 years

Customer name Address 1, 2, 3

Phone 1, 2, 3 Type

Status

Select a customer status from the list of codes that can be set up in the Code Tables/Customer Status Types option. Examples are: Y - Customer Status Active N - Customer Status In-active

Customer since

Enter the date that this customer became a customer, normally the date of first contract or signing of vendor agreement. For each contact name in the customer record, the first name. For each contact name in the customer record, the last name. For each contact name in the customer record, the relationship of the contact to the ShopTrac Pro system. For each contact name in the customer record, the

Contacts: First name Contacts: Last name Contacts: System title Contacts:

Kronos Incorporated

Page 170 of 613

Phone Contacts: Contact Support Contacts: Customer title

primary phone number (with area code). Check if the contact is the primary or secondary person to call on support issues. Let clear if not a support issue contact. For each contact name in the customer record, their company title.

Suppliers
The ShopTrac Pro system will track those companies who furnish the parts or raw materials used to complete Work Orders. The supplier information is stored in the supplier file. A supplier number that you create for each company identifies suppliers. This means that existing supplier numbers can be used, without changing. Even a company name change; can be easily edited without interfering with existing work orders in progress.

FIELD
Supplier number Supplier name

DESCRIPTION
Use up to ten letters and/or numbers to create an ID for the supplier/company. Use up to 30 characters to enter the supplier name.

Part Numbers
The Part Number file is used to store all the components used in the manufacturing process. Once set up in this file, the part numbers can be entered on the Work Order screen for each job and/or each operation in a process.

FIELD
Part number Part type Part name Unit of measure

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters to identify the part number. A single character that identifies the part type. The types are set up in the Flags file. Use up to 20 characters to describe the part. Use up to three characters to identify the unit of measure for the part. For example, EAR for each, ART for quart, GO for gross. This measure is usually the smallest component needed to fill a work order and is also the measure used in maintaining inventory counts. Use up to 20 characters to describe the unit of measure. The cost of a single unit, based on the unit of measure. For example, if an item's unit of measure is EACH, and they are purchased in boxes of four for $10, and then the unit cost is $2.50 ($10 divided by 4).

Unit of measure description Unit cost

Kronos Incorporated

Page 171 of 613

Unit of Measure Conversions

Use the Unit of Measure Conversion to store frequently used conversions.

FIELD
Unit of measure from Unit of measure to Description Multiplier

DESCRIPTION
Enter the measure that will be converted. Enter the measure that will result from the conversion. Describe the process to be accomplished by the conversion. Enter the number to use for the calculation. For example, if the conversion were from feet to inches, the multiplier would be 12.00.

Work Orders
A work order is a request to fulfill a demand for a product, or is used to track time not directly attributed to that demand. Two kinds of work orders are Direct and Indirect: Direct work orders include operational steps to which labor is posted, and begin with any alphanumeric character except I. For example, a work order may be a request to create 20 circuit boards, 50 vacuum pumps, or 100 aluminum cans. Indirect work orders do not include operational steps to which labor is posted. All indirect work orders begin with I. Use Indirect work orders to record time not spent on immediate job tasks, i.e., training, meetings, breaks, downtime. There is always either a work order or an absence code associated with every Labor record. Direct work orders generally consist of one or more operations that represent different steps of the work order. For example, a work order to manufacture aluminum cans might require the following steps: Step 1. Step 2. Step 3. Step 4. Roll aluminum Shape into cylinder Attach end rims Paint

These steps are called operations. The system can further divide operations into functions, including setup and rework. For example, before you can roll the aluminum (step 1), you may need to set up the rolling machine. This setup can be tracked as a separate function of the first operation from the actual rolling of the can, or perhaps, during the third step (attach end rims), some of the cans, not properly shaped, are sent to be reworked. A separate function can be created for that purpose. When the Work Order option is selected on the menu, a list of existing orders is displayed. To create a new Work Order, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save.
Page 172 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

To edit an existing order or one of its component operations, highlight the Work Order to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing order, highlight the router to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the original order are displayed, with a blank order name field. Enter a new name and makes changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings and/or operations. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing order, highlight the order name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed. The order and all its operations will be deleted.

The operations screen contains five main tabs, General, Status, Options, and Operations List, and five sub-tabs, Operation General, Operation Status, Operation Quantities, Standards/Hours and Instructions. The sub-tabs are accessed from the Operations Lists tabs. At the top of the window is the: Work Order The name (maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters) of the work order. Work Orders can be used to simplify the creation of new work orders. Briefly describes the work order (maximum 30 characters). The quantity of completed parts necessary for this work order. The format of this field depends on the number of decimal places allowed.

Description Quantity ordered

General

FIELD
Type Routing

DESCRIPTION
Single character flag used to classify a work order. Types are defined in the Flags file. Used to select a Router that was previously created as a template for standard operations. Select from the dropdown list. Specific items and/or operations can be changed, if necessary, once the router is loaded. The user is prompted whether to load the operations that are part of the selected router. If the answer is no, only the general information linked to the router is loaded. This could be used if the operations for the specific product will be entirely different (e.g., rework vs. run). Specify how many decimal places will be used for quantities on this work order. Valid entries are 1 through 6. Specify how units produced by this work order are counted, e.g., EA, LB, BX, etc.

Decimal places

Unit of measure

Kronos Incorporated

Page 173 of 613

Customer number Customer name Part number Part name

The identifying number for the product customer. The name of the product customer. The component part number associated with this work order. If the part number has been set up in the Part Number file, the name is automatically displayed. If not, enter the name of the part number.

Status

FIELD
Schedule start (Original) Schedule completed (Original) Schedule start (Revised) Schedule completed (Revised) Actual start Actual completed Status: Current

DESCRIPTION
Enter the intended beginning date to start production for this work order. Enter the intended completion date for this work order. If the intended beginning date is revised, enter that revised date here. If the projected completion date is revised, enter that date here. When the first employee logs onto this work order, that date will be inputted to this field. Inserts date that a completed work order transaction is entered. The current status of the work order. Options are: Blank - Work order has not been started C - Complete (Can be manually entered, cannot be automatically determined. Can be marked complete if Sequence Validation [see Qualifiers tab] is on.) H - On Hold (Hours or quantities can not be logged against the work order) I - Incomplete (At least one operation in the work order has been started.) S - Split (The work order was split between two work orders; hours or quantities cannot be logged against a split work order.) X - Canceled (Hours or quantities cannot be logged against a canceled work order.)

Code Options
Kronos Incorporated

The five-character user-defined code set up for work orders in Code Tables.

Page 174 of 613

FIELD
Hours requirement

DESCRIPTION
Used to set the labor allocations. Options are: D = Default. Labor hours allocated in the normal manner. H = All hours. Labor records created for this work order have all hours allocated to them regardless of what other labor records are open. Z = Zero hours. Labor records created for this work order have zero hours allocated to them unless this is the only work order in progress. If left blank, the Default option is used.

Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale Qualifying hours

Select a pay scale from the drop-down list. These options are set on the Work Order, Absence Pay Scales menu. Check the box if hours spent on this work order are used towards the minimum hours requirement for consecutive days, non-worked hours and premium zones. Leave clear if not. The date the traveler (work order barcode for recording transactions) for this work order was last printed. Check the box if the quantity validation settings in each operation record are to be used. Each operation could have a 'validation yes-no' setting. If left clear, any validation settings in operations would be ignored, even if they have been set. For more information, see Using Quantity Validation. Check if the steps in the operation should be validated to ensure that they are performed in sequential order. Leave clear if steps will not be validated for correct sequence. For more information, see Using Sequence Validation. Check if quantities are automatically moved from one operation to the next. Manual moves are only made to move units to or from a rework operation. Leave clear if no automatic moves are made. Use this field when work orders for sub-assemblies are created. This helps to maintain an overview of the whole project. A user-defined field to be used for any purposes. Set up the label for this field in System Configuration.

Traveler last printed Quantity Validation

Sequence Validation

Automatic quantity moves

Parent work order

User-defined

Kronos Incorporated

Page 175 of 613

Operations list NOTE: This tab is only accessible for work orders. Indirect work orders cannot have operations; therefore, this tab is not relevant. The operations display includes operation number/function, the status, the description and the work center; the scheduled start/completed dates, and the actual start/completed dates, quantities received, completed, moved and scrapped. Included are any existing operations for the displayed work order, or the display is blank if this is a new work order and no router operations were selected. To add an operation, click New. A second set of screens is displayed, along with the Operation and Function fields. Enter an operation and function number and then complete the fields on the tabbed screens described below. To edit an operation, highlight the operation line and click Edit or Delete. When editing, this same set of screens are accessed. Make the desired changes in the desired field(s). Remember to click Save before exiting to save the new or changed record. To copy an operation, highlight the operation line and click Copy. The screens contain all the same information as the copied operation, but the operation and function fields are blank. Complete these fields and make any other changes to existing information. Click Save before exiting to save the new record. This function is used to save entry time and prevent errors, when there are similar operations used at different stages of the work order. To delete an operation, highlight the operation line and click Delete. A prompt to confirm the deletion will be displayed. Respond Yes to delete or No to exit without deleting.

Operations sub-menu This set of screens is displayed when the user wishes to add or edit an operation. In addition to the operation and function number fields, the operation details are set up with five tabbed screens, Operation General, Operation Status, Operation Quantities, Standards/Hours and Instructions. Operation The operation sequence numbers are always arranged in numeric order. Function The function numbers within the operation are: 1 = Setup function 2 = Run functions 9 = Rework functions Operation General

FIELD
Type

DESCRIPTION
Select the type of operation from the drop-down list. Types are entered in the Flags setup option, Operation types.
Page 176 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Part number

If a part number is assigned to the work order, that number is displayed here. To change it, you must return to the work order to edit the part number. Enter a brief description of the operation (maximum 20 characters) that can be easily identified from the operation list. Enter the department that will perform this operation. Enter the work center that will perform this operation. Enter the group within that department performing this operation. Enter the machine that will be used for this operation. All machines can be entered in the Machine file. Specify how many decimal places will be used for quantities on this operation. Valid entries are 1 through 6. Enter the unit of measure to be used with this operation. For example, if the operation results in the production of an engine, the UOM will likely be EA (each). A user-defined field to be used for any purposes. Set up the label for this field in System Configuration. Select the weighting factor from the drop-down list that will be used for this operation. This factor is used to group labor records by type when hours are allocated. The options are: A - Evenly Divided Hours (default) B - Standard Time Per Piece C - Quantity Available for Work D - Operation User-Defined Field E - Work Order Quantity Ordered F - Work Order User-Defined Field G - Extended Standard (standard time per piece x quantity ordered) H - Time to Complete (standard time per piece x quantity available)

Description

Department Work Center Group Machine Decimal places

Unit of measure

User defined Hours allocation weighting factor

Operation Status

FIELD
Schedule start (Original)
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
Enter the intended beginning date to start production for this operation.
Page 177 of 613

Schedule completed (Original) Schedule start (Revised) Schedule completed (Revised) Actual Start Actual Completed

Enter the intended completion date for this operation. If the intended beginning date is revised, enter that revised date here. If the projected completion date is revised, enter that revised date here. When the first employee logs onto this operation, that date will be entered here. When a logoff transaction includes a positive response to the Complete? Prompt, that date will be automatically entered here. Refer to the current status of only Function 1 (Startup) operations. The status and the Percent Complete (next field) are arbitrarily entered, not system generated. Options are: Blank = Operation has not been started C = Complete I = Incomplete

Status: Current

Percent Complete

Percentage of startup function completed. This field is not system-generated, but is entered by the user and has no relation to functions other than startup functions or to the quantity percentages on the next tab.

Operation Quantities

FIELD
Quantity received

DESCRIPTION
The quantity received at this operation as a result of a move transaction. On the first operation, this is always the quantity completed plus the quantity scrapped. The format of this field depends on the number of decimal places allowed. This is the cumulative total as found in the Operation record. The format of this field depends on the number of decimal places allowed. The number of items moved to the next operation on the work order. This is the cumulative total as found in the operation record. The format of this field depends on the number of decimal places allowed. The difference between the quantity received at an operation and the quantity completed or scrapped. The format of this field depends on the number of decimal places allowed.
Page 178 of 613

Completed

Moved

Unaccounted

Kronos Incorporated

Scrapped

This is the cumulative total of scrapped units, as found in the operation record. The format of this field depends on the number of decimal places allowed. The number of items moved to a rework operation. This is the cumulative total as found in the operation record. The format of this field depends on the number of decimal places allowed. Check this box to insure that quantities completed do not exceed allowable variances from the quantity ordered on the work order. Leave it clear for no validation. (Note: If validation is not indicated on the work order, any settings here will be ignored.) The allowable percentage by which the quantity received may exceed the quantity ordered. If quantities received are greater than the allowable amount, the terminal device displays an error message. The allowable percentage by which the quantity received may be less than the quantity ordered. If quantities received are less than the allowable amount, the terminal device displays an error message. Displays the unaccounted quantity completed on the operation, as a percentage of the total ordered on the work order. The factor applied to the operation quantity-ordered to compare against the work order quantity-ordered for validating the quantity completed. The system uses this field when there is a difference between the operation and the work order quantities. For example, if it takes two components produced in the operation to produce one unit on the work order, the multiplier would be 2.00. If quantity validation is turned off, this will not be used. Check this box to insure that quantities completed do not exceed allowable variances from the quantity received on the work order. Leave it clear for no validation. (Note: If validation is not indicated on the work order, any settings here will be ignored.) The allowable percentage by which the quantity completed may exceed the quantity received. If quantities completed are greater than the allowable amount, the terminal device displays an error message. The allowable percentage by which the quantity completed may be less than the quantity received. If
Page 179 of 613

Reworked

Ordered: Validate quantity

Over

Under

Unaccounted %

Multiplier

Received: Validate quantity

Over

Under

Kronos Incorporated

quantities completed are less than the allowable amount, the terminal device displays an error message. Unaccounted % Displays the unaccounted quantity (Received quantity minus the total of Completed and Scrapped quantity), as a percentage of the total received for the operation. The factor applied to the quantity moved from the previous operation. The system uses this field when there is a change of units of measure between the operations. For example, the multiplier from yard to feet is 3. The results of the multiplication are seen in the quantity-received field. This feature can be used regardless whether quantity validation is turned on or off.

Multiplier

Standards/Hours

FIELD
Standards: Setup hours Standards: Time per piece Standards: Machine

DESCRIPTION
For Function 1, (setup) operations, the total number of hours to setup this operation. For Function 2 (run) or 9 (rework) operations, the total employee time to complete one unit during this operation. Used in calculating labor efficiency levels. Machine time per piece. For Function 2 (run) or 9 (rework) operations, the total time this machine requires to complete one unit during this operation. Used in calculating machine efficiency levels. The standard rate for performing the operation based on hourly rate and number of units completed per hour. This is used for calculating and reporting earned dollars on labor efficiency reports. Time per piece x quantity completed. This is a system calculated, cumulative total. Any additions or changes to existing records will update and maintain this total. Measure of the actual productivity rate as a percentage of the ideal maximum productivity rate (time-per-piece X hours-recorded). This is a system-calculated, cumulative total. Any additions or changes to existing records will update and maintain this total. Time it will take to complete the uncompleted units, based on number of unaccounted units at 100% efficiency level. This is a system calculated, cumulative total. Any additions or changes to existing records will update and maintain this total. System calculated, cumulated total number of hours

Standards: Rate

Efficiency: Hours earned Efficiency

Efficiency: Hours to complete

Efficiency:

Kronos Incorporated

Page 180 of 613

Total labor hours Instructions

recorded on this specific operation.

This optional screen can be used to enter detailed work instructions for each operation. This information will follow the work order operation when it is used in a work order. Direct Work Orders Direct Work Orders include operational steps to which labor is posted, and begin with any alphanumeric character except I. For example, a work order may be a request to create 20 circuit boars, 50 vacuum pumps, or 100 aluminum cans. Direct work orders generally consist of different steps of the work order. For example, a work order to manufacture aluminum cans might require the following steps, called operations: Roll aluminum Shape into a cylinder Put on ends Paint

These operations can be further divided into functions. Also see Indirect Work Orders. Indirect Work Orders Indirect work orders do not include operational steps to which labor is posted. All indirect work orders begin with I. Use indirect work orders to record time not spent on immediate job tasks, e.g., training, meetings, breaks, downtime. When setting up Indirect Work Orders, set the Hours Requirement to Z = Zero Hours if you will be using the Indirect Hours Allocation Method that allocates to Direct jobs only. Using Quantity Validation The ShopTrac Pro system can validate the quantities completed against the quantity ordered on the work order. You can also validate the quantities completed against the quantities received for each operation. If you turn the Validate Against Quantity Received condition in the Work Order/Operation file on (check the box), the system uses the following rules: There must be a Quantity Received at an operation in order for work to begin. Quantity Completed plus Quantity Scrapped must be within the Quantity Variance limits of the Quantity Received. The system requires that a quantity be moved to an operation before an employee logs onto it. If this criterion is not met, an error-message is generated when an employee attempts logon. The system validates whether quantities are within a specified percentage of the quantity
Page 181 of 613

The result of validation, using these rules, is that:

Kronos Incorporated

with which they started. These percentages are set in the operation file. If this criterion is not met, an error-message is generated. Quantity Validation can be set on the Work Order Defaults screen. Using Sequence Validation The ShopTrac Pro system will ensures that the steps in the operation are performed in sequential order. When it is on, it is in effect for all operations in the work order. With sequence validation set in the Work Order/Operation File: If you attempt to log hours or quantities against an operation that is out of sequence, the system displays an error message and you cannot complete the transaction. The system marks the status of the work order completed when you complete the last operation of a work order. You must complete the Setup for an operation before you can begin the Run for that operation. Before you start a Run operation, you must start the previous Run operation. The previous operation need not be completed, but quantities must have been moved from the previous to the Run operation you want to start. Before you can complete a Run operation, you must complete the previous Run operation.

Sequence validation follows these rules:

If any of these rules are violated, the system sends an error message to the terminal. Sequence Validation can be set on the Work Order Defaults screen.

Routers
Routers act like master work orders. They permit the creation of a template that can be used repeatedly to create work orders and operations. This will permit you to create a complex set of operations that are standard with your manufacturing process and, with each new work order, use the Router to include these operations, saving entry time and preserving accuracy. If there is more than one set of standard operations, you can set up several routers. This is also helpful when the work order information does not exist on a separate system that is exported into the ShopTrac Pro system. The Router contains much of the same information found in the Work Order and Operation file. Completing a work order includes operational steps and functions within those steps. Once a router is defined, it is simple to create new work orders, and select a router from the list that contains all or most of the desired operations. Once the router information is entered, it can be edited to fit the specific needs of the work order. Routers can be used to create new work orders and exclude the operations. This might occur when a work order is set up with operations for building a product, but a separate work order must be created for a Rework of the same product. The general information would be required, but the operations would be entirely different. See Work Order for more information. When Router is selected, a list of existing routers is displayed.
Kronos Incorporated Page 182 of 613

To create a new Router, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing router or one of its component operations, highlight the router to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing router, highlight the router to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the original router are displayed, with a blank router name field. Enter a new name and make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings and/or operations. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing router, highlight the router name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed. The router and all its operations will be deleted.

Using Routers to Build a Work Order Routers create templates that can be used repeatedly to create work orders. This will permit you to create a complex set of operations that are standard with your manufacturing process and can be used to build new work orders, saving entry time and preserving accuracy. If there is more than one set of standard operations, several routers can be created. The router settings are displayed on the opening window. Details of operations are contained on three sub-tabs Operations 1, Operations 2 and Instructions.

FIELD
Router Router description Router type

DESCRIPTION
The name (maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters) of the router. Briefly describe the router (maximum 30 characters). This field will accept any single-character entry. To set up router types, access the Flags (All) file and use the file name ROUTER and the field name TYPE. The component part number associated with this router. If the part number has been set up in the Part Number file, the name is automatically displayed. If not, enter the name of the part number. This date is filled in by the system for reference only. Indicates how recently the router was used.

Part number Part name

Last date used Operations list

Included on this list are all existing operations for the displayed router. Select an operation to edit or delete by highlighting the operation line and clicking Edit or Delete. A second set of screens is displayed, along with the Operation and Function fields. To add an operation, click New and enter the operation and function. Then complete the fields on these screens described below. When editing, this same set of screens are accessed. To edit, make the desired changes in the desired field(s). Remember to click Save before exiting to save the new or changed record.
Kronos Incorporated Page 183 of 613

Operation The operation sequence numbers are always arranged in numeric order. Function The function numbers within the operation are: 1 = Setup function 2 = Run functions 9 = Rework functions Operations 1

FIELD
Type

DESCRIPTION
Select the type of operation from the drop-down list. Types are entered in the Flags setup option, Operation types. Enter a brief description of the operation (maximum 20 characters) that can be easily identified from the operation list. Select the weighting factor from the drop-down list that will be used for this operation. This factor is used to group labor records by type when hours are allocated. The options are: A - Evenly Divided Hours (default) B - Standard Time Per Piece C - Quantity Available for Work D - Operation User-Defined Field E - Work Order Quantity Ordered F - Work Order User-Defined Field G - Extended Standard (standard time per piece x quantity ordered) H - Time to Complete (standard time per piece x quantity available)

Description

Weighting factor

Work Center Machine Department Group Scheduled days

Kronos Incorporated

Enter the work center that will perform this operation. Enter the machine that will be used for this operation. All machines can be entered in the Machine file. Enter the department that will perform this operation. Enter the group within that department performing this operation. Enter how many days should be allotted to complete this i Thi fi ld i d h h k d i
Page 184 of 613

operation. This field is used when the work order is created, to fill in the schedules dates for the operation to be started and completed. Unit of measure Enter the unit of measure to be used with this operation. For example, if the operation results in the production of an engine, the MOM will likely be EAR (each).

Operations 2

FIELD
Ordered: Validate quantity Over

DESCRIPTION
Check this box to insure that quantities completed do not exceed allowable variances from the quantity ordered on the work order. Leave it clear for no validation. The allowable percentage by which the quantity received may exceed the quantity ordered. If quantities received are greater than the allowable amount, the terminal device displays an error message. The allowable percentage by which the quantity received may be less than the quantity ordered. If quantities received are less than the allowable amount, the terminal device displays an error message. The factor that is applied to the quantity ordered to validate that the quantity is completed. The system uses this field when there is a difference between the operation and the work order units of measure. For example, the multiplier from feet to yards is .333. If quantity validation is turned off, this will not be used. Check this box to insure that quantities completed do not exceed allowable variances from the quantity received on the work order. Leave it clear for no validation. The allowable percentage by which the quantity completed may exceed the quantity received. If quantities completed are greater than the allowable amount, the terminal device displays an error message. The allowable percentage by which the quantity completed may be less than the quantity received. If quantities completed are less than the allowable amount, the terminal device displays an error message. The factor applied to the quantity moved from the previous operation. The system uses this field when there is a change of units of measure between the operations. For example, the multiplier from yard to feet is 3. The results of the multiplication are seen in the quantity-received field. This feature can be used
Page 185 of 613

Under

Multiplier

Received: Validate quantity Over

Under

Multiplier

Kronos Incorporated

regardless whether quantity validation is turned on or off. Employee For Function 1, (setup) operations, the total number of setup/time per piece hours to setup this operation. For Function 2 (run) or 9 (rework) operations, the total time to complete one unit during this operation. Machine setup/time per piece For Function 1, (setup) operations, the total number of hours to setup this operation. For Function 2 (run) or 9 (rework) operations, the total time to produce one piece. Employee standard rate Decimal accuracy Instructions This optional screen can be used to enter detailed work instructions for each operation. This information will follow the router operation when it is used in a work order. The standard rate for performing the operation. This is used for calculating and reporting earned dollars on labor efficiency reports. Indicate the number of decimals to carry the employee standard rate out to for accurate measure.

Teams
In the normal course of tracking employee time, each employee must log on and off jobs to create a labor record detailing work performed and hours worked. The Teams function allows for team-based labor. Employees can be assigned to teams, and labor transactions can be performed for all team members with a single transaction. Even though these transactions permit batch entry of employees to jobs, an individual employee labor record is created for each team member. This team batch entry reduces the number of transactions necessary at the terminal device, and helps insure consistent job records. To use the Team function, teams must be defined to include information specific to the team and then teams must be built by assigning employees to the team. Also available is a Team Status Report. Adding a new team To create a team, from the Setup menu, select Labor/WIP, then Teams. Right click on the team list and select New to add a new team. The Teams screen has two tabs, General and Labor. Begin by giving the team a name and then complete the team default fields, as explained below. Team A 15-character field to enter the team name. This should be descriptive as possible, so that when viewed on a team list, can be easily identified. When adding a team, this name must be unique. General

FIELD
Description
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
Use up to 30 characters to describe the team. Optional fi ld
Page 186 of 613

field. Type A single-character flag defining the team type. This is a user-defined field that is set up in the Team Types menu option. Select a work schedule from the drop-down list. The system will automatically check the work schedule file and enter the default shift from that file into the team record. The shift can be changed when team members are added. Select a work center from the drop-down list. This will update the time record when an employee joins the team. Work centers can be added in the Code Tables menu option. Select a labor code from the drop-down list. This will update the time record when an employee joins the team. Labor codes can be added in the Code Tables menu option. Select a work center from the drop-down list. This will update the time record when an employee joins the team. Job classes can be added in the Code Tables menu option.

Work schedule

Work center

Labor code

Job class

Labor

FIELD
Labor status

DESCRIPTION
Select a labor status for employees who are members of the team AND whose time record is created using the Team Building screen. This is a mandatory field. Valid status codes are: L = Log-on only (members can only log onto a work order; only one job at a time is allowed. Logging onto another job automatically logs off the previous job. This option does not permit the recording of completed quantities.) M = Multiple jobs (members can log on to more than one work order at the same time. Maximum total jobs below sets limit for number of jobs. Hours shared with more than one job are divided according to the Hours allocation weighting. Log-on and log-off transactions are permitted; only log-off permits the recording of completed quantities.) O = Log-off only (members can only log-off a work order; only one job at a time is allowed. Logging off a job automatically allots any previous time block to this

Kronos Incorporated

Page 187 of 613

job being logged off. This option is recommended if you want the employee to record completed quantities.) Maximum multiple jobs Specifies the maximum number of jobs the team can be logged onto simultaneously, including both direct and indirect jobs. The maximum allowed by the system is 99. Setting this number as low as possible is recommended. Specifies the maximum number of indirect jobs the team can be logged onto simultaneously. The maximum allowed by the system is 99. The recommended setting is 1. Specifies an account or work order that labor will be charged to, if no job is currently running. This field would generally be filled by an indirect work order, but if a gap job is always assigned when team members are between jobs, this could be an active work order. If individual employees have default work orders set up, those defaults would be overridden by the team default work order. Specify an operation if the default work order above is not an indirect job. It must be a valid operation of the selected work order. Specify a function if the default work order above is not an indirect job. It must be a valid function of the selected work order. Check the box to indicate that the system will permit concurrent meals and breaks with other jobs, when creating labor records. Leave the box clear if this is not permitted. This setting will override any individual employee's set up and will be applied to all team members.

Maximum indirect jobs

Default work order

Default Operation

Default Function

Meal/break overlap

Editing, copying or deleting a team To edit an existing team, highlight the team name and right click. Select Edit and the team record is displayed. Make the necessary changes and Save before exiting the record. Click Cancel to exit the record without saving any changes. To copy an existing team, which will serve as a template for a new team, highlight the team to copy and right click. Select Copy and the team record is displayed complete with all settings of the copied team, except for the team name. Enter a new team name and make any other desired changes. Click Save before exiting or Cancel to exit without saving. To delete a team, highlight the team name and right click. Select Delete and a prompt will request a verification of the deletion.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 188 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Page 189 of 613

Machines
There are instances when a company needs to collect data on the machines the employees use to produce their products. In most cases, machines do not run on a strict work shift with specific start and stop times. Machines can sometime run for days or weeks at a time, only stopping for maintenance, or to change setups for different jobs. Depending on the type of work being done, one employee may run one or more machines at a time, or multiple employees may be operating the same machine. In cases such as these, the tracing of machine time is very useful in gauging plant productivity. Machine time is tracked similar to the way employee time is tracked on Work Orders. Unlike employees, machines are not tied to a shift or schedule, and not limited in the time they can be in operation. As there are no predefined schedules for machines, ShopTrac Pro records the actual start and stop times from the transactions; no adjustments are made to machine time. Machine time can also be linked to the Operation file, where an employee would log onto a machine at the same time they log onto their job. Use the Machines file on the Labor/WIP menu to set up a list of the machines in your facility. Each machine will have a separate record. The machines on this list can be displayed in the operation file, so a machine can be associated with a specific operation in a work order. The assigning and status of a machine can be performed at the device. The fields used to set up machines are described below:

FIELD
Machine

DESCRIPTION
A five-character alphanumeric designation for the machine in this record. This identifier must be unique to each machine. A 30-character alphanumeric description of the machine. This is user-defined and is displayed on reports and work order screens. A single-character designation for a type of machine. This allows the grouping of machines by types and is displayed on many reports and screens. Define machine types through the Flag file. Examples of types are drilling, lathes, punch, saws, etc. The work center where the machine is located. This is an optional field. If set up in the work center code file, the drop-down list permits selection of a work center. A single-character designating the status of the machine. The status can be changed at the device. The options are: H = Hold (Machine cannot be assigned to a job. This is used when an extended repair is involved. No time is recorded on the machine when in hold status.) S = Suspend (A temporary suspension of machine

Description

Type

Work center

Status

Kronos Incorporated

Page 190 of 613

operations due to conditions such as, waiting for materials, short training session, etc. Any time record is closed and machine is transferred to an indirect job and cannot be assigned to another job.) Blank = Indicates the machine is ready to work. Status code A five-character designation that describes the reason for the status assigned above. The code used in this field is set in the Machine Status code file. This denotes the costs, per hour, of a machine that has been removed from active status. This is limited to a four-digit plus two-decimal number. It will be multiplied by the downtime hours to calculate downtime costs in the Machine Summary report. Indicate the average number of hours the machine runs per day. For reference only, this field is a two digit plus two-decimal number.

Standard cost

Daily run hours

Rework Operation
In each Work Order Operation, one of the available functions is a Rework Operation, which is a Function 9. This function permits materials to be moved out of the production stream and into a rework or redo category. This Rework Operation option lets you quickly create rework functions for a range of operations, without having to manually add them to each operation, one at a time. After these functions are created, it is available the next time users view a work order.

FIELD
Work order Operation

DESCRIPTION
Select the desired work order from the drop-down menu. Enter the range of operations you want to create rework functions (9) for.

Be sure to click Save to store and activate the function. The Total Records field displayed in the left corner of the screen reflects the total number of operations in the work order file. The Records created field reflects the number of new rework functions have been created each time Save is clicked.

Work Order Split

After a Work Order is created, it may become necessary to split the work assignment into two in order to assign the work to more than one department or team. To avoid having to create two new work orders and delete the old, this option can be used to split the existing work order into two, and assign different work order numbers to each. At the same time, the user can assign a percentage of the work quantities to each of the new work orders. For instance, if the existing work order quantities total 2000 and the new work orders will be assigned 75% and 25% respectively, the first work order will be assigned a quantity of 1500 and the second will be assigned a quantity of 500. The system copies all operation statuses as well.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 191 of 613

If the original work order number is retained, by giving two new names to the resulting split work orders, the original work order is assigned a status of S (Split) and it cannot be split again. Retaining a record of the original order may be desirable for reference purposes. If the original work order number is retained by one of the resulting split work orders, either of the resulting split orders can be split again.

FIELD
Original Work Order New Work Order1 New Work Order2

DESCRIPTION
Select the work order you want to split from the pop-up window. Enter an identifier and a quantity percentage to transfer for the new work order. The original work order ID is displayed in this field. If you want to retain the original work order, enter a new name for the second order of the split. The remaining quantity percentage, which will be transferred to this work order, is automatically displayed.

Be sure to click Save to store and activate the function. Once saved, the new work orders will be accessible the next time the work order file is entered.

WORK SCHEDULES
This group of menu options includes the selection used to create and maintain Work Schedules and Shifts, to set date-cycle parameters for printed reports, and to enter temporary work assignments. A Work Schedule is an overview of different shifts on different days that repeat in time cycles. Although a Shift file defines each unique schedule worked by employees, the Work Schedule lists data about every shift. A Work Schedule is made up of the number of days in the cycle, the shift description, beginning and ending times, length, non-scheduled days, whether the day is scheduled or not, and pay scales based on straight, double, or overtime, etc. To access the Work Schedules menu, select Setup from the Main Menu and then click on the Work Schedules option. To add a range, schedule or shift, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, right-click on the list. Select New from the options on the dropdown menu. Complete the fields according to the explanations found in the help section for each type and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To edit a range, schedule or shift, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to edit and click Enter or rightclick with your mouse and select Edit from the option list. Make the desired changes and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries. To copy a range, schedule or shift, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to copy, right-click with your mouse and select Copy from the option list. Make any desired alterations and click Save to save the record. Click Cancel to exit without saving the entries.
Kronos Incorporated Page 192 of 613

To delete a range, schedule or shift, select a type from the menu tree. When the list of existing records is displayed to the right, highlight the record you wish to delete and right click with your mouse. Select Delete from the option list. The system will prompt for a confirmation of the deletion. Click Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting.
The Setup/Work Schedules submenu options are used to define components of the work schedule, including:

Daily Assignment Authorizes unusual daily events and/or changes in an employees schedule, department, group, work center etc. Date Ranges Used to define date ranges and dates to run reports, work schedules, or data selection according to daily, monthly, yearly, weekly, biweekly, quarterly, or semi-monthly pay periods. Schedules Used to define or edit schedules, collections of different shifts on different days, which repeat on a periodic basis. Shifts Defines each unique schedule worked by your employees. It provides basic information, such as when the shift starts and ends, when meals and breaks are taken, and what days are scheduled.

Daily Assignment
Daily Assignment lets the user schedule overtime (pre- and post-shift), temporary shifts, and absences in advance. Daily Assignment authorizes future events and/or changes (unusual daily events) in an employees department, group, work center etc. For example, if an employee works in a different department for the day, or clocks in late, Daily Assignment can record this data. The data is keyed by an employees ID number and date. Daily Assignments are used when processing an employees Time and Labor records and can be created and/or edited here or by device transactions or using the Transaction Entry option. How the Daily Assignment file can be used Daily Assignment can hold information for several different events. Temporary work schedules Temporary shifts Temporary departments, groups, work centers, job codes, labor class Temporary employee status - log off only, multiple job, etc. Premium Zone authorizations Restriction Assignments Overtime -- pre/post shift Full day absence

Kronos Incorporated

Page 193 of 613

Absence

To set up a daily assignment, select an employee, using the drop-down box on the Emp ID field, and then click the New button at the bottom of the screen. Complete the necessary fields below to make the assignment:

FIELD
Employee ID Date Work Schedule Shift

DESCRIPTION
The employee's identification number The current date or date the Assignment will affect. The temporary work schedule assigned to the employee. The temporary shift assigned to the employee. If both work schedule and shift are filled in, and a conflict exists between the shift in the work schedule and this one, this shift is the one used. The number of pre-shift overtime hours scheduled. The format is [Link] to accommodate hour fractions. The number of post-shift overtime hours scheduled. The format is [Link] to accommodate hour fractions. If the employee is scheduled for a full-day absence, this absence code is used by Nightly Batch to create the records. Associated with the full day absence code, it is the number of hours specified if you want it to be different from the shift length. If blank, the shift length is used. The temporary department assigned to the employee. If blank, the employee's default department is used. The temporary group assigned to the employee. If blank, the employee's default group is used. The temporary work center assigned to the employee. If blank, the employee's default work center is used. The temporary labor code assigned to the employee. If blank, the employee's default labor code is used. The temporary job class assigned to the employee. If blank, the employee's default job class is used. The temporary rate class assigned to the employee. If blank, the employee's default rate class is used. The temporary status assigned to the employee. If blank, the employee's default status is used. The line number for the restriction period set up in the Shift file, which will be overridden. Up to six line b (h i li ll df i i )
Page 194 of 613

Pre-shift OT hours Post-shift OT hours Full day absence code Full day absence hours Department Group Work Center Labor Code Job Class Rate Class Employee status Restriction Override

Kronos Incorporated

numbers (the maximum lines allowed for restrictions) can be entered or the letter A that indicates that All lines are overridden. Premium Zone 1-10 If any affected Premium Zones (1-10), set up in the Shift file, requires authorization, check the appropriate box next to the code related to the Premium Zone.

Absence Scheduling
Scheduling an absence can be performed in the following ways: Full-Day Absences Future absences can be scheduled through a device, transaction, Transaction Entry, or Daily Assignment. Partial-Day Absences Absences that produce labor records to cover part of a day can only be scheduled on the day they occur, through a device transaction or Transaction Entry.

The Time/Labor Editor can only be used to alter past events (add an absence record), not schedule future ones.

Date Ranges
The Date Ranges file is used to define date ranges according to daily, monthly, yearly, weekly, biweekly, quarterly, or semi-monthly pay periods. Pay periods are basically types of date ranges. Define your pay periods in ShopTrac Pro and run reports by those dates. Pre-configured Date Ranges are shipped with the ShopTrac Pro system. Before using other files in the system, define your date ranges first to set dates for schedules, reports, etc. Pre-configured date ranges include Biweekly (beginning on Sundays), Monthly, Quarterly, Semi-monthly (1st and 15th), and Weekly (beginning on Sundays). When Date Ranges is selected, a list of existing ranges is displayed. To create a new Date Range, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing Date Range, highlight the range to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing Date Range, highlight the range to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the copied router are displayed, with a blank range name field. Enter a new name and make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing Date Range, highlight the range name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed.

The Date Range settings include:

FIELD
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
Page 195 of 613

Date range name Type

The identifier for the date range. Use up to five, alphanumeric characters. A user-defined field that categorizes the date range for reports. For instance, if you have several versions of a biweekly range (starts on difference days of the week), define a B type in the Flags file. Enter a description for the date range, using up to 30 alphanumeric characters. This field defines the interval at which the period repeats. The system-set options are: D = Every x days M = Every x months S = Semi-monthly

Description Period

Months/Days

Depending on the option selected in the Period field, this field will request the number of days in range (D) or the number of months in range (M). If the range is every other month (S), this field cannot be accessed. Instead the Day 1, 2, 3 fields (see below) are opened. This date identifies the beginning date the system uses, along with the Days/Month field, to calculate the period intervals. Monthly cycles can begin on any day of the month up to the 28th day. Fields opened when the S Period option is selected (see above). In most semi-monthly period ranges, the month is divided into two periods (e.g., 1st and 15th). If that is the case, complete the Day 1 field with the beginning date of the first period of the month, and the Day 2 field with the beginning date of the second period. The Day 3 field is seldom used but is present to offer maximum flexibility to users who may want to divide the month into three parts. The valid options for all fields are 1 to 28, or L (Last day of the month). For instance, valid entries for Days 1 and 2 could be 15 and L. At least two fields must be completed and L can be used only once.

Anchor date

Day 1, 2, 3

Schedules
The work schedule file is used to define or edit schedules, collections of different shifts on different days that repeat on a periodic basis. A work schedule consists of data pertaining to the schedule as a whole, such as overtime rules, and many Daily Schedule records which describe each day in the schedule, including the shift for that day and whether the day is a scheduled work
Kronos Incorporated Page 196 of 613

day. When Schedules is selected, a list of existing schedules is displayed. To create a new Schedule, right-click on the list and select 'New', or click on the New icon on the Toolbar. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing Schedule, highlight the schedule to change, right-click and select 'Edit', or click on the Edit icon on the Toolbar. Enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing Schedule, highlight the schedule to copy, right-click and select 'Copy', or click on the Copy icon on the Toolbar. A duplicate of the settings on the copied schedule is displayed, with a blank schedule name field. Enter a new name and make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing Schedule, highlight the schedule name, right-click and select 'Delete', or click on the Delete icon on the Toolbar. Confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed.

The work schedule settings are displayed on four tabbed screens General Rules, Premium Rules 1, Premium Rules 2, Schedule Detail. To print a list of schedules, see Printing a list of work schedules. General Rules

FIELD
Work schedule Type Description

DESCRIPTION
A five-character field used to name the work schedule. When creating a new schedule this field is required. A user-defined field used for queries, listing, etc. Types are defined in the Flags file. Use up to 30 characters to describe the work schedule. Once entered in a new schedule record, this description appears above the tabbed screens next to the new schedule name. If an existing record is accessed, this description is immediately displayed above the tabbed screens, next to the schedule name. Specify when the schedule begins. This provides a reference point to calculate which Daily Schedule to use on a given day. The corresponding day of the week is displayed to the right of the date. This specifies whether days not on the schedule will have any text displayed next to the day. Options for this field are: A = Show non-scheduled day text B = Show shift schedule on all days

Anchor date

Non-scheduled day display

Non-scheduled day

If A is selected in the previous field, enter the text that

Kronos Incorporated

Page 197 of 613

text Premium Rules 1

will appear next to any day not on the schedule.

FIELD
Period overtime limit

DESCRIPTION
As the system accumulates hours through Pay Rules to the various hours buckets, it keeps track of which hours the user has configured to count toward period overtime. Once the number of hours crosses the limits specified in this field, the system begins accumulating period overtime hours for the employee. It is important to complete this field; otherwise, if left blank, all hours count as period overtime, since the user crosses the limit after the first minute on the clock.

Period double time limit

The system also keeps track of which hours the user has configured that count towards period doubletime. When that number of hours crossed the limit specified in this field, the system begins accumulating period doubletime for the employee. It is important to complete this field; otherwise, if left blank, all hours count as period doubletime, since the user crosses the limit after the first minute on the clock.

Reset on date range

Employees' hours accumulation is reset on this cycle. This field is separate from the Work Schedule's cycle of days, so overtime rules are not required to be configured on the same cycle as an employee's shift schedule. For example, period hours may reset every 7 days while the work schedule itself repeats every 28 days. The resets are independent. When creating a new schedule, this field is required. There are three sets of fields that can be used to define different pay scales for each range of consecutive days the employee has worked after the specified day. The second field of the set is necessary if the consecutive day pay scale is a part of your Pay Rule factors. Appropriate Pay Scales should already have been defined, prior to setting up schedules. Employees' consecutive days are reset on this cycle. This too is independent of the work schedule cycle.

Consecutive day pay scales: After day number Pay Scale

Reset on date range Premium Rules 2

FIELD
Day of the week pay scales: SundayKronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
Used in indicate the pay scale that will be referenced when calculating pay scales for each day of the week.
Page 198 of 613

Saturday Schedule Detail

These scales are set in the Hours Allocation Rules file.

All existing daily schedules are displayed when this tab is accessed. Additionally, buttons used to add, edit or delete schedules are displayed on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen. To add a daily schedule, highlight the day below which you want the new daily schedule placed and click New. You will be prompted to insert the schedule before this schedule or at the end of the schedule list. If you insert the new schedule in the middle of an existing list of daily schedules, the new schedule will replace the existing one and move all the existing schedules down a day. Complete the fields necessary to create a new schedule. To edit or copy an existing schedule, highlight the relevant schedule and click Edit or Copy. Make the desired changes and Save the record, or Cancel to exit without saving the changes. To delete a schedule, highlight the schedule and click Delete. A confirmation request is displayed. Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel the deletion. Creating a New Work Schedule When a new work schedule is created, complete (at a minimum) the new schedule name, the date range and click on the Schedule Detail tab. A window is displayed, requesting the following information:

FIELD
Days in cycle

DESCRIPTION
This field is only applicable when a new work schedule is being created. Enter the total number of days in the schedule cycle. This does not necessarily match the pay period cycle. When editing existing schedules, this field displays the days in cycle, but cannot be changed. Select a default shift from the shift list.

Default shift

NOTE: These details are not requested when adding a day to an existing work schedule. When the detail screens of a schedule are displayed, the fields to be completed are contained under two tabs, Regular Shift and Alternative Shifts. These fields are used to edit an existing schedule day or all a new schedule day. The explanation for each field can be found below. At the top of the screen are fields that document the work schedule name and day of the week related to that schedule. Regular Shift

FIELD
Scheduled day

DESCRIPTION
Denotes whether the day is scheduled to be worked or not. Click the box if the day is a scheduled one; leave clear if the day is not a scheduled day. Enter the base hours allocation level for the day. For example, a worker may be paid differently on day 8 of an eight-day schedule. A user-defined field that categorizes the schedule for reports. Types are set in the Flags file.
Page 199 of 613

Pay scale

Type

Kronos Incorporated

Description Shift

This field stores a description for this day in the schedule. This is used to define the primary shift for this day in the work schedule cycle. It is used if none of the 'Alternate' shifts apply. Select a shift from the drop-down list. Information included on that list is the shift ID, description, beginning/ending times, shift length, shift type, defined meals and breaks, and the pay rule profile. These shifts are set up in the Shift file. Defines how many qualifying hours an employee must have in order for a day to be considered consecutive. Qualified Hours are determined by the Work Order or Absence code. Do not leave this blank, because if left blank, the day may be considered consecutive if there are any worked hours.

Hours to be consecutive day

Alternative Shifts

FIELD
Clock-In From

DESCRIPTION
This is a time field, which is optional. This field defines the beginning of a time period during which, if the employee clocks-in, automatically puts the employee on the associated alternate shift. If the clock-in comes before this time, the alternate shift is not automatically chosen. This field defines the ending of a time period during which, if the employee clocks-in, automatically puts the employee on the associated alternate shift. If the clockin comes after this time, the alternate shift is not automatically chosen. If the clock-in falls inside the From/To time range, then this shift is used for the day. Defines when the clock-in period falls, relative to the Reference Date. The primary shift is used to determine the reference date of the clock-in question. Once that date is determined, the system determines the shift the employee is on. In order to properly analyze the from/to time ranges, the system must know where they fall relative to the reference day. For example, the system must know if a time range of 23:00 to 03:00 begins the day before the reference date, or on the reference date. The selections available on the drop-down menu include: A The range begins the day after the reference date. B The range begins the day before the reference date.

To

Use shift Placement

Kronos Incorporated

Page 200 of 613

R The range begins on the reference date. X Applies to all dates. Printing a list of work schedules To print a list of all existing Work Schedules, select the Reports option on the main menu, and then select Lists. Select the Work Schedules Detail option and enter the desired selection criteria to print a list of transactions.

Shifts
A Shift file defines each unique schedule worked by your employees. It provides basic information, such as when the shift starts and ends, when meals and breaks are taken, and what days are scheduled. In addition, the Shift file establishes how the employees on the Shift file are paid for the hours they work. Before you set up Shifts, first define your system default values. The Shift Defaults contain many default values for shift records. Defining Shifts The Work Schedule, Daily Schedule, and Shift files all function to store the data that the system needs to determine when an employee should be working. For example, when an employee clocks in, the system must have the employees 'proper shift' data in order to store that information in the Time record. The Shift file describes each shift worked by your employees by providing basic information, such as when the shift starts and finishes, when meals and breaks are taken. When Shifts is selected, a list of existing shifts is displayed. To create a new Shift, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing Shift, highlight the schedule to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing Shift, highlight the schedule to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the copied schedule are displayed, with a blank schedule name field. Enter a new name and make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing Shift, highlight the shift name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed.

Shift File Screens Each Shift record contains information displayed on seven tabs (Rules, Rounding, Meals/Breaks, Rules/ Enforcement, Non-Worked Hours, Premium Zones, Exceptions) when accessed from the Work Schedule/Shift list. The fields contained on these seven tabs are fully explained below. All tabs have access to the three buttons [Save], [Cancel] and [Help]. Press the [Save] button to store any entries or edits made to a shift file. Press [Cancel] to exit a shift file without saving
Kronos Incorporated Page 201 of 613

any entries or edits. A confirmation screen will be prompted to confirm your desire to exit without saving. The [Save] button is used to access the online help information for the Shift program option. Other buttons are only available for certain tabs and they are explained with the tab information below. Above the tabbed screens is the Shift ID that identifies the shift. Rules

FIELD
Type

DESCRIPTION
The type of shift. Valid options are: D - Day shift N - Night shift S - Swing shift Other options can be entered in the Flags file.

Description Flex shift

The shift name or description, up to 30 characters long. This is an optional field. Click this box if the shift is defined as a flex shift. This is a shift with a variable starting time. In a flex shift, the ShopTrac Pro system moves an employee's scheduled clock-in/-out and meals and breaks window times to correspond with the actual time the employee clocks in. The shift length and the meal/break times in the shift record determine the times. Leave this box clear if the shift is not a flex shift. Click on this box if the system should force the reference date of the time record to be one day later than the scheduled shift-begin date. This would occur if the shift begins on one day but needs to have the next day's date on the labor records. Leave this box clear if the records should reflect the same day as the shift begins. The time the shift begins. Use the 24-hour clock to enter a shift time past noon. For instance, enter 3:00 PM as 15:00, midnight as 00:00. The time the shift ends. Use the 24-hour clock to enter a shift time past noon. For instance, enter 3:00 PM as 15:00, midnight as 00:00.

Next day shift

Begin time

End time

Daily overtime limit As the system accumulates hours through the pay rules to the various hours buckets, it keeps track of which hours are configured to count toward daily overtime. Once that number of hours crosses the limit specified in this field, the system begins accumulating daily overtime hours for employees. If this field is left at zero, then all hours count as daily overtime, since any employees clocking in
Kronos Incorporated Page 202 of 613

on this shift cross the limit immediately. Never leave this field blank. Daily doubletime limit Just as with Overtime limits, the system keeps track of which hours are configured to count toward daily doubletime. Once that number of hours crosses the limit specified in this field, the system begins accumulating daily doubletime hours for employees. If this field is left at zero, then all hours count as daily doubletime, since any employees clocking in on this shift cross the limit immediately. Never leave this field blank. Select the pay rule profile, which will be applied to this shift, from the drop-down list. Special profiles can be created to apply to specific shifts. See Pay Rule Profiles. Click on this box if employees on this shift can log onto a job without clocking in. If checked, the first transaction of the day automatically clocks the employee in using the shift clock-in time. Transactions which would trigger this action are: Log-on a work order (LON) Log-off a work order (LOF or OFF) Log a quantity on a work order (LOQ or LQ1) Move a quantity on a work order (MOV) Inspect a work order (INP) Daily change transaction (DCH) Leave this box clear if the automatic clock-in should not be used with this shift. For more information, see Automatic Clock-In/Out. Clock-out Select the option that applies if employees on this shift do not clock out. This option is triggered in relation to the Nightly Batch time. Options are: 1 - Auto clock-out at last log-off (the time of the last transaction related to a work order is used as the clockout time.) 2 - Later of last logoff and shift end time (the later time between the last work order transaction and the time of the shift end.) N - No automatic clock-offs (the shift end time is left open and the open end time will be recorded on the shift exception report to be later completed through the Time/Labor Editor.)
Kronos Incorporated Page 203 of 613

Pay rule profile

Automatic clock-in

Action option

Select the option to be enforced for employee's clocking out. The options are: A - Clock out (must be off all jobs). This means that the employee cannot clock out if any opened jobs have not been closed. The employee must enter transactions to close those jobs and then clock out again. E - Off all jobs and out. This means that when the employee clocks out, all open jobs are automatically closed and the clock out request is accepted.

Rate operator

For those special situations when the shift is used to pay a special rate or to create a bonus shift, the operator selected here will be used with the Calculator below to calculate the employee's pay rate. This could add or subtract a specific amount from the shift pay rate, or multiply the rate by a specific number. It could also be used to set a minimum or maximum or set rate to be paid. The options are: * Multiply Rate + Add to Rate - Subtract from Rate < Minimum (Current Rate vs. Calculator below) > Maximum (Current Rate vs. Calculator below) = Set (replace with Calculator amount)

Calculator

Specify the number that will be used in conjunction with the Rate Operator above to calculate the pay rate. If the operation is *, this number will be multiplied with the hourly rate to calculate the pay for the shift. If + or - is used, this amount will be added or subtracted to the hourly rate. If < or > is used, the hourly amount entered here will be compared with the current rate and the lesser or greater of the two will be used. If = is used, this hourly amount will replace the existing current rate.

Rounding

FIELD
Variances: Early in (minutes)

DESCRIPTION
This field defines the grace period within which employees can clock in early on this shift. If they clock in within the grace period, the system rounds the time to the clock-in time for the shift. If they clock in before the grace period, the system may use Alternative shifts, if defined in the daily schedule.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 204 of 613

Variances: Late in (minutes)

This field defines the grace period within which employees can clock in late on this shift. If they clock in within the grace period, the system rounds the time to the clock-in time for the shift. If they clock in later than the grace period, the system records the actual time. This field defines the grace period within which employees can clock out early on this shift. If they clock out within the grace period, the system rounds the time to the clock-out time for the shift. If they clock out before the grace period, the system records the actual time. This field defines the grace period within which employees can clock out late on this shift. If they clock out within the grace period, the system rounds the time to the clock-out time for the shift. If they clock out after the grace period, the system records the actual time. The amount of time allowed between clock-in and the first job log-on. If this time is exceeded, a default Labor record is created.

Variances: Early out (minutes)

Variances: Late out (minutes)

Variances: First job (minutes)

Variances: Between The amount of time allowed between jobs. This applies job (minutes) to multiple-job status only. If this time is exceeded, a default Labor record is created. Variances: Last job (minutes) If overtime is authorized: Allow early-in The amount of time allowed between the last job log-off and clock-out. If this time is exceeded, a default Labor record is created. Click on this box if early clock-ins that occurs within the grace period set above will not be rounded to the normal shift start time. Instead, the actual time of the clock-in will be recorded as the adjusted clock-in. Leave this box clear, if the normal shift start time will be used for clockins occurring within the grace period. Click on this box if late clock-outs that occur within the grace period set above will not be rounded to the normal shift end time. Instead, the actual time of the clock-out will be recorded as the adjusted clock-out. Leave this box clear, if the normal shift end time will be used for clock-outs occurring within the grace period.

If overtime is authorized: Allow late-out

Meals/Breaks Note that three additional buttons at the bottom of the screen are available when this tab is displayed. When the cursor is placed in any field on a Meal/Break definition line, pressing [Insert] will move that line down and insert a blank line in its place. Pressing [Delete] will remove any line where the cursor is placed, after a confirmation prompt is accepted. Pressing [Line Defaults] while the cursor is on any line will fill the fields with default settings that are set
Kronos Incorporated Page 205 of 613

in the Shift Defaults option.

FIELDS
M(eal)/B(reak) Start Stop Min(utes)

DESCRIPTION
Select the labor type for this period. The start time of the period. Enter times in a 24-hour format. The stop time of the period. Enter times in a 24-hour format. A display-only field. It contains the length of the period in minutes. To change the value of this field, edit the Start/Stop times. This is the early variance associated with the period. It functions by rounding the length of the period to its scheduled length. If the period is not within the variance, the actual length of the period is used. This is the late variance associated with the period. It functions by rounding the length of the period to its scheduled length. If the period is not within the variance, the actual length of the period is used. The Before window is used to determine if the employee took this Meal or Break period. If an employee clocks out or logs onto a meal or break job within the window, the period is marked as taken in the time file. The After window is used to determine if the employee took this Meal or Break period. If an employee clocks in or logs off a meal or break job within the window, the period is marked as taken in the time file. The first transaction after this time triggers the automatic deduction of this period. If an employee does not clock out for lunch, this will automatically fill in a meal period, assuming that the transaction occurred after the meal. Take care to make this trigger time realistic. If the Automatic box (below) is checked and if the employee, clocks out for a meal after this trigger time, the system assumes this is not a meal but a regular clock out time and automatically inserts a meal period prior to this clock out. This means that when the employee clocks back in, the system records both a meal and the time off the clock as an absence. If the Automatic box is not checked, and the employee clocks out after the trigger time, the time is not recognized as a meal, but a normal clock out. When the employee clocks back in the time is recorded as an

Variance: E(arly)

Variance: L(ate)

Window: B(efore)

Window: A(fter)

Trigger time

Kronos Incorporated

Page 206 of 613

absence. In either case, the employees must be made aware that clock outs after the trigger time will be recorded as normal clock outs and not meal times. To avoid this, set the trigger time to accommodate a late meal. This field is automatically filled in with a time halfway between the Start and Stop times, but it can be changed. Auto(matic) Check this box if you wish the hours to be automatically allocated as entered at the clock. Leave the box clear if meals are not automatically deducted but are taken from the actual punches. But, also be aware that a clock out after the Trigger time (above) will not be recognized as a meal, but a normal clock out. Work order The entry of a work order number in this field forces a labor record to be created for this period. The work order must an Indirect one. The labor record will include an M or B type. If this field is complete, the time is not deducted from the direct work order(s) a labor record is created.

Restrictions/Enforcement Note that three additional buttons at the bottom of the screen are available when this tab is displayed. When the cursor is placed in any field on a Restriction/Enforcement definition line, pressing [Insert] will move that line down and insert a blank line in its place. Pressing [Delete] will remove any line where the cursor is placed, after a confirmation prompt is accepted. Pressing [Line Defaults] while the cursor is on any line will fill the fields with default settings, which are set in the Shift Defaults option.

FIELD
Begin restriction

DESCRIPTION
Used to specify the time option for the beginning of the work period restriction period. Options are: 1 - Before work period begins 2 - After work period begins 3 - Before work period ends 4 - After work period ends T - Specific time is entered

Minutes

If options 1, 2, 3, or 4 are selected above, this field is used to enter the number of minutes before or after the work period time when the restriction time begins. If option T is selected above, this field is used to enter an exact time for the restriction to begin.
Page 207 of 613

Time

Kronos Incorporated

End restriction

Used to specify the time option for the ending of the restriction period. Options are: 1 - Before work period begins 2 - After work period begins 3 - Before work period ends 4 - After work period ends T - Specific time is entered

Minutes

If options 1, 2, 3, or 4 are selected above, this field is used to enter the number of minutes before or after the work period time when the restriction time ends. If option T is selected above, this field is used to enter an exact time for the restriction to end. This field specifies which transactions are restricted. The options are: B - Restrict both clock-ins and outs I - Clock-ins are restricted O - Clock-outs are restricted

Time In/Out

The fields above on the Restrictions/Enforcement tab are all Restrictions parameters. The remaining fields are Work Period Enforcement parameters. The Restrictions are applied first. If the transaction falls within a restricted period, it is rejected, and no records are created or updated. The Enforcement values are not used at all. If the transaction does not fall within the restricted period, the work period enforcement values may be used, depending on the time and whether or not overtime has been scheduled. For more information on the differences between restrictions and enforcements, see Restriction-Enforcement Differences. Work Period Enforcement: Enforce before This field affects the infinite roundings. If checked, roundings will be changed to the shift begin time or a pre-shift overtime, if set up. If clear, no roundings will occur and the actual time is accepted. Work Period Enforcement: Enforce after This field affects the infinite roundings. If checked, roundings will be changed to the shift end time or a postshift overtime, if set up. If clear, no roundings will occur and the actual time is accepted. Work Period Enforcement: No logon before If this field is checked, logon transactions, which occur before the start of the authorized work period, will cause the system to return an error message and the log on not permitted.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 208 of 613

If clear, the system uses the normal early-in variance to determine if the transaction is rounded. Transactions before the variance period will not be prevented. Work Period Enforcement: No logoff after If this field is checked, logoff transactions, which occur after the end of the authorized work period, will cause the system to return an error message and the log off not permitted. If clear, the system uses the normal late-out variance to determine if the transaction is rounded. Transactions after the variance period will not be prevented. Non-worked hours Time allocated to the employee' records when the employee has not actually worked (on-call hours, minimum-hours allocations, travel time). Note that two additional buttons at the bottom of the screen are available when this tab is displayed. When the cursor is placed in any field on a Non-Worked Hours definition line, pressing [Insert] will move that line down and insert a blank line in its place. Pressing [Delete] will remove any line where the cursor is placed, after a confirmation prompt is accepted.

FIELD
Method

DESCRIPTION
The method of recording non-worked hours. The options are: A - Record if Absent B - Extra (add to beginning of record), if worked E - Extra (add to end of record), if worked F - Fill if worked

Qualifying hours

The number of hours an employee needs as qualifying hours before it is recorded as an absence for non-worked hours. This applies only if B, E or F were selected above. Actual recorded hours for non-worked hours. Absence code that the time is allocated to. Absence codes pertaining to clocking in late (tardy). Absence codes pertaining to clocking out early (early out).

Actual hours Code Tardy Early out Premium Zones Note:

Four additional buttons at the bottom of the screen are available when this tab is displayed. The [View Details] button is explained below.

When the cursor is placed in any field on a Premium Zone definition line, pressing [Insert] will move that line down and insert a blank line in its place. Pressing [Delete] will remove any line
Kronos Incorporated Page 209 of 613

where the cursor is placed, after a confirmation prompt is accepted. Pressing [Line Defaults] while the cursor is on any line will fill the fields with default settings, which are set in the Shift Defaults option.

FIELD
Start

DESCRIPTION
The Zone start time. Valid options are: 1 - Outside authorized work period 2 - Authorized begin time 3 - Shift begin time 4 - Shift end time 5 - authorized end time F - Flexible time T - Specific time

Time Stop

Reflects the zone start time, excluding any overtime that may have been scheduled for an employee. The Zone stop time. Valid options are: 1 - Outside authorized work period 2 - Authorized begin time 3 - Shift begin time 4 - Shift end time 5 - authorized end time F - Flexible time T - Specific time

Time Pay rule profile Expansion B(efore) Expansion A(fter) Auth(orization) Req(uired)

Reflects the zone stop time, excluding any overtime that may have been scheduled for an employee. The profile used for the hours an employee will accumulate in this Zone. The length of the expansion window, in minutes, before the start of the Zone. The length of the expansion window, in minutes, after the end of the Zone. If this box is checked, the Zone requires authorization. If authorized and employee meets all qualification criteria, the profile is applied. If clear, the Zone does not require authorization. The employee still must meet the qualification criteria to have the profile applied.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 210 of 613

Premium Zone Details Click the Detail View button at the bottom of the Premium Zone screen and another screen will be displayed. It is here that the details of the zone are set. The following fields are available to define a Premium Zone.

FIELD
Zone start option

DESCRIPTION
This field defines the nature of the Zone start time. Valid options are: 1 - Outside authorized work period 2 - Authorized begin time 3 - Shift begin time 4 - Shift end time 5 - Authorized end time F - Flexible time T - Specific time

Start time

If the start option requires it, enter the zone start time, excluding any overtime that may have been scheduled for an employee. This field defines the nature of the Zone stop time. Valid options are: 1 - Outside authorized work period 2 - Authorized begin time 3 - Shift begin time 4 - Shift end time 5 - Authorized end time F - Flexible time T - Specific time

Zone stop option

Stop time

If the stop option requires it, enter the zone stop time, excluding any overtime that may have been scheduled for an employee. If both the Start and Stop time options are set to T Specific time, this field is applicable. Options are: A - Date after reference date B - Date before reference date R - On reference date X - Applies to all dates

Zone placement

Kronos Incorporated

Page 211 of 613

For more information about these options, see Premium Zone Placement.

Pay rule profile Expansion window before zone (min) Expansion window after zone (min) Authorization required

The profile used for the hours an employee will accumulate in this Zone. The length of the expansion window, in minutes, before the start of the Zone. The length of the expansion window, in minutes, after the end of the Zone. Check this box if the Zone requires authorization. If authorized and employee meets all qualification criteria, the profile is applied. Leave clear if the Zone does not requires authorization. The employee still must meet the qualification criteria to have the profile applied.

Hours in zone needed to qualify

If this field is filled in, the employee must accumulate this number of qualifying hours in the Zone, not including Expansion Zones, in order for the Pay Rule Profile for the Zone to take effect. If this field is filled in, the employee must accumulate this number of qualifying hours over the course of the whole day in order for the Pay Rule Profile for the Zone to take effect. If these fields are filled in, the employee must clock in for the day at or between these times in order for the Pay Rule Profile for the Zone to take effect. These times are absolute and do not "float" with a Flex shift. Options are: A - Actual or B - Adjusted If these fields are filled in, the employee must clock out for the day at or between these times in order for the Pay Rule Profile for the Zone to take effect. These times are absolute and do not "float" with a Flex shift. Options are: A - Actual or B - Adjusted This box defines the on-line assumption for each Premium Zone. It is applied only when there are Batch Qualifiers defined (Hours in zone/day needed to qualify) for the Zone. If checked, the system assumes that the employee qualifies for the Zone, and hours are allocated according to the Zones Pay Rule Profile. If clear, the system waits until the employee has satisfied all of the qualifiers before allocating hours according to the Zones Pay Rule Profile.

Hours in day needed to qualify

Employee must start day between...and Use which times Employee must end day between...and

Use which times On-line, assume employee will qualify

Kronos Incorporated

Page 212 of 613

Exceptions Defines exceptions related to the times set for clock-in/out, which will appear as codes on Exception Reports. Even though exceptions are determined independently of the application of the variances, the two are usually configured to act together so that the rounding, applied through the variances, is reflected in the exception reports. Company policy should dictate how exceptions are handled. Example: On a shift that begins at 8:00 and has a 15-minute Early-In Variance, you would likely set the Early-In Exception to 15 minutes as well. By doing this, an employee who clocks in within the Variance does not show up on the Exception Reports. Generally speaking, if you are rounding a clock-in, you do not want it reported as an exception. A similar situation exists with the meal/break variances and the long/short meal/ break exceptions. It differs because the meals can be of varying lengths during the shift. The exceptions for meals/breaks should be set to match the most common situations.

FIELD
Very early in (min)... Actual/Adjusted

DESCRIPTION
Enter the number of minutes relative to the clock-in, after which this exception will be triggered. If 9999 is entered, this exception is disabled. The extension of this field is the Actual/Adjusted field that specifies whether the employee's actual or adjusted transaction time is to be used when testing for the exception. Company policy will determine the choice here. For example, if you want to know how early an employee was even though there may be a grace period, select Actual time. If this is not a concern, select Adjusted time.

Early in (min)... Actual/Adjusted

Enter the number of minutes relative to the clock-in, after which this exception will be triggered. If 9999 is entered, this exception is disabled. The extension of this field is the Actual/Adjusted field that specifies whether the employee's actual or adjusted transaction time is to be used when testing for the exception. Company policy will determine the choice here. For example, if you want to know how early an employee was even though there may be a grace period, select Actual time. If this is not a concern, select Adjusted time.

Late in (min)... Actual/Adjusted

Enter the number of minutes relative to the clock-in, after which this exception will be triggered. If 9999 is entered, this exception is disabled. The extension of this field is the Actual/Adjusted field that specifies whether the employee's actual or adjusted

Kronos Incorporated

Page 213 of 613

transaction time is to be used when testing for the exception. Company policy will determine the choice here. For example, if you want to know how late an employee was even though there may be a grace period, select Actual time. If this is not a concern, select Adjusted time. Very late in (min)... Actual/Adjusted Enter the number of minutes relative to the clock-in, after which this exception will be triggered. If 9999 is entered, this exception is disabled. The extension of this field is the Actual/Adjusted field that specifies whether the employee's actual or adjusted transaction time is to be used when testing for the exception. Company policy will determine the choice here. For example, if you want to know how late an employee was even though there may be a grace period, select Actual time. If this is not a concern, select Adjusted time. Very early out (min)... Actual/Adjusted Enter the number of minutes relative to the clock-out, before which this exception will be triggered. If 9999 is entered, this exception is disabled. The extension of this field is the Actual/Adjusted field that specifies whether the employee's actual or adjusted transaction time is to be used when testing for the exception. Company policy will determine the choice here. For example, if you want to know how early an employee left even though there may be a grace period, select Actual time. If this is not a concern, select Adjusted time. Early out (min)... Actual/Adjusted Enter the number of minutes relative to the clock-out, before which this exception will be triggered. If 9999 is entered, this exception is disabled. The extension of this field is the Actual/Adjusted field that specifies whether the employee's actual or adjusted transaction time is to be used when testing for the exception. Company policy will determine the choice here. For example, if you want to know how early an employee left even though there may be a grace period, select Actual time. If this is not a concern, select Adjusted time. Late out (min)... Actual/Adjusted Enter the number of minutes relative to the clock-out, after which this exception will be triggered. If 9999 is entered, this exception is disabled. The extension of this field is the Actual/Adjusted field
Kronos Incorporated Page 214 of 613

that specifies whether the employee's actual or adjusted transaction time is to be used when testing for the exception. Company policy will determine the choice here. For example, if you want to know how late an employee left even though there may be a grace period, select Actual time. If this is not a concern, select Adjusted time. Very late out (min)... Actual/Adjusted Enter the number of minutes relative to the clock-in, before which this exception will be triggered. If 9999 is entered, this exception is disabled. The extension of this field is the Actual/Adjusted field that specifies whether the employee's actual or adjusted transaction time is to be used when testing for the exception. Company policy will determine the choice here. For example, if you want to know how late an employee left even though there may be a grace period, select Actual time. If this is not a concern, select Adjusted time. Meals - long (min) This exception occurs when the employee has a meal deduction in the record that is longer than the specified minute limits. This will apply only on manually taken meals and breaks, since automatic deductions or allocations will never be long. This exception occurs when the employee has a meal deduction in the record that is shorter than the specified minute limits. This will apply only on manually taken meals and breaks, since automatic deductions or allocations will never be short. This exception occurs when the employee has a break deduction in the record that is longer than the specified minute limits. This will apply only on manually taken meals and breaks, since automatic deductions or allocations will never be long.

Meals - short (min)

Breaks - long (min)

Breaks - short (min) This exception occurs when the employee has a break deduction in the record that is shorter than the specified minute limits. This will apply only on manually taken meals and breaks, since automatic deductions or allocations will never be short. Daily hours - long (min) Daily hours - short (min)
Kronos Incorporated

This exception occurs when the number of hours allocated during an employees day is longer than the specified limits. This exception occurs when the number of hours allocated during an employees day is shorter than the ifi d li i
Page 215 of 613

specified limits.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 216 of 613

Shift Restriction-Enforcement Differences

Restrictions can be set to block an employee's clock-in or clock-out during user-defined periods of the day. A notification of the block is sent to the device, if the system is on-line. Up to six restriction periods can be defined as an absolute time or as a time relative to the beginning or ending of the employee's authorized work period. Restrictions do not let the system record the employee's transaction in the following ways: Rejects clock-in or clock-out transactions during defined periods of the day. Sends employee notification to the devices if the transaction and response is online. Overrides restrictions through transactions or scheduling. You can define up to six restriction periods in the Shift file. The fields that may be defined for each period are described in one of two ways As an absolute time, such as 16:00 or 00:36 As a time relative to the beginning or ending of the employee's authorized work period, as in "fifteen minutes before the work period's begin time or one hour after the end of the work period".

For each restriction period's beginning and ending times, first pick which time option you want to configure, then enter additional information - either absolute time or a number of minutes. Enforcements have a different function because, They adjust an employee's clock-in or clock-out outside the work period to the work period. Enforcement also considers authorized overtime and is only activated in the Shift file

Restrictions, if set, are always applied first. If the transaction falls within a restricted period, it is rejected, and no records are created or updated. The work period enforcement values are not used at all. If the transaction does not fall within the restricted period, the work period enforcement values may be used, depending on the time, and whether or not overtime has been scheduled.

Daily Overtime Limit On a daily basis, employees may cross into overtime after they have worked x number of hours, and then into double time after y more hours. A typical example is overtime after eight hours and double time after 12 hours. These are referred to as "daily limits" and are set in the Shifts file.

Period Overtime Limit The period is based on the employees work schedule. The period limits are set independent of the daily limits. Again there is a limit for overtime and a separate limit for double time. A typical limit for overtime on a weekly basis is 40 hours. If your work schedule is based on two weeks, you may cross the overtime limit after 80 hours. Some work schedules have no
Kronos Incorporated Page 217 of 613

possibilities of crossing into overtime or double time. All of these are possible in the ShopTrac Pro system. The period limits are set in the Work Schedules file.

Premium Zone
Premium Zones can be created as an incentive or reward employees that work certain hours and/or on certain days. These zones can then have different rules and different pay categories, and be applied to specific times in any particular shift. You can define up to ten premium zones per shift. Zone Placement Zone Placement involves the date context of Premium Zones scheduling. Usually, Premium Zones are thought of simply as a period of time during an employees day, but suppose the Premium Zone is very long and ends sometime after midnight, or begins before midnight on the previous day. Zone Placement is only an option when a Premium Zone is created with a Start or Stop time option of X = Flexible time or T = Specific time. ShopTrac Pro offers these placement options for handling zone times for those situations: Apply on all dates Zone Starts on the Reference Date Zone Starts on the date before the Reference Date Zone Starts on the date after the Reference Date

Premium Zones are defined as periods of time independent of dates, as are all items in a Shift. This means that a zone set for twelve hours prior to or after the normal shift would include an employee staying very late, or coming in very early, on the day prior to or after the date of the shift. These options allow the user to 'place' the Zone relative to the shift and prevent the 'wrap-around' that may occur with long Zones or varying employee schedules. Apply on All Dates. This setting uses the Zone times as-is, with wrap-around. It is used for both employees who come in early, and those who stay late. This setting is for Zones that repeat every day. This is the most commonly used option. Zone Starts on Reference Date. The Zone is in effect from the start time on the shift reference date and nowhere else. This Zone does not include any time before the employees shift; it is applied only from the reference date into the next day. This means it is now only used for employees who stay late, not those who come in early. Zone Starts on Date Before Reference Date.
Kronos Incorporated Page 218 of 613

This option places the start of the Zone on the date before the shift reference date. This Zone applies only to employees who come in early, not those who stay late. Zone Starts on Date After Reference Date. This option places the start of the zone on the date after the shift reference date. This Zone affects only employees who work into the date after their reference date. It does not apply to the morning of the reference date. The latter three options are designed to handle 'transition' days where the Zone scheme changes. For example, Monday through Friday may have a Zone from 01:00 to 05:00 every morning. The customer would use the "Apply on All Dates" option because this Zone applies all the time, no matter whether it is "early" or "late" for the employee. Suppose Saturday does not use the Zone, however. If it is possible that employees on Friday might work past 01:00 on Saturday, Friday would have to have the Zone defined with the "Zone Starts on Reference Date" option, which would activate it only on Friday morning, not Saturday morning.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 219 of 613

CHAPTER 4 USING TIME/LABOR EDITOR

TIME/LABOR EDITOR - EMPLOYEE DISPLAY

The Time/Labor Editor allows you to view, edit, or delete data in Daily Time, Labor, and Hours records. The Time/Labor Editor allows you to edit one or several employee records at a time. When beginning a session, define the criteria at the Selection Criteria screen to narrow the list of employees you will be editing. Once selected, the main Editor screen is displayed. From this screen, changes can be made to the daily record or the labor events covered by the Editor data for each employee selected. CAUTION: Make sure that the users of the Editor do not use the same log-on User IDs. This could cause a conflict if users with the same ID are working in the Editor at the same time. Even though temporary IDs can be set up for new employees or employees who forget their password, these IDs should be unique, and not assigned to more than one person at a time. Browsing Employee files in the Time/Labor Editor Whenever employees have been selected from the Selection Criteria screen, the Editor displays the first employee selected, based on the Order by: sort field above the windows. If the cursor is in the Employee name or ID field, the Toolbar browse arrows can be used (from l-r) to move to the first record, move to the previous record, move to the next record and move to the last record. The field on the left will always be the employee's name, but the middle field will reflect the sort order selection made in the Order by: sort field on the right. For instance, if you select an Order by: of EMP ID, the middle field will be labeled EMP ID and will display the employee ID of the displayed employee. If you change the sort order to Last Name, the middle field label will change to Last Name and display the last name of the displayed employee. Other sort orders are by schedule, work center or department. Select a sort order from the drop-down list in the Order by: field. You can select a specific employee using the drop-down list in the box in the middle field, which will reflect your sort order choice. The Time/Labor Editor window The Editor main screen is divided into three windows, Days, Labor and Period Hours. At the top of the screen, above the three windows, are the employee identifying and sort order fields. If your selection criterion has isolated more than one employee, the Order by: field determines how those employees will be sorted. The three windows of the main screen contain the following: Days A browse window which lists the day, schedule etc., for each day pertaining to the Time record in the date range selected from the Selection Criteria screen. All of the days in the selection range are displayed, whether or not there is a time record for any of the days. To view the entire
Kronos Incorporated Page 220 of 613

line of information, use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the window. To view days which may extend below the window, scroll up or down through the list of days, using the arrow keys or the scroll bar on the right side of the window. Select a day to view and/or edit by highlighting the day. When a day is highlighted, the related Labor and Period Hours detail is displayed. The data in the Days window includes:

COLUMN HEADER
Day

DESCRIPTION
A list of days covered by the range requested in the selection criteria screen. Information includes the date and day of the week for each entry The schedule or shift for each employee as found in the time record for that day. If the day is not scheduled, that information is displayed in the column, according to the setting in Work Schedule Defaults for non-scheduled days. The time of the employee's first, adjusted clock-in for the day, if it is a scheduled workday. The time of the employee's last, adjusted clock-out for the day, if it is a scheduled workday. The employee's department, as found in the time record. The employee's group, as found in the time record. Work center. The employee's work center, as found in the time record. Displays a code for punches which are defined in the Shift as exceptions, e.g., A=Very early out. Displays a code if shift, schedule, department or work center is a temporary one. The pay scale for the shift worked by the employee. Meals and breaks. Indicates if a meal and/or break were recorded for that day, whether automatic or manually punched. Store up to 6 entries. Recalculation. This column indicates how edited data will be recalculated. The system determines the option shown here on the basis of the Recalculation Triggers encountered. The possible options are: A = On-line recalculation B = Fully qualified C = On-line and fully qualified

Schedule/Shift

In Out Dept Group W/C Exceptions Temporary Scale M&B

Kronos Incorporated

Page 221 of 613

By flagging the day for recalculation the system guarantees that the days hours are recalculated and the system can fully validate whether the employee met the qualifiers for the any special pay rate. SO In/Out 1, 2 and 3 Sign off. Displays who signs off the time record. Options are S - Supervisor or E - Employee. Displays a maximum of three in and out punches for the employee on that day.

If you want to change any of the information stored in the Days window, highlight the day and click Edit or double-click. The screens related to this data are displayed. For information on these screens, see Editing Times. Labor A browse window which lists the labor record for the highlighted day in the Days window. As you move from day to day in the Days window, the Labor window changes to show the labor data for the currently highlighted day. To view the entire line of information, use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the window. To view any records that may extend below the viewing area, use the vertical scroll bar at the right of the window. The data in the Labor window includes:

COLUMN HEADER
WO/Event

DESCRIPTION
Displays the work order (direct or indirect) or event (e.g., absence) related to each labor transaction for the selected day. Displays the operation related to each labor transaction for the selected day. The work order or event description. The work center related to the work order or event. The time of the opening transaction for the work order or event. The time of the closing transaction for the work order or event. The total hours spent on the work order or event. Requirements. Displays the hours requirements for the transaction. Options are D - Default hours Allocations, H - All hours, and Z - Zero hours. The pay scale applicable for the work order or event. Adjustments. Displays how a labor event was adjusted. Options included in the ShopTrac Pro system are: H - Another job was all-hours

Opn Description W/C Start Stop Hours R

Scale Adj

Kronos Incorporated

Page 222 of 613

I - Indirect while direct in progress L - Lunch deducted from labor hours M - Employee was on multiple jobs N - Non-paid absence O - Clocked out while on this job R - Start or stop time rounded X - Extra hours Z - A zero-hours job Adjustment codes can be added in the All-flags file. SO Dept Group Sign off. Displays who signs off the time record. Options are S - Supervisor or E - Employee. The department assigned to the employee on the job. The group assigned to the employee on the job.

If you want to change any of the information stored in the Labor window, highlight the day and click Edit or double-click. The screens related to this data are displayed. For information on these screens, see Editing Labor. Period Hours A browse window which lists up to four Pay Category entries on each line. Each category and the total number of hours allocated to each category are displayed. The data in this browse is summary data, so there are no records to edit. As you move from entry to entry in the Labor window, the Period Hours window changes to show the hours data for the currently highlighted labor entry. To view any records that may extend below the viewing area, use the vertical scroll bar at the right of the window. Editor Function Buttons The buttons at the bottom of the Editor screen have the following functions: Used to create a new time record or labor record. If an entry in the Days window is highlighted, clicking New creates a new time record. If an entry in the Labor window is highlighted, clicking New creates a new labor record. Used to edit a highlighted time or labor record. Used to erase a highlighted time or labor record. A prompt to confirm the deletion is displayed for a response from the user. Used to automatically recalculate Time and Labor records to produce and process a transaction list of in/out, start/ stop times. It checks the list for errors and handling errors according to configuration selections. Errors must be corrected, whether automatically or manually, before recalculation proceeds. After the list is error-free, it is processed. This recalculates all hoursrelated data in the Time and Labor records and regenerates the LHours records for the days processed. If marked, the error recap screen displays the correction.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 223 of 613

Used to save any new or edited time or labor records prior to exiting the Editor or to selecting another record. All existing records for same time periods or labor events will be replaced with the edited record. Exit the Editor without saving any changes that may have been made on any screen. Existing records are retained without alteration. Used to access the on-line help screen, displayed information on the topic currently on-screen. From the Help screen, click the Contents button to access the ShopTrac Pro menu structure, from which the user can access help on any topic.

TIME/LABOR EDITOR - SELECTION CRITERIA WINDOW

Selecting Employees Selection of employees is conducted from the opening Selection Criteria screen. There are six tabs containing criteria that can be used to select employees (Employee Selection, Exceptions, Options, Recalculation Hours, Error Checking, WIP Adjustments). Searches can be conducted based on a single-field criteria or narrowed by using a combination of fields. Once the selection criterion is complete, click OK to process the request and select the employees who fit the criteria. The fields on each of the tabs are described below: Employee Selection

FIELD
Reference Date From: ...To:

DESCRIPTION
Define dates for a range (from-to) by clicking on each date field and keying in a date (MM/DD/YYYY), or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the date box and selecting dates from the calendar. Select a range (from-to) of employee ID numbers by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the dropdown button to the right of the ID box and selecting from the list. Select a range (from-to) of departments by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the department box and selecting from the list. Take note that the Department list also includes the Group information. When you select a department from the list, the group is automatically placed into the related Group field. If you enter the department manually, you will also have to key in the group. Be sure to select the correct line, if the department has more than one group. If you have selected a Department above, the group is
Page 224 of 613

ID From: ... To:

Department From: ... To:

Group
Kronos Incorporated

From: ... To:

automatically placed into the related Group field. If you enter the department manually, you will also have to key in the group. Select a range (from-to) of work centers by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the work center box and selecting from the list. Select a range (from-to) of labor codes by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the labor code box and selecting from the list Select a range (from-to) of job classes by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the job class box and selecting from the list. Select a range (from-to) of work schedules by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the work schedule box and selecting from the list. Select a range (from-to) of teams by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the team box and selecting from the list.

Work Center From: ... To:

Labor Code From: ... To:

Job Class From: ... To:

Work Schedule From: ... To:

Team From: ... To: Exceptions

FIELD
Exceptions: Available...Selected

DESCRIPTION
Used to select only those employees who have some kind of exception condition in their work shift file. Exception types include: A - Very early clockin B - Early clockin C -Late clockin D -Very late clockin E -Very early clockout F - Early clockout G -Late clockout H - Very late clockout I - Long/short day J - Full day absence K - Not clocked out

Kronos Incorporated

Page 225 of 613

L - Open labor records M - Short meal or break N - Long meal or break O - Overridden meal or break P - Supervisor transaction Q - Temporaries R - Assigned station To select specific exception conditions, highlight the desired condition in the Available window and click the right-arrow button to move it to the Selected window. To move it back, highlight the option and click the leftarrow button. The double right-arrow and left-arrow buttons are used to move the entire list from one list to another. The double right-arrow is useful if you wanted to select most, but not all, of the options. You can move the entire list to the right window and then select out those specific conditions that you don't want, and move them back to the left. The double left-arrow is useful if you wanted to start all over by moving the entire list back. Options

FIELD
Only select not signed off

DESCRIPTION
Click this box if you want to select only those employees who have days not yet signed off. Leave the box clear if this is not a criteria and all employees will be considered against other criteria. This is used only with Electronic Signoff. Quantity synching allows the moving of quantities to the next operation as soon as they are completed, when automatic moves in a work order are turned on. This is reflected in the Quantity Complete field in the Labor/Events file. If you are using quantity calculation, this box should always be checked. Clear box to turn off quantity synching. See Quantity Synching principles for more information. Indicate if Weighting Factors and Values will follow with changes made to Work Order Operations. Check the box if the system should automatically adjust work order, operation or function fields whenever changes are made, to accommodate weighting factors and values.

Quantity synching

Adjust weighting data

Kronos Incorporated

Page 226 of 613

Leave this clear if these adjustments are not necessary. Automatically move through employee list Check box if, when editing multiple employees, clicking Save at the employee screen will display the next employee without going back to the selection screen. If checked, the next two prompts are not relevant and therefore, not accessible. Clear box to return to the selection screen after each employee change has been saved. If this box is clear, the next two prompts are accessed. Initial display Determine how the selected employees will be displayed. The options are to display the First Employee from the selected list or to display a selected Employee List. If changes will be made to all selected employees, it would likely be more efficient to move directly through the list. If changes will only be made to specific employees on the selected list, it might make more sense to display the list and select the relevant employees. See Editing multiple employee records for more information on this function. Check box to save your edits and automatically display the employee list. Clear box to save and not return to list. Specifies whether you want records that are edited to be automatically signed off when the edits are saved. The options are: A - Auto, prompt for access to fix. (This option asks you to edit records if errors are found.) N - Don't sign-off on save. (No signoff occurs when the records are saved.) Y - Auto, don't stop on errors. (Sign off the records, regardless of errors.) Sign off option Controls how many records are affected by the sign-off. The options are: A - Sign-off day highlighted. (Only those days the user highlights in the hours browse are signed off.) B - Sign-off all days in range. If error during 'All days' option Specifies what actions should be taken if an error occurs during the sign-off process. Use this only if you selected option B for the Sign off option above. The options are: A - Sign-off non-error days. (The days that created

Display employee list after save Automatic signoff on save

Kronos Incorporated

Page 227 of 613

errors are not signed off until errors are corrected.) B - Don't sign off any days. Allow editing of signed-off days Controls the permission to edit records once they are approved. Check the box to permit the user to make more edits to records after signoff. You can change a record without the knowledge of the person who originally signed off on the record. Leave clear if records cannot be edited once they are signed off. To prevent the editing of signed off records, you must also check the Supervisor sign-off required prior to upload and Employee signoff required prior to upload boxes in the Time and Attendance Configuration file. If those boxes are not checked, editing will not be permitted, regardless of a checked box here. Recalculate Hours The Recalculate Hours process frees you from manually having to edit all the fields in the Editor. You only need to change the times, and the recalculation process performs all the math calculations and error checking. When the Recalculate button is clicked from the employee screen, the system scans time and labor records to produce a transaction list of in/out, start/stop times and checks the list for errors according to configuration selections. Errors are documented and automatically corrected, before recalculation proceeds. See Error Checking below for information on setting up the correction options. Once error-free, processing is completed. It recalculates all hours-related data in the time and labor records and regenerates the LHours records for the days processed.

FIELD
Recalculate on save

DESCRIPTION
This option governs automatic recalculation when the user has completed employee changes. The options are: A - Automatic recalculation. (When you exit after editing the employee, the system automatically begins the Recalculate Hours routing, using the default dates.) N - No automatic recalculation. (The system does not recalculate when an employee record is exited after editing.) U - Ask user (Prompt user on exit to recalculate or not.)

Default date range: from...to

Select the range of dates to recalculate. The options for the From field are: B - Beginning of edit range D - Displayed reference date L - Latest reference date

Kronos Incorporated

Page 228 of 613

Options for the To field are D and L. Hours past work period for full premium zone qualification Prompt for date range on manual recalculation Recalculate if latest day is still open Indicate the number of hours past the normal work period before the employee is eligible for Premium Zone rates. If the hours recorded are less than this number, the employee time will be considered for overtime rates, but not Premium Zone. Check this box if the user should be prompted for a date range when saving. Leave clear if the system should begin recalculating immediately, without giving the user the opportunity to change dates. Check this box if recalculation should proceed even if the employee's latest day is still open. Leave clear to return an error if the latest day is not properly closed, e.g., no clock-out, open labor records. Check this box if recalculation should proceed even if a day before the employee's latest day is still open. Leave clear if the user should be alerted when a previous day is not properly closed, e.g., no clock-out, open labor records. Check this box if recalculation allows open labor records across clock-outs. Leave clear if the user should be alerted when an open labor record is found. Click on this box if marked corrections should be automatically processed in the Editor. Leave this box clear if marked corrections should not be automatically processed. This option determines whether a recalculation error list, including any corrections made, is printed before the list is processed. The options are: A - Automatically print. (Each recalculation transaction list is printed automatically after it is compiled, whether errors were encountered or not. Printing occurs before any automatic corrections are made and, if there are no errors, before the transactions are processed. This option provides a record of all recalculation activity.) B - Automatically print, errors only. (Recalculation transaction lists that contain errors are printed automatically after being compiled. Printing occurs before errors are automatically corrected. This option provides a record of all automatically corrected errors.) N - No automatic printing. (No automatic action is taken in regard to printing the error list. The user may still
Kronos Incorporated Page 229 of 613

Recalculate if a previous day is still open

Allow mid-day clock-out with open labor Automatically process marked corrections Printing Option

print the list manually.) U - Ask user. (After recalculation begins, a print box come up, allowing the user to choose whether to print or not.) Output to File mode Select where the printing option, chosen above, sends its output, the Printer or to an ASCII File. If File is selected in the Output to option above, this tells the system to either Append (add to the end of existing data) or Overwrite (replace existing data with new data) when transferring data to a file. By appending, old data is retained. By overwriting, old data is lost. If Printer is selected above, this field is not available. If File is selected in the Output to option above, this tells the system what to name the file. Take care that, if you want to retain old files, do not give this file the same name as an existing one. If Printer is selected above, this field is not applicable.

File name

Error Checking While completing the recalculation process, the system tracks out-of-sequence events (errors) from Time and Labor records that were edited by the user. For example, if you change an employees clock-in to an hour later but do not adjust the Labor records to match, the system detects Labor activity before the employee is clocked in. When errors are detected, the system will perform the following actions, according to the options defined on this tab: Examine each error individually and select a correction. Once corrected, the system automatically processes the corrections and performs a recalculation. Move to the next employee, if appropriate.

NOTE: Correcting data in the system does not correct data that has already been exported from the ShopTrac Pro system to an external computer system. If this records data has been exported, a number appears in the Batch field. In that case, any corrections you make to a Time, Labor, or LHours record in the ShopTrac Pro system also has to be made in that external system. Checking the box to the right of the selection can mark all selections on this screen. This means that the error correction will appear on the Error recap screen. Leave the box clear if you do not need to view the correction on the Error recap screen.

ERROR
Gap

DEFAULT CORRECTION OPTION

This error occurs when no error record shows when you clocked in or out, or took a break. There are three options:

Kronos Incorporated

Page 230 of 613

A - Fill the gap with default job. B - Move labor stop time forward. C - Move labor start back. Activity Before First Clock-in This error occurs if an error record starts before a clockin. Events should reside only between clock-ins and clock-outs. There are two options: A - Move clock-in back. B - Move pre-clock-in forward. (All events before clock-in.) Mid-day out, open labor This error occurs when a Labor record extends thorough an entire shift and neglects to record breaks or clock-ins or clock-outs. There are three possible corrections: A - Break Labor records into two. B - Move labor start times forward. C - Move labor stop times back. Mid-day out, on DT (downtime) /M (meal) /B (break) /A (absence) This error occurs if you are recorded as absent for the day and clock out anyway, although you are on a regular shift. There are three possible corrections: A - Break labor records into two. B - Move labor start times forward. C - Move labor stop times back. A (absence) /DT (downtime) started with open labor This error occurs if you are recorded as absent for the day and clock in anyway. There are two possible corrections: A - Move labor start times forward. B - Move labor stop time back. Activity While On DT (downtime) /M (meal) /B (break) /A (absence) This error occurs if you are working and clock in for the day record as absent while clocked in. There are two possible corrections: A - Move labor start times forward. B - Move period stop time back. Out for day, open labor Activity after last out This error occurs if you clock out before your shift has ended. The only correction for this error is to: A - Close Labor records at Out time. This error occurs if an error record starts after a clockout. Events should reside only between clock-ins and l k Th i
Page 231 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

clock-outs. There are two options: A - Move clock-out forward. B - Move post-clock-out back. Missing Clock-out This error occurs if you did not clock out at the end of the day. There are two possible corrections: A - Clock-out at last activity. B - Clock-out at shift end time. Day Left Open This error occurs if you did not clock out at the end of the day. There are two possible corrections: A - Close day at last activity. B - Close day at shift end time. WIP (Work In Process) Adjustments

FIELD
Include quantities moved in WIP adjustments list Automatically mark all processable adjustments Automatically process marked adjustments

DESCRIPTION
Check this box if the all Quantities Moved should appear in the WIP Adjustments detail. Leave it clear if only the adjustments to Quantities Completed and Scrapped are displayed. Check this box if all entries, except No Update items, are marked for processing immediately when the browse is displayed. Leave clear if all entries are unmarked when the browse is displayed. This selection is only applicable if the Automatically mark all processable adjustments box above is checked. If checked, all WIP adjustments are processed automatically after the list is displayed, without any intervention required from the user. Leave clear if the adjustment is not processed automatically and must be manually processed. Check this box if, after all adjustments are processed, the user is returned to the main selection screens. Leave clear if the system should remain on the selected record after processing. This option determines whether a WIP list, including any changes made, is printed after changes are processed. The options are: A - Automatically print. Each WIP list is printed automatically after it is processed, whether changes were made or not. Printing occurs after changes are made and, if there are no errors, before the transactions are processed. This option provides a record of all WIP

Automatically return to main screen after processing Printing Option

Kronos Incorporated

Page 232 of 613

changes. N - No automatic printing. No automatic action is taken in regard to printing the WIP changes list. The user may still print the list manually. U - Ask user. After processing is complete, a print box come up, allowing the user to choose whether to print or not. Output to File mode Select where the printing option, chosen above, sends its output, the Printer or to a File. If File is selected in the Output to option above, this tells the system to either Append (add to the end of existing data) or Overwrite (replace existing data with new data) when transferring data to a file. By appending, old data is retained. By overwriting, old data is lost. If Printer is selected above, this field is not applicable. If File is selected in the Output to option above, this tells the system what to name the file. Take care that, if you want to retain old files, do not give this file the same name as an existing one. If Printer is selected above, this field is not applicable.

File name

Once selected, an Editor screen is displayed. If you selected First Employee in the Initial display window on the Options tab above, the first employee among those chosen is displayed. From the Editor screen, changes can be made to any of the three areas covered by the Editor data, Daily Time, Labor, and Period Hours If recalculations produce errors, an Error recap screen is displayed. If any error correction defaults have been MARKed, the default correction will appear under the appropriate error recap line. If you selected Employee List, a pop-up window with all selected employees is displayed. See Editing multiple employee records for more information on editing from the employee list.

TIME/LABOR EDITOR - EDITING MULTIPLE RECORDS

The Time/Labor Editor allows you to edit a group of employees during one editing session. You may define selection criteria from the Selection Criteria screen from which the system builds an employee list, and then edit employees in any order. To have the selected employees displayed in a list, on the Options tab of the Selection Criteria screen, select L - Employee list in the Initial Display field. To return to the employee list after edits are saved on an employee record, check the Display employee list after save box.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 233 of 613

Selecting a column on the employee list will automatically reorder the list according to the selected column. For instance, if the Name column is selected, the list will be order alphabetically. If the Employee ID column is selected, the list will be ordered numerically. In an alphanumeric field, like Department, the list is ordered by character from left to right, numbers first, then capitalized letters, then lower-case letters. The Employee List includes information for each selected employee in the following columns:

COLUMN
HEADER

DESCRIPTION
Each employee's identification number. The full name of each selected employee, last name first. The work schedule for each employee as entered in his or her employee file. The department for each employee as entered in his or her employee file. The group for each employee as entered in his or her employee file. The work center for each employee as entered in his or her employee file. The status of the employee as it relates to this editor session. There are three possible statuses: Viewed - The employee is currently in the editor main window. Saved - The employee has been edited and the changes saved. [Blank] - The employee has not been edited.

ID Name (Last, First, MI) Schedule Department Group Work center Edit status

Selecting from the Employee List When the employee list is displayed, select the employee to edit by double-clicking or highlighting the record and clicking OK. If the Display employee list after save box was checked on the Options tab, once employee edits are saved, the Employee list is displayed to select another record to edit. If the employee list is long, a specific employee can be selected by scrolling down the list, using the scroll bar on the right side of the list box, or by clicking Search. Select a column to search by clicking on the column and entering data into the Search pop-up window. The record matching the search criteria is displayed. If more than one record matches, they are displayed together, with the first highlighted. If the data does not match any record on the list, the first record on the list is highlighted. If the list is redisplayed, the edited record will display "Saved" in the Edit Status column. You than then select another record to edit.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 234 of 613

TIME/LABOR EDITOR - EDITING TIME RECORDS

The Time/Labor Editor allows you to view, edit, or delete data in Daily Time, Labor, and Hours records. The Time/Labor Editor allows you to edit one or several employee records at a time. When beginning a session, define the criteria at the Selection Criteria screen to narrow the list of employees you will be editing. CAUTION: Make sure that the users of the Editor do not use the same log-on User IDs. This could cause a conflict if users with the same ID are working in the Editor at the same time. Even though temporary IDs can be set up for new employees or employees who forget their password, these IDs should be unique, and not assigned to more than one person at a time. If you selected First Employee in the Initial display window on the Selection screen, the first employee among those chosen is displayed. If you selected Employee List, a pop-up window with all selected employees is displayed. See Editing multiple employee records for more information on editing from the employee list. Once an employee is selected, the main Editor screen is displayed. From this screen, changes can be made to the daily record or the labor events covered by the Editor data for each employee selected. The Editor main screen is divided into three windows, Days, Labor and Period Hours. At the top of the screen, above the three windows, are the employee identifying and sort order fields. If your selection criterion has isolated more than one employee, the Order by: field determines how those employees will be sorted. Editing Time Records Days Window A browse window which lists the day, schedule etc., for each day pertaining to the Time record in the date range selected from the Selection Criteria screen. All of the days in the selection range are displayed, whether or not there is a time record for any of the days. To view the entire line of information, use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the window. To view days which may extend below the window, scroll up or down through the list of days, using the arrow keys or the scroll bar on the right side of the window. Select a day to view and/or edit by highlighting the day. When a day is highlighted, the related Labor and Period Hours detail is displayed. Select a time record to view and/or edit by highlighting the line for that record. Click Edit or double-click to view the time details of the record. A sub-set of screens related to this data is displayed. Edit records including employee's meals and break times, clock-ins and out, actual and adjusted times, etc. Replace old records with edited records by clicking Save, or click Cancel to exit without saving

Kronos Incorporated

Page 235 of 613

the changes. If changes were made that require recalculation, click the Recalculate button at the bottom of the main screen. The automatic recalculation process scans Time and Labor records to produce a transaction list of in/out, start/ stop times. Checks the list for errors and handling errors according to configuration selections. Errors must be corrected, whether automatically or manually, before recalculation proceeds. After the list is error-free, it is processed. This recalculates all hours-related data in the Time and Labor records and regenerates the LHours records for the days processed. On the Title Bar of the screen are the Reference Day, and the Employee ID and Name. Information on the daily record can be changed using the fields on five tabs, Time, Rules, Assignments, Processing and Allocations. Details on each field is below: Time

FIELD
Clock-Ins/Outs: Adjusted in/out First/Second/Third

DESCRIPTION
The adjusted times for up to three of the employee's actual clock ins and outs on this day. If the times for those clock-ins and outs cannot be adjusted, according to the shift rules, the same time is listed for both actual and adjusted times. The system always rounds to zero, any seconds on a time posted in the Adjusted field. The actual times of the employee's clock-ins and outs on this day. The time record tracks up to three times an employee clocks in and out during a day. Explains whether the employee took meals or breaks on this day and how the system accounts for the time spent at the meal or break. Options are: Blank - The period was not taken or deducted L - Time was deducted from labor hours only Y - Meals and/or breaks were taken and the system deducted them from the employee's time and labor record for that day.

Clock-Ins/Outs: Actual in/out First/Second/Third Meals/Breaks: Taken

Type Method

If taken, one of the two types are displayed, M - Meal or B - Break. Indicates whether the period was automatically or manually taken. The four methods are: D - Automatically deducted R - Automatically recorded X - Manually deducted

Kronos Incorporated

Page 236 of 613

Y - Manually recorded Minutes Override Indicates the number of minutes the employee took for the meal or break. The auto deduct override code (if the employee was authorized to work through the meal or break). This field should be blank unless the meal or break was overridden and time was not deducted or allocated to the meal or break.

Next to the Meal and Break section of the screen, there are two buttons, INS and DEL that can be used to insert or delete a meal or break record. To insert a record between two existing Meal and Break records, place the cursor on the line below the new line you want to open. Then click INS and a new, blank line to open. Make the record entries as required. To delete a Meal and Break record line, place the cursor on the line you want erased and click DEL. The record line is deleted and the line is closed when the system moves all lines below up.

FIELD
Sign off: Employee Sign off: Supervisor Calculated hours: Daily total Rules

DESCRIPTION
Contains the date the employee signed off the time record. Contains the date (with Employee ID number) the supervisor signed off the time record. Contains the accumulated time hours for the referenced day.

FIELD
Labor status Work schedule Shift

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the employee's status. Options are: L - Log on only, M - Multiple jobs, O - Log off only. The employee's current work schedule. The shift to which the employee is assigned (as defined by a temporary shift transaction or defaulted from the employee file). Indicates whether the employee was assigned to a temporary shift on this day. The current rate in the time record. This field is only displayed if the user has the necessary access code for restricted information. Indicates how the Rate was calculated. Options are: A - Automatic. The rate was calculated automatically

Temporary Rate

Calculation type

Kronos Incorporated

Page 237 of 613

based on the Rate Class for the employee. M - the rate was manually entered either during a transaction or an Editor session. Rate calculation A system command that describes the sequence of rate premiums that were applied to the rate to arrive at the calculated value. This field and the Calculation type field are for information only and cannot be edited. Alphabetic characters used in a rate calculation string can include B - Base rate, S - Shift, D - Department, W Work center, L - Labor code, or J - Job code. Calculation characters can include * multiply, + add, subtract, > greater than, < less than and = equal. Origination: Device ID Supervisor badge The first device where the employee clocked in for the day. The content of this field is device dependent. The Employee ID number of the last supervisor to perform a supervisor transaction for this employee on this day. If no supervisor transactions occurred, the field is blank. The reason code for the last supervisor transaction passed for this employee on this day. If no supervisor transactions occurred, the field is blank. The number of the batch process that transferred this time record to an external computer system. If this field is blank, the record has not been transferred in a batch process. This field is informational only. Its value is assigned by the system.

Supervisor code

Export: Batch number

Assignments

FIELD
Department

DESCRIPTION
The department assigned to the employee (as defined by the most recent daily change transaction, or defaulted from the Employee file). The group within the department assigned to the employee (as defined by the most recent daily change transaction, or defaulted from the Employee file). The work center assigned to the employee (as defined by the most recent daily change transaction, or defaulted from the Employee file). The labor code assigned to the employee (as defined by the most recent daily change transaction, or defaulted from the Employee file).

Group

Work Center

Labor Code

Kronos Incorporated

Page 238 of 613

Job Class

The job class assigned to the employee (as defined by the most recent daily change transaction, or defaulted from the Employee file). The rate class assigned to the employee (as defined by the most recent daily change transaction, or defaulted from the Employee file). The team the employee is currently assigned to. Could be the same as Default Team or different if the assignment was changed by a daily change transaction. The default team the employee is assigned to in his/her Employee file. If no default team is assigned, this field will be blank.

Rate Class

Current Team

Default Team

Employee Details Use this button to view the information set up for the current employee in his/her Employee file. Included on this screen are the following fields: Employee ID Employee Name Employee Badge # Social Security Number Maximum Direct Jobs Maximum Indirect Jobs Processing All fields on this screen are system-filled and not editable by the user. Their purpose is informational only. Device ID Status Absence Code Access Department Group Work Schedule Work Center Labor Code Job Class Default Team Default Work Order

FIELD
Last updated: Labor - Date/Time

DESCRIPTION
The last date and time the labor file was updated either by a Nightly Batch process or a previous Time/Labor edit. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited.

Last updated: Time - Date/Time

The last date and time the time file was updated either by a Nightly Batch process or a previous Time/Labor edit. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited.

Minimum hours for

Kronos Incorporated

Indicates the number of hours needed on this day before

Page 239 of 613

consecutive day

it is counted as a consecutive day. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited.

Currently in premium zone Daily qualifying hours

Shows the current Premium Zone number, if applicable. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited. Total number of hours for the day. If the current day is accessed, this field will display a running total of hours elapsed since the employee clocked in. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited.

Nightly batch update

Indicates if a nightly batch run has updated this information. For a past day, this box should be checked indicating that an update has been completed. For a current day, this box may or may not be checked, depending on the time of day the nightly batch is run and the time of the edit. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited.

In use status

Signifies how hours will be recalculated. Options are: A - Being recalculated by AutoCalc; E - Being edited through the Editor. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited.

Hours recalculation Indicates the status of recalculation. If the field is blank, needed no recalculation has been performed. If the field has one of the following codes, recalculation has been performed and indicates the nature of the recalculation. A indicates on-line recalculation B indicates that the recalculation has been validated C indicates that recalculation has been validated and recalculated on-line. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited. Daily schedule scale Indicates the pay scale (depending on the job) assigned to the time record. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 240 of 613

Consecutive day scale Day of week scale

Indicates the pay scale assigned to the time record. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited. Indicates the pay scale associated with the day of the week for this time record. This information is filled by the system and cannot be manually edited.

Allocations All fields on this screen are system-filled and not editable by the user. Their purpose is informational only.

FIELD
Hours allocated: Time Hours allocated: Labor Pd toward period overtime Pd toward period double time Daily toward daily overtime Daily toward daily double time Daily toward period overtime Daily toward period double time Next absence: Code

DESCRIPTION
Indicates the total number of hours allocated in the time file for this day for this employee. Indicates the total number of hours allocated in all the labor records with the same reference date for this employee. Indicates the subtotal of period hours accrued for this employee toward period overtime. Indicates the subtotal of period hours accrued for this employee toward period double time. Indicates the subtotal of daily hours accrued for this employee toward daily overtime. Indicates the subtotal of daily hours accrued for this employee toward daily double time. Indicates the subtotal of daily hours accrued for this employee toward period overtime. Indicates the subtotal of daily hours accrued for this employee toward period double time. If a Partial Day Absence has been entered in Transaction Entry, to account for the time between normal shift start time and the time when the employee clocks in, the absence code for that PDA is displayed. Once the clockin has occurred, the field will be blank. At the time of clock-in, the system will create a labor record for the missing time, using the absence code. This feature can be used for a supervisor to check on an employee who has not clocked in, and someone else entered the PDA. This field displays the number of hours, from normal shift start time, when the employee will clock-in, as entered on the PDA. This is considered an approximate
Page 241 of 613

Hours

Kronos Incorporated

time, for the actual employee clock-in time will be used on the labor record. Carrying team If a default Team has been entered in the Employee file, and a PDA is active, that default Team will be displayed here.

Editor Function Buttons The buttons at the bottom of the Editor screen have the following functions: Used to save any new or edited time records prior to exiting the Editor or to selecting another record. All existing records for same time periods will be replaced with the edited record. Exit the Editor without saving any changes that may have been made on any screen. Existing records are retained without alteration. Used to access the on-line help screen, displayed information on the topic currently on-screen. From the Help screen, click the Contents button to access the ShopTrac Pro menu structure, from which the user can access help on any topic. To edit information in the Labor records, see Editing Labor Records.

TIME FILES
The Time file collects daily transactions related to an employees typical schedule at the facility and creates one time record per day. Collecting information starts with the initial clock-in and ends with the final clock-out for the day. When an employee clocks in, the system verifies the Employee ID number. If it is valid, a time record is created for that date. Every time this employee clocks in or out on this date, the times are recorded in the Actual and Adjusted fields of the time record. If the employee clocks in or out within the variances defined on the Shift file, the time is rounded and that adjusted time is the figure recorded in the Adjusted field. Each Time File record also gathers additional information about an employee's day from the Shift file and the Employee file. From these, it collects information such as the employee's shift number, department, or status for that day and maintains totals needed for faster operation of the system. You can view and edit the time file by selecting Time/Labor Editor. Information in the Time File The Time file contains many pieces of data including information about the actual times (dates and times when this employee clocked in/out), meals and breaks, and hours (calculated Time and Attendance hours). Clock-Ins and Clock-Outs This information pertains to the times the employee clocked in and out for the day. Actual In/Out
Kronos Incorporated Page 242 of 613

The actual times an employee clocks in and out on this day. The Time record tracks the first three times an employee clocks in and out during a day. Adjusted In/Out The adjusted time for each of the employee's actual clock-ins and outs. If the times for those clock-ins and outs cannot be adjusted according to the shift rules, the same time is listed for both actual and adjusted times. The system always rounds to zero, any seconds on a time posted in the Adjusted field. Meals and Breaks The meals and breaks data keeps track of the corresponding items scheduled in the Shift file and any overrides that were scheduled as well. Taken This information explains whether the employee took a meal/break on this day and how the system accounts for the time spent at the meal/break: Blank L Y Type Two different types can be tracked: M B Method Whether the period was automatically or manually taken there are four methods: D R X Y Minutes The number of minutes the employee took for a meal/break. Override The Auto Deduct Override code (if the employee was authorized to work through the meal or break). Other Information The Time File also stores much of the information used when the system allocates hours to Labor and LHours records. This includes:
Kronos Incorporated Page 243 of 613

The period not taken or deducted. Time was deducted from Labor Hours only. Meal/Break was taken and the system deducted it from the employees Time record for that day.

Meal Break

Automatically deducted Automatically recorded Manually deducted Manually recorded

Work Schedule information Day of the schedule Day of the week Consecutive day count Department and Group Work Center Labor Code and Job class Status

Employee information

Sub-totals of hours towards the nine different hours levels Last time the Time and Labor records were updated Whether or not the related Labor and LHours records need to be recalculated

TIME/LABOR EDITOR - EDITING LABOR RECORDS

The Time/Labor Editor allows you to view, edit, or delete data in Daily Time, Labor, and Hours records. The Time/Labor Editor allows you to edit one or several employee records at a time. When beginning a session, define the criteria at the Selection Criteria screen to narrow the list of employees you will be editing. CAUTION: Make sure that the users of the Editor do not use the same log-on User IDs. This could cause a conflict if users with the same ID are working in the Editor at the same time. Even though temporary IDs can be set up for new employees or employees who forget their password, these IDs should be unique, and not assigned to more than one person at a time. If you selected First Employee in the Initial display window on the Selection screen, the first employee among those chosen is displayed. If you selected Employee List, a pop-up window with all selected employees is displayed. See Editing multiple records for more information on editing from the employee list. Once an employee is selected, the main Editor screen is displayed. From this screen, changes can be made to the time record or the labor events for any period of time for each employee selected. The Editor main screen is divided into three windows, Days, Labor and Period Hours. At the top of the screen, above the three windows, are the employee identifying and sort order fields. If your selection criterion has isolated more than one employee, the Order by: field determines how those employees will be sorted. Editing Labor Records
Kronos Incorporated Page 244 of 613

Labor window A browse window that lists the labor record for the highlighted day in the Days window. As you move from day to day in the Days window, the Labor window changes to display the labor data for the currently highlighted day. This includes any work order and operation related to the day record. To view the entire line of information, use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the window. To view information which may extend below the window, scroll up or down through the list of days, using the arrow keys or the scroll bar on the right side of the window. To access a labor record: Select a labor record to view and/or edit by highlighting the line for that record. Click Edit or double-click to view the details of the record. A sub-set of screens related to this data is displayed. Edit records including work order quantities, departments or work centers, labor codes, etc. Replace old records with edited records by clicking Save, or click Cancel to exit without saving the changes. If changes were made that require recalculation, click the Recalculate button at the bottom of the main screen. The automatic recalculation process scans Time and Labor records to produce a transaction list of in/out, start/ stop times. The process also checks the list for errors and handling errors according to configuration selections. Errors must be corrected, whether automatically or manually, before recalculation proceeds. After the list is error-free, it is processed. This recalculates all hours-related data in the Time and Labor records and regenerates the LHours records for the days processed. On the Title Bar of the screen are the Reference Day, and the Employee ID and Name. Information on the daily record can be changed using the fields on four tabs, Time, Event, Assignments and Quantity Destinations, Memo, Work Instructions. Below the Labor window is the Period Hours window that displays the breakdown of total hours for each pay category. Details on each field is below: Time

FIELD
Adjusted Date /Time, Start/Stop

DESCRIPTION
The dates and times when this employee started and stopped this event after those times have been adjusted according to the rules defined in this employee's shift record. For instance, if the employee clocked in early, but within the Early In variance in the shift record, the actual time would be listed in the Actual Time window, while the Adjusted Time window would display the rounded time. The dates and times when this employee actually started and stopped this event.
Page 245 of 613

Actual Date /Time, Start/Stop

Kronos Incorporated

Elapsed time

The Actual Times window also automatically supplies the total time that elapsed between the time the employee logged on and off the event. Labor type. These are preset flags that cannot be added to. Included are: A - Absence records B - Break D - Default (down time records) L - Direct/Indirect (normal) labor M - Meal X - Extra hours labor records

Type

Work order Operation

The event worked on by this employee. This can be a work order (direct or indirect) or an absence code. The operation or sequence number of the work order. If an indirect work order or absence code is selected, this field is not applicable. The function within the operation or the work order operation. If an indirect work order or absence code is selected, this field is not applicable. Enter the quantity completed by this operation. This is a system-filled field that tracks the total quantity moved to the next operation when completed. The number of items entered as scrap during this transaction. This number is subtracted from the quantities ordered to account for their absence from the final completed count. This is a system-filled field which tracks the total quantity moved to rework or out of the item count and subtracted from the quantities ordered count. The reason the items were scrapped. These codes are defined in Code Tables. The work center responsible for the scrap. The code associated with finishing an operation. The date the employee signed off the selected labor record.

Function

Quantity completed Quantity moved Quantity scrapped

Quantity moved

Scrap code Scrap work center Completion code Sign off: Employee

Sign off: Supervisor The date (with Employee ID number) the supervisor signed off the selected labor record.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 246 of 613

Export: Batch

The number of the batch process that transferred this record to another computer system. This number never changes, and you cannot modify the value. If this field is blank, the record has not been transferred in a batch process. This field may not be edited. A system-generated identifier for the labor record. This field cannot be edited.

Labor ID Event

FIELD
Work order

DESCRIPTION
The event worked on by this employee provided by the system from the previous Time tab. This field is informational only. The operation or sequence number of the work order provided by the system from the previous Time tab. This field is informational only. The function within the operation or the work order operation provided by the system from the previous Time tab. This field is informational only. The same transaction codes are available as would be available at a device. Click on the drop-down window and select the appropriate code. Indicates how the time was allocated to this labor record. Options are: D - Default hours allocation. (This labor record is part of the usual hours allocation.) H - All hours. (All hours go to this labor record regardless of what other jobs may have been in progress. This is usually done on meal and break indirect work orders. This hours requirement is the opposite of Z.) Z - Zero hours. (If other jobs are in progress, this job gets no hours. This is usually done on default indirect work orders. This hours requirement is the opposite of H.)

Operation

Function

Transaction code

Hours requirement

Pay scale Weighting factor

The pay scale associated with the labor record. It comes from the work order or absence code. The weighting factor from the drop-down list used for this operation. This factor is used to group labor records by type when hours are allocated. The options are: A - Evenly Divided Hours (default) B - Standard Time Per Piece

Kronos Incorporated

Page 247 of 613

C - Quantity Available for Work D - Operation User-defined Field E - Work Order Quantity Ordered F - Work Order User-defined Field G - Extended Standard (standard time per piece x quantity ordered H - Time to Complete (standard time per piece x quantity available.) Weighting value This is the value used to divide hours among the jobs in each factor group. For instance, if you selected a Weighting factor of E, the value could be set equal to the quantity ordered so that the hours worked would be divided equally by the number of items to be completed on the work order. The value field can also be used to divide hours among the total number of jobs. The number of adjusted hours assigned to the labor record. Determines if the hours qualify towards hours limits set in the Shift file. Any adjustments made to the record are recounted. Adjustment codes include: 1-6 - Up to six meals or breaks deducted A - Adjusted record to match T & A H - Another job was all-hours I - Indirect job added while direct in progress L - Lunch deducted while on this job M - Employee was on multiple jobs N - Non-paid absence O - Clock out while on this job R - Start or stop time rounded X - Extra Hours Z - This job was zero hours Project Rate Enter a project name that will be used to combine two or more work orders under a single umbrella. The employee's calculated rate in dollars to four decimal places. This field is available only if the user has

Hours allocated Hours qualify Adjustments

Kronos Incorporated

Page 248 of 613

security access to the rate files. Type The single character with two possible values: A - Automatic. The rate was automatically calculated by the system. M - Manual. The user manually entered the rate. This field is available only if the user has security access to the rate files. Calcs Calculation. The rate calculation string that shows how the rate was determined. The field can only be edited if the rate was manually entered. Alphabetic characters used in a rate calculation string can include B - Base rate, S - Shift, D - Department, W Work center, L - Labor code, or J - Job code. Calculation characters can include * multiply, + add, subtract, > greater than, < less than and = equal. This field is available only if the user has security access to the rate files. Pay rules The list of pay rules which may be used when allocating the hours of the labor record to the time file. More than one pay rule ID may be displayed.

Assignments

FIELD
Work schedule Shift

DESCRIPTION
The employee's work schedule The shift assigned to the employee, as assigned by a temporary shift transaction or defaulted from the employee file. The department entered at the time of the event tracked by this record, or defaulted from the employee file. The group entered at the time of the event tracked by this record, or defaulted from the time file. The work center entered at the time of the event tracked by this record, or defaulted from the time file. The labor code entered at the time of the event tracked by this record, or defaulted from the time file. The job class entered at the time of the event tracked by this record, or defaulted from the time file. The rate class entered at the time of the event tracked by this record, or defaulted from the time file. This field is

Department Group Work center Labor code Job class Rate class

Kronos Incorporated

Page 249 of 613

only visible if the users have the required security access level. Machine Team Misc 1-4 Quantity Destinations The machine associated with this operation. The team assigned at the time of the event tracked by this record, or defaulted from the time file. The contents of the user-defined fields as defined in the Labor Configuration file.

FIELD
Completed Destination: Quantity moved Work order Operation Function Scrapped Destination: Quantity moved Work order Operation

DESCRIPTION
Complete quantities that have been moved from the current work order to another. The work order that the completed quantities, above, have been moved to. The work order operation that the completed quantities, above, have been moved to. The work order operation function that the completed quantities, above, have been moved to. Scrapped quantities that have been moved from the current work order and will be deducted from the quantities ordered on the work order. The work order that the scrapped quantities, above, have been moved to. If the work order above is a Rework function, this field can be used to enter the operation. If an indirect work order is selected, this field is not applicable. If the work order above is a Rework function, this field can be used to enter the operation function. If an indirect work order is selected, this field is not applicable.

Function

Memo Included on this tab are the Work Order number, and the Operation and Function numbers. The Labor Text window is used to make any comments related to the editing of the labor record. The maximum amount of information that can be entered is 14 lines of text. This information prints on various reports. Work Instructions Included on this tab are the Work Order number, and the Operation and Function numbers. The Work Instructions window is used to make any comments related to the operation and/or function. The maximum amount of information that can be entered is 14 lines of text. This information prints on various reports.
Kronos Incorporated Page 250 of 613

Editor Function Buttons The buttons at the bottom of the Editor screen have the following functions: Used to save any new or edited labor records prior to exiting the Editor or to selecting another record. All existing records for same time periods will be replaced with the edited record. Exit the Editor without saving any changes that may have been made on any screen. Existing records are retained without alteration. Used to access the on-line help screen, displayed information on the topic currently on-screen. From the Help screen, click the Contents button to access the ShopTrac Pro menu structure, from which the user can access help on any topic.

LABOR FILE
The Labor File gathers information about an employees events taking place in a day. For example, if an employee changes departments, job classes, labor codes, or work centers in the course of the day, the system creates an event (record) in the Labor file. Each record that the system creates in the Labor file combines data that an employee has entered into a terminal with additional data from the Employee file, such as the employee's home department, work center, job class, or labor code. The information in each Labor file record is related to a Time file record by a reference date. For every Time File record, there may be many related Labor File records; however, the total Labor hours for a single day must always equal the Time hours for the same day. This information can be edited as required. Each Labor record must contain either a work order or an absence code, since all time is allocated to one of these events. It also contains the hours allocated to the event. You can find the Labor File by selecting Time/Labor Editor. Information in the Labor/Events File The Labor File contains information on specific job events that occurred during the day. Each Labor record also contains some information needed for fast on-line processing. Each Labor record stores the record numbers of the Pay Rules currently in effect for that record. This way the system only searches for the Pay Rule when the Labor record is created, or the Pay Rules change. For most hours allocation operation, such as when an employee logs on a job or clocks out, the open Labor records have a quick reference to the Pay Rules being used. Start and Stop Times The Labor record contains the actual and adjusted start and stop times for the work order or absence code in this Labor record. Unlike the Time file, there is only one set of start stop times. Fields Related to the Work Order These fields contain information related to a work order: Work Order/Event
Kronos Incorporated

The event worked on by the employee.

Page 251 of 613

Operation Quantity complete ...moved Quantity scrapped ...moved Scrap code Operation status Other Information

The operation or sequence number of the work order. The cumulative quantity completed on this operation. The amount entered as a scrap quantity during this transaction. The reason the quantity was scrapped. Complete or incomplete.

The Labor record contains further information about the event, either work order or absence. In the case of an absence, some of this information is taken from the Time record. In the case of a work order, the information may come from the operation, or may be collected at the time of the transaction. The information that is in this category is: Department and Group Work Center Labor Code Job Class Rate class

There are several pieces of information in the Labor record that are used in other places within the ShopTrac Pro system, and are available for export. A B D L M X 1-6 A H I M N The type of labor. This is used as a possible factor in hours allocation. The Labor Types are fixed and cannot be changed or added to. Absence record allocated to an absence code. Break record allocated to an indirect work order. Default Labor record allocated to the employees default job. Labor record allocated to a work order. Meal record allocated to an indirect work order. Absence record allocated to an absence code with an Allocation of X. Adjustments codes that tell what changes were made to the hours allocated to the Labor record. Meal/Break deducted Adjusted Another job was all hours Indirect while direct in progress Multiple jobs Non-paid absence
Page 252 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

O R Z

Clock out with job open Rounded Another job was zero hours Hours requirements that determine how hours were allocated. The pay scale used for hours allocation. Whether or not the hours on this record were counted as Qualifying Hours for consecutive days and Premium Zones. Rate information and how it was derived.

QUANTITY SYNCHING
Quantity Synching allows you to move quantities to the next operation as soon as they are completed, when automatic moves in a work order are turned on. Labor records against work orders with automatic moves on, always show both a quantity Complete and a quantity Moved. Quantity synching is related to the Quantity Complete field in the Labor/Events file, which reflects the cumulative quantity completed moved in this operation. When Quantity Synching is activated in the Configuration/Time-Labor Editor, you can see the moved data updated when the Work Order, Operation, Function or Quantity Completed fields change. There are several general principles used in Quantity Synching: Moved Fields Only Updated on Edit The Moved fields are updated only when one of the four driving fields is changed. If those fields are never changed, then the Moved data does not move. Moved Fields Blank if No Destination Operation If Quantity Synching is based on the Work Order, Operation, and Function you have entered, there is no Destination Operation, and all the Moved fields are set to blank. This is the case when you are editing a Labor record for the last operation in a Work Order. There is no place for the quantity to move, so the Moved fields are set to blank. Moved Fields Blank for Setup If the function is 1, then the Move fields are set to blank. Setup operations do not handle quantities, so there can be no quantities moved from them. To insure that all affected records are updated with any new quantities, run the Nightly batch function in the Utilities menu option.

LHOURS FILE
Kronos Incorporated Page 253 of 613

As daily transactions occur, the system looks for specific attributes of the hours that need to be allocated and searches for a Pay Rule that matches the attributes of the hours that need allocation. It conducts a search in the Pay Rule Profile list from the highest level of detail to the lowest. This ensures that the most specific match for your particular rule will be found. Once the system finds a match, it uses the information to create the LHours records for the time allocated. For each Labor record, there may be many LHours records, each containing a pay code and a number of hours. Purpose of the LHours file The LHours file is an optional file in which hours recorded in the Labor/Events file are further classified into pay categories. The Time/Labor Editor shows the hours allocated to each LHours record. You can find the LHours file (referred to as Period Hours) in the Time/Labor Editor. Contents of the LHours file The LHours file actually contains relatively few pieces of information. They fall into three categories: The Pay Category The hours allocated to each Pay Category Rate information

TIME/LABOR EDITOR - AUDIT TRAIL

Audit Trail is a part of the ShopTrac Pro system that provides a record of all manual changes to Time and Labor data. It is designed to help the user when trying to determine why a Time or Labor record does not contain the data expected, by showing who made the change, when it was changed, why it was changed, and what data was changed. Time and Labor changes are logged by Audit Trail. These changes are viewed by the user through various printed reports or on-screen, within the record that has been modified. For each record edited, Audit Trail records the employee ID of the person making the change, date and time the change was made, and the reason it was made (optional). Audit Trail can be configured to record the entire edited record, or just the changes made to it. Audit Trail is configured in Time & Attendance Configuration and in Labor Configuration. How an Audit Trail Record Is Created Audit Trail can be configured to create records any time the two principal files; Time and Labor are changed. Changes to these files more commonly occur through the Time/Labor Editor or through Electronic Timecard. Changes made to these files through any of the data entry screens are also recorded. Following is an example of when and how an Audit Trail record is created when configured to
Kronos Incorporated Page 254 of 613

open whenever a Time or Labor file is edited, in this case, in the Editor. Example: From the Editor, once all corrections and recalculations have been completed, the user clicks Save to save the changes. The system then normally returns to the selection screen or an employee list for another edit. When Audit Trail is activated, once Save is clicked, the Audit Trail window is displayed. No corrections to the file are saved until the Audit Trail window prompts are completed and the Save is clicked again. Once the corrected Time or Labor record is saved and an Audit Trail record is created and saved to a file. If the Audit Trail window is exited without saving, the system displays the previous screen and a Modified Record Not Saved message box appears. This informs the user that the changes made to the record and the Audit Trail entry were not saved. The changes must be reentered and the proper steps followed. Depending on how Audit Trail is configured, the fields changed in the record are stored in separate Time and Labor files. This allows the user to track whichever type of audit data is needed. The Reason Code field in the Time/Labor Editor configuration setup can be set as a mandatory or optional entry. In the Editor, the employee ID of the person editing the record is displayed as recorded with the date and time when the record is saved. If the record is being edited in other than the Editor, when the entry is saved, the Audit Trail window is displayed and the users must enter their ID and Pin number before continuing.

AUTOMATIC HOURS RECALCULATION

If the Automatic Recalculation option is set in the Time/Labor Editor configuration, it scans the Time file for days marked for recalculation and then recalculates their hours, resetting the Hours Allocated in all Labor records for the day and completely regenerating the days Hours records. Within the Editor, the user can set the recalculation feature for each session. There also is a separate utility that can be used to recalculate records. These are some of the features of the Automatic Recalculation (also referred to as AutoCalc) utility: Can run continuously, once in a while, or on demand Processes days in an unlimited, user-defined date range Reports errors that prevent recalculation from completing successfully Automatic exit, with exit script, as in Transaction Processor Avoids collisions with transactions that may have come in during processing Avoids collisions with the Time/Labor Editor, which may also have a session going for the day in question Fully automatic processing

Kronos Incorporated

Page 255 of 613

These two hours-recalculation functions are much alike. The daily time and labor hours being recalculated are loaded into temporary working files, the hours are recalculated, then the time and labor records are put back into the live files, along with a new set of hours records. Because the utilities use the same mechanisms to handle time and labor data, these similarities exist: Each instance of the process has a unique identifier Time and labor records may be used by only one process at a time

The automatic recalculation utility requires a parameter to specify its unique identifier. This is used in case there is more than one session of recalculation running on the system at the same time. This parameter is passed from the Access Profile setup. The ID parameter is required. If it is not specified, an error message "Missing or Invalid AutoCalc ID Parameter" will be displayed. The system sees the Automatic Recalculation and Editor session the same way, and the use of the ID prevents two processes from accessing the same data, regardless of which session originates the process. When Automatic Recalculation finds a day needing recalculation, it checks to see whether another process is using that particular day. If any process is using it, the day is skipped and the utility tries again on its next pass of the time file.

ELECTRONIC SIGNOFF
The Electronic Signoff feature lets employees and/or their supervisors confirm hours allocated to the Labor/Events records on which they worked for the day. The signoff may be required daily or on a periodic basis, depending on company policy. Signoff may be required before data is uploaded to another system (e.g., payroll). Electronic Signoff lets a supervisor use the Time/Labor Editor to sign off on the labor records. The Labor Signoff feature includes a Signoff Exception Report and signoff fields that are available in the Labor Period Time Card report. Electronic Signoff is a part of the Editor and lets supervisors use one utility to correct and approve records. You can configure Signoff in the Editor and customize it for your companys requirements. As part of your implementation of Signoff, you may need to do the following preliminary implementation procedures: Update the supervisor handbooks to include policies and procedures for Labor Signoff. Configure the Editor, menus, etc., to perform signoffs. Train supervisors on the use of the Editor for Signoffs. Train any employees who will use this utility.

The following policy questions arise with the use of this feature:
Kronos Incorporated Page 256 of 613

Should employees approve their time records? This may not be much different from current policy and paper timecards. Should supervisors approve their employees time records? Should they do this only after the employee has approved them? What is the timetable for approval? Who makes corrections to records, Data Administrators or supervisors? Can records be edited once they have been approved? Who runs signoff exception reports and when? Are supervisors restricted to approving their own department, group, etc.? If so, who takes over the task when the supervisor is absent? What is the procedure if employees find errors in their records prior to signoff?

Examining and Signing Off the Time Records Special configuration parameters control the signoff features of the Editor. These parameters depend upon how you use the Editor. To examine and sign off the records: Select the Editor from the menu. Enter your Employee ID and PIN number. It is a recommended policy to assign PINs to all employees who use the Signoff utility. The system displays the Selection Criteria screen. Enter the date range and other information to identify the records that you want to examine and sign off. You can configure the Editor to restrict changes to record data. The system displays the records either on a list or one employee at a time, depending on the Initial Display setting. Examine the records. If you need, examine and edit the records. If editing is not allowed, the records are view-only. If the records are correct, click Signoff. This updates the screen with either an E (employee) or an S (supervisor) in the SO column. After you sign off the records, click Save to save the signoffs. The Signoff utility gives you several configuration options. You can configure the system-wide defaults for signoff using the following options: Editor Configuration Labor Signoff Time Signoff

Kronos Incorporated

Page 257 of 613

CHAPTER 5 MAINTAINING EMPLOYEE FILES

EMPLOYEES
The Employee file identifies all the employees in the company. Create an Employee file record for each of the employees in the ShopTrac Pro system. An Employee record contains basic information about a worker, such as the Employee ID number, name, Social Security number, and access level. Use employee information that exists on an external computer system to help create the Employee file. See Utilities for more information on importing data for the Employee file. Define the Employee Defaults File First Before beginning to set up all the files necessary for the system, first define the Employee Defaults, which contain many default values for employee records. Employee File The Employee file uses information from many of the files in other segments of the ShopTrac Pro program. It is important to define all the previous files that are planned for use before beginning to define employees. (If entering a value that hasn't been defined in the appropriate data file, the system displays an error message.) Generally the Employee file contains the greatest level of detail. The initial screen displayed when the Employee file is accessed, is a selection screen. Select one of the following options: Browse Employee File Select Employee by ID Select Employee by Name Add New Employee

Additionally the screen contains two none selectable field that provide background information on usage. The fields are: Previous Employee Viewed ID ID number of the last employee viewed. Name Name of the last employee viewed. Employee Capacity - (####) - ## - represents the number of employees associated with the license.
Kronos Incorporated Page 258 of 613

Used Number of employees currently entered in ShopTrac Pro. Available Number of remaining slots for entry into the employees database for current license. Status Visual representation of the usage level against the remaining allocation available. Click on one of the options to browse: Employee list Locate a specific employee by name Employee ID Add a new employee If the user has previously selected an employee and returned to this opening screen, the previously selected employee is displayed on the bottom half of the screen.

Note: Add

Check the Add New Employee button. Complete the fields according to the explanations below and press Save to save the record. Press Cancel to exit without saving the record. Edit Select the employee by checking Browse Employee File, Select Employee by Name or Select Employee by ID. Make the desired changes and press Save to save the record. Press Cancel to exit without saving the changes. Exiting without saving changes means that the record remains in its original form. Copy Select the employee to copy from and click on the File button on the Menu Bar. Select Copy from the drop-down menu. All the information related to the copied employee remains the same, but the Employee ID field is cleared. The user must enter a new, unused ID number, change the employee last, first, and middle initial name fields. Other fields to consider in the new record are the social security number and the hire date. Make any other desired alterations and press Save to save the record. Press Cancel to exit without saving the entries. Delete Select the employee to erase either with the browse or the find options. When the employee record is displayed, press Delete. The system will prompt for a confirmation of the deletion. Press Yes to confirm or No to exit without deleting. Browsing the Employee File Whenever the Employee File is opened to an employee record, the toolbar contains a set of browse arrows which are used (from l-r) to move to the first record, move to the previous record, move to the next record and move to the last record. The browse sequence will be dependent on the location of the cursor when the browse arrows are
Kronos Incorporated Page 259 of 613

pressed. If the cursor is in the ID field, the browse will move in the order of the ID data (lower numbers to higher numbers). If, the cursor is in any of the name fields, the browse will move in the order of the last name data (alphabetically A-Z). If the cursor is in the Employee ID Number field, the browse will move in the order of the Employee ID Numbers (lower to higher). If the cursor is in any other field, the browse arrows are not accessible. The Employee File Screens When the Employee file is accessed, the following fields are displayed above the five tabbed screens. If creating a new employee record, these fields are blank.

FIELD
Employee ID Last Name First Name Middle Initial

DESCRIPTION
A unique identifier for the employee. Maximum of six numbers (no letters or special characters). Mandatory field. The employee's last name. Maximum of 14 characters. Mandatory field. The employee's first name (optional). Maximum of 10 characters. Mandatory field. The employee's middle initial (optional). Maximum of one character.

The tabbed screens are: Details Home Absence Labor Miscellaneous Accruals

Their fields are described below: Details

FIELD
Social Security Number PIN Number

DESCRIPTION
The nine-digit social security number of the employee. A four-digit number that is unique to each employee. This number is used to enter the Transaction Entry menu option. These numbers are invisible to the user so make sure they are entered correctly. Enter the same four-digit number above to confirm that the pin number has been correctly entered. If the confirmation is denied, reenter the PIN number
Page 260 of 613

Confirm PIN Number

Kronos Incorporated

Badge Number Hire Date Home

above and then the confirmation. A unique number (maximum 10 characters) required if Badge Mapping is active. The date the employee was hired. (Optional field)

FIELD
Work Schedule Department

DESCRIPTION
The name of the employee's default work schedule. Select the appropriate schedule from the drop-down list. Mandatory field. The department to which an employee is assigned. Select the appropriate department from the drop-down list. This is an optional field. The group to which an employee is assigned. Select the appropriate group from the drop-down list. This is an optional field. The employee's work center. Select the appropriate work center from the list. This is an optional field. The employee's labor code. Select the appropriate labor code from the list. This is an optional field. The employee's job class. Select the appropriate work center from the list. This is an optional field. Select the class that will be used to determine how rate premiums are applied. Select the appropriate rate class from the list. This is an optional field. Define the level of access the employee will have to perform certain types of transactions, including supervisor transactions. New levels can be entered in the Flags field. Mandatory field. The field is used to enter the employee's base pay rate. For those users not having the required access level, this field is not displayed.

Group Work Center Labor Code Job Class Rate Class

Access Level

Base Rate

Absence

FIELD
Full Day: Absence Code

DESCRIPTION
This field is used to define an absence code that will be used on those scheduled days when the employee is reported as absent. Select the appropriate absence code from the list. If used, Nightly Batch posts hours to the code. This is an optional field.
Page 261 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Full Day: Option

Partial Day Absences: Tardy

Partial Day Absences: Early Out

Partial Day Absences: Fill Day Labor

Select whether an absence is to be charged against an absence code or against a default job. For some companies who may be job shops, all time, including an absence expense, is charged against a job. This is an optional field. Select the code from the drop-down list to be used to fill the time between the shift start time and the actual time an employee clocks in. This fills out the early part of an employee's day. If this field is left blank, the system does not fill the time when employees clock in later than their shift start time. If the employee is in a Flex Shift, the tardy code will never be used. If used, Nightly Batch posts hours to the code. This is an optional field. Select the code from the drop-down list to be used to fill the time between the shift end time and the actual time an employee clocks out. In other words, it fills out the later part of an employee's day. If this field is left blank, the system does not fill the time when employees clock out earlier than their shift end time. Select the code from the drop-down list to be used to fill in those hours not covered by tardy or early-out codes. It is primarily used for absences that occur during the middle of the day.

FIELD
Labor Status

DESCRIPTION
This field is used to group employees and not as a check against transactions. The only exception is the terminated status, which restricts employees with that status to perform any type of transaction. This field is mandatory. Options are: A - Time and attendance only L - Log on only M - Multiple jobs O - Log off only T - Terminated (If selected, clockin is not permitted.) Y - Multiple jobs - supervisor The total number of jobs the employee is allowed to log on concurrently. The number of indirect jobs that the employee is allowed to log on concurrently.
Page 262 of 613

Maximum Multiple Jobs Maximum Indirect Jobs

Kronos Incorporated

Default Team Meal & Break Overlap Default Work Order Operation

The team that the employee is assigned to. A supervisor can assign other teams. This is an optional field. Check this box if the system can accept hours allocated to meals and breaks while still logged onto jobs. Leave unchecked if the employee must log off jobs prior to clocking out for a meal or break. The name of the default work order. The operation sequence number for the work order specified above, unless the work order is an indirect work order. If the work order is a direct one, select a valid operation. The function for the operation specified above, unless the work order is an indirect work order. If the work order is a direct one, select a valid function, if any have been set up for an operation.

Function

Miscellaneous

FIELD
Device ID Transaction Details Batch Hours Only

DESCRIPTION
The name of the device to which the employee is assigned. Select it from the drop-down list. Check this box to activate messages in the Transaction Log that details hours allocation for employees. Leave unchecked if this is not necessary. Check this box to turn off the on-line calculation of employee hours. If on-line calculation is off, the hours will be accumulated in batch at the end of the day. Leave unchecked if the on-line calculation should be turned on, in other words, constantly updated. These are fields that can be used to store miscellaneous pieces of information about the employee. These could contain an address, birthday, etc., which cannot be entered into any other field. This is an optional field. Note: These fields are named in the Setup program. If named there, the new field names replace the Misc 1-6 field labels.

Misc: 1-6 (Employee User- Defined Fields)

Accruals

FIELDS
Balances Accrual Code Accrued

DESCRIPTION
Absence code or a combination code Number of hours allowed. Note: Changed by ShopTrac Pro.
Page 263 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Hours Taken Balance As Of

Import application needs to be formatted with the same display criteria as ShopTrac Pro. Number of hours used by the employee. Number of hours remaining, or the difference between Accrued and Hours Taken. Date of the last update. Updated by the Time Labor Entry function or Transaction Entry.

Buttons Add Edit Delete Details (Accrual Code: 0) Day Day of the Week, i.e. Monday, Tuesday, etc. Date Calendar date. Hours Time of the occurrences. (12 or 24 Hour format) Absence Code Pre describe System Absence Code involved. For more information about Accruals, see Accruals Functionality.

PARTIAL DAY ABSENCES (PDA)

A PDA is a record of an employee as being absent for part of a day. The PDA transaction creates an event record for an employee's absence. Depending on the code you enter in the transaction, the absence hours can use a different Pay Rule. A default code can be set in the Employee record. In the case of the partial day absence at the beginning of the employee's shift, the supervisor can perform the PDA at any time before the employee's arrival, and the employee will perform a Clock-in, Daily change, or labor transaction as soon as arriving at work, to close out the partial day absence event and start the time event that records the employees time at work. The supervisor does not need to enter a number of hours with the PDA. The employees first transaction automatically updates the record for the absence to the amount of time between the beginning of the shift and the arrival transaction. In the case of the partial day absence at the end of the shift, the employee should perform a Clock-out, Daily change, or labor transaction, when leaving the facility. The supervisor can then perform a PDA without entering an amount of time. The PDA creates an absence record from the time of the last transaction to the scheduled shift end time. In the case of a partial day absence in the middle of the shift, the employee should clock out when leaving and clock in when returning. The supervisor must perform the PDA after the employee has clocked out and before the employee has clocked in again, and must pass an amount of time for the PDA. The PDA adds the specified amount of time to the first clock-out, and automatically rounds the employee's clock-in to the end of the PDA event. This may result in a small fraction of time that must be adjusted in the Editor.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 264 of 613

PDA Logic
Following are several examples that explain how the system treats the PDA transaction and determines how the time is allocated. Example 1 PDA Transaction at the beginning of the day, no hours are specified. The employee calls in and informs the supervisor he will be late, with a reason that is determined to be a valid absence. The supervisor performs a PDA transaction at any time before the employee arrives. This creates a time record starting at his normal shift start time. When the employee arrives, he performs a Clock-in, Daily change, or labor transaction. The system looks at the Shift record for this employees assigned shift to determine how to treat this transaction. The system sees that this transaction is outside the Late In variance, then checks to see if there is a PDA transaction for this employee. If a PDA transaction has been performed, a Labor/Event record is created from the beginning of the employees shift until the time he does his first transaction and allocates this time to the absence code entered by the supervisor. Example 2 PDA Transaction at the end of the day, no hours are specified. The employee informs the supervisor that she needs to leave early for the day, which is determined to be a valid absence. The employee performs a Clock-out, DCH, or labor transaction when she leaves. The supervisor performs the PDA transaction after the employees last transaction for the day. When the supervisor performs the PDA, the system creates a Labor/Event record and allocates the time from when the employee performed her last transaction to her shift end time. This time is allocated to the absence code entered by the supervisor. The system also closes the employees time record for the day at her shift end time. Example 3 PDA Transaction in the middle of the day, hours must be specified. The employee informs the supervisor that he needs to leave work in the middle of the workday for a reason that is determined to be a valid absence. The employee clocks out and leaves the plant. The supervisor must perform the PDA transaction at some time before the employee clocks back in. The hours must be specified, or else the system will treat the transaction as an absence at the end of the day, and allocate the remainder of the hours up until the shift end time to the absence code. When the employee clocks back in, if the system detects the PDA, it creates a Labor/Event record and allocates the hours entered to the absence code entered by the supervisor. The time is allocated from the employees Clock-out and continues for a period equal to the hours specified in the PDA. The time of the next Clock-in and the start time of the corresponding Labor record will be rounded to the end of the absence Labor record.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 265 of 613

Example 4 PDA Transaction at the beginning of the day with 4 hours specified. The employee calls in and informs the supervisor that she will be late by four hours. The supervisor performs a PDA before the employee arrives, specifying 4 hours in the transaction. When the employee arrives she performs an INN, DCH, or LON transaction. The system performs the same functions as explained earlier except it now looks at the hours specified in the transaction. When the employee arrives, the system looks to see if the employee is within the variances set in her shift record. If she is within the Late In variance, the system rounds her Adjusted time to the number of hours specified by the transaction. For example, 4 hours were specified, the employee arrives at 10:47. The system was looking for the employee to be in at 11:00. She is within her Late In variance, so the system will round the Clock-in time to 11:00. The system creates a Labor/Event record and allocates from 7:00 to 11:00 to the absence code. Example 5 PDA Transaction at the beginning of the day with 4 hours specified. Employee arrives later. The employee calls in and informs the supervisor that he will be late by four hours. The supervisor performs a PDA before the employee arrives, specifying 4 hours in the transaction. When the employee arrives he performs an INN, DCH, or LON transaction. The system performs the same functions as explained earlier except it now looks at the hours specified in the transaction. When the employee arrives, the system looks to see if the employee if within the variances set in his shift file. If he is outside the variances, the system creates a Labor/Event record and allocates the number of hours specified in the transaction. With the remaining time, the system creates another Labor/Event record and allocates the time to the DownTime Work Order in the Employee file. In the example below, a PDA transaction was done and 4 hours were specified. The employee did not arrive until 2:30 instead of 11:00. The system creates a Labor/Event record and allocates from 7:00 to 11:00 (for four hours from the employees shift start time) to the absence code entered by the supervisor. The system also creates a Time record for the day. The system creates another Labor/ Event record from 11:00 to 2:30 (when the employee arrived) and this time is allocated to the DownTime W/O. Example 6 PDA Transaction at the end of the day with 2 hours specified. The employee informs her supervisor that she needs to leave 2 hours early from work. The employee logs off her last job at 1:43. The supervisor then performs a PDA transaction after the employee leaves and specifies 2 hours in the transaction. The system creates a Labor/Event record from the time of the employees logoff for the number of hours specified. In the example below, the Labor/Event is from 1:43 to 3:43 and is allocated to the absence code entered by the supervisor. The system also closes the employees time record for the day with an end time of 3:43. When a number of hours are specified in the PDA transaction, the system allocates that number of hours regardless of when the employee arrives at work or when her shift is supposed to end.
Kronos Incorporated Page 266 of 613

Example 7 PDA Transaction at the end of the day, the employee does not clock out and 2 hours are specified. The employee informs the supervisor he needs to leave 2 hours early. The employees last transaction was an OFF at 12:30. The employee leaves the plant at 1:30 but does not clock out. The Supervisor performs the PDA after the employee was supposed to clock out, and specifies 2 hours. The system looks at the Last Update Time for the employee and creates a Labor/ Event record for the two hours, from 12:30 - 2:30, to the absence code. It also closes the time record at 2:30. A manual correction may need to be made for the period 2:30 to 3:30.

EMPLOYEE ID NUMBER LOGIC

If badge mapping is enabled, the system translates the employees badge number to their ID number at the time transactions are received from the Transaction Processor. If the data is entered in response to the Employee ID prompt in a supervisor transaction the process is as follows: The system first assumes that the data entered is a badge number. It searches for a badge number matching the data from the transaction. If is finds a match, then the Employee ID number matching the badge number is used to update all appropriate records. If no match is found, the system assumes that the data is an Employee ID number. It searches for a matching Employee ID number and updates all appropriate records. If the data does not match an Employee ID in the system, an error is returned. The six-digit Employee ID is used for all references in the system. The badge number is only used to determine the Employee ID number. There are some reports that allow you to extract information from the system by the badge number as well. CAUTION: Make sure that the users do not use the same log-on User IDs. This could cause a conflict if users with the same ID are updating records at the same time. Even though temporary IDs can be set up for new employees or employees who forget their password, these IDs should be unique, and not assigned to more than one person at a time. This process takes place only if badge mapping is on. If it is off, then step one is skipped. As before, the six-digit Employee ID is used for all references in the system. The badge number is only used to determine the Employee ID number.

ACCRUALS FUNCTIONALITY
The accruals functionality is designed to provide tracking and validation of accruable absence hours. Information will be stored by employee and by accrual code. The tracked information includes available hours, hours taken, and a detail of accrued absence records. Before an absence record is created for an accruable code, validation will be performed to check if there are sufficient hours available. If available, the record is created, hours are added to the hours taken field, and the detail is created including: employee ID, labor record ID, reference date, hours, and

Kronos Incorporated

Page 267 of 613

absence code used. This employee accrual information is available for adding, viewing and editing in the Employee Maintenance>Accruals Tab. It can also be imported into ShopTrac using the standard format, EMPACCR01, or a user designed format. Any absence code can be designated as accruable, and then attached to the appropriate accrual code. Absence codes can also be marked to override the validation if insufficient hours are available, but the record should still be created. This can result in negative hours available. For the transaction entry utility and nightly batch utility to use absence codes that are checked to override, the parameter ACCROVERRIDE must be added to their access profiles. In the Time/Labor Editor, the parameter is not needed, a window will popup to ask if you want to override. Accruable absence records are created in three ways: Adding a record in the Time/Labor Editor Performing a transaction that creates the record (FDA, XHR) Scheduling the absence to be created by nightly batch (ABS) Create accrual codes. Edit absence codes. Check the box to designate as accruable Check the override box if this code will allow the record to be created even if there are insufficient hours (two codes can be created for the same accrual code, one without override, one with override for special circumstances) Select the appropriate accrual code to attach to the absence code Import employee accrual information. The standard format can be used or a user-defined format created Check to ensure successful import Employees>(Select Employee)>Accruals Tab Exporting Accrual Information Employee accrual information can be exported using the Utilities>Export. A user-defined format can be created and then information can be exported to a text file. Accruals Reporting The Accruals Detail Report (ACR001) (Ltr\Port) can be run by employee, accrual code, and date. Employee accrual information will be listed, and if checked, the detail information will be displayed.

To set up accruals:

Kronos Incorporated

Page 268 of 613

CHAPTER 6 PROTECTING THE SHOPTRAC PRO SYSTEM

SECURITY
ShopTrac Pro comes with a variety of utilities to help you maintain system security and perform routine file housekeeping tasks. The security feature uses a security user-profile that is associated with an employee's ShopTrac Pro user-ID. You can set up a security user-profile for each employee who has access to the ShopTrac Pro system. This lets you control access to confidential information, employee by employee, creating each employee's or group of employees' individual level of security, as needed. You can block employees from accessing particular fields, from accessing entire screens or from accessing entire menu items. If you will be using access, user and group profiles, create the Access Profiles first, then the Group Profiles and then the User Profiles. Once the system security is activated, the system restricts access, based on the security user-profile set up for each user. Security profiles can be set up for groups of employees and users assigned to that group. For instance, if you wanted to set a profile for all supervisors, that can be accomplished with a security group-profile. In addition to the security profiles options, this menu includes a Licensing option that is used when customers upgrade, add features or register their ShopTrac Pro software. To access the security menu, select Setup from the Main Menu and Security from the menu tree. Included on the Security menu are: Group Profiles - used to set up security by employee groups. User Profiles - used to set up an individual employee with a password, group and employee ID. Access Profiles - used to more specifically define to the program-function level, the access level of individual employees and groups of employees

SECURITY ACCESS PROFILES

The Group Profiles and User Profiles options in the Security menu can be used to broadly limit access to entire menus or to specific options on menus, but the Access Profiles option is used to more specifically restrict access to individual functions within a program or even to a specific information field. For instance, an access profile can be defined to entirely restrict a user's access to the Employee file, but if you want certain users to view Employee data, without being able to see individual pay rates or make changes to the information, an Access Profile can be created to accommodate this need. Once an access profile is defined, it can be used to further define a user profile or group profile. Each ShopTrac Pro program has a list of parameters that can be used to define access. The access profile must be defined before the user or group profile. For a list of parameters available for each program, see Program Parameters.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 269 of 613

If you will be using access, user and group profiles, create the Access Profiles first, then the Group Profiles and then the User Profiles. When Access Profiles is selected, a list of existing profiles is displayed. To create a new Profile, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing Profile, highlight the profile to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing Profile, highlight the profile to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the copied profile are displayed, with a blank profile name field. Enter a new name and make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing Profile, highlight the profile name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed.

When defining a new Profile, complete the following fields:

FIELD
Name Description Key

DESCRIPTION
Used to define a name for the profile. Used to describe the profile more completely. Used to enter the parameter that defines the specific function or field name to be used in the profile in conjunction with a program option. For a list of parameters available for each program, see Program Parameters. Used to restrict access to a specific value or sequence of values in a profile. For instance, if access is to be limited to a specific department or work center, the value associated with that department or work center is entered here. Not all parameters will require a value. See Program Parameters for value information for the parameters available for each program.

Value

Keep in mind that parameters from several programs can be included on one Access Profile. When a user or group profile is defined, the access profile is named and programs are linked to the profile. Only those access keys that apply to each program will be executed. Take care, however, to consider if one key could apply to more than one program and how it would affect program operation if included in the same profile. Be sure to save the completed profile by clicking Save. To cancel the entries, click Cancel.

SECURITY GROUP PROFILES

This feature permits the user to set up employee groups with access to common functions within ShopTrac Pro. Once set up, individuals in that group profile would have either limited, complete or restricted access to individual ShopTrac Pro menu items.
Kronos Incorporated Page 270 of 613

For instance, one group of supervisors or managers could access the Employees maintenance file, Transaction Entryand a specific list of reports, while another group of supervisors or managers has access only to Transaction Entry and a different list of reports. Groups of employees within a shop department could have access only to Transaction Entry, while the human relations department has access only to the Employees maintenance file. To further refine this feature, the human relations department's access to the Employees file could be restricted to exclude the Base Rate field, while the payroll department's access could include the Base Rate field. Any number of users can be assigned to a Group Profiles category, when they are set up in the User Profiles feature. Once a group or user security profile is set up, an Access Profile can control their access to individual functions within a program. If you will be using access, user and group profiles, create the Access Profiles first, then the Group Profiles and then the User Profiles. When Group Profiles is selected, a list of existing profiles is displayed. To create a new profile, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing profile, highlight the schedule to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing profile, highlight the profile to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the copied profile are displayed, with a blank profile name field. Enter a new name and make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing profile, highlight the profile name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed.

Menu Option Restrictions versus Access Profiles Linking When a Group Profile is created, there are two levels of access definition, menu restrictions and access profile linking. At the restriction level, you can double click on any menu option and all employees set up in this group will be covered by this restriction. The option selected for restriction will have an "X" displayed over the option icon. Menu options can be restricted at the Main Menu level, at the submenu level and at the task level. To link an option to an access profile in the Group Profile, click on the Preferences button at the bottom of the window. Another window will open which has a menu tree similar to the original window, with the addition of a field to select an Access Profile. Once the Access Profile is selected, you can double click on any menu option to link the profile to the option for anyone included in that Group Profile. The option selected for linking will have a "!" displayed over the option icon and within the parentheses to the right a G (group) and the access profile name is displayed. Group profiles can be linked to more than one access profile. When defining a User Profile option, menu restrictions cannot be made, but menu options can be linked to access profiles. Once the individual user is assigned to a group profile, access to specific menu options can be linked to an access profile. Individual users' access can be linked to more than one Access Profile.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 271 of 613

But keep in mind that the restrictions made at the group level will override the user level definition. For example, if the group is restricted from using the Reports menu option, that option will not appear on the menu for any users assigned to that group. If you want to specify different access parameters for each individual in a group, define them at the User Profile level not the Group Profile level. Defining Program Restrictions Each Group Profile is defined using the four tabbed selection lists (Main, Reports, Setup, Utilities) that reflect the ShopTrac Pro menu structure. On the Main selection list are all those main menu options that group members have access to or can be restricted from. Two menu options, Change Password and Help are excluded, since they should never be restricted. If any main menu option is restricted, when a user in this restricted group opens the ShopTrac Pro program, the restricted menu option does not appear. If any sub-menu option is restricted, when a restricted group user opens the main menu option, the restricted submenu option does not appear on the selection list. The Reports, Setup, and Utilities lists are those main menu options that have sub-menu options. Determining whether to restrict access at the main menu list for any of these options depends on, whether you wish to restrict the entire menu option or only an option within the sub-menu. For instance, if you want to restrict the entire Setup menu option, define your restriction on the Main tab. If you want to restrict access to the Configuration sub-menu, but retain access to the remaining options, select the Setup tab and restrict the Configuration option. The process would be the same for sub-menu lists on the Reports, Setup, and Utilities tabs. To restrict an option To restrict any menu or sub-menu option, locate the option on the appropriate tab (Main, Reports, Setup, or Utilities) and double-click the mouse, click Spacebar or click Enter. An "X" will appear over the option. To clear an option, repeat the double-click, Spacebar or Enter. NOTE: If you restrict the entire list of options from the Reports, Setup, or Utilities tabs, but not on the Main list, the menu option will still be included on the Main Menu tree. Opening the option from the Main Menu will display an empty window, with no options listed. Be sure to save the record, when completed, by clicking Save. To cancel the entries, click Cancel. Defining Access Profiles Preferences Menu options can be restricted at the Main Menu level, at the sub-menu level and at the task level, using any Access Profiles that have been created. To link the access keys defined in Access Profiles to the program option, click the Preferences button on the Group Profile screen. Clicking this button, a screen is displayed with the Group Profile name at the top and a selection field for the Access Profile. The same four tabbed selection lists (Main, Reports, Setup, Utilities) are used to link menu options with the access keys defined in Access Profiles. For example, if you have defined an access profile with the VIEWONLY access key and then specified the EMPLOYEES menu on the Preferences screen, all users in that group would be able to view the employee records, but would not be able to make any changes to the information.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 272 of 613

Or, if you wanted to give a group access to the Employee maintenance file, and be able to view the Base Rate field (which is automatically restricted), this could be accomplished using Preferences. The Group would be defined, the Employees option not restricted, and in Preferences, an access profile containing the SHOWRATE access key could be linked to the EMPLOYEES menu option. Just as with the option restriction screen, to link any menu or sub-menu option to an Access Profile, locate the option on the appropriate tab (Main, Reports, Setup, or Utilities) and doubleclick the mouse, click Spacebar or click Enter. A "!" will appear over the option. All menu options selected to on this access profile linking screen will be subjected to any access key included with the access profile. To clear the option, repeat the double-click, Spacebar or Enter on the option. Be sure to save the completed profile by clicking Save. To cancel the entries, click Cancel.

USER PROFILES - SECURITY

This feature permits you to set up individual users with specific access to ShopTrac Pro functions. Once set up, individuals would have either limited, complete or restricted access to individual ShopTrac Pro menu items. Individual users must be linked with a Group Profile. The individual can have unique restrictions set up in addition to the restrictions that are attached to the group. For instance, one user could have access to the Employees maintenance file, Transaction Entry and a specific list of reports, while another user could have access only to Transaction Entry and a different list of reports. A user within the production department could have access only to Transaction Entry, while another user in the human relations department could have access only to the Employee maintenance file. To further refine this feature, the human relations department user's access to the Employee file could be restricted to exclude the Base Rate field, while a payroll department user's access could include the Base Rate field. Access to specific functions within a program is defined in Access Profile to a group name. Then Individual users can be set up in User Profiles and assigned to Group Profiles. Individuals can be linked to only one group. If you will be using access, user and group profiles, create the Access Profile first, then the Group Profile and then the User Profile. When User Profiles is selected, a list of existing profiles is displayed. To create a new profile, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing profile, highlight the schedule to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing profile, highlight the profile to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the copied profile are displayed, with a blank profile name field. Enter a new name and make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing profile, highlight the profile name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed.
Page 273 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Defining a User Profile Complete the fields on the opening screen as follows:

FIELD
Name Full Name Password

DESCRIPTION
Enter the employee's name used to log onto the ShopTrac Pro program. Enter the employee's full name as listed in the Employee file. Enter the password that the employee uses to log onto the ShopTrac Pro program. Passwords cannot be changed here (see Change Password). Enter the same password that was entered in the field above. Enter the Group Access name that will be used to define this employee's menu restrictions. Enter the employee's ID number as listed in the Employee file.

Confirm Password Group name ID Number

Menu Option Restrictions versus Access Profiles Linking When a Group Profile is created, there are two levels of access definition, menu restrictions and access profile linking. At the restriction level, you can double click on any menu option and all employees set up in this group will be covered by this restriction. The option selected for restriction will have an "X" displayed over the option icon. Menu options can be restricted at the main menu level, at the sub-menu level and at the task level. To link an option to an access profile in the group profile, click on the Preferences button at the bottom of the window. Another window will open which has a menu tree similar to the original window, with the addition of a field to select an access profile. Once the access profile is selected, you can double click on any menu option to link the profile to the option for anyone included in that group profile. The option selected for linking will have an "!" displayed over the option icon and within the parentheses to the right a G (group) and the access profile name is displayed. Group profiles can be linked to more than one access profile. When defining a User Profile option, menu restrictions cannot be made, but menu options can be linked to Access Profiles. Once the individual user is assigned to a Group Profile, access to specific menu options can be linked to an access profile. Individual users' access can be linked to more than one access profile. But keep in mind that the restrictions made at the group level will override the user level definition. For example, if the group is restricted from using the Reports menu option, that option will not appear on the menu for any users assigned to that group. If you want to specify different access parameters for each individual in a group, define them at the User Profile level not the Group Profile level. Linking Access Profiles to User Profiles At the User Profile level, menu options can be linked to any Access Profile. For example, if an access profile has been created with the VIEWONLY parameter and that access profile is linked to the menu option Employees for a specific user, then when that user opens the Employee file,
Kronos Incorporated Page 274 of 613

he or she can only view the contents and not be able to change any of the information. To link Access Profiles to the user, different from those set up for the group, click the Preferences button. Clicking this button, a screen is displayed with the User Profile name at the top and a selection field for the Access Profile. Four tabbed selection lists (Main, Reports, Setup, Utilities) are used to link menu options with the access keys defined in Access Profiles. On the Main selection list are all those main menu options that the user has access to or can be restricted from. Two menu options, Change Password and Help are excluded, since they should never be restricted. If any main menu option is restricted, when a restricted user opens the ShopTrac Pro program, the restricted option does not appear. If any submenu option is restricted, when the user opens the main menu option, the restricted submenu option does not appear on the selection list. The Reports, Setup, and Utilities lists are those main menu options that have sub-menu options. Determining where to restrict access depends on whether you wish to restrict the entire menu option or only an option within the submenu. To link any menu or sub-menu option to an access profile, locate the option on the appropriate tab (Main, Reports, Setup, or Utilities) and double-click the mouse, click Spacebar or click Enter. A "!" will appear over the option. To clear the selection, repeat the double-click, Spacebar or Enter. Note that restrictions made at the user level are displayed differently than those made at the group level. If a menu option is linked at the group level, a profile label is displayed to the right of the menu option with a G (for group) and the access profile name. If a menu option is linked at the user level, the G is replaced by a U. Even the color of the check (!) is different. For example, if you wanted to give a user access to the Employee maintenance file, and be able to view the Base Rate field (which is automatically restricted), this could be accomplished using Preferences. By selecting the access profile with the SHOWRATE access key, and double clicking on the Employee menu option, the link is defined. To link an access profile to all submenu options on the main menu option, double click the menu option on the Main tab. For example, double click on the Setup option on the Main tab to apply the access profile to all submenu options on the Setup tree. To restrict access only to the Configuration submenu, while retaining normal access to the remaining list, select the Setup tab and double click on the Configuration option. The process would be the same for submenu options on the Reports, Setup, and Utilities tabs. Be sure to save the completed profile by clicking Save. To cancel the entries, click Cancel.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 275 of 613

CHANGE PASSWORD
The Change Password screen has only one function, the changing of passwords to protect overall security of the ShopTrac Pro system. Every employee or employee group with access to the ShopTrac Pro system should be assigned a password when he or she is set up on the system. This could be a temporary password that the employee must change to a unique series of alphanumeric characters after logging on for the first time. Or it could be the company policy to change passwords periodically to maintain confidentiality. And there's always the human fact that people sometimes forget their passwords. The system administrator can replace a password with a temporary one and then the employee can replace it in privacy. There might even be times, after a termination, when a password is changed to preserve the integrity of access to the system. Whatever the reason, changing a password is a simple thing to do. To accomplish this: Select the Change Password option on the ShopTrac Pro Main Menu. The User Name field will display the name of the person who has logged onto the system. Enter the present password in the Old Password field. Enter a new password into the New Password field. To double-check the accuracy of entry, enter the same new password into the Confirm Password field. When all fields are completed, click OK to send the information to the ShopTrac Pro system If all entries are correct, the system will accept the information and return the user to the Main Menu. If the old password or the confirm password entries are incorrect, an error message will be displayed and the user prompted to reenter the information. If the entries are rejected and cannot be corrected, the user must contact the system administrator or a supervisor for assistance. Once the new password is accepted, the user can continue using the system without exiting first, but if access to any menu item requires a password, the new password must be used. This is because the ShopTrac Pro is an on-line or constantly updated system. Once the system is exited, to reenter the system, the user must use their new password. Superuser Access Every ShopTrac Pro system will have a default user name called SUPERUSER that can be used to access all programs in the system. This user name should be assigned to the system administrator or system maintenance supervisor. This access name can be used to change a password if an employee forgets his or her password or after a termination. To accomplish this, follow these steps: Logon as SUPERUSER. Select the Change Password option on the ShopTrac Pro Main Menu. Select the employee or group from the drop-down menu on the User Name field.
Kronos Incorporated Page 276 of 613

Enter the Superuser password in the Superuser Password field. Enter a new password for the employee or employee group into the New Password field. To double-check the accuracy of entry, enter the same new password into the Confirm Password field. When all fields are completed, click OK to send the new user password to the ShopTrac Pro system If all entries are correct, the system will send a confirming message. If the old password or the confirm password entries are incorrect, an error message will be displayed and the user prompted to reenter the information. Changing any other user's password, using SUPERUSER access, does not require that the employee or group password be known.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 277 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Page 278 of 613

CHAPTER 7 GENERATING REPORTS

REPORTS
Reports can help you better manage your personnel and your system. For example, you can quickly determine which employees are not adhering to their shift schedule, which supervisors are performing transactions for their employees or when employees are approaching an overtime status. You can also examine the raw data coming from the ShopTrac Pro system. NOTE: Group Selection Criteria allow users to select individual items/numbers, several separated items/numbers or a range of items/numbers (Department #s, Employee ID #s, Work Order #s, Part #s, etc.) depending on the individual requirements. When selecting these items from the Report window use the Ctrl Key and the mouse for making multiple selections. Included on the Reports menu are: Audit Trail Barcodes Daily Assignment Exceptions Labor Lists Logs Machine Utilization Quality Control Time & Attendance Work In Process Labor and Time record details are reported by date, Employee ID, or code. Prints Travelers barcodes and various transaction barcodes. Reports details of rescheduling or reassignments employees for the day. Detailed report on all non-standard transactions, daily and signoff. Reports for individual employees, teams, work order and period payroll. Print listings that include employees, schedule and shift details, import and export formats, and devices. Reports transaction and batch log information. Reports machine usage by work center, machine. Reports activity on shopfloor by employee, work center, work order and scrap code. Reports clock-in details, absentee and overtime status. Reports work status by product movement, work center and hours/efficiencies.
Page 279 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

REPORT PRINTING OPTIONS

Report Printing Options Each report indicates the paper size and orientation in parentheses, e.g., Lgl = Legal, Ltr = Letter, Port = Portrait, Ldsc = Landscape). Please remember to check your printer to be sure it has the correct size paper in its tray. If the printer is not capable of printing on legal paper, an error message may occur. After you have selected the criteria for your report, generate the report by selecting the Print Preview button in the upper left corner, or save your criteria by selecting the Save button. The save feature is handy for reports you generate regularly. You can give the selection criteria a profile name, save it and recall the profile, together with its criteria, at a later time. Report profiles saved in this manner are saved only on the client computer where they were saved and are accessible only with the User ID under which they were created. Printing Status: After the report is generated to the screen, you can right-click the blue paper icon in the system try (bottom right of your screen) to: Restore ShopTrac Pro Reporting: Leaves the report in preview on your screen, but returns the ShopTrac Pro menu as the active window. Restore ShopTrac Pro Reporting Status: Places the ShopTrac Pro Reporting Status as the active window. From this status window, you have the option to Preview, Print or cancel the report. After you have previewed or printed the report, you must cancel it to remove it from the status window. From the Options menu, you can automatically Remove After Preview and/or select All Auto Preview. Unless you select these options in an Access Profile, these options are removed after you close the Reports menu. Automating the Options tab: To keep your printing options each time you generate a report, you must create an Access Profile with keys of DELETEAFTERPREVIEW and AUTOPREVIEW. Saving the Report: From the Preview window, you can choose to save the report to one of several destinations (Disk File, Application, Exchange Folder, et al.) and in a large variety of formats (Character- separated Values, Crystal Reports (RPT), Microsoft Excel, HTML, et al.)

Audit Trail
As time and labor records are recorded and edited in the system, you can use the Audit Trail utility to generate reports to track changes made to the data. From these reports, you can analyze the data to determine if and where problems exist in management of the collected data. Once a
Kronos Incorporated Page 280 of 613

problem is identified, corrective actions can be taken. ShopTrac Pro allows you to generate the following reports about the changes made to the system data: Labor Audit by ID Labor Audit by Date Labor Audit Whole Record Time Audit by ID Time Audit by Date Time Audit Whole Record Report Printing Options Each report indicates the paper size and orientation in parentheses, e.g., Lgl = Legal, Ltr = Letter, Port = Portrait, Ldsc = Landscape). Please remember to check your printer to be sure it has the correct size paper in its tray. If the printer is not capable of printing on legal paper, an error message may occur. After you have selected the criteria for your report, generate the report by selecting the Print Preview button in the upper left corner, or save your criteria by selecting the Save button. The save feature is handy for reports you generate regularly. You can give the selection criteria a profile name, save it and recall the profile, together with its criteria, at a later time. Report profiles saved in this manner are saved only on the client computer where they were saved and are accessible only with the User ID under which they were created. Printing Status: After the report is generated to the screen, you can right-click the blue paper icon in the system try (bottom right of your screen) to: Restore ShopTrac Pro Reporting: Restore ShopTrac Pro Reporting Status: Leaves the report in preview on your screen, but returns the ShopTrac Pro menu as the active window. Places the ShopTrac Pro Reporting Status as the active window. From this status window, you have the option to Preview, Print or cancel the report. After you have previewed or printed the report, you must cancel it to remove it from the status window. From the Options menu, you can automatically Remove After Preview and/or select All Auto Preview. Unless you select these options in an Access Profile, these options are removed after you close the Reports menu. To keep your printing options each time you generate a report, you must create an Access Profile with keys of d
Page 281 of 613

AUD301 AUD300 AUD305 AUD311 AUD310 AUD315

Automating the Options tab:

Kronos Incorporated

DELETEAFTERPREVIEW and AUTOPREVIEW. Saving the Report: From the Preview window, you can choose to save the report to one of several destinations (Disk File, Application, Exchange Folder, et al.) and in a large variety of formats (Character- separated Values, Crystal Reports (RPT), Microsoft Excel, HTML, et al.)

Labor Audit by ID (AUD301) The Labor Audit by ID report is organized by the employee number of the person making changes to the data. This report lists by Employee ID number for a range of dates, range of Employee ID numbers, a range of Employee ID numbers that made the changes, or specific reason codes, or a combination of Employee ID numbers and reason codes. Note: If an audit trail report of all records is required, do not complete any of the data fields. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Audit IDs

DESCRIPTION
The range of Employee ID numbers of employees who can make changes to the Labor file. Select the desired Employee ID range from the drop-down list. The range of dates to include on the report. The date used here is the day the changes were made. A single date can be used to narrow the selections. The range of Employee ID numbers for the employee labor records to include on the report. Select the desired Employee ID range for the drop-down list. The range of dates for the associated time record. A single date can be used to narrow the selections. Enter the reason code entered when the record was created. Select from the drop-down list. If your company does not use reason codes, leave this blank. Check the appropriate option to select the record type to be included. Options are: Records that have been ADDED Records that have been UPDATED Records that have been DELETED If all three are desired, check all three or leave all blank.

Audit record dates

Labor IDs

Labor reference dates Reason codes

Event types

Kronos Incorporated

Page 282 of 613

Page break on Audit ID

Check this box if you want the printed report to start a new page on each audit ID. Leave clear if you want continuous printing.

When your selection criteria is complete, click the Preview button to view the list on the screen or Print button to begin printing. Printer choices and number of copies to print are selected from the Print window. The Printed Report The information fields that appear on this report include the following:

FIELD
Employee ID Audit: Date/Time Audit: Employee ID Audit: Type Audit: Code Labor: Employee ID Labor: Ref Date Labor: Date Strt Labor: Time Start Labor: ID Number File Field Image: Before Image: After Audit Text

DESCRIPTION
The ID of each employee in the report. Date and time change to labor event was made. ID of the employee making the change. The type of change to record. Options are: U-Update, A-Add, D-Delete The reason code given for the change. ID of employee making change. Date of the associated time record. Adjusted date for labor event. Adjusted time for labor event. Number assigned by the system to identify this event. File where the change was made. Name of file field where the change was made. Contents of the field before change was made to the event. Contents of the field after the change were made to the event. The reason code text.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 283 of 613

Labor Audit by Date (AUD300) The Labor Audit by Date report is organized by the date records were edited. This report lists the changes for a range of dates and/or Employee ID numbers. It is arranged in date order and can be run for a range of dates, a range of Employee ID numbers, a range of Employee ID numbers that made the changes, or specific reason codes, or a combination. Note: Leaving any field blank will generate reports on all items in the record that relate to the specific field. If a report of all records is desired, do not complete any of the data fields.

Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Audit record dates

DESCRIPTION
Select the range of dates for the report to cover. The date used here is the day the changes were made. A single date can be used to narrow the selections. Select the range of ID numbers of employees who can make changes to the Labor file from the drop-down list. The range of ID numbers for the employee labor records to include on the report. Select the desired Employee ID range for the drop-down list The range of dates for the associated time record. A single date can be used to narrow the selections. Enter the reason code entered when the record was created. Select from the drop-down list. If your company does not use reason codes, leave this blank. Select the type to include by checking the appropriate box. Options are: Records that have been ADDED Records that have been UPDATED Records that have been DELETED New page on each date change. Leave clear if you want continuous printing through date changes.

Audit IDs Labor IDs

Labor reference dates Reason codes

Event type

Page break on audit date The Printed Report

The information fields, which appear on this report, include the following:

FIELD
mm/dd/yy Audit: Time Audit: Employee ID Audit: Type

DESCRIPTION
The dates included in the report. Time change to labor event was made. ID of the employee making the change. The type of change to record. Options are: U-Update A-Add
Page 284 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Audit: Code Labor: Employee ID Labor: Ref Date Labor: Date Strt Labor: Time Start Labor: ID Number File Field Image: Before Image: After Audit Text

D-Delete The reason code given for the change. ID of employee making change. Date of the associated time record. Adjusted date for labor event. Adjusted time for labor event. Number assigned by the system to identify this event. File where the change was made. Name of file field where the change was made. Contents of the field before change was made to the event. Contents of the field after the change were made to the event. The reason code text.

Labor Audit Whole Record (AUD305) This procedure explains how to generate a report of changes made to the Labor Audit file when the Whole Record option is set to Y in the Configuration file. This report is arranged in ID number order and lists all the changes made to each Labor/Event record. This report displays all the information in the Event record. You can elect to run this report for a range of dates, range of employee IDs, range of record ID numbers, range of badge numbers that made the changes, or specific reason codes, or a combination of these. If an Audit Trail report of all records is required, do not complete the information fields on the screen. Note: In all of the fields described below, leaving the field blank reports on all items in the Audit Trail record that relate to the specific field. Also only one single date/ employee ID/code/event can be entered if needed to narrow the scope of the report.

Report Printing Options If necessary, narrow the range of information in the report by entering values in the following fields:

FIELD
Labor record ID numbers

DESCRIPTION
The range of employee ID numbers for the employee labor records you want to view in the report. Select from the list of employees on the drop-down list or enter the d i d b L bl k i l d ll l
Page 285 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

desired numbers. Leave blank to include all employees. Labor record reference dates Labor record IDs Audit record dates The range of dates for the associated time records. Leave blank to include all dates. The ID number assigned by the system to each Labor Event. The range of dates for audit trail labor records to include. This date reflects when the records were changed. Leave blank to include all dates. The range of employee ID numbers who can make changes to the Labor file. Select from the drop-down list or enter the desired numbers. Leave blank to include all IDs. The range of reason codes entered when the record was created. Select from the drop-down list or enter the desired code. If your company does not use Reason Codes, bypass this field. Leave blank to include all codes. Check this box if you want to include updated records in the report. If this box is checked and the next one (Include deleted event types) is not, only updated types will be included. If the next box is checked and this one is not, updated types will not be included. However, if both boxes are not checked, both types will be included. Check this box if you want to include only deleted records in the report. If this box is checked and the previous one (Include updated event types) is not, only deleted types will be included. If the previous box is checked and this one is not, deleted types will not be included. However, if both boxes are not checked, both types will be included. Check this box if you want the printed report to start a new page with each new employee ID number. Leave clear if you want continuous printing with page breaks determined by maximum paper size.

Audit ID numbers

Reason codes

Include updated event types

Include deleted event types

Page break on ID

The Printed Report The printed report header block contains the Employee ID, the reference date, the adjusted start date and time, and the labor event ID number assigned by the system. Below that block are two sections that contain Update information (left-hand box) and the Event Record (right-hand box) as it is seen through the data entry screens or the Editor. That information includes the following:

Kronos Incorporated

Page 286 of 613

FIELD
Update: Time Update: Employee ID Update: Code Update: Text Event Record: Employee ID Event Record: Ref Date Event Record: Adj Start

DESCRIPTION
Date and time change to labor event was made. ID of the employee making the change. The reason code given for the change. Comments entered at the time of the change record. ID of employee related to record. Date the event record was created. Adjusted date and time assigned the event by the system.

The remainder of the box is a re-creation of the event record divided into details of the event and the related labor hours detail.

Time Audit by ID (AUD311) The Time Audit by ID report is organized by the Employee ID number of the person making changes to the data. This report lists all the changes made to each time event for a selected time period by a particular person. You can run this report for a range of dates, range of Employee ID numbers, a range of Employee ID numbers which made the changes, or specific reason codes, or a combination of any. Report Printing Options Note: If an audit trail report of all records is required, do not complete any of the data fields. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Audit IDs

DESCRIPTION
The range of ID numbers of employees who can make changes to the Time file. Select the desired Employee ID range from the drop-down list. The range of dates to include on the report. The date used here is the day the changes were made. A single date can be used to narrow the selections. The range of ID numbers for the employee time records to include on the report. Select the desired Employee ID f h d d li
Page 287 of 613

Audit record dates from...to Time IDs

Kronos Incorporated

range for the drop-down list. Time reference dates from...to Reason codes The range of dates for the associated time record. A single date can be used to narrow the selections. Enter the range of reason codes, entered when the record was created, to include. Select from the drop-down list. If your company does not use reason codes, leave this blank. Check the appropriate box to select the type(s) to include. Options are: Records that have been ADDED Records that have been UPDATED Records that have been DELETED Page break on audit ID The Printed Report The information fields that appear on this report include the following: Check this box if you want the printed report to start a new page on each new employee. Leave clear if you want continuous printing through date changes.

Event types

FIELD
Employee ID Audit: Date/Time Audit: Type Audit: Code Time: Employee ID Time: Ref Date Field Image: Before Image: After Audit Text

DESCRIPTION
The ID of the employee who made changes to the records listed in the report. Date and time change to time record was made. The type of change to record. Options are: U-Update, A-Add, D-Delete The reason code given for the change. ID of employee change was made for. Date of the associated time record. Name of file field where the change was made. Contents of the field before change was made to the record. Contents of the field after the change were made to the record. The reason code text.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 288 of 613

Time Audit by Date (AUD310) The Time Audit by Date report is organized by the date records were edited. This report lists the changes for a range of dates and/or Employee ID numbers. It is arranged in date order and can be run for a range of dates, a range of Employee ID numbers, a range of Employee ID numbers that made the changes, or specific reason codes, or a combination of any of these. Note: Leaving any field blank will generate reports on all items in the record that relate to the specific field. If a report of all records is desired, don to complete any of the data fields.

Reporting Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Audit record dates from...to Audit IDs Time IDs

DESCRIPTION
Select the range of dates for the report to cover. The date used here is the day the changes were made. A single date can be used to narrow the selections. Select the range of ID numbers of employees who can make changes to the Time file from the drop-down list. The range of ID numbers for the employee time records to include on the report. Select the desired Employee ID range for the drop-down list The range of dates for the associated time record. A single date can be used to narrow the selections. Enter the range of reason codes, entered when the record was created, to include. Select from the drop-down list. If your company does not use reason codes, leave this blank. Check the appropriate box to select the types to include. Options are: Records that have been ADDED Records that have been UPDATED Records that have been DELETED

Time reference dates Reason codes

Event types

Page break on date

Check this box if you want the printed report to start a new page on each date change. Leave clear if you want continuous printing through date changes.

The Printed Report The information fields that appear on this report include the following:

FIELD
mm/dd/yy Audit: Time
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
The date the time record was changed. Time change to time record was made.

Page 289 of 613

Audit: Employee ID Audit: Type Audit: Code Time: Employee ID Time: Ref Date Field Image: Before Image: After Audit Text

ID of the employee making the change. The type of change to record. Options are: U-Update, A-Add, D-Delete The reason code given for the change. ID of employee change was made for. Date the original record was created. Name of file field where the change was made. Contents of the field before change was made to the record. Contents of the field after the change were made to the record. The reason code text.

Time Audit Whole Record (AUD315) Use this feature to generate a report of changes made to the Time Audit file when the Whole Record option is set to Y in the Configuration file. This report is arranged in ID number/Reference date order and lists all the changes made to each Time record. This report displays all the information in the Time record. You can elect to run this report for a range of dates, range of employee ID numbers, range of employees who made the changes, or specific reason codes, or a combination of these. If an Audit Trail report of all records is required, do not complete the information fields on the screen. Note: In all of the fields described below, leaving the field blank reports on all items in the Audit Trail record that relate to the specific field. Also only one single date/ employee ID/code/event can be entered if needed to narrow the scope of the report.

Report Printing Options If necessary, narrow the range of information in the report by entering values in the following fields:

FIELD
Time Record ID Numbers

DESCRIPTION
The range of employee ID numbers for the time records you want to view in the report. Select from the list of employees on the drop-down list or enter the desired numbers. Leave blank to include all employees.
Page 290 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Time record reference date from...to Audit record dates from...to Audit ID numbers

The range of dates for the associated labor records. Leave blank to include all dates. The range of dates for audit trail time records to include. This date reflects when the records were changed. Leave blank to include all dates. The range of employee ID numbers who can make changes to the Time file. Select from the drop-down list or enter the desired numbers. Leave blank to include all IDs. The range of reason codes entered when the record was created. Select from the drop-down list or enter the desired code. If your company does not use Reason Codes, bypass this field. Leave blank to include all codes. Check this box if you want to include updated records in the report. If this box is checked and the next one (Include deleted event types) is not, only updated types will be included. If the next box is checked and this one is not, updated types will not be included. However, if both boxes are not checked, both types will be included. Check this box if you want to include only deleted records in the report. If this box is checked and the previous one (Include updated event types) is not, only deleted types will be included. If the previous box is checked and this one is not, deleted types will not be included. However, if both boxes are not checked, both types will be included. Check this box if you want the printed report to start a new page with each new employee ID number. Leave clear if you want continuous printing with page breaks determined by maximum paper size.

Reason codes

Include updated event types

Include deleted event types

Page break on ID

The Printed Report The printed report header block contains the Employee ID and the reference date for the time file record. Below that block are two sections that contain Update information (left-hand box) and the Time Record (right-hand box) as it is seen through the data entry screens or the Editor. That information includes the following:

FIELD
Update: Time

DESCRIPTION
Date and time change to record was made.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 291 of 613

Update: Employee ID Update: Code Update: Text Time Record: Employee ID Time Record: Date

ID of the employee making the change. The reason code given for the change. Comments made at time of the change record. ID of employee related to record. Date the time record was created.

The remainder of the box is a re-creation of the time record divided into details of the event and the related labor hours detail.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 292 of 613

BARCODES
This group of options is used to print barcode labels used for employees, supervisors and to track shopfloor activities. Before you begin tracking data in your facility, badges with barcodes on them are distributed to each of your employees. To track work order information during the production cycle, barcode travelers are used by supervisors and other employees to monitor labor data. Included in this Barcode menu are: Departments Employee Badge Labels Employee ID Labels Job Class Labor Code Labor Code Labels Machine Rate Class Reason Codes Supervisor Cards Transactions Travelers Work Center Work Order Work Order Labels Report Printing Options Each report indicates the paper size and orientation in parentheses, e.g., Lgl = Legal, Ltr = Letter, Port = Portrait, Ldsc = Landscape). Please remember to check your printer to be sure it has the correct size paper in its tray. If the printer is not capable of printing on legal paper, an error message may occur. After you have selected the criteria for your report, generate the report by selecting the Print Preview button in the upper left corner, or save your criteria by selecting the Save button. The save feature is handy for reports you generate regularly. You can give the selection criteria a profile name, save it and recall the profile, together with its criteria, at a later time. Report profiles saved in this manner are saved only on the client computer where they were saved and are accessible only with the User ID under which they were created.
Kronos Incorporated Page 293 of 613

DPT020 EMP033 EMP031 JCL020 LBRC020 LBRC030 MAC020 RCL020 COD020 SUPVCARD TRX020 TRV015 WKC020 TRV020 TRV030

Printing Status: After the report is generated to the screen, you can right-click the blue paper icon in the system try (bottom right of your screen) to: Restore ShopTrac Pro Reporting: Leaves the report in preview on your screen, but returns the ShopTrac Pro menu as the active window. Restore ShopTrac Pro Reporting Status: Places the ShopTrac Pro Reporting Status as the active window. From this status window, you have the option to Preview, Print or cancel the report. After you have previewed or printed the report, you must cancel it to remove it from the status window. From the Options menu, you can automatically Remove After Preview and/or select All Auto Preview. Unless you select these options in an Access Profile, these options are removed after you close the Reports menu. Automating the Options tab: To keep your printing options each time you generate a report, you must create an Access Profile with keys of DELETEAFTERPREVIEW and AUTOPREVIEW. Saving the Report: From the Preview window, you can choose to save the report to one of several destinations (Disk File, Application, Exchange Folder, et al.) and in a large variety of formats (Character- separated Values, Crystal Reports (RPT), Microsoft Excel, HTML, et al.)

Departments (DPT020) As your employees change departments, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode device. If they are working at a device without function keys, they may need to enter transaction codes. To simplify these processes, you can print barcodes for the required codes and post them by the barcode devices. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Departments. The user can select a range of departments or specific departments. Begin the process by entering header text, which will print at the top of the barcode page, in the following field:

FIELD
Enter page heading

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 45 characters of text that will be printed at the top of the barcode sheet.

To print department codes by specifying a range Specify a range of the appropriate codes by completing the following field: Select department codes by range from:...to: Enter the beginning and ending department codes to include in the selection process. Remember that the departments named here will be included in that search.

After the range selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific department codes
Kronos Incorporated Page 294 of 613

Enter the specific codes in the following field: Select random department codes Type in the Department code or select from the dropdown list. Only one department can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one department code to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific department codes are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing.

Employee Badge Labels (EMP033) Before you begin tracking data in your facility, you must distribute badges with barcodes on them to each of your employees. The procedures described in this section are for facilities that are not already using badges. If your facility does use badges, you may want to make special arrangements to incorporate barcodes into your existing identification system. You may also choose to order pre-printed badges from Kronos. Report Printing Options Before you can print badge labels, you must create an Employee record for each of your employees. You can print individual badges or a range of badge numbers. Printing Badge Labels Select the Reports option from the ShopTrac Pro menu. Select the Barcodes option from the Reports sub-menu tree, then Employee Badge Labels. Enter either a single badge number or a range of badge numbers in the Employee fields. Leave the field blank and all employees will be included. Or select a random number of employees using the drop-down list on each field in the Select Random Employees section. Indicate in the Labels Per Badge field the number of labels to print for each Employee ID number. In addition to this label-printing program, you can use any label-printing program that permits the use of True Type fonts (e.g., Microsoft Word or Excel , Seagate Crystal Reports , etc.). The True Type fonts needed to print badges in these programs is on the ShopTrac Pro installation CD and is automatically installed when ShopTrac Pro is loaded to each client PC.

Employee ID Labels (EMP031) Before you begin tracking data in your facility, you must distribute badges with Employee ID
Kronos Incorporated Page 295 of 613

barcodes on them to each of your employees. The procedures described in this section are for facilities that are not already using badges. If your facility does use badges, you may want to make special arrangements to incorporate barcodes into your existing identification system. You may also choose to order pre-printed badges from Kronos. Reporting Printing Options Before you can print badge labels, you must create an Employee record for each of your employees. You can print individual badges or a range of badge numbers. Printing Badge Labels Select the Reports option from the ShopTrac Pro menu. Select the Barcodes option from the Reports sub-menu tree, then Employee ID Labels. Enter either a single ID number or a range of numbers in the Employee fields. Leave the field blank and all employees will be included. Or select a random number of employees using the drop-down list on each field in the Select Random Employees section. Indicate in the Labels Per Badge field the number of labels to print for each Employee ID number. In addition to this label-printing program, you can use any label-printing program that permits the use of True Type fonts (e.g., Microsoft Word or Excel , Seagate Crystal Reports , etc.). The True Type fonts needed to print badges in these programs is on the ShopTrac Pro installation CD and is automatically installed when ShopTrac Pro is loaded to each client PC.

Job Class (JCL020) As your employees change job classes, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode device. If they are working at a device without function keys, they may need to enter transaction codes. To simplify these processes, you can print barcodes for the required codes and post them by the barcode devices. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Job Classes. The user can select a range of job classes, with or without job class types, or specific job classes, which includes all class types. Begin the process by entering header text, which will print at the top of the barcode page, in the following field:

FIELD
Enter page heading

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 45 characters of text that will be printed at the top of the barcode sheet.

To print classes by specifying a range:

Kronos Incorporated

Page 296 of 613

Specify a range of the appropriate classes by completing the following fields: Select job class codes by range from:...to: Job class code types (Up to 5) Enter the beginning and ending job class codes to include in the selection process. Remember that the job classes named here will be included in that search. Enter up to five job class types to narrow the search. Only these types for those classes named in the range above will be selected.

After the range and type selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific job class codes: Enter the specific job codes in the following fields: Select random job class codes Type in the Job Class code or select from the drop-down list. Only one job class can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one job class code to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific job class codes are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing.

Labor Code (LBRC020) As your employees change labor codes, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode device. If they are working at a device without function keys, they may need to enter transaction codes. To simplify these processes, you can print barcodes for the required codes on paper and post them by the barcode devices, to be swiped by a barcode pen. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Labor Codes. The user can select a range of labor codes, with or without code types, or specific labor codes, which includes all code types. Begin the process by entering header text, which will print at the top of the barcode page, in the following field:

FIELD
Enter page heading

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 45 characters of text that will be printed at the top of the barcode sheet.

To print labor codes by specifying a range: Specify a range of the appropriate codes by completing the following fields:
Kronos Incorporated Page 297 of 613

Select labor codes by range from:...to: Labor code types (Up to 5)

Enter the beginning and ending labor codes to include in the selection process. Remember that the labor codes named here will be included in that search. Enter up to five labor code types to narrow the search. Only these types for those codes named in the range above will be selected.

After the range and type selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific labor codes: Enter the specific labor codes in one or more of the following fields: Select random labor codes Type in the labor codes or select from the drop-down list. Only one labor code can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one labor code to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific labor codes are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing.

Labor Code Labels (LBRC030) As your employees change labor codes, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode device. If they are working at a device without function keys, they may need to enter transaction codes. To simplify these processes, you can print barcodes for the required codes on labels to be placed on cards, posted by the barcode devices, and used with a barcode card reader. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Labor Codes Labels. The user can select a range of labor codes, with or without code types, or specific labor codes, which includes all code types. Select a label size (currently only one size 2" X 4", Avery #5163, is included) and select the labor codes to include by completing the following fields: Select labor codes by range from:...to: Labor code types (Up to 5) Enter the beginning and ending labor codes to include in the selection process. Remember that the labor codes named here will be included in that search. Enter up to five labor code types to narrow the search. Only these types for those codes named in the range above will be selected.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 298 of 613

After the range and type selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific labor codes: Enter the specific labor codes in one or more of the following fields: Select random labor codes Type in the labor codes or select from the drop-down list. Only one labor code can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one labor code to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific labor codes are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. Note: To print the same code multiple times on a single sheet of labels, enter the same code in multiple random labor code fields.

Machine (MAC020) As your employees change machines, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode device. If they are working at a device without function keys, they may need to enter transaction codes. To simplify these processes, you can print barcodes for the required machines and post them by the barcode devices. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Machines. The user can select a range of machines, with or without code types, or specific machine codes, which includes all machines types. Begin the process by entering header text, which will print at the top of the barcode page, in the following field:

FIELD
Enter page heading

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 45 characters of text which will be printed at the top of the barcode sheet.

To print labor codes by specifying a range: Specify a range of the appropriate codes by completing the following fields: Select machine codes by range from:...to: Machine types (Up to 5) Enter the beginning and ending machines to include in the selection process. Remember that the machines named here will be included in that search. Enter up to five machine types to narrow the search. Only these types for those machines named in the range above will be selected.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 299 of 613

After the range and type selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific machines: Enter the specific machines in one or more of the following fields: Select random machine codes Type in the machines or select from the drop-down list. Only one machine can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one machine to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific machines are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing.

Rate Class (RCL020) As your employees change rate classes, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode device. If they are working at a device without function keys, they may need to enter transaction codes. To simplify these processes, you can print barcodes for the required codes and post them by the barcode devices. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Rate Classes. The user can select a range of rate classes, with or without rate class types, or specific rate classes, which includes all class types. Begin the process by entering header text, which will print at the top of the barcode page, in the following field:

FIELD
Enter page heading

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 45 characters of text that will be printed at the top of the barcode sheet.

To print rate class codes by specifying a range: Specify a range of the appropriate codes by completing the following fields: Select rate classes by range from:...to: Enter the beginning and ending rate class codes to include in the selection process. Remember that the rate classes named here will be included in that search.

After the range and type selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific rate class codes:
Kronos Incorporated Page 300 of 613

Enter the specific rate codes in the following fields: Select random rate classes Type in the Rate Class code or select from the dropdown list. Only one rate class can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one rate class code to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific rate class codes are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing.

Reason Codes (COD020) As the employees perform their jobs, they may need to enter a reason code with the appropriate codes at the bar code device. Reason codes include recording an incomplete or completed job, an absence reason, a scrap reason, or a job interruption reason, etc. If employees are working at a device without function keys, they may need to enter transaction codes. To simplify these processes, print bar codes for the required codes and post them by the bar code devices. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Bar Codes> Reason Codes. The user can select a range of reason codes, with or without code types, or specific reason codes, which includes all code types. Begin the process by entering header text, which will print at the top of the bar code page, in the following field:

FIELD
Enter Page Heading

DESCRIPTION

Enter up to 45 characters of text that will be printed at the top of the bar code sheet. Note: To print reason codes by specifying a range. Specify a range of the appropriate codes by completing the following field: Select Reason Enter the beginning and ending department codes to Codes by Range include in the selection process. Select Remember that the departments named here will be included in that search. After the range selection is complete, press Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. Note: To print specific job codes. Enter the specific job codes in the following fields: Select Reason Enter up to five reason code types to narrow the search. Codes by Random Only these types for those codes named in the range above will be selected.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 301 of 613

To enter more than one Rate Classes Code to print on the same page, press Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific department codes are entered, press Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. Reason Code Types The Reason Code Types that are available to refine a bar code selection above are included in the ShopTrac Pro system and cannot be edited or added to. They include the following: A - Absence Code C - Completion Code D - Audit Trail Reason Code E - Serial Number Status Code F - Serial Number Move Code M - Machine Status Code R - General Reason Code S - Scrap Code U - Customer Status V - Automatic Deduction Override W - Work Order Status Code

Supervisor Cards (SupvCard) Your shop floor supervisors perform supervisor transactions to record employee full and partial day absences, and to register omitted employee transactions after the fact. When supervisors perform barcode transactions, the ShopTrac Pro system prompts for codes that identify the type of transaction. The system may also prompt for a code that explains the nature of the events. This feature will simplify transactions for your supervisors when they need to perform supervisor clock-ins and clock-outs, and partial day absences using several different absence codes. Report Printing Options In order to perform supervisor transactions, these transaction codes must be available in the form of barcodes so they can be easily input into the system. The system includes a utility for printing these codes in a small format to laminate as portable cards. Printing Supervisor Cards The ShopTrac Pro system can print supervisor codes in a special format to laminate as portable cards. The utility prints three images of supervisor cards, repeated three times on letter-size or legal-size paper, to be cut apart and laminated (double-sided if necessary).
Kronos Incorporated Page 302 of 613

Select menu options Reports > Barcodes > Supervisor Cards. You can define up to three columns of codes by completing the following fields for each code:

FIELD
Title Text Text (lines 2-6) B/C Len

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 26 characters as the title or heading of the supervisor card. Enter up to 10 characters each on the two lines reserved for the text identifying the barcode. Enter up to 10 characters each on the two lines reserved for the text identifying additional barcodes on same card. Enter the transaction code for the transaction you want to print (for example, STI to print the Supervisor Clock-In). Defaults to the length of the code you entered. Do not change if you want to accept the defaults.

To enter other codes, repeat the steps to enter five more codes into the first column. When you have completed one card, you can click the Copy Previous Card button to copy the codes to the next card, and change any fields as necessary. If you click the Copy... button on the third column, the system will copy the second column entries into the third column. Click Print to print when you have completed the entries. The system displays a prompt to select the printer and how many copies are required.

Transactions (TRX020) As your employees complete transactions, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode device. They may also need to enter transaction codes, if they are working at a device without function keys. To simplify these processes, you can print barcodes for the required codes and post them by the barcode devices. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Transactions. The user can select a range of transactions, with or without transaction types, or specific transactions, which includes all types. Begin the process by entering header text, which will print at the top of the barcode page, in the following field:

FIELD
Enter page heading

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 45 characters of text that will be printed at the top of the barcode sheet.

To print transaction codes by specifying a range:

Kronos Incorporated Page 303 of 613

Specify a range of the appropriate codes by completing the following fields: Select transaction codes by range from:...to: Transaction types (Up to 5) Transaction program Enter the beginning and ending transaction codes to include in the selection process. Remember that the transaction codes named here will be included in that search. Enter up to five transaction types to narrow the search. Only these types for those transactions named in the range above will be selected. Use this field to specify a specific transaction to print. For example, CLOCKIN or EXTRAHRS. If you complete the field, no other transactions will print.

After the range and type selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific transaction codes: Enter the specific transaction codes in the following fields: Select random transaction codes Type in the Transaction code or select from the dropdown list. Only one code can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one transaction code to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific transaction codes are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing.

Travelers (TRV015) Printing barcoded work order information is essential to tracking labor data in your facility. If your facility already uses barcodes on work orders, you will want to confirm that they are compatible with the ShopTrac Pro system. Once Work Orders are created, you can begin printing barcoded Travelers. Report Printing Options Fields to complete for the barcoded traveler to print are found on two tabs, Selection 1 and Selection 2. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields: Selection 1

FIELD
Work order numbers

DESCRIPTION
The range of work orders to include. If left blank, all work orders will be included.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 304 of 613

Customer numbers Part numbers Select last printed dates Select unprinted only Print only operations Print only function

The range of customers to include on the listing. If left blank, all customers will be included. The range of part numbers to included. If left blank, all part numbers will be included. The range of dates when work order travelers were last printed. If left blank, all work orders will be included, regardless of print dates. Check this box if you want to print only those work orders that have not yet had travelers printed. Leave clear to print all work orders, previously printed or not. The range of work order operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. Select up to five Work order types. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types.

Work order types

Work order statuses Select up to five Work order statuses. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types. Selection 2

FIELD
Print part number at top

DESCRIPTION
This controls where the part number is printed on the traveler. Options are: A - Print at the top of every page B - Print at the top of the first page only N - Do not print the part number

Print quantity barcode

This controls where the quantity ordered is printed on the traveler. Options are: A - Print at the top of every page B - Print at the top of the first page only N - Do not print the quantity barcode or text

Print work order information Print operation information

Check this box if you want to print the work order ID information. Leave clear if you don't want this information printed. Check this box if you want to print the operation efficiency information. Leave clear if you don't want this information printed.
Page 305 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Print standards in operation information Print work instructions Stagger operation, function barcodes

Check this box if you want to print the operation standards/hours information. Leave clear if you don't want this information printed. Check this box if you want to print the work instructions from the operations file. Leave clear if you don't want this information printed. Check this box if you want to stagger the printing of operation and function barcodes on different lines. This is helpful when using last scanners, however it does take more space on the traveler. Leave clear if you don't want printing to be staggered. The user may select one additional piece of data, associated with the operation, to be printed on the operation data line. Options are: 0 - None B - Operation User-defined field C - Scheduled completion date D - Department or group E - Employee standard M - Machine S - Scheduled start date V - Variance limit W - Work center X - Machine standard

Operation line data selection

Barcode height

The height of the barcodes on the travelers. Acceptable values are 2 or 3. A height of 3 is usually better if the barcodes are scanned by hand. A height of 2 is used with laser scanners and conserves space on the traveler. This setting applies to all barcodes printed on the traveler. Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: P - Part Number order W - Work Order order

Sequence

Page breaks

Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on operation

Kronos Incorporated

Page 306 of 613

Work Center (WKC020) As your employees change work centers, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode device. If they are working at a device without function keys, they may need to enter transaction codes. To simplify these processes, you can print barcodes for the required codes and post them by the barcode devices. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Work Centers. The user can select a range of work centers or specific work centers. Begin the process by entering header text, which will print at the top of the barcode page, in the following field:

FIELD
Enter page heading

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 45 characters of text that will be printed at the top of the barcode sheet.

To print work center codes by specifying a range: Specify a range of the appropriate codes by completing the following field: Select work center codes by range from:...to: Enter the beginning and ending work center codes to include in the selection process. Remember that the work centers named here will be included in that search.

After the range selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific work center codes: Enter the specific codes in the following fields: Select random work center codes Type in the Work Center code or select from the dropdown list. Only one department can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one work center code to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific work center codes are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing.

Work Order (TRV020) As your employees complete work orders, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode
Kronos Incorporated Page 307 of 613

device. They may also need to enter work order codes, if they are working at a device without function keys. To simplify these processes, you can print barcodes for the required codes and post them by the barcode devices, available to be swiped with a barcode pen. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Work Orders. The user can select a range of work orders, with or without work order types, or specific work orders, which includes all types. Begin the process by entering header text, which will print at the top of the barcode page, in the following field:

FIELD
Enter page heading

DESCRIPTION
Enter up to 45 characters of text that will be printed at the top of the barcode sheet.

To print work order codes by specifying a range: Specify a range of the appropriate codes by completing the following fields: Select work order numbers by range from:...to: Work order types (Up to 5) Enter the beginning and ending work orders to include in the selection process. Remember that the work order numbers named here will be included in that search. Enter up to five work order types to narrow the search. Only these types for those work orders named in the range above will be selected.

After the range and type selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific work order codes: Enter the specific work order codes in the following fields: Select random work order numbers Type in the work order number or select from the dropdown list. Only one number can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one work order code to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific work order codes are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing.

Work Order Labels (TRV030) As your employees complete work orders, they must enter the appropriate codes at the barcode device. They may also need to enter work order codes, if they are working at a device without
Kronos Incorporated Page 308 of 613

function keys. To simplify these processes, you can print barcode labels to be placed on cards and posted by the barcode devices, available for swiping on a card reader. Report Printing Options Select menu options Reports > Barcodes> Work Order Labels. The user can select a range of work orders, with or without work order types, or specific work orders, which includes all types. Select a label size (currently only one size 2" X 4", Avery #5163, is included) and select the work orders to include by completing the following field: Select work center codes by range from:...to: Enter the beginning and ending work center codes to include in the selection process. Remember that the work centers named here will be included in that search.

After the range selection is complete, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. To print barcode sheets for specific work center codes: Enter the specific codes in the following fields: Select random work order numbers Type in the work order number or select from the dropdown list. Only one number can be entered in each field.

To enter more than one work order code to print on the same page, click Tab and the cursor will move to the next field to complete. The order of movement from field to field is left to right and then to the next line. After the specific work order codes are entered, click Print to select a printer and number of copies, and begin printing. Note: To print the same code multiple times on a single sheet of labels, enter the same code in multiple random labor code fields.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 309 of 613

Daily Assignment
The Daily Assignment option lets the user schedule overtime (pre- and post-shift), temporary shifts, and absences in advance. Daily Assignment authorizes future events and/or changes (unusual daily events) in an employees department, group, work center etc. These reports can lists assignment for an employee on a given date and summarizes the data in a calendar format or in summary form. The following are Daily Assignment Reports: Assignment Schedule Chart Assignment Schedule Summary Personnel Archive Chart PRS090 PRS092 PRS080

Assignment Schedule Chart (PRS090) This report lists the scheduled events for an employee in a calendar format. The report lists any or all of the four possible assignments scheduled for an employee for a given data. It also summarizes and totals hours scheduled. Report Printing Options The criteria are detailed on three tabs, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to ID numbers

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. The range of Employee ID numbers to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all Employee IDs will be included. The range of departments to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all departments will be included. The range of groups within a department to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all groups will be included. The range of work centers to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all centers will be included.

Departments Groups

Work centers

Kronos Incorporated

Page 310 of 613

Selection Criteria 2 Labor codes Job classes Work schedules The range of labor codes to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all codes will be included. The range of job classes to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all classes will be included. The range of work schedules to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all work schedules will be included. The range of teams to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all teams will be included Specify what prints on the final report. Options are: A - Print summary data only B- Print detail data only C - Print summary and detail data only Print Options Sequence Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Alphabetical B - By Employee ID order D - By Department order Page breaks Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on Employee ID Double spacing Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Home teams Summary data

Print last name first Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first. The Printed Report The report contains the following sections:

SECTION
Header Body

DESCRIPTION
Contains the selection criteria used to create the report and the date and time the report was created. Show information displayed in a calendar format, Sunday through Saturday, with totals listed at the end of each week.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 311 of 613

Each day

Lists scheduled events, if any, for each day. Events which could be included are: Temporary work schedule Temporary shift Pre-shift OT hours scheduled Post-shift OT hours scheduled Scheduled absence Scheduled temporary assignments Restriction override performed Premium zone authorized

Right-hand box Bottom column

Contains a summary of days and hours for all events. Totals are listed or each employee included in the report.

Assignment Schedule Summary (PRS092) This report lists a summary of scheduled assignments for each employee in a text format. The report lists any or all of the four possible assignments scheduled for an employee for a given data. It also summarizes and totals hours scheduled. Report Printing Options The criteria are detailed on three tabs, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to ID numbers

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. The range of employee ID numbers to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all Employee IDs will be included. The range of departments to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all departments will be included. The range of groups within a department to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all groups will be included. The range of work centers to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all centers will be included.

Department Groups

Work centers

Kronos Incorporated

Page 312 of 613

Selection Criteria 2

FIELD
Labor codes Job classes Work schedules

DESCRIPTION
The range of labor codes to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all codes will be included. The range of job classes to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all classes will be included. The range of work schedules to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all work schedules will be included. The range of teams to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all teams will be included Specify what prints on the final report. Options are: A - Print summary data only B- Print detail data only C - Print summary and detail data only

Home teams Summary data

Print Options Sequence Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Alphabetical B - By Employee ID order D - By Department order Page breaks Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on Employee ID Double spacing Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Print last name first Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first. The Printed Report This report contains the following information:

FIELD
Date Work Schedule Shift

DESCRIPTION
The date of the clock-in information. The work schedule of the employee. The employee's shift number.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 313 of 613

Overtime Pre Overtime Post Absence Code Absence Hours Dept Grp W/C Labor Code Job Class Rate Class Emp Status Restrict override

The number of pre-shift overtime hours scheduled. The number of post-shift overtime hours scheduled. The absence code of any pre-scheduled absences. The number of hours associated with the scheduled absence. The temporarily scheduled department. The temporarily scheduled group. The temporarily scheduled work center. The temporarily scheduled labor code. The temporarily scheduled job class. The temporarily scheduled rate class. The temporarily scheduled employee status. The designations of the zones where clock-in/out is restricted. The options are: A - All restriction zones are overridden. 1-6 - The specified zone is overridden

Premium Zones 1234567890

The indicated premium zone has been authorized. A 'Y' is displayed in the appropriate column. If the column is blank, the zone is not authorized.

Personnel Archive Chart (PRS080) The Daily Assignments Personnel Archive Chart collects all the assigned events created in the system that has been purged. Run the Nightly Batch for a given date, the Daily Assignments file is no longer needed because all the events scheduled have occurred or have been processed by Nightly Batch. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

Currently all purged information is located in a single file and the system will recover the selected data from that location automatically. As additional information is purged the file will become larger making the selection process more critical with time. Users have the option to view a preview of the list on the screen or print the listing. Double clicking on the report name or by highlighting the report and clicking the Print icon on the
Kronos Incorporated Page 314 of 613

toolbar shown below can open the desired report. Report Printing Options To run a new chart fill in the information according to the table below:

FIELD
Employee ID

DESCRIPTION
Employee(s) may be selected from the pull down button to the right of the window. Selection can include the following: Individual - Select the individual by highlighting the name and clicking the check at the upper left of the display window. Random - Use the Crtl Key on the keyboard and highlight as many as required for the report. Once completed select the check in the upper left corner of the display window. Block - Select the first name then locate the final name in the block sequence desired. Hold the Shift Key down on the keyboard while making the final selection. All names from the first selection and last will be highlighted. Once completed select the check in the upper left corner of the display window. All - To select all names. Use the process for Block selection, selecting the first name and last names on the list. This will highlight the entire list. Once completed select the check in the upper left corner of the display window. This window works similar to other Reference Date selections, with the exception noted below. Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. Exception: Once a date has been selected the user no has a scroll option available that is deactivated without a date. User can select the month, day or year to scroll, using the up down arrows to the right of the date. Check this box to separate employee ID with a page break. Select this icon to view the report on the display screen. Once the report has been previewed the option of Printing the report or Saving it are also available to the user. Select this icon to name the file to be saved to the local hard drive. See the information above to the location of the file and warnings associated with there deletion.
Page 315 of 613

Reference Date From:.....To:

Page Break On ID Menu Bar Options Display

Save

Kronos Incorporated

Delete

Select the file name for deletion in the window to the right of the "X" for deletion.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 316 of 613

Labor Reports
The reports generated from this option relate to employees' Labor files. For example, you can review the hours worked by employees in a particular department. Or, on a given day, you can determine how many hours have been spent on a particular work order. Reports available are: Employee Activity Labor Hours Summary Period Timecard Rate Detail by ID & Date Rate Detail by ID & Work Order Team Status Work Order Detail LAB420 LAB475 LAB451 LAB423 LAB427 LAB440 LAB402

Employee Activity (LAB420) This report lists employee Labor hours by Employee ID number. It has fields that contain Work In Progress and Quality Control information. You can elect to run this report for a range of Employee IDs, home departments, or shifts. To narrow the range of information reported, enter qualifying information related to labor and/or work order files. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on five tabbed screens, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2, Selection Criteria 3, Selection Criteria 4 and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. If left blank, the system will report all dates available for each employee. The range of employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. This field makes selections based on home departments set in
Page 317 of 613

IDs Home departments

Kronos Incorporated

the Employee file, not in the Labor record. Home groups Home work centers Home work schedules Selection Criteria 2 A range of groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules.

FIELD
Home teams Labor departments

DESCRIPTION
A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. This field makes selections based on departments set in the Labor record, not in the employee record. A range of groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of shifts to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all shifts.

Labor groups Labor work centers Labor work schedules Labor shifts Selection Criteria 3

FIELD
Labor teams Work orders Operations Function

DESCRIPTION
A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. A range of work orders to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work orders. A range of operations to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all operations. The function to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all functions in each work order requested above. Select a data range according to how this user-defined field was set up in the Work Order file. If the field is named in the Setup program, that name will replace the Misc label. Select up to 10 Labor types. If left blank, the system f ll
Page 318 of 613

Misc (Work order user-defined field)

Labor types
Kronos Incorporated

generates a report for all types. Selection Criteria 4 Misc (Labor userdefined field 1) Misc (Labor userdefined field 2) Part numbers Customers Part types Routers Print Options Select a data range according to how the first userdefined field was set up in the Labor configuration file. Select a data range according to how the second userdefined field was set up in the Labor configuration file. A range of part numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all part numbers. A range of customers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all customers. A range of part types to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all part types. A range of routers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all routers.

FIELD
Work order types

DESCRIPTION
A range of work order types to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work order types. These types are defined in the Flags file. Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Employee ID, Date B - Home Department, Group, Employee ID, Date C - Labor Department, Group, Employee ID, Date D - Home Work center, Employee ID, Date E - Labor Work center, Employee ID, Date

Sequence

Page breaks

Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on Employee ID

Double spacing

Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Print last name first Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first. Print labor text Check this box if you want the labor text to print on all printed pages. Leave clear if you want the text to print only on the first page of the report.
Page 319 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Print hours per labor records

Check this box if you want the labor records to be printed on a line below the detail. Each pay category is printed only once with the total hours allocated to that category for that time record. Leave clear if you don't want labor records to be included. Check this box if you want the daily subtotals to be printed on a line below the detail. Each pay category is printed only once with the total hours allocated to that category for that time record. Leave clear if you don't want daily subtotals to be included. Check this box if you want the labor records for each employee subtotal printed on a line below the detail. Leave clear if you don't want labor records to be included. Check this box if you want the labor records to be totaled by other breakdowns and printed on a line below the detail. Leave clear if you don't want labor records to be included. Check this box if you want the labor records to be totaled for the entire report and printed on a line below the detail. Leave clear if you don't want labor records to be included.

Print Hours per daily Subtotal

Print hours per employee subtotal

Print hours per other subtotal

Print hours per grand total

The Printed Report The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report was created. Depending on the print sequence selected, a header separates each record. The header contains information related to the sequence selected. For example, if the Employee ID, Date sequence was selected, the data would be proceeded by a header with the employee ID and name, and a header with each new date. The fields under each header section include the following:

FIELD
Employee Date Work Sched Shift First In Last Out

DESCRIPTION
The employee's ID and name. Date of the record. The work schedule to which the employee is assigned. The shift the employee is assigned to. The adjusted time of the employee's first clock-in on this date. The adjusted time of the employee's last clock-out on this date.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 320 of 613

Recalc Needed

If an * appears here, it is an indication that something in the system has changed that necessitates a recalculation of hours. The hours you see on the report are not necessarily accurate if recalculation is indicated. The date and the adjusted start time for each job the employee logged on within the specified parameter. The date and the adjusted start time for each job the employee logged on within the specified parameter. The work order number of the job the employee was on. The operation of the work order and its function. The function part is to the right of the decimal. Absence codes and Indirect work orders do not have operations. The description from the operation record. The associated department and group. The associated labor code. The associated job class. The transaction code that created this labor record. The associated completion code. The associated work center The associated machine. The number of hours allocated to this labor record. The number of hours designated in the Column 1 definition for the report. For instance, if Column 1 were defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 2 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 2 were defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 3 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 3 were defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 4 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 4 were defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here.

Adj Start Adj Stop Work Order Opn

Description Dept/Grp Labor Code Job Class Trx Comp WC Mach Hours Information: Alloc Hours Information: Column 1

Hours Information: Column 2

Hours Information: Column 3

Hours Information: Column 4

Kronos Incorporated

Page 321 of 613

RN

If an * appears here, it is an indication that something in the system has changed that necessitates a recalculation of hours. The hours you see on the report are not necessarily accurate if recalculation is indicated. Weighting factor set for the operation when the work order is set up. The Hours Requirement for this work order. Options are: Blank - Hours are allocated in the usual way. H - All hours are given to this job, regardless of other jobs in progress concurrently. Z - Zero hours are given to this job because another job was in progress concurrently.

WF HR

Earned Hours

Hours earned based on the standards set up in the work order for how long the operation should have taken, based on the number of pieces completed or the percent of the setup completed. Displays the efficiency level calculated by the system, based on the earned hours and total hours allocated to the operation. The quantity entered when the employee logged off. The quantity scrapped reported when logging off work orders. The scrap code set up in the work order operation. The work center associated with the scrap numbers. This field indicates how the time for this record has been adjusted. The options are: 1-6 - Meal/Break deducted A - Adjusted H - another job was all hours I - Indirect while direct in progress M - Multiple jobs N - Non-paid absence O - Clock out with job open R - Rounded Z - Another job was zero hours

Efficiency

Quantities: Completed Quantities: Scrapped Quantities: Code Scrap WC Adjustments

Kronos Incorporated

Page 322 of 613

NOTE: If the PRINTNOQUANITIES parameter is used, the Earned Hours, Efficiencies, Quantities, Scrap W/C and Adjustments headers above and their quantities will not be included on the report.

Labor Hours Summary (LAB475) This report includes the Pay Categories and hours data for employees. It also contains rate information and tallies the hours for the employee, for the work order specified, and for the entire report. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on five tabbed screens, Selection Criteria 1, Selection Criteria 2, Selection Criteria 3, Selection Criteria 4, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. If left blank, the system will report all dates available for each employee. The range of Employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. This field makes selections based on home departments set in the Employee file, not in the Labor record. A range of groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules.

IDs Home departments

Home groups Home work centers Home work schedules Selection Criteria 2

FIELD
Home teams Labor departments

DESCRIPTION
A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. This field makes selections based on departments set in the
Page 323 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Labor record, not in the employee record. Labor groups Labor work centers Labor work schedules Labor shifts Selection Criteria 3 A range of groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of shifts to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all shifts.

FIELD
Labor teams Work orders Operations Function

DESCRIPTION
A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. A range of work orders to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work orders. A range of operations to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all operations. The function to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all functions in each work order requested above. Select a data range according to how this user-defined field was set up in the Work Order file. If the field is named in the Setup program, that name will replace the Misc label. Select up to 10 Labor types. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types. Select a data range according to how the first userdefined field was set up in the Labor configuration file. If the field is named in the Setup program, that name will replace the Misc 1 label. Select a data range according to how the second userdefined field was set up in the Labor configuration file. If the field is named in the Setup program, that name will replace the Misc 2 label. A range of part numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all part numbers. A range of customers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all customers.
Page 324 of 613

Misc (Work order userdefined field) Labor types Selection Criteria 4 Misc 1 (Labor userdefined field 1) Misc 2 (Labor userdefined field 2) Part numbers Customers

Kronos Incorporated

Part types Routers Print Options

A range of part types to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all part types. A range of routers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all routers.

FIELD
Work order types

DESCRIPTION
A range of work order types to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work order types. These types are defined in the Flags file. Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Employee ID, Date B - Home Department, Group, Employee ID, Date C - Labor Department, Group, Employee ID, Date D - Home Work center, Employee ID, Date E - Labor Work center, Employee ID, Date

Sequence

Page breaks

Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on Employee ID C - Page break on Date

Report format

Check the appropriate boxes. They are: Double Spacing - Check if you want a blank line between each record on the report. Leave clear for no blank lines. Print Last Name First - Check if you want the records to be printed with the last name before the first name. Leave clear to print first name before last name. Output Pay Categories Alpha(betically) - Check if you want the report to print pay categories alphabetically. Leave clear to print categories chronologically.

The Printed Report The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report was created. Depending on the print sequence selected, a header separates each record. The header contains information related to the sequence selected. For example, if the Employee ID, Date sequence were selected, the data would be preceded by a header with the employee ID and name, and a header with each new date. The fields under each header section include the following:
Kronos Incorporated Page 325 of 613

FIELD
Employee Date Work Sched Allocated Pay Category Description Hours Recalc Needed

DESCRIPTION
The employee's ID and name. Date of the record. The work schedule to which the employee is assigned. The number of hours allocated to this labor records on this date. The code for the pay category for the labor record. The description of the pay category. The total number of hours to this pay category for this date. If an * appears here, it is an indication that something in the system has changed that necessitates a recalculation of hours. The hours you see on the report are not necessarily accurate if recalculation is indicated.

Period Timecard (LAB451) This report lists employee hours by Employee ID number. A period-hours summary appears at the top of each employee's timecard, with detailed daily hours following. You can run this report for a range of Employee IDs, home departments or shifts. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on three tabbed screens, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. If left blank, the system will report all dates available for each employee. The range of Employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. A range of department groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the f ll k
Page 326 of 613

IDs Departments Groups Work centers

Kronos Incorporated

system generates a report for all work centers. Labor codes Selection Criteria 2 A range of labor codes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all labor codes.

FIELD
Job classes Work schedules Teams Time format: Select one

DESCRIPTION
A range of job classes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all job classes. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. This report can be changed to display time information in a format created in the Export Formats utility. Specify the name of the time format here. If this field is left blank, the hard-coded system format will be used. The system format will be faster to process. This report can be changed to display labor information in a format created in the Export Formats utility. Specify the name of the labor format here. If this field is left blank, the hard-coded system format will be used. The system format will be faster to process.

Labor format: Select one

Print Options

FIELD
Report title Sequence

DESCRIPTION
Use up to 50-characters to define a title that will print at the top of the report. Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Employee ID, Date B - Home Department, Group, Employee ID, Date C - Labor Department, Group, Employee ID, Date D - Home Work center, Employee ID, Date E - Labor Work center, Employee ID, Date

Page breaks

Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on employee

Double spacing

Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 327 of 613

Print last name first Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first. Print period header on all pages Print signature line Check this box if you want the period header to print on all printed pages. Leave clear if you want the header to print only on the first page of the report. Check this box if you want a signature line to print on each employee's timecard. Leave clear if you don't want a signature line to be printed. Check this box if you want the LHours records to be printed on a line below the detail. Each pay category is printed only once with the total hours allocated to that category for that time record. Leave clear if you don't want LHours records to be included. Check this box if you want the LHours records to be totaled by day and printed on a line below the detail. Leave clear if you don't want LHours records to be included. Check this box if you want the LHours records to be totaled by employee and printed on a line below the detail. Leave clear if you don't want LHours records to be included.

Print hours per labor records

Print hours per daily subtotal

Print hours per employee subtotal

The Printed Report The fields included on the Period Timecard report are divided into time and labor sections. The formats for each section can be tailored to meet your needs. The fields include the following:

TIME HEADERS
Day Sched In Out Dept/Group W/C Temporary

DESCRIPTION
The date and day of the week. The work schedule followed by the shift. The first clock-in for the reference date. The first clock-out for the reference date. The employee's home department code. The work center for the employee. This field contains the alphanumeric designations for any temporary assignments the employee may have had on this date. Possible values are: D- Department E - Employee status G - Group

Kronos Incorporated

Page 328 of 613

H - Shift J - Job Class L - Labor Code R - Rate Class S - Work Schedule W - Work Center R (Hours Requirement) SO (Sign Off) If the Labor record had an hours requirement of H or Z, it appears here. Blanks indicate a D (default) hours requirement. This column displays indicators to tell who has electronically signed off the time record. The options are: E - Employee S - Supervisor Labor headers

LABOR HEADERS DESCRIPTION

WO/Event Opn Description W/C Start Stop Hours R (Hours Requirement) Adjs/Rates The absence or event code associated with each event. The operation associated with the work order. This includes the function. The operation description. The work center associated with each event. The time the employee began the labor record for this work order or absence code. The time the employee ended the labor record. The number of hours allocated to the event. If the Labor record had an hours requirement of H or Z, it appears here. Blanks indicate a D (default) hours requirement. This field indicates how the time for this record has been adjusted or the employee's hourly rate. The adjustment options are: 1-6 - Meal/Break deducted A - Adjusted H - Another job was all hours I - Indirect while direct in progress

Kronos Incorporated

Page 329 of 613

M - Multiple jobs N - Non-paid absence O - Clock out with job open R - Rounded Z - Another job was zero hours. The employee's rate is displayed in place of the adjustments when the SHOWRATE parameter is passed. SO (Sign Off) The indicators of who has signed off on this record.

Rate Detail by Employee ID & Date (LAB423) This report lists employee labor hours and rate information by employee ID number. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on three tabbed screens, Selection Criteria 1, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. If left blank, the system will report all dates available for each employee. The range of Employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of work orders to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work orders. A range of operations to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all operations. The function to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all functions in each work order requested above. Select a data range according to how this user-defined field was set up in the Work Order file. If the field is named in the Setup program, that name will replace the Misc label.

ID Numbers Work orders Operations Function

Misc (work order userdefined field) Selection Criteria 2

Kronos Incorporated

Page 330 of 613

Labor types Departments

Select up to 10 Labor types. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. This field makes selections based on departments set in the Labor record, not in the employee record. A range of groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of shifts to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all shifts.

Groups Work centers Work schedules Shifts Print Options

FIELD
Teams Page breaks

DESCRIPTION
A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on employee ID C - Page break on date

Double spacing

Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Print last name first Check this box if you want the report to print last names before first names. Leave clear if first names should be printed before last names. The Printed Report The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report was created. The fields include the following:

FIELD
Employee Work Sched Shift First In
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
A header box with the employee's ID and name. The work schedule to which the employee is assigned. The shift the employee is assigned to. The adjusted time of the employee's first clock-in on this d
Page 331 of 613

date. Last Out Recalc Needed The adjusted time of the employee's last clock-out on this date. If an * appears here, it is an indication that something in the system has changed that necessitates a recalculation of hours. The hours you see on the report are not necessarily accurate if recalculation is indicated. The date and the adjusted start time for each job the employee logged on within the specified parameter. The date and the adjusted start time for each job the employee logged on within the specified parameter. The work order number of the job the employee was on. The operation of the work order and its function. The function part is to the right of the decimal. Absence codes and Indirect work orders do not have operations. The description from the operation record. The associated department and group. The associated work center. The associated labor code. The associated job class. The calculations that were used to arrive at the rate. The calculated rate. This is based on the employee base rate plus any applied premiums. The number of hours allocated to this labor record. The number of hours designated in the Column 1 definition for the report. For instance, if Column 1 were defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 2 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 2 were defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 3 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 3 were defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 4 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 4 were
Page 332 of 613

Adj Start Adj Stop Work Order Opn

Description Dept/Grp Work center Labor Code Job Class Rate Calculations Rate Hours Information: Alloc Hours Information: Column 1

Hours Information: Column 2

Hours Information: Column 3

Hours Information: Column 4

Kronos Incorporated

Column 4 RN

defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here. If an * appears here, it is an indication that something in the system has changed that necessitates a recalculation of hours. The hours you see on the report are not necessarily accurate if recalculation is indicated. The cost of hours allocated to Column 1 above. The cost of hours allocated to Column 2 above (1.5 x the rate). The cost of hours allocated to Column 3 above (2 x the rate). The total cost of hours allocated to this function (the sum of Mult 1, 2 and 3).

Cost: Mult 1 Cost: Mult 2 Cost: Mult 3 Cost: Total

Rate Detail by ID & Work Order (LAB427) This report shows the hours worked by an employee for a given work order. It contains rate information and tallies the hours for the employee, for the work order specified and for the entire report. Report Printing Options The fields to complete for a desired report are found on five tabs, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2, Selection Criteria 3, Selection Criteria 4, and Print Options. Selection Criteria

FIELD
Work orders Operations Functions

DESCRIPTION
A range of work orders to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work orders. A range of operations to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all operations. The function to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all functions in each work order requested above. Select a data range according to how this user-defined field was set up in the Work Order file. If the field is named in the Setup program, that name will replace the Misc label. A range of dates to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all dates for each selected work order.
Page 333 of 613

Misc (Work order userdefined field) Reference dates from...to

Kronos Incorporated

Customers Selection Criteria 2

A range of customers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all customers.

FIELD
Part numbers Part types Routers Work order types

DESCRIPTION
A range of part numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all part numbers. A range of part types to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all part types. A range of routers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all routers. A range of work order types to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work order types. These types are defined in the Flags file. Select up to 10 Labor types. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types. The range of Employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees.

Labor types ID numbers Selection Criteria 3

FIELD
Departments Groups Work centers Work schedules Shifts Teams Selection Criteria 4 Misc 1 (Labor userdefined field 1) Misc 2 (Labor userdefined field 2)

DESCRIPTION
A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. A range of groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of shifts to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all shifts. A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. Select a data range according to how the first userdefined field was set up in the Labor configuration file. Select a data range according to how the second userdefined field was set up in the Labor configuration file.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 334 of 613

Print Options

FIELD
Sequence

DESCRIPTION
Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - By Work Order, Operation B - By Work Order Type, Work Order, Operation C - By User-defined field 1, Work Order, Operation D - By Part Number, Work Order, Operation E - By Part Type, Part Number, Work Order F - By Customer, Work Order, Operation G - By Router, Work Order

Page breaks Double Spacing

Check the box if you want the report to break on each new work order. Leave clear to print continuously. Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line. Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first.

Print Last Name First The Printed Report

The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report was created. Depending on the Sequence order selected, the headers will reflect the order selected. For instance, if Part Number, Work Order, Operation is selected; a header box with the part number will precede the work order and operation header. The fields below are given in the order of display for the default sequence (Work Order, Operation). They include the following:

FIELD
Work Order Scheduled Revised Actual

DESCRIPTION
The work order number and description for the information. The scheduled start and completion date as found in the work order file. The revised start and completion date as found in the work order file. The actual start and completion date as found in the work order file. This date is determined by the system as employees log on/off the work order. The status of the work order. This is blank if the work order has not been started; otherwise an "I" is displayed.

Status

Kronos Incorporated

Page 335 of 613

Type Part #, Name WO User- Defined field Qty Val

The work order type, if used. The part number of this work order and its name. The contents of the work order user-defined field set up in the System configuration file. Quantity Validation. A "Y" in this column indicates that quantities completed are validated against the quantity ordered for the work order. Set in the work order file. Sequence Validation. A "Y" in this column indicates that the steps in the operation are validated to be performed in sequential order. Set in the work order file. Automatic Quantity Moves. A "Y" in this column indicates that quantities are automatically moved from one operation to the next. Set in the work order file. The quantity ordered in the work order record. The router defined in the work order record. Unit of measure set for the work order. The employee ID and employee name related to the work order. The date of the time record associated with this labor record. The operation of the work order. Note that absence codes and indirect work orders do not have operations. The description of the operation. The work schedule associated with the work order. The shift associated with the work order. The department associated with the work order. The group associated with the work order. The work center associated with the work order. The labor code associated with the work order. The job class associated with the work order. The calculations that were used to arrive at the rate shown for the work order. The calculated rate. This is based on the employee base rate plus any applied premiums.

Seq Val

Auto Moves

Qty Ordered Routing UOM Employee ID Date Opn Description Work Sched Sh Dept Grp Work Ctr Labor Code Job Cls Rate Calculations Rate -- Hours Information --

Kronos Incorporated

Page 336 of 613

Alloc Column 1

The number of hours allocated to this labor record The number of hours designated in the Column 1 definition for the report. For instance, if Column 1 were defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 2 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 2 were defined as Overtime/Doubletime, then those hours would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 3 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 3 were defined as Total, then total hours would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 4 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 4 were defined as Special, then hours classified as special would appear here. If an * appears here, it is an indication that something in the system has changed that necessitates a recalculation of hours. The hours you see on the report are not necessarily accurate if recalculation is indicated. The Hours Requirement for this work order. Options are: D - Default hours are allocated. H - All hours are given to this job, regardless of other jobs in progress concurrently. Z - Zero hours are given to this job because another job was in progress concurrently.

Column 2

Column 3

Column 4

RN

HR

Hours earned

Hours earned based on the standards set up in the work order for how long the operation should have taken, based on the number of pieces completed or the percent of the setup completed. Displays the efficiency level calculated by the system, based on the earned hours and total hours allocated to the operation. The cost of the hours allocated to Column 1. The cost of the hours allocated to Column 2 (1.5 x the rate). The cost of the hours allocated to Column 3 (2 x the rate).
Page 337 of 613

Eff

-- $ Cost -Mult1 Mult2 Mult3

Kronos Incorporated

Total $ Earned

The total cost of hours that is allocated to this function; the sum of Mult1, Mult2 and Mult3. The total of earned hours x operation standard rate, if included.

Team Status (LAB440) This report lists all open jobs for the selected team(s) and gives a listing of all employees currently assigned to the team. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Attendance date

DESCRIPTION
Enter the date to reference data for the report. If run for a previous date, the only information that will be reported is for employees who did not clock-out on that date and were assigned to the team. The range of employee teams to report. If left blank, the system will report all teams. Check this box if you want the report to break pages on each new team. Leave clear if the report should print continuously.

Teams Page break on teams The Printed Report

The report includes the following fields:

FIELD
Open Jobs Work Order Opn Description Employees on team Employee ID/Name

DESCRIPTION
Listing of all work orders the team is currently logged onto. The work order number. The operation and function for the work order. The operation description. Listing of all employees currently assigned to the team. The ID number and name of each employee on the team.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 338 of 613

Work Order Detail (LAB402) This Labor report shows hours worked, by work order. You can sort it by specific work orders. It tallies the hours for the day, for all days specified, and for the entire report. You can select the dates, departments, shifts, etc. for which you want a report. It is a detailed report of hours worked arranged numerically by work order number. The heading contains information for the work order and the body of the report contains more detailed information for each operation within the work order. Use this report to determine which operations have been performed on each work order. The report totals the hours posted on each operation and for the entire work order. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on three tabbed screens, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Work orders Operations Functions

DESCRIPTION
A range of work orders to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work orders. A range of operations to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all operations. The function to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all functions in each work order requested above.
A range of customers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all customers.

Customers Part numbers Reference dates from...to Selection Criteria 2

A range of part numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all part numbers. A range of dates to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all dates for each selected work order.

FIELD
ID numbers Departments Groups Work centers Work schedules
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
The range of Employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. A range of groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the f ll k h d l
Page 339 of 613

system generates a report for all work schedules. Shifts Print Options A range of shifts to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all shifts.

FIELD
Teams Labor types Page breaks

DESCRIPTION
A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. Select up to 10 Labor types. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types. Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on work order C - Page break on operation

Double spacing

Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Print last name first Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first. Output Opn header on non-direct Print work instructions Print labor text Check this option if you want the operation header above all non-direct jobs information. Check this option if you want to print any work instructions that may have been entered for the work order. Print any relevant comments that may have been entered in the labor text field during a Time/Labor Editor session.

The Printed Report The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report was created. The fields include the following:

FIELD
Work Order Scheduled Revised

DESCRIPTION
The work order number and description for the information. The scheduled start and completion date as found in the work order file. The revised start and completion date as found in the work order file.
Page 340 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Actual

The actual start and completion date as found in the work order file. This date is determined by the system as employees log on/off the work order. The status of the work order. This is blank if the work order has not been started; otherwise an "I" is displayed. The work order type, if used. The part number of this work order and its name. The contents of the work order user-defined field set up in the System configuration file. Quantity Validation. A "Y" in this column indicates that quantities completed are validated against the quantity ordered for the work order. Set in the work order file. Sequence Validation. A "Y" in this column indicates that the steps in the operation are validated to be performed in sequential order. Set in the work order file. Automatic Quantity Moves. A "Y" in this column indicates that quantities are automatically moved from one operation to the next. Set in the work order file. The quantity ordered in the work order record. The router defined in the work order record. Unit of measure set for the work order. The operation number and description of the work order. Note that absence codes and indirect work orders do not have operations. The scheduled start and completion date as found in the operation record. The revised start and completion date as found in the operation record. The actual start and completion date as found in the operation record. This date is determined by the system as employees log on/off the operation. The status of the operation. This is blank if the operation has not been started; otherwise it is I (Incomplete) or C (Complete). The date and the adjusted start time for each job the employee logged onto within the specified parameters. The date and adjusted stop time for each job the employee logged off of within the specified parameters. This field is blank if the job is still open.
Page 341 of 613

Status Type Part #, Name WO User- Defined field Qty Val

Seq Val

Auto Moves

Qty Ordered Routing UOM Operation number

Scheduled Start & Completion Revised Start & Completion Actual Start & Completion Status

Adj Start Adj Stop

Kronos Incorporated

Employee ID Employee Name RefDate Dept/Grp Work Schedule Shift Labor Code Job Cls Trx Comp WC Mach --Hours Information-Alloc Column 1

The employee ID related to the work order. The employee name related to the work order. The date of the time record associated with this labor record. The department and group associated with the labor record. The work schedule associated with the labor record. The shift associated with the labor record. The labor code associated with the labor record. The job class associated with the labor record. The transaction code that opened this labor record. The completion code associated with the labor record. The work center associated with the labor record. The machine associated with the labor record.

The number of hours allocated to this labor record The number of hours designated in the Column 1 definition for the report. For instance, if Column 1 were defined as Regular, then hours classified as regular would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 2 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 2 were defined as Overtime/Doubletime, then those hours would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 3 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 3 were defined as Total, then total hours would appear here. The number of hours designated in the Column 4 definitions for the report. For instance, if Column 4 were defined as Special, then hours classified as special would appear here. If an * appears here, it is an indication that something in the system has changed that necessitates a recalculation of hours. The hours you see on the report are not necessarily accurate if recalculation is indicated. The weighting factor related to this labor record.

Column 2

Column 3

Column 4

RN

WF

Kronos Incorporated

Page 342 of 613

HR

The Hours Requirement for this work order. Options are: Blank - Hours are allocated in the usual way. H - All hours are given to this job, regardless of other jobs in progress concurrently. Z - Zero hours are given to this job because another job was in progress concurrently.

Earned Hours

Hours earned based on the standards set up in the work order for how long the operation should have taken, based on the number of pieces completed or the percent of the setup completed. Displays the efficiency level calculated by the system, based on the earned hours and total hours allocated to the operation. The quantity entered when the employee logged off. The cumulative total of the quantity scrapped. The scrap code associated with the work order. The work center associated with the scrap. This field indicates how the time for this record has been adjusted. The possibilities include: 1-6 - Meal\Break deducted A - Adjusted H - Another job was all hours I - Indirect while direct in progress M - Multiple jobs N - Non-paid absence O - Clock out with job open R - Rounded Z - Another job was zero hours

Eff

--Quantities-Completed Scrapped Code Scrap WC Adjustments

Kronos Incorporated

Page 343 of 613

Exceptions
Exceptions are transactions that fall outside the limits you set for clocking in and out at the beginning and ending of shifts or meals and breaks. Exceptions reports are available to list all non-standard transactions for a range of dates. This includes the following reports: Daily Exceptions Sign-Off Exceptions ADM900 TAA560

Daily Exceptions (ADM900) The Daily Exceptions report lists all unusual activity in your company for a given range of dates. This report lists information such as employees who attendance differs from the normal schedule. Use this report to note any unusual circumstances that need to be investigated and corrections that need to be made. An exception is determined by values placed in the Exceptions section of each shift file. This report is usually run daily, for the previous day, but can be run for a series of days. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. If left blank, the system will report all dates available for each employee. The range of employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. A range of department groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers.

ID numbers Departments Groups Work centers Selection Criteria 2

FIELD
Labor codes

DESCRIPTION
A range of labor codes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all labor codes.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 344 of 613

Job classes Work schedules Shifts Home teams Exceptions

A range of job classes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all job classes. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of shifts to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all shifts. A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams.

FIELD
Settings available

DESCRIPTION
Select the desired exception types to include in the report. Options are: A - Very early clockin B - Early clockin C -Late clockin D -Very late clockin E -Very early clockout F - Early clockout G -Late clockout H - Very late clockout I - Long/short day J - Full day absence K - Not clocked out L - Open labor records M - Short meal or break N - Long meal or break O - Overridden meal or break P - Supervisor transaction Q - Temporaries R - Assigned station

Settings selected

Select the setting to include and move them into this window, using the > button. If you click on the >> button, all the types will be moved over. Remove types from this window using the < button. If you click on the << button, all the selected types will be removed.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 345 of 613

Print Options

FIELD
Sequence

DESCRIPTION
Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Alphabetical B - Employee ID order D - Department, Group, Employee ID order

Page breaks

Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on department C - Page break on group

Double spacing

Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Print last name first Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first. The Printed Report The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report was created. If the print sequence was selected to display by Department, Group and ID, a header separates each new department. The header contains the department, group and supervisor name. The employees within the department are displayed in order of employee ID number. If the sequence, Alphabetical, is chosen, the employees are printed in alpha order, according to the last name. The sequence, Employee ID, is chosen, the employees are arranged in order, according to their ID number. The fields under each header section include the following:

FIELD
Employee Date Device Asgn Device INN Early In OT Sch Early In Sched Early In INN Min

DESCRIPTION
The employee's ID and name. Date of the exception. The device ID to which the employee is assigned. The device ID where the employee actually clocked in for the day. The hours of pre-shift overtime scheduled. The time when the employee was scheduled to clock in. The time when the employee actually clocked in. The number of minutes the employee was early preceded by indicators for Early and Very Early conditions, as set
Page 346 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

in the shift. Options are VE - Very Early, E - Early. Late In Sched Late in INN Min The time when the employee was scheduled to clock in. The time when the employee actually clocked in. The number of minutes the employee was late proceeded by indicators for Late and Very Late conditions as set in the shift. Options are VL - Very Late, L - Late. The employee ID of the supervisor who performed a supervisor clock-in or out for this employee. The reason code the supervisor supplied when the supervisor clock-in or out was performed. If a meal/break was taken that was out of the defined variances, i.e., too long or short, the amount by which it was long or short appears under the appropriate column. For example, L15 means that the meal/break was 15 minutes longer than schedule. S5 means that it was short by 5 minutes. The time when the employee was scheduled to clock out at the end of the shift. The time when the employee actually clocked out for the day. The number of minutes the employee was early leaving proceeded by indicators for early and very early conditions as set in the shift. The number of hours of post-shift overtime. The time when the employee was scheduled to clock out. The time when the employee actually clocked out. The number of minutes the employee was late clocking out proceeded by indicators for late and very late conditions as set in the shift. Options are VL - Very Late, L - Late. If the day was longer or shorter than what the employee's schedule called for. Options are: L - The time the employee worked was more than scheduled. S - The time the employee worked was less than scheduled. Day Min The number of minutes by which the day was Long or Short.

STI/STO ID STI/STO Code Meals/Breaks: 1-6

Early Out Sched Early Out-OUT Min

Late Out OT Sch Late Out Sched Late Out-OUT Min

Day L/S

Kronos Incorporated

Page 347 of 613

Absence Day Code Absence Day Hrs Temporaries Corrections Not Out

The reason code from the labor record assigned to an employee's full day absence. The number of hours allocated to this absence. This column indicates any temporary events that were scheduled for the employee. An X indicates that the employee did not clock out. This should be corrected with a supervisor clock-out.

Corrections Jobs IP The number of jobs left open because the employee did not log off.

Signoff Exceptions (TAA560) This report lists time and attendance file Signoff Exceptions by department and group for a specified date range. A daily signoff listing for employees with time records in the date range is created. You can run this report for a range of dates, departments, or shifts. In addition, you can run the exception report for records missing only employee signoff, supervisor signoff, or both. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Reference Dates from...to Departments Groups

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. The range of departments to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all departments will be included. The range of groups within a department to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all groups will be included. The range of work schedules to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all work schedules will be included. The range of shifts to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all shifts will be included. The range of home teams to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all teams will be included. Check this option to specify if only records missing an employee signoff should be considered exceptions and reported. If you check both this and Missing supervisor signoff, below, options, or leave both clear, the system generates a report for any record missing either employee or

Home Work Schedules Shifts Home Team Missing Employee Signoff

Kronos Incorporated

Page 348 of 613

supervisor signoff. Missing Supervisor Signoff Check this option to specify if only records missing a supervisor signoff should be considered exceptions and reported. If you check both this and Missing employee signoff, above, options, or leave both clear, the system generates a report for any record missing either employee or supervisor signoff. Page Break on Department The Printed Report The fields contained on this report are as follows: Check this box if the page breaks should be on each new department. Leave clear to print continuously.

FIELD
Employee Date Clocked Out?

DESCRIPTION
The employee ID and name. The reference date of the selected record. Clock-out flag for the reference date. Options are: Y - A clock-out exists for the employee for this date. N - No clock-out exists for the employee for this date.

Time Sign-Off Emp Time Sign-Off Sup

The date the employee signed off the corresponding time record. The date the supervisor signed off the corresponding time record and the supervisor's ID number.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 349 of 613

Lists
These are lists of operational system data that can be previewed on the screen or printed to a printer. Included on the Listings menu are: Access Profile Listing Customer Device Listing Employees Export Field Listing Export Format Listing Group Profile Listing Import Format Listing Pay Rule Profiles Prompts Shifts Detail Transactions Transaction Programs User Profile Listing Work Schedules Detail ACCESSPR CUSTOLS1 TTX920 EMPLOLS1 EXFILLS1 EXFMTLS2 GROUPPR IMPFMLS1 PRPROLS1 PROMPLST SHIFTLS2 TRANSLST TTX920 USERPR WRKSCLS

Access Profile Listing (ACCESSPR) This report prints a list of Security Access Profiles in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Access profile names

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of profile names to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all available profiles.

Customer (CUSTOLS1) This report lists selected customers and contacts by name or number.
Kronos Incorporated Page 350 of 613

Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Customer numbers Customer names Customer types

DESCRIPTION
The range of customer numbers to report. If this field is left blank, all customer numbers will be included. The range of customer names to report. If this field is left blank, all customer names will be included. Select the customer type to include in the report. If this field is left blank, all types will be included. Up to five types can be included. Customer types can be defined in the appropriate Flags file. Select the sort order for your report be clicking on appropriate option: By name or By number

Sort order

Device Listing (TTX917) This report prints a list of Devices in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Devices Active devices only

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of devices to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all available devices. Check this box if you only want devices that are active in the system to be included. Leave unchecked to include all devices.

Employees (EMPLOLS1) This report prints a listing of selected employees. The fields to complete for a desired report are found on five tabs, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2, Selection Criteria 3, and Print Options. Selection Criteria

FIELD
Employee IDs Badge numbers
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
The range of employee IDs to report. If left blank, all employees meeting other criteria will be included. A range of employee badge numbers to include in the If l f bl k ll l i h i i
Page 351 of 613

report. If left blank, all employees meeting other criteria will be included. Last name Departments The last name of the employee. If left blank, all employees meeting other criteria will be included. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. This field makes selections based on home departments set in the Employee file, not in the Labor record. A range of groups to report. If left blank, all groups meeting other criteria will be included. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of labor codes to include in the report. If left blank, all codes will be included. A range of job classes to include in the report. If left blank, all classes will be included. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of shifts to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all shifts.

Groups Selection Criteria 2 Work centers Labor code Job class Work schedules Hire dates Selection Criteria 3

FIELD
Device IDs Default work orders Employee statuses Access levels Default Teams Print Options

DESCRIPTION
A range of devices to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all devices. A range of default work orders to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work orders. Specify up to five employee statuses to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all statuses. Specify up to five access levels to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all levels. A range of default teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams.

FIELD
Output sequence

DESCRIPTION
Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Alphabetical B - By Employee ID

Kronos Incorporated

Page 352 of 613

D - By Department, Group, Employee ID N - By Badge T - By Teams Page breaks Select the desired page break. Depending on the Sequence selection above, the options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on Employee ID, Department, Group or Team Double spacing Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Print last name first Check this box if you want the report to print last names before first names. Leave clear if first names should be printed before last names.

Export Field Listing (EXFILLS1) This report prints the contents of the various fields available when defining an export or report format. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Source files

DESCRIPTION
To include only the formats designed as the source for exports, enter the file type here. Choose from Labor, LHours or Time files. If left blank, all sources are included. Select the sections of the source file to be included in the listing. Choose from [Link], Analyzed Data or Runtime Data. Field data is stored in each record; Analyzed data are calculated values that are not stored in the database but are calculated at the time they are needed, either for export or display in a report; Runtime Data are values specified at the time the export or report is run, typically values entered in the selection criteria.

Sections

The printed or displayed list includes the following headers:

HEADER
File and Description

DESCRIPTION
The ShopTrac Pro system file name and description of the selected file.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 353 of 613

Source File Section Seq Type

This is the ShopTrac Pro system file number and file name. This identifies the section selected. It will show Field, Analysis or Runtime. The file sequence number for field displayed. Type of field and field character-length. The types are: A - Alphanumeric N - Numeric D - Date T - Time For instance, A12 would identify a 12-character alphanumeric field.

Description

Description of the field or runtime data. For runtime data, this is either the parameter name or the text description if there is no parameter. For analyzed data, the description is of the calculated values that are included when needed. The ShopTrac Pro system file number and field number for each item. If this item is a custom field, the From File/Field specified is displayed. If this item is a custom field, the To File/Field specified is displayed.

Source file/field From file/fields To fields

Export Format Listing (EXFMTLS2) This report prints a list of Export Formats in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Data formats Source files

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of export formats to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all available formats. To include only the formats designed as the source for exports, enter the file name here. Otherwise, all sources are included. To include only the formats designed for one output destination, enter the file name here. Otherwise, all

Output destinations

Kronos Incorporated

Page 354 of 613

output destinations are included. The printed or displayed list includes the following in the data format box:

FIELD
Name and Description Header

DESCRIPTION
The ShopTrac Pro system file name and description of the selected format. If the Header configuration is defined in the Data Format, this section will describe Lines Per Record, Description, ASCII format, and delimiter type as specified in the Export Format record. If undefined, the header is blank. If the Body configuration is defined in the Data Format, this section will include the details of Lines Per Record, Description, ASCII format, and delimiter type as specified in the Export Format record. If undefined, the body is blank. If the Footer configuration is defined in the Data Format, this section will describe Lines Per Record, Description, ASCII format, and delimiter type as specified in the Export Format record. If undefined, the footer is blank. This is the ShopTrac Pro data file on which the Export Format is based.

Body

Footer

File The line element fields are:

HEADER
Element

DESCRIPTION
This identifies the section (Header, Body, Footer), the line number of this element, and the sequence in the data stream. If an offset-based format, the offset of the line element. The length of the element if offset-based. Export field type of the line element and the type of character. The types are: A - Alphanumeric N - Numeric D - Date T - Time For instance, A12 would identify a 12-character alphanumeric field.

Off Len Type

Source Comments
Kronos Incorporated

Data source file and field in the element. Comments entered for the line element. This is userd fi d h ld h i f i F l
Page 355 of 613

defined text to hold other information. For example, enter formatting information like mm/dd/yy for date entries. Byte total Data Types Default Just, Pad Char Other Defaults The total width of the line element in bytes. This is displayed for offset-based sections only. Displays the various data types available with the data formatter. Displays the defaults justification and padding characters for the data types. Displays other defaults for line elements.

Group Profile Listing (GROUPPR) This report prints a list of Security Group Profiles in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Group profile names

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of profile names to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all available profiles.

Import Format Listing (IMPFMLS1) This report prints a list of Import Formats in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Import formats Target data file

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of import formats to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all available formats. To include only the formats designed for one data file import, enter the file name here. Otherwise, all data file formats are included. To include only a specific ASCII format in the listing, enter that format here. Options are: All - Select all formats below 1 - Offset driven (not delimited) 2 - Character delimited

ASCII formats

Kronos Incorporated

Page 356 of 613

3 - Line delimited

Pay Rule Profiles (PRPROLS1) This report prints a list of Pay Rule Profiles in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Pay rule profiles

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of profiles by entering the name of the profile alphabetically the lowest in the range and the profile name alphabetically the highest in the range. For example BASIC to HOLIDAY would include all profiles beginning with the letter C, D, E, F, and G. Leave these fields blank to select all available profiles. Select up to five profile types to be included in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all profile types. An optional field. Only those profiles matching all of the "Apply Rules" will be included in the listing. If no Pay Rules have one of the selected characters as the "Apply Rule" value, the profile is not included in the listing. If this field is left blank, then the "Apply Rule" field in a profile's Pay Rules is not considered when determining whether that profile is included in the listing or not.

Pay rule profile types Include only if one or more pay rules...have "Apply Rule" set to

Include only if one or more pay rules...have "Override" set to

An optional field. This field allows users to list only profiles that contain a rule or rules with a specific "Override More General Levels" field. There are three options: Y - Enter a Y in the field to include all Pay Rule Profiles with its Override field set to Yes, the profile may be included in the listing if it meets the other selection criteria. If no Pay Rule has an Override field of Yes, no profiles are included in the listing. N - Enter a N in the field to include all Pay Rule Profiles with its Override field set to No, the profile may be included in the listing if it meets the other selection criteria. If no Pay Rule has an Override field of No, no profiles are included in the listing. Blank - Leave the field blank if all profiles, regardless of their Override field setting are to be included.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 357 of 613

Uses pay categories Enter a range of pay categories to include in the listing. The selection is made alphabetically. See the Pay Rule Profiles field above for more explanation. Print errors only Check this box if you want to print error messages when duplicate main rules are detected. If there are no duplicate messages, there is no output. Leave blank to print all desired profiles, including those with errors. Check this box if you want the printed copy to break at each new pay rule profile. Leave blank to print at natural page breaks.

Page break on pay rule profile

Prompts (PROMPLST) This report prints a list of Transaction Prompts in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Prompt numbers

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of prompts to include in the listing. Prompts numbered 1-4999 are reserved for systemdefined ShopTrac Pro prompts. User-defined prompts begin at 5000 and go up to 9999. Leave these fields blank to select all available prompts. The range of database destinations to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all mappings. The type of data to be included in the listing. Choose up to five types. The valid types are: A - Alphanumeric B - Formatted badge (produces a 6-digit number from the scanned barcode) D - Date (mm/dd/yy) N - Numeric T - Time (hh:mm:ss)

Usual mapping1 Prompt data types

Shifts Detail (SHIFTLS2) This report generates a detailed listing of selected shifts defined in the system.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 358 of 613

To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Shifts Start times

DESCRIPTION
The range of shifts to report. If left blank, all shifts meeting other criteria will be included. A range of shift start times to include in the report. If left blank, all start times meeting other criteria will be included. A range of shift stop times to include in the report. If left blank, all stop times meeting other criteria will be included. Include up to 5 shift types to report. If left blank, all types meeting other criteria will be included. Shift types can be defined in the appropriate Flags file. Check this box if you only want flex shifts to be included on the listing. Leave clear if all shifts should be considered for inclusion. Check this box if you only want next day shifts to be included on the listing. Leave clear if all shifts should be considered for inclusion. Check this box if you only want shifts that have automatic clock-ins or automatic clock-outs to be included on the listing. Leave clear if all shifts should be considered for inclusion. Check this box if you only want shifts that have work period enforcement flags to be included on the listing. Leave clear if all shifts should be considered for inclusion. If this range is completed, only shifts using a pay rule profile in that range will be included in the listing, provided they meet the other selection criteria. If left blank, shifts are not included or excluded based on their pay rule profile. This selection is used in conjunction with Uses pay rule profiles selection above to further define the selection criteria. Options are: S - Shift pay rule profile Z - Premium Zone profile

Stop times

Shift types

Flex shifts

Next day shifts

Automatic in/out

Work period enforcement

Uses pay rule profiles

Pay rule profile usage

Kronos Incorporated

Page 359 of 613

Transactions (TRANSLST) This report prints a list of Transactions in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Transaction codes

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of transactions codes to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all available transactions. The range of transaction programs to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all programs. The transaction types to be included in the listing. Choose up to five types that have been set up in Flags. Select up to five of the defined employee access types set up in Flags.

Transaction programs Transaction types Access

Transaction Programs (TTX920) This report prints a list of Transaction Programs in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Transaction programs Output mappings

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of programs to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all available programs. Check this box if you want available mappings to be included. Leave clear if mappings should not be included. Check this box if you want a list of execution options, if they exist, included. Leave clear if execution options should not be included. Check this box if you want a list of transactions included. Leave clear if transactions should not be included.

Output execution options Output transaction list

Note: When setting up the option for creating a DB file to be available, will allow the transaction file to be saved to one of three supported DB's, Oracle, SQL or Pervasive. The transaction saved will retain the following identification, STPTRACxxx. The xxx will represent the 3-digit (alpha-numeric) identifier for the transaction code. The system will append the file name by adding and incrementing a numeric one to the end of the xxx, i.e. STPTRACABS1. To prevent this from taking place the file must be removed manually.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 360 of 613

User Profile Listing (USERPR) This report prints a list of Security User Profiles in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
User profile names

DESCRIPTION
Select a range of profile names to include in the listing. Leave these fields blank to select all available profiles.

Work Schedules Detail (WRKSCLS1) This report generates a detailed listing of selected work schedules defined in the system. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Work schedules Anchor dates from...to Days in cycle

DESCRIPTION
The range of work schedules to report. If left blank, all schedules meeting other criteria will be included. A range of anchor dates (when the cycle began) to include in the report. If left blank, all dates will be included. A range of days in the work schedule cycle to include in the report. For example, if you gave a range of 5 to 7, all work schedules with cycles of 5, 6 and 7 would be included. If left blank, all cycles meeting other criteria will be included. Select up to five work schedules types to include on the listing. Work Schedules types are set up in Flags. If left blank, all types are included.

Work schedule types

Kronos Incorporated

Page 361 of 613

Logs
The log reports give the user all transaction data coming from collection devices and processed in batches within a specified period of time. Other log reports will be added in a later release of ShopTrac Pro. Log Reports Include: Transaction Log Batch Log by Date Run BCL015 BCH0707

Transaction Log (BCL015) Generating a report of the transactions performed at the data collection device on your shop floor allows you to monitor activity in your facility to detect recurring problems. You can define the range of time to report transaction information. You can also specify the Data Collection PC and even the collection device for which you want information reported. Data administrators should run and review this report every day. The Transaction Log reports all transactions coming from a collection device, and is the only source to review the quality of device communications. It includes employee errors that may indicate need for additional training. (This is especially important as you first bring the system up.) File the logs for reference and purge the files on a regular basis. The Transaction Log includes the source of a transaction: the Data Collection PC and collection device, the date and time the data collection PC received the transaction, and the number it assigned to the transaction. It also provides information about the transaction. It tells you the transaction type, when it was entered at the device, who performed it, and whether the transaction generated an on-line response. This is the information you may want to analyze, especially if you see the message ERR on the left of this column. ERR means the transaction listed on the previous line resulted in an error. Additionally, the log lists the user-entered data and any error messages generated by the transaction. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on three tabbed screens, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Transaction PASSED from...at Transaction PASSED to...at
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
To establish the criteria for date/time selection, enter the beginning parameter for a date and time range when the transactions were passed at the device. To establish the criteria for date/time selection, enter the ending parameter for a date and time range when the transactions were passed at the device.
Page 362 of 613

Transaction POLLED from...at Transaction POLLED to...at Transaction types

To establish the criteria for selection, enter the beginning parameter for a time range when the transactions were polled by transaction processing. To establish the criteria for selection, enter the ending parameter for a time range when the transactions were polled by transaction processing. Select up to five transaction types to include in this report. These types are defined in the Flags program. If left blank, the system will include all types. A range of devices to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all devices. Select up to five transaction codes to include in this report. These codes are defined in the Transaction program. If left blank, the system will include all codes.

Device IDs Transaction codes

Selection Criteria 2

FIELD
ID numbers Badge numbers Department Groups Work schedule Print Options

DESCRIPTION
A range of employee IDs to report. If left blank, the system includes all IDs. A range of employee badge numbers to report. If left blank, the system includes all badges. A range of departments to report. If left blank, the system includes all departments. A range of groups to report. If left blank, the system includes all default groups. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system includes all schedules.

FIELD
Sequence

DESCRIPTION
Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: B - By employee ID, poll date, transaction number D - By poll date, transaction number N - By badge order, poll date, transaction number

Page breaks

Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on employee ID C - Page break on poll dates

Double spacing
Kronos Incorporated

Check this box if you want the printed report to be d bl df i d bili L l if

Page 363 of 613

double-spaced for easier readability. Leave clear if you want single spacing. Print last name first Check this box if you want the report to be printed with employee's last names before their first names. Leave clear if you want names printed in first name, last name order. Errors only Check this box if you only want to include transactions that returned an error message. Leave clear to include all transactions, including transaction errors.

The Printed Report The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Device ID /Description Trx Polled at Date Trx Polled at Time Trx Number

DESCRIPTION
The data collection device where the transaction was passed. The date on which this transaction was passed to the device. The time at which this transaction was passed to the device. The number assigned to this transaction. These numbers are assigned to transactions as they are received at the device. Every day these numbers are reset and begin again at 1. The code for this transaction. The date when this transaction was performed at the device. The time when this transaction was performed. The badge number for the employee used to pass the transaction. Appears only if badge mapping is active. The employee ID and name of the person who performed this transaction. If this transaction generated an online response, a Y is displayed. If not, an N is displayed. Data the user is prompted for, error messages generated by the transaction, and network status and polling session information. The length of time between when the transaction was performed at the data collection device to when the polling PC received the data.
Page 364 of 613

Trx Transaction Date Transaction Time Transaction Badge # Transaction Employee ID/Name On Ln Transaction Data

Seconds From Trx to Poll

Kronos Incorporated

Batch Log by Date Run (BCH070) This is a consolidated report of system batch information. All batch processes are assigned a number and logged in the Batch Log file. This includes all batch exports, such as Time and Labor exports as well as the Nightly Batch. The KAT (Kronos Attendance Tracker) exports from the LHours file are also logged. The report provides a chronological listing of batches sorted in order of the time they were run. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Batches run on dates from...at Batch types

DESCRIPTION
A range of run dates to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all dates. Check the appropriate box to select the batch type to include on the report. If left blank, all batch types will be included. Options are: Labor export Time export Nightly batch

Page breaks on date The Printed Report

Check the box if you want page breaks on each new date. Leave clear if you want continuous printing.

At the top of the report is the date range on which the batches were run. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Batch Rep Start Time End Time Type Selections From To Time
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
The batch number assigned to the records. Records whether or not this batch was reprocessed, Y/N. The time the batch process was started. The time the batch process ended. The type of batch processed. Options are Labor, Time or NBatch (nightly batch). The dates entered on the selection criteria screen for exports. The start date entered in the batch process. The end date entered in the batch process. This field is filled only for Nightly Batch entries. It will di l f h Sh f E d O B f fi ld
Page 365 of 613

display contents of the Shifts Ending On or Before field. Output file name Records selected Status The name entered on the Batch Export screen. This applies only to Labor and Time exports. The number of records selected for the batch export. This applies only to Labor and Time exports. This reports if the batch process was interrupted either by choice of the operator or an undetermined cause. The work ABEND, for ABnormal END will appear in this column if there was an interruption.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 366 of 613

Machine Utilization
As employees input data into the system, you can use it to generate reports about machine usage. For example, machine history can provide hour totals for direct and indirect work orders as well as what job each machine is currently working on. Machine utilization reports include: History by Work Center In Progress by Work Center Usage by Machine MAC211 MAC213 MAC218

History by Work Center (MAC211) The option generates a report listing a machine history by work center, machine and date. It also shows earned hours and efficiencies for the machine records. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on two tabbed screens, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2 & Format: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to Work centers Machines Part numbers Work orders Selection Criteria 2 & Format Operations

DESCRIPTION
The range of reference dates to include on the listing. This field cannot be left blank. The range of work centers to include on the listing. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of machines to include on the listing. If left blank, all machines will be included. The range of part numbers to include on the listing. If left blank, all part numbers will be included. The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left
Page 367 of 613

Functions

Kronos Incorporated

blank, all work centers will be included. Page break on W/C Check the box if you want the report to start a new page on each work center. Leave clear if the report should print continuously.

The Printed Report At the top of the report is the work center number and description. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Machine Description Act Start Act Stop Work Order Opn Description Part Number Part Name TRX Comp Out of Svc Hours Elapsed hours

DESCRIPTION
The machine code. Description of the machine from the machine data file. Date and time this machine time record was started. Date and time this machine time record was closed by the employee transaction. Work order this machine was working on. The operation of the work order and its function. The function is the number to the right of the decimal. The description from the operation record. The part number associated with this work order, from the work order record. Name associated with the part number, from the part number data file. The transaction that opened this machine time record. The completion code used when the time record was closed. The number of hours allocated to an indirect work order. Number of hours allocated for this machine time record. Total hours from start to stop time when this machine record was open. Based on machine standard and quantities completed. Based on earned hours and elapsed time. The cumulative quantity completed in the machine time record. Quantity scrapped during this time period. Scrap code used to describe why the material was scrapped.

Earned Hours Efficiency --Quantity-Completed Scrapped Code

Kronos Incorporated

Page 368 of 613

In Progress by Work Center (MAC213) The option generates a report listing what machine in a work center is currently working on. The report also shows how many hours it will take to complete the operation on each machine. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Work centers Machines Part numbers Work orders Operations

DESCRIPTION
The range of work centers to include on the report. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of machines to include on the report. If left blank, all machines will be included. The range of part numbers to include on the report. If left blank, all part numbers will be included. The range of work centers to include on the report. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of work centers to include on the report. If left blank, all work centers will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the report. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. Check the box if you want the report to start a new page on each work center. Leave clear if the report should print continuously.

Functions

Page break on W/C The Printed Report

At the top of the report is the work center number and description. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Machine Description Machine Start Work Order Opn

DESCRIPTION
The machine code. Description of the machine from the machine data file. Date and time this machine time record was started. Work order this machine was working on. The operation of the work order and its function. The function is the number to the right of the decimal.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 369 of 613

Description Part Number Quantity Ordered Act Start Sched Start Sched Compl Standard Hr/Compl

The description from the operation record. The part number associated with this work order, from the work order record. Quantity from the work order record. Actual start date from the work order record Scheduled start date from the work order record. Scheduled completion date from the work order record. The standard from the operation record along with the calculated hours to complete the operation on the machine.

Usage by Machine (MAC218) The option generates a report showing a daily breakdown of machines and the total direct and indirect hours. The report is generated by day, by 'up period'. An 'up period' is set in the Machine Configuration with the Maximum hours for considering a machine closed (not idle) field. This determines how many hours a machine can remain idle before the system considers that the next machine start transaction begins a new run or 'up' period. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on two tabbed screens, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2 & Format: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Dates from ...to Machines Work centers Part numbers Work orders Selection Criteria 2 & Format Operations

DESCRIPTION
The range of reference dates to include on the report. This field cannot be left blank. The range of machines to include on the report. If left blank, all machines will be included. The range of work centers to include on the report. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of part numbers to include on the report. If left blank, all part numbers will be included. The range of work centers to include on the report. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of work centers to include on the report. If left blank, all work centers will be included. Completed i i l d d
Page 370 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

operations are not included. Functions The operation function to include on the report. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. Check the box if you want the report to start a new page on each machine. Leave clear if the report should print continuously.

Page break on machine The Printed Report

At the top of the report is the machine and description. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Date ---Time--Start Stop Status

DESCRIPTION
Date of the records being reported. Start time of the associated record. Date and time this machine time record was closed by the employee transaction. Status of the machine time record. The two possibilities are an S, which indicates the machine time was closed with a machine suspend transaction, or blank, which indicates a standard time record. Work center associated with this record. Comes from either the transaction or the operation record. The part number associated with the operation record. Work order associated with this machine time record from the employee transaction. The operation of the work order and its function. The function is the number to the right of the decimal. Completion code used in the transaction used to close this record. The cumulative quantity completed for this record that is associated with this work order and operation. Quantity scrapped during this time period. Scrap code used to describe why the material was scrapped. Work center associated with the scrapped material.

Work Center Part Number Work Order Opn Comp Code --Quantities-Completed Scrapped ---Scrap--Code WC

Kronos Incorporated

Page 371 of 613

Direct hours Indirect hours Idle hours Period total Percentage Machine total Percentage Grand total Percentage

Total hours allocated to the direct job for this record. Total hours allocated to the indirect job for this record. Total hours the machine was idle between run periods as set in the configuration screen. Total direct and indirect hours for this machine for the period indicated. The column percentage of the total hours for the run period. Total direct, indirect and idle hours for this machine for the date period selected. The percentage for the column of the total hours allocated from this machine. Total direct and indirect hours for all records presented in the report. The percentage for the column of the total hours of the report.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 372 of 613

Quality Control
As employees input data into the system, you can use it to generate reports that gather information about the work orders employees are working on. For example, you can review the quantities and status of a work order. Quality control reports include: By Employee ID By Scrap Code By Scrap Code Summary By Work Center By Work Order By Work Order Summary QC353 QC351 QC381 QC352 QC354 QC384

Quality Control By Employee/ID (QC353) The option generates a report listing scrap detail information entered by employees. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to IDs Scrap codes

DESCRIPTION
The range of reference dates to include on the listing. This field cannot be left blank. The range of employee IDs to include on the listing. If left blank, all IDs will be included. The range of scrap codes to include on the listing. If left blank, all scrap coders will be included. These codes are defined in the Codes program. The range of departments to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included The range of work centers to include on the listing. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included.

Departments Work centers Work orders Operations

Kronos Incorporated

Page 373 of 613

Functions

The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. Check the box if you want the report to start a new page on each scrap code. Leave clear if the report should print continuously.

Page break

The Printed Report At the top of the report is the description of the report and the dates it covers. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Ref Date Work Order Description Opn Description Dept Scrap WC Scrap Code Scrap Description Quantity Good Quantity Scrapped Yield

DESCRIPTION
The range of dates for which you want a report. This is a required field. Work order number associated with the information. The description of the work order. The operation of the work order and its function. The function is the number to the right of the decimal. The description from the operation. The department of the employee who scrapped the part. The work center where the part was scrapped. The scrap code for the reason the part was scrapped. Description of the scrap code. If Quantity Completed data is entered, this column will have numbers. If no data is entered, it will be blank. Quantity scrapped during this time period. The ratio of scrap to quantity completed expressed as a percentage.

By Scrap Code (QC351) This option generates a report listing scrap codes, descriptions and quantities. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to

DESCRIPTION
The range of reference dates to include on the listing. This field cannot be left blank.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 374 of 613

Scrap codes

The range of scrap codes to include on the listing. If left blank, all scrap codes will be included. These codes are defined in the Codes program. The range of departments to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included The range of work centers to include on the listing. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. Check the box if you want the report to start a new page on each scrap code. Leave clear if the report should print continuously.

Departments Work centers Work orders Operations

Functions

Page break on scrap code The Printed Report

At the top of the report is the description of the report and the dates it covers. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Ref Date Work Order Description Opn Description Part number Part Name TRX Description Dept Scrap WC

DESCRIPTION
The range of dates for which you want a report. This is a required field. Work order number associated with the information. The description of the work order. The operation of the work order and its function. The function is the number to the right of the decimal. The description from the operation. The part number associated with the work order. The name of the part number. The transaction code performed. The description of the transaction. The department of the employee who scrapped the part. The work center where the part was scrapped.

Quantity Completed This column will have quantity totals for the selected d
Kronos Incorporated Page 375 of 613

date range. Quantity Scrapped Yield Quantity scrapped during this time period. The ratio of scrap to quantity completed expressed as a percentage.

Quality Control By Scrap Code Summary (QC381) The option generates a summary report listing the number of occurrences and quantities for selected scrap codes. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to Scrap codes

DESCRIPTION
The range of reference dates to include on the listing. This field cannot be left blank. The range of scrap codes to include on the listing. If left blank, all scrap codes will be included. These codes are defined in the Codes program. The range of departments to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included The range of work centers to include on the listing. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. Check the box if you want the report to start a new page on each scrap code. Leave clear if the report should print continuously.

Departments Work centers Work orders Operations

Functions

Page break on scrap code The Printed Report

At the top of the report is the description of the report and the dates it covers. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Scrap Code
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
The scrap code associated with each record.
Page 376 of 613

Scrap Description Num Occur Quantity Good

The description of the scrap code. The total number of times this scrap code was used as a reason for rejecting parts. If Quantity Completed data is entered, this column will have totals in the selected date range. If no data is entered, it will be blank. Quantity scrapped during this time period. The ratio of scrap to quantity completed expressed as a percentage.

Quantity Scrapped Yield

By Work Center (QC352) The option generates a report listing the scrap at each operation in selected work centers. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to Work centers

DESCRIPTION
The range of reference dates to include on the listing. This field cannot be left blank. The range of work centers to include on the listing. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of scrap codes to include on the listing. If left blank, all scrap codes will be included. These codes are defined in the Codes program. The range of departments to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included. The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included.

Scrap codes Departments Work orders Operations

Functions

Page break on work Check the box if you want the report to start a new page center on each work center. Leave clear if the report should print continuously. The Printed Report
Kronos Incorporated Page 377 of 613

At the top of the report is the description of the report and the dates it covers. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Ref Date Work Order Description Opn Description Dept Scrap Code Scrap Description Quantity Good

DESCRIPTION
The range of dates for which you want a report. This is a required field. Work order number associated with the information. The description of the work order. The operation of the work order and its function. The function is the number to the right of the decimal. The description from the operation. The department code for this operation. The scrap code for the reason the part was rejected. The description of the scrap code. If Quantity Completed data is entered, this column will have totals in the selected date range. If no data is entered, it will be blank. Quantity scrapped during this time period. The ratio of scrap to quantity completed expressed as a percentage.

Quantity Scrapped Yield

Quality Control By Work Order (QC354) The option generates a report listing the scrap for each work order selected. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Actual start dates Work centers Scrap codes

DESCRIPTION
The range of start dates to include on the listing. This field cannot be left blank. The range of work centers to include on the listing. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of scrap codes to include on the listing. If left blank, all scrap codes will be included. These codes are defined in the Codes program. The range of departments to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included.
Page 378 of 613

Departments Work orders

Kronos Incorporated

Operations

The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included.

Functions

Page break on work Check the box if you want the report to start a new page order on each work order. Leave clear if the report should print continuously. The Printed Report The report header contains a description of the report, and the date and time the report was created. The fields include the following:

FIELD
Work Order Act Start

DESCRIPTION
The work order number and description for the information. The actual start and completion date as found in the work order file. This date is determined by the system as employees log on/off the work order. The actual completion date as found in the work order file. The status of the work order. This is blank if the work order has not been started, otherwise an "I" (incomplete) or "C" (complete) is displayed. The part number of this work order and its name. The part number type, if used. The quantity ordered in the work order record. The router defined in the work order record. The reference date for the labor records. The operation number of the work order. Note that absence codes and indirect work orders do not have operations. The function number is to right of the decimal. The description of the operation. The department associated with the labor record. The work center where the part was scrapped. The scrap code for the reason the part was rejected.
Page 379 of 613

Comp Status

Part #, Type Qty Ordered Routing Ref Date Opn

Opn Description Dept Scrap WC Scrap Code

Kronos Incorporated

Scrap Description Quantity Good

Description of the scrap code. If Quantity Completed data is entered, this column will have totals in the selected date range. If no data is entered, it will be blank. The cumulative total of the quantity scrapped. The ratio of total scrap to total quantity complete expressed as a percentage.

Quantity Scrapped Yield

Quality Control By Work Order Summary (QC384) The option generates a summary report listing quality control information by work order. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to Work centers Scrap codes

DESCRIPTION
The range of dates to include on the listing. This field cannot be left blank. The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of scrap codes to include on the listing. If left blank, all scrap codes will be included. These codes are defined in the Codes program. The range of departments to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included The range of work centers to include on the listing. If left blank, all work centers will be included.

Departments

Work orders

Operations Functions

Page break on work Check the box if you want the report to start a new page order on each work center. Leave clear if the report should print continuously. The Printed Report At the top of the report is the description of the report and the dates it covers. The report fields include the following:
Kronos Incorporated Page 380 of 613

FIELD
Work Order Description Num Occur Quantity Good

DESCRIPTION
The work order number associated with the record. The description of the work order. The total number of times this scrap code was used as a reason for rejecting parts. If Quantity Completed data is entered, this column will have totals in the selected date range. If no data is entered, it will be blank. Quantity scrapped during this time period. The ratio of scrap to quantity completed expressed as a percentage.

Quantity Scrapped Yield

Kronos Incorporated

Page 381 of 613

Time & Attendance

As employees input data into the system, you can use it to generate reports that gather information about the employees' attendance. For example, you can review the hours worked by employees in a particular department, or, on a given day, who is tardy or absent. Time and Attendance reports include: Absentee Approaching Overtime Clock In Detail Pay Category Amounts Summary Weekly Schedule Accruals Detail TAA510 TAA519 TAA500 TAA132 TAA133 ACR001

Absentee (TAA510) This is an attendance report that lists all the absentees for the present date. If the current shift began on the previous day, you can still generate an absence report for it by using the Date field to specify the previous day. You cannot use this field to generate an absence report for days in the past. This report checks each employees schedule, including temporary shifts, to determine if the employee is absent. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on three tabbed screens, Selection Criteria 1, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Date

DESCRIPTION
The current day is displayed in this field. If you are running an absentee report for the current shift and it began on the previous day, enter the date for the previous day. The range of employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. A range of department groups to report. If left blank, the f ll
Page 382 of 613

ID numbers Departments Groups

Kronos Incorporated

system generates a report for all groups. Work centers Selection Criteria 2 Labor codes Job classes Work schedules Shifts A range of labor codes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all labor codes. A range of job classes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all job classes. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of shifts to report. Use these fields to exclude shifts that are scheduled to work later in the current day. If left blank, the system generates a report for all shifts. In this case, the report will list, as absent, even employees not scheduled to start until later in the day. A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers.

Home teams Print Options

FIELD
Sequence

DESCRIPTION
Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Alphabetical order B - Employee ID order D - Department, Group, Employee ID order T - Default Team, Employee ID order

Page break

Select the desired page break. The options (depending on the Sequence selection) are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on department C - Page break on group

Double spacing

Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Print last name first Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first. The Printed Report The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report
Kronos Incorporated Page 383 of 613

was created. Depending on the Sequence order selected, the headers will reflect the order selected. For instance, if Department, Group, Employee ID is selected, a header box with the department will precede the group and Employee ID header. The only time the group or team will be reported is when the sequence selected includes these selections. The fields below are given in the order of display for the default sequence (Alphabetical). They include the following:

FIELD
Employee Schedule Dept Sch Absence

DESCRIPTION
The employee ID and name of each employee included on this report. The schedule assigned to this employee. The department assigned to this employee. If the absence is a scheduled absence the full-day absence code and its description will appear in this column. If the absence is not a scheduled one, this field will be blank.

Approaching Overtime (TAA519) This report lists all employees approaching their daily or weekly overtime limit. You can specify the departments, groups, and shifts to report on, the hour range to report on, and whether to report employees already past their daily or period overtime limit. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on two tabbed screens, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2 & Format: Selection Criteria

FIELD
ID numbers Home departments

DESCRIPTION
The range of employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. This field makes selections based on home departments set in the Employee file, not in the Labor record. A range of department groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system f ll
Page 384 of 613

Home groups Home work centers Home work schedules Home teams
Kronos Incorporated

generates a report for all teams. Selection Criteria 2 & Format

FIELD
Hours until overtime

DESCRIPTION
The highest number of hours until overtime to include in the report. For example, enter 8 to report on all employees within 8 hours or less of collecting overtime. An entry in this field is required. Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Alphabetical B - Employee ID order D - Department, Group, Employee ID order T - Default Team, Employee ID order

Sequence

Page breaks

Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on department C - Page break on group

Double spacing

Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line. Check this box to include employees already collecting overtime. Leave clear to report only the hours of employees approaching overtime.

Show already in overtime

Print last name first Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first. The Printed Report The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report was created. Depending on the Sequence order selected, the headers will reflect the order selected. For instance, if Department, Group, Employee ID is selected, a header box with the department will precede the group and Employee ID header. The only time the department, group or team will be reported is when the sequence selected includes these selections. The fields below are given in the order of display for the default sequence (Alphabetical). They include the following:

FIELD
Employee Period Hours

DESCRIPTION
The employee ID and name of each employee included on this report. The number of straight time hours the employee has worked in the current period.
Page 385 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Period Til Pd OT

Period hours until overtime. The number of hours remaining until the employee meets his period overtime limit as defined in his current work schedule. This is the difference of the OT limit and the Period Hours. The number of straight time hours the employee has worked in the current day, and whether the employee is still clocked in. The number of hours remaining until the employee begins to collect daily overtime. If the hours until daily overtime limit is set at 99, effectively disabling it, this number will be in access of 24. The number of hours of overtime the employee will have collected at the end of his current shift. The number of hours of double time the employee will have collected at the end of his current shift. The number of hours of overtime the employee is authorized to work in the current day, and an "O" to indicate post-shift authorization.

Today Hours

Today Til Dly OT

OT End of Day DT End of Day OT Auth

Clock In Detail (TAA500) This is a detailed attendance report for employees. It lists the hours worked by each employee and can be sorted by different categories. It tallies the hours for the employee, the department, and the entire company. You can specify the department, work schedules and shifts. Report Printing Options To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on three tabbed screens, Selection Criteria 1, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference dates from ...to

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. If left blank, the system will report all dates available for each employee. The range of employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. A range of department groups to report. If left blank, the f ll
Page 386 of 613

ID numbers Departments Groups

Kronos Incorporated

system generates a report for all groups. Work centers Selection Criteria 2 Labor codes Job classes Work schedules Shifts Home teams Exceptions A range of labor codes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all labor codes. A range of job classes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all job classes. A range of work schedules to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work schedules. A range of shifts to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all shifts. A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams. Select up to 18 exceptions to include on the report. If an exception is specified, only those employees with time records that qualify as an exception are included. If left blank, all employees meeting other criteria are included. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers.

Print Options

FIELD
Sequence

DESCRIPTION
Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: A - Alphabetical B - Employee ID order D - Department, Group, Employee ID order

Page breaks

Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on department C - Page break on group

Double spacing

Check this box if you want the report to be printed with a blank line before each data line. Leave clear if you don't want an extra blank line.

Print last name first Check this box if you want the last name of the employee to be printed before the first name. Leave it clear if you want the first name printed first. Print hours per time record Check this box if you want to print the LHours record for each time record on a line below the detail. Each pay category is printed only once with the total hours allocated to that category for that time record. Leave it
Page 387 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

clear if you don't want the LHours record printed. Print hours per employee subtotal Print hours per other subtotal Print hours per grand total The Printed Report Depending on the Sequence order selected, the headers will reflect the order selected. For instance, if Department, Group, Employee ID is selected, a header box with the department will precede the group and Employee ID header. The only time the department, group or team will be reported is when the sequence selected includes these selections. The fields below are given in the order of display for the default sequence (Alphabetical). The headings and body fields that appear on this report include the following: Check this box if you want the LHours records totaled by employee printed on a line below the detail. Leave it clear if you don't want the employee subtotals printed. Check this box if you want the LHours records totaled by other breakdowns printed on a line below the detail. Leave it clear if you don't want these subtotals printed. Check this box if you want the LHours records totaled for the whole report printed on a line below the detail. Leave it clear if you don't want these totals printed.

HEADING
A/B/D Dates Page #/ Time Department

DESCRIPTION
The Sequence selected for the report. The from and to dates specified for the report. The number for each page and the time of day the report was printed. The department code for the report information. (Only appears if Department/Group/Employee ID Sequence is selected.) The group number within the department. (Only appears if Department/Group/Employee ID Sequence is selected.) The department supervisor. (Only appears if Department/Group/Employee ID Sequence is selected.) Description The employee ID number and name related to the information. The date of the clock-in information. The first time (real and adjusted) when the employee clocked in on this day. The first time (real and adjusted) when the employee clocked out on this day.
Page 388 of 613

Group

Supervisor

Body Field Employee Date First In First Out

Kronos Incorporated

Second In Second Out Third In Third Out WkSch Shift Hours: Alloc Hours: user defined Hours: user defined Hours: user defined Hours: user defined RN (Recalculation Needed) Tardy? Device Supervisor: Code Supervisor: ID Schedule Info: PreOT Schedule Info: Post-OT Schedule Info: Temp Sh

The second time (real and adjusted) when the employee clocked in on this day. The second time (real and adjusted) when the employee clocked out on this day. The third time (real and adjusted) when the employee clocked in on this day. The third time (real and adjusted) when the employee clocked out on this day. The work schedule for the employee. The shift for the employee. The amount of time allocated to the employee on this day. The total amount of hours designated in the system configuration to be in column 1 on reports. The total amount of hours designated in the system configuration to be in column 2 on reports. The total amount of hours designated in the system configuration to be in column 3 on reports. The total amount of hours designated in the system configuration to be in column 4 on reports. An * in this column means that the system has determined that something has changed in this record that necessitates a Recalculation of hours, therefore the hours recounted in the four columns may not be accurate. If the employee clocked in tardy, a "Y" appears in this column. The device terminal at which the employee first clocked in on that day. The reason code entered by a supervisor is any supervisor transaction was performed. The ID of the supervisor who performed the supervisor transaction, if any. The number of hours of pre-shift overtime scheduled for this employee. The number of hours of post-shift overtime scheduled for this employee. The shift number entered by a supervisor when assigning this employee temporarily to another shift on that date.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 389 of 613

Schedule Info: Absence

The absence code entered by a supervisor when scheduling an employee as absent.

Pay Category Amounts Summary (TAA132) This reports allows for the printing or viewing of Pay Category Amounts Summary information by a wide variety of selectable criteria. The screen affords the user two tabs, Home and Print. The Home Tab is used to make the basic selection by a wide range of employee options. The Print Tab is used to format the report per the users requirements. Review the options below for a specific format or selection criteria. Home Tab To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Reference Dates From:.....To:

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. If left blank, the system will report all dates available for each employee. The range of employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. This field makes selections based on home departments set in the Employee file, not in the Labor record. A range of department groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of job classes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all job classes. A range of labor codes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all labor codes. A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams.

Employee ID Department

Group Work Center Job Classes Labor Codes Default Team Print Tab Sequence & Page Breaks

FIELD
Sequences

DESCRIPTION
Set the criteria for the printout sequence for this report. A - Alphabetic
Page 390 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Page Breaks

B - Department C - Work Center D - Labor Code E - Job Classes Each selection is based on the Sequences selection above and the Page Break options vary with selection. Sequence A - Alphabetic A - Default Sequence B - Department A - Default B - Employee ID C - Department D - Group Sequence C - Work Center A - Default B - Employee ID C - Work Center Sequence D - Labor Code A - Default B - Employee ID C - Labor code Sequence E - Job classes A - Default B - Employee ID C - Job Classes

Weekly Schedule (TAA133) This reports allows for the printing or viewing of Weekly Schedule information by a wide variety of selectable criteria. The screen affords the user two tabs, Home and Print. The Home Tab is used to make the basic selection by a wide range of employee options. The Print Tab is used to format the report per the users requirements. Review the options below for a specific format or selection criteria. Home Tab To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields:

FIELD
Reference Dates From:.....To:

DESCRIPTION
Specify a date range for the report. If a report is desired for only one day, enter that date in both fields. If left blank, the system will report all dates available for each employee. The range of employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees.
Page 391 of 613

Employee ID

Kronos Incorporated

Department

A range of department numbers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all departments. This field makes selections based on home departments set in the Employee file, not in the Labor record. A range of department groups to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all groups. A range of work centers to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all work centers. A range of job classes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all job classes. A range of labor codes to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all labor codes. A range of teams to report. If left blank, the system generates a report for all teams.

Group Work Center Job Classes Labor Codes Default Team Print Tab Sequence & Page Breaks

FIELD
Sequences

DESCRIPTION
Set the criteria for the printout sequence for this report. A - Alphabetic B - Department C - Work Center D - Labor Code E - Job Classes Each selection is based on the Sequences selection above and the Page Break options vary with selection. Sequence A Alphabetic A Default Sequence B Department A Default B - Employee ID C Department D Group Sequence C - Work Center A Default B - Employee ID C - Work Center Sequence D - Labor Code A Default B - Employee ID C - Labor code Sequence E - Job classes A Default

Page Breaks

Kronos Incorporated

Page 392 of 613

B - Employee ID C - Job Classes

Accruals Details (ACR001) This reports allows for the printing or viewing of Accrual Detail information using a wide variety of selectable criteria. This function has one screen for making the selection necessary for the user to get the desired report information. Review the options below for a specific format or selection criteria. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields: Selection Criteria
FIELD

DESCRIPTION
The range of Employee ID numbers to report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. The range of Accrual Dates for the report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. The range of Scheduled Dates for the report. If left blank, the system will report all employees. Check this box to include detail associated with the information requested for this report. Leave uncheck and no details will be reported. Check this box to include any schedule associated with the information requested for this report. Leave uncheck and no schedule will be reported. Check this box to separate the report by Employee ID. Leave uncheck and the report will be printed sequentially without specific breaks. Check this box to include any Negative Accrual Codes associated with the information requested for this report. Leave uncheck and no Negative Codes will be reported.

Employee ID Accrual Date From:.....To: Schedule Date From:.....To: Show Detail

Show schedule

Page Break On ID

Negative Accrual Code

Kronos Incorporated

Page 393 of 613

Work In Process (WIP)

As employees input data into the system, you can use it to generate reports that gather information about the work orders the employees are working on. For example, you can review the quantities and status of a work order. Work in Process (WIP) reports include: WIP by Work Center WIP Hours & Efficiencies WIP Movement WIP Summary W/O Top Assembly WIP105 WIP111 WIP112 WIP103 WIP199

WIP by Work Center (WIP105) This report lists the quantities at each operation in selected Work Centers. You can run this report for a range of work centers, work orders, operations, part numbers, and several other selection criteria. This report is available only as a printed report. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on two tabbed screens, Selection Criteria 1, and Selection Criteria 2: Selection Criteria
Field Description

Work centers Work orders Operations

The range of work centers to include on the listing. If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The range of customers to include on the listing. If left blank, all customers will be included. The range of part numbers to included on the report. If left blank, all part numbers will be included. The range of values to included on the report that are found in the user-defined fields set up in system configuration. If left blank, all values will be included.
Page 394 of 613

Customers Part numbers Misc (Work Center userdefined field)

Kronos Incorporated

If this field is named in Setup, that name will replace the Misc label. Selection Criteria 2 Operation departments Operation groups The range of departments found in the operation record to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included. The range of groups found in the operation record to include on the listing. If left blank, all groups will be included. Select up to five Operation types. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types. Checks the scheduled completion date found in the operation record and return only those operations with a completion date sooner than the date entered. If you leave this field blank, the report will be generated without regard to the scheduled completion date.

Operation types Scheduled completion date less than or equal to

Page break on work Check this box if you want page breaks on each new center work center. Leave clear if the report should print continuously. The Printed Report At the top of the report is the work center number and description. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Sched Compl Work Order Status Opn St In Prg Part Number Qty Ordered --Last CompOpn

DESCRIPTION
The scheduled completion date as found in the work order. Work order this machine was working on. The status of the work order. This is blank if the work order has not been started, or I if it has been started. The operation assigned to this work center. The current status of the operation assigned to this work center. The number of employees currently logged on this operation. The part number associated with this work order, from the work order record, and its description. The quantity ordered as shown on the work order. (Last operation completed) The last operation number completed (status is C).

Kronos Incorporated

Page 395 of 613

Qty -Last StartedOpn Qty Opn Description Sched Start RV

The quantity reported as complete for that operation. (Last operation started) The last operation number started (status is I). The quantity reported as complete so far for that operation. The description as found in the operation record, for the last operation started. The scheduled start date as found in the operation record, for the last operation started. Revised date. If a revised date is entered on the operation record, an * appears in this column to indicate that the date shown in the Sched Start column is really the revised date. The actual date that work on the operation was started in this work center. The total number of hours accrued to this operation. Based on machine standard and quantities completed. Based on earned hours and elapsed time. Hours to complete the operation.

Act Start Total Hours --Standards-Earned Hours Efficiency Hrs/Compl --Quantity Information-Received

The quantity received at this operation as a result of a MOV transaction. On the first operation this is always the quantity completed plus the quantity scrapped. The cumulative quantity completed in the operation record, for the last operation started. The cumulative quantity scrapped in the operation record, for the last operation started. The unaccounted for difference between the quantity received at an operation and the quantity completed or scrapped, for the last operation started.

Completed Scrapped Unacct'd

WIP Hours & Efficiencies (WIP111) This report lists the status of work orders, earned hours and efficiencies. You can run this report
Kronos Incorporated Page 396 of 613

for a range of work orders, work order types, and work order statuses. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on three tabbed screens, Selection Criteria 1, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Work orders Operations

DESCRIPTION
The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of customers to include on the listing. If left blank, all customers will be included. The range of part numbers to included on the report. If left blank, all part numbers will be included. The range of values to include on the report that are found in the work order user-defined field set up in system configuration. If left blank, all values will be included. If the field is named in Setup, that name replaces the Misc label. The range of departments found in the operation record to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included. The range of groups found in the operation record to include on the listing. If left blank, all groups will be included. The range of work centers found in the operation record to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included. Select up to five Work order types. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types.

Functions

Customers Part numbers Misc (Work Order userdefined field)

Selection Criteria 2 Operation departments Operation groups

Operation work centers Work order types

Work order statuses Select up to five Work order statuses. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types. Print Options Sequence
Kronos Incorporated

Specify the sort order for the report. Possible options:

Page 397 of 613

P - Part number, work order, operation W - Work order, operation Page breaks Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on part number C - Page break on work order The Printed Report At the top of the report is the work order numbers and sequence selection. The report fields include the following:

FIELD
Work Order Qty Ordered UOM Part Nbr Part Nam Opn S

DESCRIPTION
Work order number and description. The quantity ordered as shown on the work order. The unit of measure taken from the work order record. The part number associated with this work order, from the work order record, and its description. The part number name associated with this work order, from the work order record. The operation and function assigned to this work center. The function is the number is to the right of the decimal. The status of the operation. This is blank if the work order has not been started, I if it has been started, or C if complete. The number of employees currently logged on this operation. The description as found in the operation record. The work center as found in the operation record. The total number of hours allocated to this function, including paid absences. Based on machine standard and quantities completed. Based on earned hours and elapsed time. Hours to complete the operation.

IP Description WC Alloc Earned Hours Efficiency Hrs/Compl

Kronos Incorporated

Page 398 of 613

WIP Movement (WIP112) This report lists the status of work orders, earned hours and efficiencies as well as the destinations of movement. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on three tabbed screens, Selection Criteria 1, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Work orders Operations

DESCRIPTION
The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of customers to include on the listing. If left blank, all customers will be included. The range of part numbers to included on the report. If left blank, all part numbers will be included. The range of dates to include on the listing. If left blank, all dates will be included. The range of departments to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included. The range of groups to include on the listing. If left blank, all groups will be included. The range of work centers to include on the listing. If left blank, all centers will be included. The range of work schedules to include on the listing. If left blank, all schedules will be included. The range of teams to include on the listing. If left blank, all teams will be included. The range of shifts to include on the listing. If left blank, all shifts will be included. Check this box if you only want direct jobs to be included on the report. Leave clear if you want both

Functions

Customers Part numbers Reference dates from...to Selection Criteria 2 Departments Groups Work centers Work schedules Teams Shifts Print Options Direct jobs only

Kronos Incorporated

Page 399 of 613

direct and indirect jobs included. Print work instructions Print labor text Check this box if you want work instructions for the operation to be included on the report. Leave clear if you don't want these instructions. Check this box if you want text from the Engineering Timecard optional module to be included on the report. Leave clear if you don't want this text.

Page break on work Check this box if you want page breaks on each new order work order. Leave clear if you want continuous printing. The Printed Report The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report was created. The fields include the following:

FIELD
Work Order --Scheduled-Start Comp --Revised-Start Comp --Actual-Start

DESCRIPTION
The work order number and description for the information. The scheduled start date as found in the work order file. The scheduled completion date as found in the work order file. The revised start date as found in the work order file. The revised completion date as found in the work order file. The actual start date as found in the work order file. This date is determined by the system as employees log on/off the work order. The actual completion date as found in the work order file. This date is determined by the system as employees log on/off the work order. The status of the work order. This is blank if the work order has not been started; otherwise an "I" is displayed. The work order type, if used. The part number of this work order. The part name of this work order. The contents of the work order user-defined field set up
Page 400 of 613

Comp

Status Type Part Number Part Name WO User- Defined

Kronos Incorporated

field Qty Val

in the System configuration file. Quantity Validation. A "Y" in this column indicates that quantities completed are validated against the quantity ordered for the work order. An "N" means quantities are not validated. Set in the work order file. Sequence Validation. A "Y" in this column indicates that the steps in the operation are validated to be performed in sequential order. An "N" means order is not validated. Set in the work order file. Automatic Quantity Moves. A "Y" in this column indicates that quantities are automatically moved from one operation to the next. Set in the work order file. The quantity ordered in the work order record. Unit of measure set for the work order. The router defined in the work order record. The operation number and description of the work order. Note that absence codes and indirect work orders do not have operations. The scheduled start and completion date as found in the operation record. The revised start and completion date as found in the operation record. The actual start and completion date as found in the operation record. This date is determined by the system as employees log on/off the operation. The status of the operation. This is blank if the operation has not been started; otherwise it is I (Incomplete) or C (Complete). The quantity of parts received at this operation. The cumulative quantity completed on this operation. The Cumulative quantity scrapped. Reports if quantity ordered numbers are validated. "Y" means completed quantities are validated against the work order quantity ordered field. "N" means completed quantities are not validated against the quantity ordered field. Reports if quantity received numbers are validated. "Y" means completed quantities are validated against the work order quantity received field. "N" means completed quantities are not validated against the
Page 401 of 613

Seq Val

Auto Moves

Qty Ordered UOM Routing Operation number

Scheduled Start & Completion Revised Start & Completion Actual Start & Completion Status

Qty Received Qty Complete Qty Scrapped Val Qty Ord

Val Qty Rec

Kronos Incorporated

quantity-received field. Actual These two fields for correspond to the two validate quantity fields described above. The actual variance is displayed. The date and the adjusted start time for each job the employee logged onto within the specified parameters. The date and adjusted stop time for each job the employee logged off of within the specified parameters. This field is blank if the job is still open. The employee ID related to the work order. The employee name related to the work order. The date of the time record associated with this labor record. The department associated with the labor record. The shift associated with the labor record. The labor code associated with the labor record. The job class associated with the labor record. The transaction code that opened this labor record. The completion code associated with the labor record. The work center associated with the labor record. The machine associated with the labor record. The total number of hours that will be paid for this function, including paid absences. Hours earned based on the standards set up in the work order for how long the operation should have taken, based on the number of pieces completed or the percent of the setup completed. Displays the efficiency level calculated by the system, based on the earned hours and total hours allocated to the operation.

Adj Start Adj Stop

Employee ID Employee Name RefDate Dept Shift Labor Code Job Cls Trx Comp WC Mach --Hours-Total Earned

Efficiency

--Quantity Complete-Comp Moved Destination

Kronos Incorporated

The quantity entered when the employee logged off. The quantity moved as entered using the MOV transaction. The work order and operation the completed quantity d
Page 402 of 613

was moved to. --Quantity Scrapped-Scrap Code WC Moved Destination The quantity scrapped as entered on transaction. The scrap code associated with the transaction. The work center associated with the scrap. The quantity moved to a rework operation. The rework operation number.

WIP Summary (WIP103) This report lists the status and quantities at each operation in selected work orders. You can run this report for a range of work orders, operations, part numbers, and several other selection criteria. This report gives you a summary of each and every operation of a work order. To select specific information, complete any or all of the following data fields found on three tabbed screens, Selection Criteria 1, Selection Criteria 2, and Print Options: Selection Criteria

FIELD
Work orders Operations

DESCRIPTION
The range of work orders to include on the listing. If left blank, all work orders will be included. The range of operations to include on the listing. If left blank, all operations will be included. Completed operations are not included. The operation function to include on the listing. You can include up to two. Remember that operation functions can include 1 (setup) 2 (run) and 3 (rework). If left blank, all work centers will be included. The range of customers to include on the listing. If left blank, all customers will be included. The range of part numbers to included on the report. If left blank, all part numbers will be included. The range of values to included on the report that are found in the user-defined fields set up in system configuration. If left blank, all values will be included. If the field is named in Setup, that name replaces the Misc label.

Functions

Customers Part numbers Misc (Work Order userdefined field)

Selection Criteria 2
Kronos Incorporated Page 403 of 613

Operation departments Operation groups

The range of departments found in the operation record to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included. The range of groups found in the operation record to include on the listing. If left blank, all groups will be included. The range of work centers found in the operation record to include on the listing. If left blank, all departments will be included. Select up to five Work order types. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types.

Operation work centers Work order types

Work order statuses Select up to five Work order statuses. If left blank, the system generates a report for all types. Print Options Sequence Specify the sort order for the report. Options are: P - Part number, Work order, Operation W - Work order, Operation Page breaks Select the desired page break. The options are: A - Default page breaks B - Page break on part number C - Page break on work order The Printed Report The report header contains the selection criteria for the report, and the date and time the report was created. Depending on the sequence order selected, the headers will reflect the order selected. For instance, if Part Number, Work Order, Operation is selected; a header box with the part number will precede the work order and operation header. The fields below are given in the order of display for the sequence (Work Order, Operation). They include the following:

FIELD
Work Order Part # WO User- Defined field Status Type Sched St
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
The work order number for the information. The part number of this work order. The contents of the work order user-defined field set up in the System configuration file. The status of the work order. This is blank if the work order has not been started, or I if it has been started. The work order type. The scheduled start date.
Page 404 of 613

Compl Opn St

The scheduled completion date as found in the work order. The operation and function assigned to this work center. The function is the number to the right of the decimal. The current status of the operation assigned to this work center. This is blank if the operation has not been started, otherwise it is I (Incomplete) or C (Complete) The number of employees currently logged on this operation. The description as found in the operation record. The work center as found in the operation record. The scheduled completion date as found in the operation record. The actual completion date. This is the date that a completion code with allocation C has been passed. The quantity received at this operation as a result of a MOV transaction. On the first operation this is always the quantity completed plus the quantity scrapped. The cumulative quantity completed in the operation record, for the last operation started. The cumulative quantity scrapped in the operation record, for the last operation started. The unaccounted for difference between the quantity received at an operation and the quantity completed or scrapped, for the last operation started.

In Prg Description Work Ctr Sched Compl Act Compl --Quantities-Received

Comp Scrap Qt RO

WIP W/O Top Assembly (WIP199) This report lists the Work Order Top Assemblies. Run this report for a range of status, part numbers, work order numbers, dates, and several other selection criteria. This report is available as a printed report or display. This report will show any subsequent assemblies, including part numbers, work orders, and hours for completion for the requested item. This relationship is sometimes referred to as the 'parent/child' relationship of item in question: Work Order Number Router Number
Page 405 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Customer Number Part Number Part Name

Work Orders Selection Criteria

FIELD
Work order Status

DESCRIPTION
Used to fill in the Work Order Status prior to performing a search of the selected criteria. Selection is not limited to one choice and can include all the option listed below C - Completed H- Hold I- Uncompleted S- Split X- Cancelled Use the pull down window to fill in the name to the right of the pull down. Selection are: Work Order Number Router Number Customer Number Part Number Part Name Use the pull down window to fill in the name to the right of the pull down. Selection are: Scheduled Start Scheduled Completion Actual Start Actual Completion Revised Start Revised Completion Last Printed Performs a search of the selective criteria. Clear all selected fields for new search criteria.

Fields

Date Fields

Search Clear All Department Group

Popup window used to select single, multiple or a range of Departments. Popup window used to select single, multiple or a range of Groups. Report Format

FIELD
Show WO Status

DESCRIPTION
When checked this allows the Work Order Status to be displayed or printed. If left unchecked no status will be
Page 406 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Show Total Hours

Show Part Number

available on the report. When checked this allows the Total Hours to be displayed or printed for the selected report(s). If left unchecked no information will be available on the report. When checked the Part Number will be displayed or printed. If left unchecked no information will be available on the report.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 407 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Page 408 of 613

CHAPTER 8 USING SHOPTRAC PRO UTILITIES

UTILITIES OVERVIEW
The Utilities menu in ShopTrac Pro contains programs used to Purge data, Import and Export data and perform unique operations such as complete your end-of-the-day data processing and file maintenance. Sub-menu options on the Utilities menu include: Purges - system maintenance that involves removing expendable records from the system for the purposes of saving storage space and slows processing time. Company policies will have an effect on the timing and selectivity of the removal. Importing - procedures to import information from other system into a usable format for ShopTrac Pro. Exporting - procedures to export information that can be used by other systems from ShopTrac Pro. Miscellaneous - contains programs to complete daily processing, to perform recalculation and schedule backups.

ADDING DELIMITERS
There may be a need for use a delimiter that does not exist on the predefined list of delimiters when defining a format for importing and/or exporting. To add a delimiter: Open System Setup \ Configuration \ Flags (All). Select [New] by right clicking on the list of flags on the right. Define the new flag as follows: File = GENERAL Field = CHARACTERS Value = <new delimiter character>

DATABASE BUILDER
**This program is recommended for use only by System Administrators or programmers.** This Data Access utility allows you to:
Kronos Incorporated Page 409 of 613

Add, delete, move fields Re-index Repair Recompress

The Database Builder (DB) is the preferred method of creating database files and data dictionaries. It provides a means for viewing the field structure, index structure, number of records, and other attributes of existing database files. DB maintains all the directory files that make up a database file, and it maintains them all automatically except for the *.DEF file. DB can create these .DEF files, and when a new one is created, it overwrites any previous version of the same file that may have existed in the directory. Database files can be modified with data in them, but it is faster and less likely to cause errors to modify empty files before putting data in them. When DB is called upon to restructure a file with data in it, it must convert the data from the old structure to the new, a process that can consume significant amounts of time in large files. With DB, you can add or delete fields, or move them relative to each other. You can insert new fields at any point. The order of fields in the file is usually of no importance, but sometimes can be. You can change the lengths of files, and you can change their types, as well as their names. Changing the name of a field, of course, will render program source code, that uses the obsolete names, unusable until the names are updated in the source code. You can change the database file's record length, either implicitly by changing the aggregate length of its fields, or explicitly by direct entry. DB is the facility for defining a database file's indexes, and any change desired may be made, although improper changes to interrelated files can upset file relationships. Indexes can be added, deleted, inserted, or changed as to whether they are on-line (updated on each change to the database) or batch (updated only by running Re-index). For existing indexes, segments (participating fields) can be added, deleted, inserted, or changed as to whether they are ascending or descending, or case-sensitive or case-insensitive. You can change the maximum number of records the database file may hold, a factor of importance only to the design or its index files. You can update one or all the indexes of a database file through DB. DB provides a means for defining relationships between files. Defining relationships is a process of defining which field in the child file relates to which field in a parent file. These definitions are always made in the child file, the one in which many records may relate to a single record in the parent file (the reverse is not permitted). Finally, DB affords the means of setting the type of data compression that should be applied to a file, and also the means for updating such compression in files whose contents have changed substantially since the last time they were recompressed.

DATABASE EXPLORER
**This program is recommended for use only by System Administrators or programmers.**

Kronos Incorporated

Page 410 of 613

This utility allows you to: View information about the file including data, attributes, indexes, and field definitions Delete an individual record Edit individual field values in a record

With the Database Explorer (DE), you can browse through the list of data files of any environment or workspace, and open the files to inspect their data. In formation such as which fields are present in a data file is presented via a Windows tree view and grid (Fields tab page). Information about the indexes of the chosen data file is also presented in a tree view via the Index tab page. You can change the sort order of the displayed data by browsing through the indexes. All other file information can be accessed via the Attributes tab page. Finally, the files parentage (the file(s) to which it relates, the files(s) to which that file relates, and so on) can be viewed by the way of the Tree tab page. The DE allows you to open any data file and examine or edit its data. It provides a quick and easy way to add, delete, or modify records in a file, as well as the ability to erase the entire contents of the file.

Warning: Modifying file data through this tool can seriously disrupt or disable applications that depend on the data. DE cannot, for example, respect the business rules that are encoded in the data dictionaries of most files. The use of DE for modifying data should be limited to users who can be relied upon not to damage applications in use.
The opening view displays the names of the data files in the file list of the current workspace. The screen is divided into the following areas: the title bar (showing the name of the workspace that is being used), menu bar, tool bar, the list of files on the left and the file attributes tab-page dialog to the right, and finally the status bar. At startup, the file-list tree will be automatically filled. The tab dialog, however, is not filled until you select a file in the list of files.

IMPORT EMPLOYEES PARAMETERS

These parameters are used with the Import Employees option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
System Default System Default System Default (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

KEY
SELFORMATNAME SELINPUTFILE RESSEL

VALUE
xxxxx xxxxxxxx xx (f/i) (f=user cannot change format, i=user cannot change input file)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 411 of 613

System Default System Default

ERRORCHECKING AUTOCFG

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xx (position one, y/n, print or don't print; position two, a/b, a=continue, d=don't continue) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Automatic processing

AUTO

IMPORTING UTILITIES
Use the Import Utilities to configure and import into any ShopTrac Pro data file from a userdefined file. You can also use Event Manager in DCM to import data automatically into the ShopTrac Pro system. This utilities used to import data include: Formats Import Data Employees Work Orders Operations Employee Accruals

Formats
The ShopTrac Pro system provides predefined utilities to import data into the following files: Employee file Work Order file Operation file

However, there are other data files available within the ShopTrac Pro system where it is convenient to download data into files, instead of populating the files with data entered by an employee. Examples of these types of data are: the Shift, Work Center, Department, Part Number, etc. The Import Formatter lets you define the format used to import data, based on the data file field characteristics detailed in the ShopTrac Pro file definition. You create an ASCII file based on the fields that you need, which are listed in the file definition. Then, create an Import Format that is used to populate the desired file. The predefined formats cannot be deleted or edited. The user can only view the details of these formats. However, they can be used as a basis for a new format or studied to assist users to build new formats. Formats that have been created by the user can be edited and deleted.
Kronos Incorporated Page 412 of 613

When Formats is selected, a list of existing formats is displayed. To create a new format, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing user-created format, highlight the format to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy an existing format, highlight the format to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the copied transaction are displayed, with a blank format name field. You will be prompted to enter a new format name. Make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing user-defined format, highlight the format name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed.

The name of the format is displayed at the top of the screen, above the two screen tabs, General and Data Elements. General

FIELD
Description Target data file ASCII format

DESCRIPTION
A 30-character description of the format. The target data file in ShopTrac Pro to receive the data from the import. Exact spelling is critical. A one-character field that specifies the format of the ASCII files from which the data is extracted. The options are: 1 - Offset Driven (Not Delimited) -- The system looks for the next field data based on the position of the data in the string as defined by the File Definition format. Numeric fields are right justified within the number of characters for it. If the entire field is not used, it can be padded up front with spaces or zeros. 2 - Character Delimited -- Each field in the data string is separated by a specific character. If this value is entered, specify the character desired in the Delimiter field. The browse is available for selection and contains the following choices: " * , . Double Quotes Asterisk Comma Space Period With this option, it is not necessary to fill the entire field

Kronos Incorporated

Page 413 of 613

length with characters or spaces. Note: Also available is the ability to add additional delimiter characters. When you enter a new character not listed, the system prompts you to enter a description. Clicking F10 saves the character and adds it to the flag file, so it is always available. 3 - Line Delimited -- The contents for each field in the data field is placed on individual lines. Delimiter If 2 - Character Delimited is selected in the ASCII Format field, select one of the following delimiters: " * , . Header lines Block size Double Quotes Asterisk Comma Space Period The number of lines, if any, which are to be skipped at the top of the ASCII file. A block is a section of the ASCII file for a given database record. Each block is "read in" to make one database record. The block size is the number of lines in each block that makes up one record to be imported.

Data Elements This tab contains the elements (fields) that are part of the format. To add a new element, click on New at the bottom of the window. Define the fields and click Save to save the element. To edit an element, double-click on the desire field, or highlight and press Enter. Change the desired fields and click Save to save the edited field. To delete a field, highlight the desired field and click Delete. Confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed. Import format Input Sequence Format 1 The name of the format from the previous window. The process order of the field in the import record.

Above the tabs are fields identifying the format including:

The formats created for the import are displayed on the Format 1 and Format 2 tabs.

FIELD
Field type

DESCRIPTION
Enter the field type that identifies the import field. Options are:
Page 414 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

1 - Non-Key field 2 - Key Field 3 - Transaction code Handling Select how the data in this field will be handled during the import. Options are: 1 - Read from ASCII file (Use if the contents are to imported from the character string into the new file.) 2 - Default only (Use if you want to place a set value [same every time] in this field for all imported records.) Field Name Read from line The name of the database field being imported to. This field is only relevant if the Block Size in the header is greater than one. If the block size is greater than one, specify on which line of the block this field can be found. If the ASCII format is set to 1 - Offset Driven, the user must specify the offset (character position in the data string) at which the field contents begin. The number of characters that are to be extracted after the beginning offset. Indicates if the field is numeric, how many decimal places will be used to display the numbers. This must be completed if a specific decimal place is not specified in the ASCII file.

Offset

Length Decimal places

Format 2

FIELD
Start at occur... of character

DESCRIPTION
If the field does not have a fixed position and the character to start importing data from occurs more than once in the data string, enter which occurrence to start at. Then enter the character to begin the import at. For instance, if the import should start at the second '*' in a field, the entry will be Start at 2 of character *. Check this box if the character cited in the Start at field should be included in the import data string. Leave clear if this character should not be included in the import data. The same as the Start at field except this is the character used to stop the extraction of data from a field that does not have a fixed position. Check this box if the character cited in the Stop at field should be included in the import data string. Leave clear if this character should not be included in the import
Page 415 of 613

Include

Stop at occur... of character Include

Kronos Incorporated

data. Use strip character Check this box, if the and characters should be stripped out of the data string. Can be used to strip delimiting characters. Leave clear if no characters will be stripped. Enter the character that should be stripped, if the Use strip character box above is checked. The default value for the field if no data is downloaded. Options are: N - No default D - Default Value - user-defined default value F - [Link] - contents of entered field If the D or F option is selected, a field opens to enter the default value of the name of the file field. Blanking character The character you want placed in the offsets for a filed whose contents you want to delete, when updating a record. The asterisk (*) character is the default character. When this blanking character is in the import data string for the required field, the system replaces the current contents of the field with blanks (alphanumeric fields) or zeros (numeric fields).

Character Default type

Data
Use this option to import data using a user-defined format. Complete the following fields to initial the import:

FIELD
Format name

DESCRIPTION
This is the name of the user-defined import format. Once selected, this displays the format name and the ShopTrac Pro file to which you are importing the data. Enter the filename where the imported data will reside. The ASCII file name located in the \DOWNLOAD\ subdirectory entered in the Import From Field field. If the file name is invalid, the system displays an error message. If valid, the system displays the directory and file name to the right of the field. Check this box to turn on error checking for the following errors, an attempt to add, update or delete a record that already exists. If you are testing your imports, check this box. If the system has been running
Page 416 of 613

Destination file Input from file

Error checking

Kronos Incorporated

for some time, leave this box clear. When the import is launched, the screen displays the import activity along with the errors encountered. If error checking is requested, any errors in the import are automatically printed on an Errors Report.

Employees
This procedure explains how to import employee information from an external computer system into the Employee file. There is a predefined Employee format available in the system. It is designed for an offset-driven file format.

Field
Format name

Description
This is the name of the import format, the predefined one or one that you have designed. [Link] is the predefined employee format. This is the file name of the file for the import to be placed into. This is the name of the file of import origin. Check this box to turn on error checking for the following errors, an attempt to add, update or delete a record that already exists.

Destination file Input from file Error checking

You may format your data to use this predefined format, or use it as a starting point for creating an import to match the output of your host system. To create your own import, see Import Formats. Importing Guidelines When you create a file to be imported, you should remember the following details: The first field (the host transaction code) must be one of these -

ENTER
ADD UPD DEL

RESULT
Uses the information on this line of the file to create a new record. Uses the information on this line of the file to update an existing record. Uses the information on this line of the file to delete an existing record. The only other information you need to include on this line is the Employee ID number. Uses the information on this line of the file to either create a new record, if none exists, or update an existing record.

Blank

Decimal fields must have an explicit decimal point.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 417 of 613

Fields that should no be changed must contain only spaces and nothing else (including numeric fields). The system ignores blank fields. Any fields that are not blank overwrite existing data. To blank out an existing field in an Employee record, fill in the corresponding field in this file completely with asterisks (*).

Once the import is launched, the processing information is displayed on the screen. Included is the number of records selected and processed and errors encountered. Start the import by clicking the OK button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. To exit without completing the process, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

Work Order
This procedure explains how to import work orders data from an external computer system into the Work Order file. Operations data must also be imported to populate both files. Before importing work order information, you should examine the formats available to export from your host system. The ShopTrac Pro system provides tools to import a variety of ASCII files. The predefined formats for work orders are designed for an offset-driven file format. This listing contains the fields available if all modules are activated.

FIELD
Format name

DESCRIPTION
This is the name of the import format, the predefined one or one that you have designed. [Link] is the predefined format for work orders. This is the file name of the file for the import to be placed into. This is the name of the file of import origin. Check this box to turn on error checking for the following errors, an attempt to add, update or delete a record that already exists.

Destination file Input from file Error checking

Once the import is launched, the processing information is displayed on the screen. Included is the number of records selected and processed and errors encountered. Start the import by clicking the OK button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. To exit without completing the process, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button. You may use the predefined formats as a starting point for creating imports to match the output of your host system. To create an import, see Import Format. Importing Guidelines When you create a file to be imported, you should remember the following details:
Kronos Incorporated Page 418 of 613

The first field (the host transaction code) must be one of these -

ENTER
ADD UPD DEL

RESULT
Uses the information on this line of the file to create a new record. Uses the information on this line of the file to update an existing record. Uses the information on this line of the file to delete an existing record. The only other information you need to include on this line is the Employee ID number. Uses the information on this line of the file to either create a new record, if none exists, or update an existing record.

Blank

Decimal fields must have an explicit decimal point. Fields that should no be changed must contain only spaces and nothing else (including numeric fields). The system ignores blank fields. Any fields that are not blank overwrite existing data. To blank out an existing field in a Work Order record, fill in the corresponding field in this file completely with asterisks (*).

This procedure also gives you the option of printing an error report for any records that are not imported correctly.

Operations
This procedure explains how to import operations data from an external computer system into the Work Order file. Work order data must also be imported to populate both files. Before importing operation information, you should examine the formats available to export from your host system. The ShopTrac Pro system provides tools to import a variety of ASCII files. The predefined formats for operations are designed for an offset-driven file format. This listing contains the fields available if all modules are activated.

FIELD
Format name

DESCRIPTION
This is the name of the import format, the predefined one or one that you have designed. [Link] is the predefined format for operations. This is the file name of the file for the import to be placed into. This is the name of the file of import origin. Check this box to turn on error checking for the following errors, an attempt to add, update or delete a record that already exists.
Page 419 of 613

Destination file Input from file Error checking

Kronos Incorporated

Once the import is launched, the processing information is displayed on the screen. Included is the number of records selected and processed and errors encountered. Start the import by clicking the OK button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. To exit without completing the process, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button. You may use the predefined formats as a starting point for creating imports to match the output of your host system. To create an import, see Import Format. Importing Guidelines When you create a file to be imported, you should remember the following details: The first field (the host transaction code) must be one of these -

ENTER
ADD UPD

RESULT
Uses the information on this line of the file to create a new record. Uses the information on this line of the file to update an existing record. (Important note: For the UPD transaction code to use any of the default settings set up in an import format, a UPDDEF parameter must be included on the setup of an access profile. Without this parameter, all default field values will be ignored.) Uses the information on this line of the file to delete an existing record. The only other information you need to include on this line is the Employee ID number. Uses the information on this line of the file to either create a new record, if none exists, or update an existing record.

DEL

Blank

Decimal fields must have an explicit decimal point. Fields that should no be changed must contain only spaces and nothing else (including numeric fields). The system ignores blank fields. Any fields that are not blank overwrite existing data. To blank out an existing field in an Operation record, fill in the corresponding field in this file completely with asterisks (*).

This procedure also gives you the option of printing an error report for any records that are not imported correctly.

Employees - Accruals
This procedure explains how to import employee information from an external computer system into the Employee file. There is a predefined Employee format available in the system. It is designed for an offset-driven file format.
Kronos Incorporated Page 420 of 613

FIELD
Format

DESCRIPTION
This is the name of the import format, the predefined one or one specifically created. [Link] is the predefined employee format. This is the file name of the file for the import to be placed into. This is the name of the file of import origin. Check this box to turn on error checking for the following errors, an attempt to add, update or delete a record that already exists. Select a printer for the file output.

Destination File Input from file Error Checking

Printer

Format the data to use this predefined format, or use it as a starting point for creating an import to match the output of the host system. To create an import, see Import Formats. Importing Guidelines When creating a file to be imported, remember the following details: The first field (the host transaction code) must be one of these:

ENTER
ADD UPD DEL

RESULT
Uses the information on this line of the file to create a new record. Uses the information on this line of the file to update an existing record. Uses the information on this line of the file to delete an existing record. The only other information to be included on this line is the Employee ID number.

Blank

Uses the information on this line of the file to either create a new record, if none exists, or update an existing record.

Note: Decimal fields must have an explicit decimal point. Note: Fields that should no be changed must contain only spaces and nothing else (including numeric fields). The system ignores blank fields. Any fields that are not blank overwrite existing data. Note: To blank out an existing field in an Employee record, fill in the corresponding field in this file completely with asterisks (*).

EMPLOYEE EXPORT
Kronos Incorporated Page 421 of 613

This utility is used to export employee records. It can also be used with the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) to gather records of all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several sources to KAT. It can also be used with the Gatekeeper Central (GKC) program to export employee records and work schedules. There are four different exports from the ShopTrac Pro system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedule Export Hours Export Pay Category Export Employee Export Work Schedule Export

There are two exports from the ShopTrac Pro system to GKC:

Employee Export This export provides basic information from the Employee record. It includes the following general items: Name information including badge and employee ID numbers. Department, Work Schedule, Work Center, etc. Rate and Status. Information from the Employee user-defined fields.

This export can be run as often as needed. Running the Employee Export has no effect on any of the ShopTrac Pro data files, meaning that it does not mark any of the files with any batch number. If you will be exporting to KAT, you must launch the Employee, Hours, Pay Category and Work Schedule exports at the same time. These records will then be available for the KAT export. Because KAT only supports three Labor entries, the export to KAT does not include Employee Labor Codes or Job Classes. The same is true of the GKC export. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Employee ID

DESCRIPTION
Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers that you want to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of labor codes you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all labor codes. Enter the range of work centers you want to include. If l hi fi ld bl k h
Page 422 of 613

Labor codes

Work centers
Kronos Incorporated

you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Work Schedules Enter the range of work schedules you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. Enter the range of departments you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all departments. Enter the range of groups you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of job classes you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work classes. You can include up to five status codes to include or leave it blank to export all records regardless of status. Displays the name of the upload destination. Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. Do not include a file extension, as the system automatically assigns the extension .TXT; the default file name is [Link]

Departments

Groups

Job classes

Employee status Employee upload for Output file name

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

EXPORTING
The ShopTrac Pro system contains a great deal of information that can be used by other systems. There are different tools available in the system to both export the information and create custom exports. Formats Custom Fields Used to define export formats for reports or export files. Used to define data fields for exporting information to outside files.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 423 of 613

Time Labor Labor Hours (Payroll) Employees Pay Categories Work Schedules Hours Machines

Used to define and launch time files for exporting. Used to define and launch labor files for exporting. Used to define and launch LHours files for exporting. Used to define and launch employee files for exporting. Used to define and launch pay category files for exporting. Used to define and launch work schedule files for exporting. Used to define and launch hours files for exporting. Used to define and launch Machine files for exporting.

Data can be exported from ShopTrac Pro to a file you define. Once defined, this data is configured and placed in export records. An exported record is a unique string of data made up of multiple data sections extracted from the ShopTrac Pro system and defined in the Export Format. Each one of these data sections is called a Line Element. The data formatter provides the following features to enable you to configure a format to your particular needs: Offset, character-delimited or line-delimited output Header and Footer sections Ability to export partial data from a field Ability to export totals of other fields exported Reformatting of the field data Defining unique formats for selected reports and the Time/Labor Editor

The general process of defining and using data formats can be broken down into a series of steps. These are: Determine which file has the information you want to export. Select the fields you want to include in the export. Define the format. Define each line element of the format. Print a listing. Perform the export.

Determine the Export File The files available for exporting are: Time Labor Events
Page 424 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

LHours

Source Data Files Source Data files are the ShopTrac Pro data files for Time, Labor and LHours, from which you can extract data for formatting. This data can either be a field within a particular file or run time data. A predefined list of data files is provided. By offering tools specific to each Source Data file, the Formatter offers access to fields in other files, whether or not they are related to the main source file. These Source Data files are accessed when creating the Export Format. For each data file there is an associated list of fields that may be placed in the Line Elements of the format. A list of the available fields can be accessed in the Format Export option. Remember that each of these time, labor and labor hours files are linked to one another, so you are not absolutely limited to the information in one file. You should consult the source field listings to determine what information is available for export. Consider the primary type of information that you need to fill the needs of the system to which you are exporting. Consider how you are using the ShopTrac Pro system to collect and store that data. This should help you complete the first step. Generally speaking, there are three types of data available for use: Fields Runtime data Analysis values These contain the data stored in each record. These are the values specified at the time the export or report is run. These are calculated values that are not stored in the database but are calculated at the time they are needed, either for export or display in a report.

Formats
Some standard export files are predefined on the Utilities/Exporting menu. The Formats option is used to define other files for exporting from the ShopTrac Pro system. There are two parts to defining an export file. The first relates to the format as a whole, the Source Data file, and information about the make-up of the Header, Body, and Footer of the export file. The other part is related to the configuration information for each line element in the format. There are predefined formats in the Formats options. These formats cannot be deleted or edited. The user can only view the details of these formats. However, they can be used as a basis for a new format or studied to assist users to build new formats. Formats that have been created by the user can be edited and deleted. When Formats is selected, a list of existing formats is displayed. To create a new format, right-click on the list and select 'New'. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing user-created format, highlight the format to change and right-click. Select 'Edit' and enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting.
Page 425 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

To copy an existing format, highlight the format to copy and right-click. Select 'Copy' and a duplicate of the settings on the copied transaction are displayed, with a blank format name field. You will be prompted to enter a new format name. Make changes, if desired, to any of the remaining settings. Make sure to Save before exiting. To delete an existing user-defined format, highlight the format name and right-click. Select 'Delete' and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed.

Output Destinations Users define formats for these output destinations: Export Report

Export formats Used in sending data to another system, users may define header, body, and footer sections, and may specify a variety of file formats for data needed for readable output. Report formats Used on screen utilities and reports, they restrict you to formats that are suitable for screen or printer output, and also prompt for data needed for readable output. These formats are generally approached differently, but most of the fields are defined the same way for both. The Formats defining fields are distributed on five tabbed screens: Format, Header, Body, Footer and Line Elements. The name of the format is displayed at the top of the window, above the tabs. Format

FIELD
Description Source data file Output destination Scheduled day

DESCRIPTION
A 30-character description of the format. The source data file for the format. The choices are Labor files, LHour files or Time files. Select E - Export or R - Report from the drop-down box. (See explanation of the difference above.) If a Time file is selected in the Source data file field, this field becomes applicable. An alphanumeric, 40character, optional field. Enter the text you want to be displayed when an employee does not work on a scheduled day. If a Time file is selected in the Source data file field, this field becomes applicable. An alphanumeric, 40character, optional field. Enter the text you want to be displayed when a non-scheduled day is included in the data.

Non-scheduled day

Kronos Incorporated

Page 426 of 613

Data elements before

If a Time file is selected in the Source data file field, this field becomes applicable. A numeric, four-digit, required field. When either of the two "No Time Record" texts is output, this many line elements will be printed first, then the text. This allows the user to output information on the line that does not depend on the time record, such as a sequence number or the day name.

Header

FIELD
Lines in header

DESCRIPTION
A four-character numeric field used to define the total number of lines contained in the Header section of the file. If no header is to be placed in the file, enter zero, which is the default. A 30-character alphanumeric user-defined description of the Header. Select a format from the drop-down box. The options are: 1 - Offset driven. Data in the Header is not separated by any characters and the total number of characters in the field are used. You must specify at what position in the data string the data starts, and how many characters it contains (this is a constant value). 2 - Character Delimited. A specific character separates the individual elements in the data string. No character is required at the beginning of ending of the string. If this option is selected, the Delimiter prompt (below) is displayed, and you can select a character from the dropdown list. 3 - Line Delimited. Each field element in the format is placed o a separate line in the file.

Description ASCII format

Delimiter

This field is only applicable when 2 is selected in the ASCII format field above. Select a delimiter from the drop-down list. (Adding delimiters.)

Body

FIELD
Lines per record Description ASCII Format

DESCRIPTION
A four-character numeric field used to define the total number of lines output for each line. A 30-character alphanumeric user-defined description of the Body (extracted file data). Select a format from the drop-down box. The options

Kronos Incorporated

Page 427 of 613

are: 1 - Offset driven. Data in the Body is not separated by any characters and the total number of characters in the field are used. You must specify at what position in the data string the data starts, and how many characters it contains (this is a constant value). 2 - Character Delimited. A specific character separates the individual elements in the data string. No character is required at the beginning of ending of the string. If this option is selected, the Delimiter prompt (below) is displayed, and you can select a character from the dropdown list. 3 - Line Delimited. Each field element in the format is placed o a separate line in the file. Delimiter This field is only applicable. When 2 is selected in the ASCII format field above. Select a delimiter from the drop-down list. (Adding delimiters.)

Footer

FIELD
Lines per footer Description ASCII format

DESCRIPTION
A four-character numeric field used to define the total number of lines contained in the footer section. A 30-character alphanumeric user-defined description of the Footer. Select a format from the drop-down box. The options are: 1 - Offset driven. Data in the Footer is not separated by any characters and the total number of characters in the field are used. You must specify at what position in the data string the data starts, and how many characters it contains (this is a constant value). 2 - Character Delimited. A specific character separates the individual elements in the data string. No character is required at the beginning of ending of the string. If this option is selected, the Delimiter prompt (below) is displayed, and you can select a character from the dropdown list. 3 - Line Delimited. Each field element in the format is placed o a separate line in the file.

Delimiter

This field is only applicable. When 2 is selected in the ASCII format field above. Select a delimiter from the drop-down list. (Adding delimiters.)
Page 428 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Line Elements This screen displays a list of all the line elements with these column headers:

FIELD
Element

DESCRIPTION
Combined contents of the Section (first digit), Line number (next two digits) and Element (last four digits) information separated by dashes. There are three options for defining a Section, 1 = header, 2 = body, 3 = footer. The line and element (sequence number) are selected, based on their desired order in the file. An alphanumeric two-character field. The first character represents the element type. Options are: C - Constant; a user-defined data string (available in all sections) F - [Link]; specifies extraction of data from a specific file and field (Select from a list based on the Source data file selected for this format. Available to Body data only) N - Analysis Data (Calculated values usually derived from two or more data sources; e.g., efficiency measures, clock-in/out dates and times, exception occurrences, pay category hours.) P - Parameter (Specify a command line parameter to supply specific data for the Source field. Available with all sections.) R - Runtime Data. Data processed by the system, but not contained in any data file; e.g., export selection parameters, export processing date and time, number of output line, etc. (Select from a list based on the Source data file selected.) T - Total (Based on another line element, provides a total number of occurrences of the element being exported. This is available with Header and Footer only.) The second character represents the length of the field where data will be contained.

Type

Hostfield or Column header

Kronos Incorporated

When the output destination is an Export, this alphanumeric 20-character field displays which Field, if any, on the external system; the line element is being exported to. This field is optional, but completing the field will assist understanding the design of the format and for future reference.

Page 429 of 613

When the output destination is a Report, this field displays the Column Header that was defined for each line element. Source Output The data source specified for this line element, based on the selected type. If the line element is output to the ASCII file in an Export format, this field is blank. If the element is only support data to a total or other special field, and not output to an ASCII file, an N (No) will be displayed.

Defining Line Elements Line elements must be defined for each format. This tells the system what information must be gathered and how it will be placed in the format to be exported to a report or to an ASCII file. To add a new element, click on New on the Line Elements tab screen. Define the element fields and click Save to save the element. To edit an element, double-click on the desire element, or highlight and click Enter. Change the desired fields and click Save to save the edited element. To delete an element, highlight the desired element and right-click. Select Delete from the option list and confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed. The fields used to define a line element are displayed on four tabs: Line Element Data, Data Source, Modifications, and Output Format. The name of the format and the section, line and element numbers are displayed above the tabbed screens. Line Element Data

FIELD
Type

DESCRIPTION
Select the element type. Options are: C - Constant; a user-defined data string (available in all sections) F - [Link]; specifies extraction of data from a specific file and field (Select from a list based on the Source data file selected for this format. Available to Body data only) N - Analysis Data (Calculated values usually derived from two or more data sources; e.g., efficiency measures, clock-in/out dates and times, exception occurrences, pay category hours.) P - Parameter (Specify a command line parameter to supply specific data for the Source field. Available with all sections.) R - Runtime Data. Data processed by the system, but not contained in any data file; e.g., export selection parameters, export processing date and time, number of

Kronos Incorporated

Page 430 of 613

output line, etc. (Select from a list based on the Source data file selected.) T - Total (Based on another line element, provides a total number of occurrences of the element being exported. This is available with Header and Footer only.) Host Field or When the output destination is an Export, this alphanumeric 20-character field requests that Field, if any, on the external system, the line element is being exported to. This field is optional, but completing the field will assist understanding the design of the format and for future reference. This field does not appear in the actual export. When the output destination is a Report, this field requests the Column Header for the line element. Only applicable. When the format is a Report, this field is used to define the position of the header. Options are: A - As is C - Centered L - Left justified Comment An alphanumeric 20-character field, used to hold descriptive or other information, such as formatting information (mm/dd/yy or [Link]), possible values and meanings (1=True, 2=False), or information on the data source (constant or Parameter). This field does not appear in the actual export. Check this box if the line element is output to the ASCII file in an Export format. If the element is only support data to a total or other special field, and not output to an ASCII file, leave the box clear. Some line elements must be included in the export format definition to support Totals in other line elements. If the element is not a piece of data needed by itself in the output file, then leave the box clear. It will still be used for totaling, formatting, etc. Report total Check the box if this field is totaled on the report. Leave clear if the field is not totaled. If entering a Header or Footer, checking this box will cause a total of the selected line element in the body (Section 2) to be generated.

Column header Header format

Output

Data Source
Kronos Incorporated Page 431 of 613

FIELD
Field

DESCRIPTION
If the line element type is F - [Link], this field is used to identify the source field. Select from the drop-down list. If the [Link] source field is a date or time field, this field is accessed to select a format for the date or time data. If the line element is a P - Parameter or a C - Constant type, this field is used to define a space character which, when found in the data extraction, is replaced by a space and all data after the character into the export. For instance in the case of a P type, if the parameter COMPCODE is identified below and the data field contains COMPCODE=CHI, the system searches for the text COMPCODE, and if the space character was =, the = is replaced by a space and the CHI is extracted for the export. If the line element is a C - Constant or P - Parameter type, this field identifies the Constant string (group of characters) or the Parameter string. This field applies only when defining a header or footer for an Export format and if a T - Total type is selected. This identifies what line and element are to be totaled on the header or footer. A numeric four-character field, applicable if the Line Element has an Offset Driven ASCII Format. This defines the character position in the Source field from which the extraction of the data begins. For example, you have general ledger account numbers as your Indirect Work Order Numbers. In the ShopTrac Pro system, Indirect Work Orders begin with the letter I. If you want to export only the G/L number, specify an offset of 2. The system extracts the data starting with position 2 of the data field, skipping the I. If no Offset is specified, the system calculates the Offset, based on the length of the individual elements.

Date format

Space character

Parameter /Constant Line...Element

Offset

Length

A numeric four-character field applicable if the Line Element has an Offset Driven ASCII Format. This is the number of characters that are to be extracted from the Source field after the beginning offset. If left blank, the system extracts all characters from the beginning of the offset to the end of the field. For [Link] line elements, if no length is specified, the

Kronos Incorporated

Page 432 of 613

system uses the standard length of the defined [Link]. Note: Using the Offset and Length together lets you extract a particular sequence of characters from the Source field. Uppercase If you want to have all characters converted to uppercase on export, check this box. If clear, the data will be exported in the same case as it appears in the system. Check this box if you want all leading and trailing spaces to be removed when the data is extracted. Leave clear and the data will be unaffected during export. These fields (Start at... and Stop at...) let you extract data from a field that contains data that does not have a fixed position. For example, you want to extract a version number from part numbers that contain a prefix identifier, followed by a dash, a version number, a period and a revision number. To do this, you would enter a 1 in the Start at occurrence field (for the first occurrence) and a dash in the Of character field. The remainder of the extraction definition is found in the Stop at... fields below. Check this box if you want the start character (the dash, in our example above) to be included in the extraction. Leave clear if you don't want the start character included. This is the mate to the Start at... field above which lets you extract data from a field that contains data that does not have a fixed position. In our example above, to complete your definition of extraction of only the version number from part numbers which contain a prefix identifier, followed by a dash, a version number, a period and a revision number, the Stop at occurrence field would have a 1 in the field (for the first occurrence) and a period in the Of character field. Check this box if you want the stop character (the period, in our example above) to be included in the extraction. Leave clear if you don't want the stop character included.

Trim

Start at occurrence...of character

Include

Stop at occurrence...of character

Include

Modifications

FIELD
Rounding

DESCRIPTION
Extracted numeric data can be exported as is or rounded to a specific number of decimal places. Options are: N - None (The data is not rounded.) R- Rounded (Data is rounded to the specified number of decimal places below. Rounding rules are that 5 or

Kronos Incorporated

Page 433 of 613

greater rounds up, 4 and below rounds down. Time rounds to the nearest minute.) T - Truncate (Numbers are truncated to the specified number or decimal places below, but without rounding. Time rounds back to the last minute.) Places When Rounded or Truncate is selected above, this field is available to enter the number of decimal places used to round or truncate. Up to 26 character replacements can be performed based on the contents of this field. The character to be replaced and the replacement character are arranged in pairs in this field with the character to be replaced first, followed immediately by the new character. If additional pairs are entered, do not enter a space or any other character between the pairs. For instance, if you wanted to replace periods with front slashes and asterisks with commas and spaces with pound signs, the entry would look like this, /*, # Any character that needs to be removed from the extracted data of a line element is entered in this field. Stripped characters are replaced by null characters. For instance, if you wanted to remove the dashes in a social security number, the dash would be entered here in the element defined for social security data. This field allows users to configure numeric line elements to print as a blank if the value of the field, or a related field, is zero. This allows the user to define formats that are more streamlined and uncluttered. This option is available for numeric, date or time elements. The options are: A - Leave as is (zeros will be output) B - Blank if zero C - Blank if related field is zero Related Fields If the C option is selected in the Zero Value Option above, the user must indicate which related field would affect this field. When that related field is blank, this field will output a blank. Related fields can only be numeric, date or time fields.

Replacements

Strip Character

Zero Value Option

Output Format

FIELD
Decimal places

DESCRIPTION
This field defines how many decimal places are being outputted if this element contains numeric data. Zeros
Page 434 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

are added on the right of the data to pad the number to fill the specified number of decimal places. It is important that this field be coordinated with the Rounding values. When the data is formatted and the number has more decimal places than defined here, the number is truncated to the number of decimal places defined here. Data could be lost if you round to a larger number of decimal places than set in this field. Note: If the data is not made up entirely of numerals, the Decimal places definition is ignored and no zeros are added to the data. Include decimal Check this box if the decimal should be included in the number that is exported. Leave it clear if you want the decimal left off. This might be the case if the rounding is to the next whole number making the decimal useless. This defines whether the data is to left or right-justified in the exported field. This option is only used with fixed-length formats. Options are: L - Left-justified R - Right-justified If the Trim box is checked, this field and the Field length and Pad character fields are ignored. Field length This field is used with fixed-length formats and defines the length of the output data for this element. If the data is shorter than this specified length, it is left of right justified as defined, and then padded with the Pad character defined below. If the data is longer than this specified length, the data is truncated. This field is used to define what character will be used to pad, or fill, a fixed-length field. For example, if the Field length is 5 and the exported file contains 2, 3 and 4character numbers, the data could be right justified and zeros added to pad, or fill, the field. 12 would be exported as 00012, 342 would become 00342 and 2984 would become 02984. After the data has been formatted, justified and padded, you can define a string of characters to be output immediately before the line element data. This field lets you insert a label or explanation before the data, and output it as part of the field. This data is not included in the length, justification, or padding of the data and is added after all other formatting is performed on the
Page 435 of 613

Justification

Pad character

String before

Kronos Incorporated

extracted data. There are no leading or trailing spaces included. String after Same as String before, except the string of characters is added immediately after the line element data. This field lets you insert a label or explanation after the data, and output it as part of the field. This data is not included in the length, justification, or padding of the data and is added after all other formatting is performed on the extracted data. There are no leading or trailing spaces included. This is a view-only field that displays the overall length of the line element data to be output for Fixed-length formatting. This includes any String before or String after characters. The overall length is based on the calculations performed on the data. For Trimmed formatting, this field is blank. Check this box if you want the field delimiter to be exported with the data. Leave it clear if you don't want the field delimiter exported. This field is only applicable in a Report format. Check this box if you want to print a line over the delimiter. This could be used to print two data fields under one column heading, using the line above the delimiter as an easy-to-see data divider. This field is only applicable in a Report format.

Overall length

Output delimiter

Line over delimiter

Custom Fields
Although ShopTrac Pro comes with predefined export fields, you may need to define a custom field using this option. This utility is helpful when you need to export data from a particular data file with each export record. For example, you want Customer Status to be exported with each record in a LABOR export. The Work Order record contains the Customer Number that contains the customer status. A custom field can be created to link these two files to extract the status information. The source file is the Customer file; the field is the status field. The file to extract from is the Work Order file; the field is the Customer Number field. This custom field can then be added to the desired Export Format. Create a custom source field by completing the fields below:

FIELD
Source Data File

DESCRIPTION
Select the source file that contains the data you want to extract. The choices are TIME, LABOR and LHOURS.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 436 of 613

Section

This is always F for Field because you can only create a new field from an existing file. Therefore, runtime and analysis fields are not user-definable since they don't exist until processing begins. This number is assigned by the system to be the next number in sequence above 500,000 by tens. Pre-set fields are numbered below 500,000. A 6-digit field. This defines the type of data this source field is. Options are: A - Alphanumeric (letters or numbers) D - Date N - Numeric (numbers only) T - Time

Sequence

Type

Description

The definition for the source field. This text will be viewed in browses and on the screen. The format should be filename, a period and the fieldname. For our example above, the field created to transfer Customer Status to could be named, [Link]. Any ShopTrac Pro system data file related to the source file for the Export Format. For the file fields, this is the file number from which this field is output. For our example above, the source file would be the Customer File. For a complete list of all file names and numbers, refer to the Export Fields Listing. A 4-digit field. This is the field in the Source File that contains the data for extraction. Enter the field number from the Source File. A 4-digit field. For our example above, the source field would be the customer status field. The length of the Source Field. This is the file from which you need to extract the data needed to link the files. In our example above, this would be the Work Order file. This is the field number in the From File that contains the desired data. In our example above, this would be the Customer Number field, which will provide the link between the Work Order and Customer files. This is the field to be moved from the From Field to the related field in the Source File for extraction. In our example above, this would be the Customer Number field.

Source File

Source Field

Length From File

From Fields

To Fields

Kronos Incorporated

Page 437 of 613

Time
When an employee uses the system to clock in and out during a day, the system collects the attendance data in a Time File record. Many users export this data to an external computer system, such as a host computer or a payroll system. This Time Export outputs Time File records to a file that can be transferred to an external system. The predefined format for this export can be used as it stands or as a model for creating your own export format. If it is used as shipped, the output is identical to the standard Time export. Time records to be exported are stored in an ASCII disk file that resides in \UPLOAD\. You can assign any name to this file. This procedure also allows you to export records that have already been processed in a previous batch job. When Time records have been processed in a batch, the ShopTrac Pro system assigns each a unique number that identifies the batch in which they were processed. Normally, a Time record that has been processed in a batch cannot be processed again with another batch procedure. This procedure allows you to reprocess Time records by assigning them a special reprocessing batch number. It is important to keep up-to-date logs of the batch numbers and corresponding dates. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the fields displayed on two tabs, Selection Criteria and Selection Criteria 2. Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference Dates from...to Employee ID

DESCRIPTION
Enter the range of dates for the time records you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all time records regardless of date. Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers that you want to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of departments you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all departments. Enter the range of groups you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of work centers you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Enter the range of labor codes you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all labor codes.
Page 438 of 613

Departments

Groups

Work centers

Labor codes

Kronos Incorporated

Job classes

Enter the range of job classes you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work classes. Enter the range of work schedules you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. Enter the range of shifts you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all shifts. If you want to export hours records that have already been processed in a previous batch, assign this upload a reprocessing batch number. If the hours records have not previously been processed in a batch, skip this field.

Work Schedules

Shifts

Reprocess batches

Selection Criteria 2

FIELD
Select exceptions Output file name Data format

DESCRIPTION
You can include up to fifteen exception codes to include or leave it blank to export all exception conditions. Select the file name for the exported file. It will have a default extension of .DSK This value is defaulted to TMUPLD01. If you have defined additional formats, select them from the dropdown box. Required field. Check this box if you want to update the labor batch number with the number of this Batch. If you don't want to update this number, leave the box clear. It may be desirable to upload a group of Hours records but not update their Batch Numbers so it does not appear later as already uploaded. Check this box if you want to exclude previously sent records in this export. Previously uploaded records are marked with a batch number update. If you don't want to exclude any records, leave the box clear. Check this box if only employees clocked out at the time of this upload are included. Clocked out status is not just gone for the day; clocked out in the middle of the day would be included. Because the employee is clocked-out at the time of the upload, it is assured that the Labor hours have been rounded to match the Time hours, whether the employee returns on this day or not. Leave clear if employees are included regardless of whether their Time record is open or not.

Update Batch Number

Exclude marked records

Clocked-out only

Kronos Incorporated

Page 439 of 613

Hours (after)

Specify how long past Shift End Time, records will not be selected. Valid entries are 0 (zero) to 99.99. For example, an entry of 2.00 means that an upload will not consider any labor records for employees whose shift end time, including any authorized overtime, is less than two hours before the time the upload is run. Check this box to restrict the output to only Labor records for shifts that have already ended. Shift End is defined for each employee as the end time of the shift, or the end of any authorized post-shift overtime period. Leave clear if selection of Labor records should not consider the employee's scheduled Shift End time when considering Labor records for export. Check this box if you want an error report to be printed. Leave clear to not print an error report. Check this box if you want the defined header/footer to print even if no records meet the selection criteria. Leave clear if no header/footers are printed when no records are selected. Check this box if you want the defined header/footer to print even if the processing is interrupted. Leave clear if no header/footers are printed when processing is interrupted.

After shift only

Print errors Header/Footer if body records equal zero Header/Footer if interrupted

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

Labor
When an employee uses the system to clock in and out and record changes during a day, the system collects the event data in a Labor/Events File record. Users may export this data to an external computer system, such as a host-based labor or MRP, or payroll system. This Labor Export outputs Labor/Events File records to a file that can be transferred to an external system. The predefined format can be used as it stands or as a model for creating your own export format. Labor/Events records to be exported are stored in an ASCII disk file that resides in

Kronos Incorporated

Page 440 of 613

\UPLOAD\[Link]. You can assign any name to this file. When Labor/Events records have been processed in a batch, they may each be assigned a unique number that identifies the batch in which they were processed. This batch number is captured in the processed Labor/Events record to avoid passing critical data twice. However, should transfer problems occur, you can reprocess Labor/Events records by assigning them a special reprocessing batch number. It is important to keep up-to-date logs of the batch numbers and corresponding dates. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the fields displayed on three tabs, Selection Criteria, Selection Criteria 2 and Selection Criteria 3. Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference Dates from...to

DESCRIPTION
Enter the range of dates for the labor records you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all labor records regardless of date. Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers that you want to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of departments you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all departments. Enter the range of work order types you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all types. Enter the range of work centers you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Enter the range of groups you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of work orders you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work orders. Enter the range of work schedules you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. Enter the range of customers you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all customers.

Employee ID

Departments

Work order types

Work centers

Groups

Work orders

Work Schedules

Customers

Selection Criteria 2
Kronos Incorporated Page 441 of 613

FIELD
Routers

DESCRIPTION
Enter the range of routers you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all routers. Enter the range of part number types you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all types. Enter the range of part numbers you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all part numbers. Enter the range of contents of the labor user-defined field1 for labor records you want included in the export, or leave it blank to export all records regardless of this field's contents. Enter the range of contents of the labor user-defined field2 for labor records you want included in the export, or leave it blank to export all records regardless of this field's contents. Enter the range of contents of the work order userdefined field for labor records you want included in the export, or leave it blank to export all records regardless of this field's contents. Enter the range of operations you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all operations. Enter the range of shifts you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all shifts. Enter the range of teams you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all teams.

Part number types

Part numbers

Labor user-defined field1

Labor user-defined field2

Work order user-defined field

Operations

Shifts

Teams

Selection Criteria 3

FIELD
Reprocess batches

DESCRIPTION
If you want to export Labor records that have already been processed in a previous batch, assign this upload a reprocessing batch number. If the records have not previously been processed in a batch, skip this field. Required field. Check this box if you want to update the batch number with the number of this batch. If you don't want to update this number, leave the box clear. It can be desirable to upload a group of LHours records but not
Page 442 of 613

Update batch number

Kronos Incorporated

update their batch numbers so it does not appear later as already uploaded. Exclude marked records Check this box if you want to exclude previously sent records in this export. Previously uploaded records are marked with a batch number update. If you don't want to exclude any records, leave this box clear. Check this box if only employees clocked out at the time of this upload are included. Clocked out status is not just gone for the day; clocked out in the middle of the day would be included. Because the employee is clocked out at the time of the upload, it is assumed that the Labor hours have been rounded to match the Time hours, whether the employee returns on this day or not. Leave clear if employees are included regardless of whether their Time record is open or not. Check this box to restrict the output to only Labor records for shifts that have already ended. Shift End is defined for each employee as the end time of the shift, or the end of any authorized post-shift overtime period. Leave clear if selection of Labor records should not consider the employee's scheduled Shift End time when considering Labor Records for export. Check this box if you want an error report to be printed. Leave clear to not print an error report. Enter the range of labor types you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export with all labor types. You can include up to five status codes to include or leave it clear to export all records regardless of status. Select the file name of the file that will export to the external system. This file name can be any name up to eight characters long. A cryptic naming scheme including the date and batch number (e.g., L0527003 for file L exported on May 27, batch 3) aids file identification. This value is defaulted to LBUPLD01. If you have defined additional formats, you can select them from the drop-down list. Select up to 15 time and attendance exceptions to include in the export. Leave the box clear to include all exceptions. Enter up to five functions you want to include in the L h b l i l d ll f i
Page 443 of 613

Clocked-out only

After shift only

Print Errors Labor types

Employee status Output file name

Data format

Select exceptions

Functions
Kronos Incorporated

export. Leave the box clear to include all functions. Output headers/footers... if body records equal zero Output headers/footers if interrupted Check this box if you want the defined header/footer to print even if no records meet the selection criteria. Leave clear if no header/footers are printed when no records are selected. Check this box if you want the defined header/footer to print even if processing is interrupted. Leave clear if no header/footers are printed when processing is interrupted.

Once the export is launched, the records processing numbers are displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed, and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button.

Labor Hours (Payroll)

LHours records are associated with Labor records and are created by the application of Pay Rules. Users may export this data to an external computer system, such as a host-based payroll system. This Labor Hours Export outputs LHours records to a file that can be transferred to the Time Bank system. The predefined format can be used as it stands or as a model for creating your own export format. Hours records to be exported are stored in an ASCII disk file that resides in \UPLOAD\[Link]. You can assign any name to this file. It is important to keep up-to-date logs of the batch numbers and corresponding dates. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the fields displayed on two tabs, Selection Criteria and Selection Criteria 2. Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference Dates from...to Employee ID

DESCRIPTION
Enter the range of dates for the LHours records you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all records regardless of date. Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers that you want to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of departments you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all departments.
Page 444 of 613

Departments

Kronos Incorporated

Groups

Enter the range of groups you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of work centers you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Enter the range of labor codes you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all labor codes. Enter the range of job classes you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work classes. Enter the range of work schedules you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. Enter the range of shifts you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all shifts. Enter the pay category range to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all categories.

Work centers

Labor codes

Job classes

Work schedules

Shifts

Pay category

Selection Criteria 2

FIELD
Reprocess batches

DESCRIPTION
If you want to export LHours records that have already been processed in a previous batch, assign this upload a reprocessing batch number. If the records have not previously been processed in a batch, skip this field. Select up to 15 time and attendance exceptions to include in the export. Leave the box clear to include all exceptions. You can include up to five status codes to include or leave it blank to export all records regardless of status. Select the file name for the file that will be exported to the external system. This file name can be any name up to eight characters long. A cryptic naming scheme including the date and batch number (e.g., L0527003) aids file identification. This value is defaulted to LHUPLD01. If you have defined additional formats, you may select them from the drop-down list.

Select exceptions

Employee status Output file name

Data format

Kronos Incorporated

Page 445 of 613

Pay category type

Enter the pay category types range to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all category types. Check this box if you want the defined header/footer to print even if no records meet the selection criteria. Leave clear if no header/footers are printed when no records are selected. Check this box if you want the defined header/footer to print even if the processing is interrupted. Leave clear if no header/footers are printed when processing is interrupted. Required field. Check this box if you want to update the batch number with the number of this Batch. If you don't want to update this number, leave the box clear. It may be desirable to upload a group of LHours records but not update their Batch Numbers so it does not appear later as already uploaded. Check this box if you want to exclude previously sent records in this export. Previously uploaded records are marked with a batch number update. If you don't want to exclude any records, leave the box clear. Check this box if only employees clocked out at the time of this upload are included. Clocked out status is not just gone for the day; clocked out in the middle of the day would be included. Because the employee is clocked-out at the time of the upload, it is assured that the Labor hours have been rounded to match the Time hours, whether the employee returns on this day or not. Leave clear if employees are included regardless of whether their Time record is open or not. Specify how long past Shift End Time, records will not be selected. Valid entries are 0 (zero) to 99.99. For example, an entry of 2.00 means that an upload will not consider any labor records for employees whose shift end time, including any authorized overtime, is less than two hours before the time the upload is run. Check this box to restrict the output to only Labor records for shifts that have already ended. Shift End is defined for each employee as the end time of the shift, or the end of any authorized post-shift overtime period. Leave clear if selection of Labor records should not consider the employee's scheduled Shift End time when considering Labor records for export.
Page 446 of 613

Header/Footer if body records equal zero Header/Footer if interrupted

Update batch number

Exclude marked records

Clocked-out only

Hours [after]

After shift only

Kronos Incorporated

Print errors

Check this box if you want an error report to be printed. Leave clear to not print an error report.

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button. Parameters

Machines
Machine time records are exported in the same manner as Labor and Time records. When machine records are exported, they are placed in an ASCII file in /UPLOAD/[Link]. You can assign any name to this file. In addition to exporting data to a file, the information can be printed. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Date start from...to

DESCRIPTION
Enter the machine time date range to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all dates. Open records are not included. The batch number that will be attached to the machine time records, exported in this session, is displayed in this field. When the records are exported, the system marks the record with this batch number and it becomes a part of the machine time record. The batch number is automatically assigned by the system. Enter the name of the file that will be exported o the external system. Do not include a file extension, as the system automatically assigns the extension .DSK Allows the re-export of records marked with the specified batch number.

Next batch number

Output file name

Reprocess batch

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want
Kronos Incorporated Page 447 of 613

to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

Work Schedules
This utility is used to export work schedule records. It can also be used with the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) to gather records of all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several sources to KAT. It can also be used with the Gatekeeper Central (GKC) program to export employee records and work schedules. There are four different exports from the ShopTrac Pro system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedule Export Hours Export Pay Category Export There are two exports from the ShopTrac Pro system to GKC: Employee Export Work Schedule Export

Work Schedule Export This export provides basic information from the Work Schedule and Shift records. These are exported to separate files for KAT and for GKC. The KAT schedule export supports only 7- and 14-day cycles. This means that if a ShopTrac Pro Work Schedule has a Days In Cycle other than what KAT supports, users must export their Work Schedules every "Days In Cycle" days. For example, if Work Schedule "A" has a Days In Cycle of 10, users must export this Work Schedule every 10 days. On the other hand, if they are using a Days In Cycle of 7 or 14, they only need to export the Work Schedule once, unless they make modifications to their schedule files. This export can be run as often as needed. It has no effect on any data files. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Work schedules

DESCRIPTION
Enter the work schedule range to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all categories. Enter the work schedule type range to include in the
Page 448 of 613

Work schedule
Kronos Incorporated

types Primary schedule file name Scheduled shift file name

export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all schedule types. Enter the name of the file that contains information from the work schedule file. Enter the name of the file that contains information from the shift file.

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

Work Schedules Listing Parameters These parameters are used when generating a list of Work Schedules. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Key SELWORKSCHEDULE SELANCHORDATE Value xxxxx MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today1 for yesterday's date xxxxx xxxx (up to 4) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELDAYSINCYCLE SEL WORKSCHEDULETYPES AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 449 of 613

UTILITIES GKC EXPORT

Gatekeeper Central is a separate Windows application that provides a flexible access control solution for ShopTrac Pro users. The employee information is exported from the ShopTrac Pro system using this Export utility. GKC is an easy-to-use configuration and reporting tool. GKC controls entry to restricted areas through a door or gate secured by a gate clock. It uses a gate list (a list of employee ID;) to control that employees can enter through the gate. The gate list for any particular gate clock is defined as those employees' home clock. Gates can restrict entry not only by employee ID, but also by associated schedules and other restrictions. For more information about GKC, contact the Kronos sales representative.

Employees
Selection criteria listed below:

FIELD
Employee ID Select Labor Code Select Work Center Select Work Schedule Select Department Select Group Select Job class Select Employee Status (Up to 5) Employee Upload For: Output File Name:

DESCRIPTION
Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers that need to be included in the export. If left blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of labor codes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all labor codes. Enter the range of work centers needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Enter the range of work schedules needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. Enter the range of departments needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all departments. Enter the range of groups needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of job classes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work classes. Include up to five status codes or leave it blank to export all records regardless of status. Displays the name of the upload destination. Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. Do not include a file extension, as the system automatically assigns the extension .TXT; the default file name is [Link]
Page 450 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Active File: Records Processed: Total Records: Records Selected:

Indicates the active file name and is not editable by the user. Indicates the total number of records processed. Indicates the total number of records in the system that are searchable. Indicates the total number of records located that meet the search criteria.

KAT EXPORTS
The Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) records all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several sources to KAT. There are four different exports from the ShopTrac system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedules Export Hours Export Pay Category Export Used to define and launch Kronos Attendance Tracker employee files for exporting. Used to define and launch Kronos Attendance Tracker work schedule files for exporting. Used to define and launch Kronos Attendance Tracker hours files for exporting. Used to define and launch Kronos Attendance Tracker pay category files for exporting.

KAT Employee
The Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) records all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several sources to KAT. There are four different exports from the ShopTrac system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedules Export Hours Export Pay Category Export

Employee Export This export provides basic information from the Employee record. It includes the following general items: Name information including badge and employee ID numbers. Department, Work Schedule, Work Center, etc.
Page 451 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Rate and Status. Information from the Employee user-defined fields.

This export can be run as often as needed. Running the Employee Export has no effect on any of the ShopTrac Pro data files, meaning that it does not mark any of the files with any batch number. Because KAT only supports three Labor entries, the export to DAT does not include Employee Labor Code or Job Class. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Employee ID Select

DESCRIPTION
Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers that need to be included in the export. If left blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of labor codes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all labor codes. Enter the range of work centers needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Enter the range of work schedules needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. Enter the range of departments needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all departments. Enter the range of groups needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of job classes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work classes. Include up to five status codes or leave it blank to export all records regardless of status. Displays the name of the upload destination. Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. Do not include a file extension, as the system automatically assigns the extension .TXT; the default file name is [Link]

Labor codes Select Work centers Select Work Schedules Select Departments Select Groups Select Job classes Select Employee status Employee upload for Output file name

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by pressing the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and begin the export again, by press the Restart button. Pressing Cancel will stop the export. Press Layout to preview or print the exported records.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 452 of 613

KAT Work Schedules The Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) records all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several sources to KAT. There are four different exports from the ShopTrac system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedule Export Hours Export Pay Category Export

Work Schedule Export This export provides basic information from the Work Schedule and Shift records. These are exported to separate files for KAT. KAT schedule export supports only 7- and 14 day cycles. This means that if a ShopTrac Pro Work Schedule has a Days In Cycle other than what KAT supports, users must export their Work Schedules every Days In Cycle days. Example: If Work Schedule A has a Days In Cycle of 10, users must export this Work Schedule every 10 days. On the other hand, if they are using a Days In Cycle of 7 or 14, they only need to export the Work Schedule once, unless they make modifications to their schedule files. This export can be run as often as needed. It has no effect on any data files. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Work Schedules Select Work Schedule Types Select Primary Schedule File Name

DESCRIPTION
Enter the work schedule range to include in the export. If left blank, the system generates an export of all categories. Enter the work schedule type range to include in the export. If left blank, the system generates an export of all schedule types. Enter the name of the file that contains information from the work schedule file.

Scheduled Shift File Enter the name of the file that contains information from Name the shift file.

KAT Hours
The Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) records all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several sources to KAT.
Kronos Incorporated Page 453 of 613

There are four different exports from the ShopTrac system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedule Export Hours Export Pay Category Export

Hours Export Selection Criteria This Export provides basic information from the LHours records and calculated exception information, based on the configuration of the exceptions in the Shift record. This Export utility works like the ShopTrac Pro Time Export utility. All Time records exported may be marked with a Batch number, therefore, users may use the Reprocess Batch functionality and they may select to exclude marked records when using this utility. The Batch Log record created by the export will have Batch Type "T". The output file name is defaulted to [Link]. There are three different types of records exported: Hours Record The HRS identifier identifies hours records. There may be several HRS records per Employee per day. There will be one "HRS record for each LHours record if the corresponding Labor is not an Absence record. The ABS identifier identifies absence records. The information for this record comes from LHours records if the corresponding Labor record is an Absence record. There may be more than one Absence record for Employee per day. The EXP identifier identifies exception records. There may be several exception records per Employee per day.

Absence Record

Exception Record

Example: If an Employee is late-in and early-out, there will be one record for the late-in exception and one record for the early-out exception. This export can be run as often as needed. It has no effect on any data files. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Reference Dates From.....To Employee ID Select Departments
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
Enter the range of dates for the hours records needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all hours records regardless of date. Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers needed for the export. If left blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of departments needed. If left blank, the
Page 454 of 613

Select Groups Select Work Centers Select Labor Codes Select Job Classes Select Work Schedules Select Reprocess Batches Select

system generates an export of all departments. Enter the range of groups needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of work centers needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Enter the range of labor codes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all labor codes. Enter the range of job classes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work classes. Enter the range of work schedules needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. To export hours records that have already been processed in a previous batch, assign this upload a reprocessing batch number. If the hours records have not previously been processed in a batch, skip this field.

Selection Criteria (2)

FIELD
Select Exceptions Output File Name

DESCRIPTION
Include up to fifteen exception codes or leave it blank to export all exception conditions. Select the file name for the exported file. It will be placed in the \UPLOAD directory and will have a default extension of .TXT; the default name is [Link] Required field. Check this box to update the labor batch number with the number of this Batch. Leave the box unchecked to repeat the update number. It may be desirable to upload a group of Hours records but not update their Batch Numbers so it does not appear later as already uploaded. Check this box to exclude previously sent records in this export. Previously uploaded records are marked with a batch number update. Leave the box unchecked to include all records. Check this box if only employees clocked out at the time of this upload are included. Clocked out status is not just gone for the day; clocked out in the middle of the day would be included. Because the employee is clocked-out at the time of the upload, it is assured that the Labor hours have been rounded to match the Time hours, whether the employee returns on this day or not. Leave unchecked if employees are included regardless of whether their Time record is open or not.
Page 455 of 613

Update Batch Number

Exclude Marked Records

Clocked-Out Only

Kronos Incorporated

After Shift Only

Check this box to restrict the output to only Labor records for shifts that have already ended. Shift End is defined for each employee as the end time of the shift, or the end of any authorized post-shift overtime period. Leave unchecked if selection of Labor records should not consider the employee's scheduled Shift End time when considering Labor records for export. Specify how long past Shift End Time, records will not be selected. Valid entries are 0 (zero) to 99.99. Example: An entry of 2.00 means that an upload will not consider any labor records for employees whose shift end time, including any authorized overtime, is less than two hours before the time the upload is run.

Hours

Common

FIELD/BUTTON
Batch Number

DESCRIPTION

Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from. Records Processed Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Total Records: Included in this information is the total records exported. Records Selected: Included in this information is the number of records selected and processed. Restart If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. Layout OK Start the export by clicking the OK button. Close To exit without completing the export, click the Close button For more information, click the Help button. Help Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

KAT Pay Categories

The Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) records all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several
Kronos Incorporated Page 456 of 613

sources to KAT. There are four different exports from the ShopTrac system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedule Export Hours Export Pay Category Export

Pay Category Export This export provides basic information from the pay category records. This export can be run as often as needed. It has no effect on any data files. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Pay Category Select Pay category types Select Output File Name

DESCRIPTION
Enter the pay category range to include in the export. If left blank, the system generates an export of all categories. Enter the pay category types range to include in the export. If left blank, the system generates an export of all category types. Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. Do not include a file extension, as the system automatically assigns the extension .TXT; the default file name is [Link]

NEXTRAK EXPORTS
NexTrak Attendance Management software automates most attendance programs. Whether the company policy is based on points, occurrences hours missed, or percentage of absenteeism, NexTrak has the flexibility to administer it. Even with different policies for new hires, or for employees in different locations, NexTrak can handle it. The company policies/rules are configured into NexTrak. Based on the configuration the software performs actions and documents any system requirements. Example: The software will apply policy/rules to absence incidents, notify the manager or supervisor of rule violations, and automatically generate warning letters. Automates multiple policies Automatically notifies managers and supervisors when policy has been violated Automatically generates disciplinary letters and reward letters Allows exporting selected attendance data to the most popular formats, including
Kronos Incorporated Page 457 of 613

spreadsheets, other databases, and ASCII text files NexTrak ensures that the rules are uniformly applied. Administration of attendance is more accurate and consistent throughout the enterprise. The result? When giving managers the tools to track attendance, they can reduce controllable absenteeism. NexTrak technology allows the management of employee attendance locally or centrally. True scalability means no sacrificed functionality whether running NexTrak on a single PC or administering attendance throughout the entire organization. The following options are available exports for NexTrak: Employees Schedule Hours Pay Categories

NexTrak Exports Employees

NexTrak Attendance Management software automates most attendance programs. Whether the company policy is based on points, occurrences hours missed, or percentage of absenteeism, NexTrak has the flexibility to administer it. Even with different policies for new hires, or for employees in different locations, NexTrak can handle it. The company policies/rules are configured into NexTrak. Based on the configuration the software performs actions and documents any system requirements. Example: The software will apply policy/rules to absence incidents, notify the manager or supervisor of rule violations, and automatically generate warning letters. Automates multiple policies Automatically notifies managers and supervisors when policy has been violated Automatically generates disciplinary letters and reward letters Allows exporting selected attendance data to the most popular formats, including spreadsheets, other databases, and ASCII text files NexTrak ensures that the rules are uniformly applied. Administration of attendance is more accurate and consistent throughout the enterprise. The result? When giving managers the tools to track attendance, they can reduce controllable absenteeism. NexTrak technology allows the management of employee attendance locally or centrally. True scalability means no sacrificed functionality whether running NexTrak on a single PC or administering attendance throughout the entire organization. Employee Export This export provides basic information from the Employee record. It includes the following general items: Name information including badge and employee ID numbers.
Page 458 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Department, Work Schedule, Work Center, etc. Rate and Status. Information from the Employee user-defined fields.

This export can be run as often as needed. Running the Employee Export has no effect on any of the ShopTrac Pro data files, meaning that it does not mark any of the files with any batch number. Because KAT only supports three Labor entries, the export to DAT does not include Employee Labor Code or Job Class. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Employee ID Select

DESCRIPTION
Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers that need to be included in the export. If left blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of labor codes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all labor codes. Enter the range of work centers needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Enter the range of work schedules needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. Enter the range of departments needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all departments. Enter the range of groups needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of job classes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work classes.

Labor codes Select Work centers Select Work Schedules Select Departments Select Groups Select Job classes Select

Employee status Employee upload for Output file name

Include up to five status codes or leave it blank to export all records regardless of status. Displays the name of the upload destination. Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. Do not include a file extension, as the system automatically assigns the extension .TXT; the default file name is [Link]

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported.
Kronos Incorporated Page 459 of 613

Start the export by pressing the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and begin the export again, by press the Restart button. Pressing Cancel will stop the export. Press Layout to preview or print the exported records.

NexTrak Exports Schedule

This export provides basic information from the Work Schedule and Shift records. These are exported to separate files for NexTrak. NexTrak schedule export supports only 7- and 14-day cycles. This means that if a ShopTrac Pro Work Schedule has a Days In Cycle other than what NexTrak supports, users must export their Work Schedules every Days In Cycle days. Example: If Work Schedule A has a Days In Cycle of 10, users must export this Work Schedule every 10 days. On the other hand, if they are using a Days In Cycle of 7 or 14, they only need to export the Work Schedule once, unless they make modifications to their schedule files. This export can be run as often as needed. It has no effect on any data files. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Reference Date From: .....To:

DESCRIPTION
Define dates for a range (from-to) by clicking on each date field and keying in a date (mm/dd/yyyy), or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the date box and selecting dates from the calendar. Select a range (from-to) of employee ID numbers by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the dropdown button to the right of the ID box and selecting from the list. Select a range (from-to) of work centers by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the work center box and selecting from the list. Select a range (from-to) of departments by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the department box and selecting from the list. Take note that the Department list also includes the Group information. When selecting a department from the list, the group is automatically placed into the related Group field. If entering the department manually, user will have to key in the group. Be sure to select the correct line, if the department has more than one group. If selecting a Department above, the group is automatically placed into the related Group field. If i h d ll ill h k
Page 460 of 613

Employee ID From: ..... To:

Work Center From: ..... To:

Department From: ..... To:

Group From: ..... To:

Kronos Incorporated

entering the department manually, user will have to key in the group. Labor Code From: ..... To: Select a range (from-to) of labor codes by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the labor code box and selecting from the list Select a range (from-to) of job classes by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the job class box and selecting from the list. Select a range (from-to) of work schedules by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the work schedule box and selecting from the list. Select a range (from-to) of shifts by keying the range into the field or by clicking on the drop-down button to the right of the shift box and selecting from the list. Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. Do not include a file extension, as the system automatically assigns the extension.

Job Class From: ..... To:

Work Schedule From: ..... To:

Shift From: ..... To:

Output File Name:

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

NexTrak Exports Hours

Selection Criteria This Export provides basic information from the LHours records and calculated exception information, based on the configuration of the exceptions in the Shift record. This Export utility works like the ShopTrac Pro Time Export utility. All Time records exported may be marked with a Batch number, therefore, users may use the Reprocess Batch functionality and they may select to exclude marked records when using this utility. The Batch Log record created by the export will have Batch Type "T". The output file name is defaulted to [Link]. There are three different types of records exported: Hours Record
Kronos Incorporated

The HRS identifier identifies hours records. There may b l d l d h

Page 461 of 613

be several HRS records per Employee per day. There will be one "HRS record for each LHours record if the corresponding Labor is not an Absence record. Absence Record The ABS identifier identifies absence records. The information for this record comes from LHours records if the corresponding Labor record is an Absence record. There may be more than one Absence record for Employee per day. The EXP identifier identifies exception records. There may be several exception records per Employee per day.

Exception Record

Example: If an Employee is late-in and early-out, there will be one record for the late-in exception and one record for the early-out exception. This export can be run as often as needed. It has no effect on any data files. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Reference Dates From.....To Employee ID Select

DESCRIPTION
Enter the range of dates for the hours records needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all hours records regardless of date. Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers needed for the export. If left blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of departments needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all departments. Enter the range of groups needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of work centers needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Enter the range of labor codes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all labor codes. Enter the range of job classes needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work classes. Enter the range of work schedules needed. If left blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. To export hours records that have already been processed in a previous batch, assign this upload a reprocessing batch number. If the hours records have not previously been processed in a batch, skip this field.

Departments Select Groups Select Work Centers Select Labor Codes Select Job Classes Select Work Schedules Select Reprocess Batches Select

Selection Criteria (2)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 462 of 613

FIELD
Select Exceptions Output File Name

DESCRIPTION
Include up to fifteen exception codes or leave it blank to export all exception conditions. Select the file name for the exported file. It will be placed in the \UPLOAD directory and will have a default extension of .TXT; the default name is [Link] Required field. Check this box to update the labor batch number with the number of this Batch. Leave the box unchecked to repeat the update number. It may be desirable to upload a group of Hours records but not update their Batch Numbers so it does not appear later as already uploaded. Check this box to exclude previously sent records in this export. Previously uploaded records are marked with a batch number update. Leave the box unchecked to include all records. Check this box if only employees clocked out at the time of this upload are included. Clocked out status is not just gone for the day; clocked out in the middle of the day would be included. Because the employee is clocked-out at the time of the upload, it is assured that the Labor hours have been rounded to match the Time hours, whether the employee returns on this day or not. Leave unchecked if employees are included regardless of whether their Time record is open or not. Check this box to restrict the output to only Labor records for shifts that have already ended. Shift End is defined for each employee as the end time of the shift, or the end of any authorized post-shift overtime period. Leave unchecked if selection of Labor records should not consider the employee's scheduled Shift End time when considering Labor records for export. Specify how long past Shift End Time, records will not be selected. Valid entries are 0 (zero) to 99.99. Example: An entry of 2.00 means that an upload will not consider any labor records for employees whose shift end time, including any authorized overtime, is less than two hours before the time the upload is run.

Update Batch Number

Exclude Marked Records

Clocked-Out Only

After Shift Only

Hours

Common

FIELD/ BUTTON
Batch Number
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
Included in this information is the name of the file the
Page 463 of 613

export is generated from. Records Processed Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Total Records: Included in this information is the total records exported. Records Selected: Included in this information is the number of records selected and processed. Restart If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Layout Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. OK Start the export by clicking the OK button. Close To exit without completing the export, click the Close button Help For more information, click the Help button. Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

NexTrak Exports Pay Categories

This utility is used to export pay category records. It can also be used with the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) to gather records of all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several sources to KAT. There are four different exports from the ShopTrac Pro system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedule Export Hours Export Pay Category Export

Pay Category Export This export provides basic information from the pay category records. This export can be run as often as needed. It has no effect on any data files. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Pay Category
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
Enter the pay category range to include in the export. If
Page 464 of 613

Select Pay category types (Up To 5) Absence Code Select

left blank, the system generates an export of all categories. Alphanumeric, one character, optional field. This is a user-definable field intended for queries and other miscellaneous uses. Select the appropriate absence code from the list separately or in conjunction with the Pay Category. Select from the list by selecting the box to the right of the field for From: and To:. If left blank, all codes will be included in the output file. Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. Do not include a file extension, as the system automatically assigns the extension .TXT; the default file name is [Link]

Output File Name

MISCELLANEOUS UTILITIES
The Miscellaneous sub-menu option contains programs to complete daily processing, to perform recalculation and schedule backups. The selections include: Nightly Batch Mark Records for Calculation Clear Local Temp Files Clean-Up Shared Temp Files Clock-In / Clock-Out Status

Nightly Batch Utility

This option sets the events that occur each evening after the system processes the day's transactions. These parameters tell the system, which shift files to include in batch processing, the date to use, whether to create absence records and automatically process clock-outs, how to add extra hours, and how to handle open labor records. You do not need to be present when the Nightly Batch is run, if you have used the Event Manager in DCM to set up Nightly Batch as an automatic process. Set these fields depending on your company's policies.

DEFAULTS
Process shifts ending at or before
Kronos Incorporated

DESCRIPTION
Enter the time that will be used to determine which shifts to process. Shifts starting after this time will be d h i h b hi U ili
Page 465 of 613

processed the next time the batch is run. Use military time, e.g., noon = 12:00, midnight = 24:00. On Dates from...to Enter a range of dates to include in the selection of shift records when the Nightly Batch is run. The time parameter set above will determine which day a shift will be reported on, if multiple dates are selected. Check box if you want to create absence records for the day. This tells the system to use the Absence Scheduling records and the default employee absence codes to create absence labor/event and time records for employees who were scheduled to work but did not clock in. A report with this data will be printed after the nightly run is completed, if you have checked the Print Nightly Batch Activity option below. Leave the box clear to decline this option. Check box to tell the system to process shifts set up for automatic clock-out. Log-offs and clock-outs will be processed as configured in the Shift file. Leave box clear if you do not want this function to be performed. Check box if you want to create labor/event records to fill the employees' day based on full-day codes in the Employee (Partial Day Absence) and Shift (Non-Worked Hours) files. Leave clear to decline this option. Check this option if you want a list printed, in Employee ID-number order, of all employees who clocked in, but did not clock out. This list will be printed when the nightly run is completed and can be used for error corrections. Leave the box clear if you don't need this list. Again, this does not interfere with the automatic clock-out process. Check this box if you want a summary of the activity completed during the nightly batch run. This includes a copy of the Nightly Batch screen showing the date and time, as well as the settings for each option. Also printed are any reports you requested above (Absences, Processed Clock-Outs, Missing Clock-outs). Leave the box clear if you do not want printed reports.

Create absence records

Process clockouts

Fill non-worked hours

Flag missing clockouts

Print [Link]

MARK RECORDS FOR CALCULATION

This utility scans the Time file and marks records for recalculation by the Time/Labor Recalculation utility. These are some of the features of this utility:
Kronos Incorporated Page 466 of 613

To begin the marking, enter values in the following fields:

FIELD
Range of marked records from... Range of marked records ...to

DESCRIPTION
Enter the beginning date for the time records you want to mark. If you leave this field blank, the system marks all time records, regardless of date. Enter the ending date for the time records you want to mark. If you leave this field blank, the system marks all time records, regardless of date.

The utility keeps a running total of marked records and displays the total on the screen: For more information on Recalculation, see one of the following subjects: Recalculation Overview On-Line vs. Fully-Qualified Recalculation Recalculation Triggers

Recalculation Overview
The ShopTrac Pro system has many features that automate the process of recalculating hours. There are many situations that necessitate recalculating hours, for example: Recording of a full-day absence earlier in the week, after later days have been worked The addition of Extra Hours at the beginning of the day Batch Qualifiers on Premium Zones

There are tools available that automate the process from beginning to end, greatly reducing the need for monitoring and maintenance. There are two aspects of the process, both of which have been automated: Detection Transactions now determine whether a day or days need to be recalculated, and mark them as needing recalculation. Recalculation A new utility scans the time file looking for days marked for recalculation, and recalculates them. Time/Labor Recalculation is optional and very configurable, allowing you to tailor the automatic tools and utilities to your own needs. Time/Labor Recalculation is also fully compatible with the manual recalculation utility, which is still available through the Time/Labor Editor. You will recall that all records relating to hours are related to the Time record. This includes Labor and LHours records. When a recalculation is needed, it may affect several different records over a period of several days. The way that records are marked for recalculation is that
Kronos Incorporated Page 467 of 613

the time record is marked, and the Recalculation utility recalculates all associated records. For more information see, On-Line vs. Fully-Qualified Recalculation Recalculation Triggers Time/Labor Recalculation utility

On-Line vs. Fully-Qualified Recalculation

During processing, a day may be marked as needing one of two kinds of recalculation, on-line or fully qualified. On-Line Recalculation When a day is said to need an "on-line" recalculation, the hours for the day can be recalculated at any time after the record is marked, even while the employee is still clocked in.

The situation that marked the day for recalculation determines what type of recalculation is needed. On-line recalculation is triggered by situations like the addition of Extra Hours at the beginning of the day, or changing a jobs Weighting Factor at the end of the job, after some hours have already been allocated to it. When a day needs an on-line recalculation, it is denoted with an A. This is the value of the Hours recalculation needed field in the Time record that signifies that the day needs an on-line recalculation. Fully Qualified Recalculation A fully qualified recalculation takes place after the day is over. This is necessitated by situations where the outcome of the day must be known before hours can be properly calculated.

One example of a situation that triggers a fully qualified recalculation is the use of a Batch Qualifier with a Premium Zone. Suppose a Premium Zone requires that the employee clock out for the day at a certain time in order for it to be used. The system cannot tell when the employee ended the day until it is over, so the day needs a fully qualified recalculation in order for the hours to be properly allocated. When a day needs a fully qualified recalculation, it is denoted with a B. This is the value of the Hours recalculation needed field in the Time record that signifies that the day needs a fully qualified recalculation. Days Needing Both On-Line and Fully Qualified Recalculation It is possible for a day to be marked for both an on-line and fully qualified recalculation. This is denoted with a C in the Hours recalculation needed field.

If the day is recalculated in on-line mode, the Hours recalculation needed field is reset to B, indicating that the day now only needs a fully qualified recalculation. If the day is recalculated in fully qualified mode, the Hours recalculation needed flag is cleared completely. Both the Time/Labor Recalculation utility and the Time/Labor Editor look at the type of
Kronos Incorporated Page 468 of 613

recalculation for which a day is marked and react accordingly. If the day is in progress, only days marked for on-line recalculation are processed. If the day is over, it is processed in fully qualified mode. For more information see, Recalculation Overview Recalculation Triggers Time/Labor Recalculation utility

When Transactions come in during Recalculation

It is possible that, while a recalculation is being processed, a transaction comes in for the day being recalculated. When this happens, the working copy of the data that is being recalculated becomes out of synch with the live data. If the data is to be saved at the end of the recalculation, the live data, which includes the new transaction, is overwritten with a recalculated copy of older data, which did not include the new transaction when it was copied to the working files. The Time/Labor Recalculation utility avoids this type of "collision" by setting the In Use field in the Time record in the Time/Labor Editor to A at the beginning of the recalculation, and checking that field at the end. If there is any change in the field, a collision has occurred. It is noted in the log and the data is not saved:
Recalculation Begins Recalculation Ends

Transaction comes in, updating live data In Use blanked In Use set to A

Change in In Use detected, data not saved, collision avoided

All transactions that involve hours allocations clear the In Use field, preventing the saving of any recalculation that may be in progress. The Time/Labor Editor handles transactions that come during editing sessions the same way, setting In Use to E. If a change is detected when the user saves the data the user is notified.

Recalculation Triggers
Recalculation "triggers" are the events and situations that necessitate the recalculation of a day's hours. For example, the addition of a Holiday record on a Monday would "trigger" the recalculation of Tuesday and other days worked later in the week. Below are the triggers that mark days for recalculation: Hours Allocation on previous days (any day before the employee's latest day) Clocking in with a previous day marked for recalculation
Page 469 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Use of Premium Zones with batch qualifiers Use of Premium Zones with Expansion Zones Partial Day Absence tardy period Extra Hours recorded at beginning of day Change of weighting data at multiple-job log-off Change of hours allocation data at log-off-only log-off Batch Hours Only (employee identified as) Electronic Timecard Late labor rounding at clock-out time

All these situations involve changes to data that may affect hours allocation later in the day, or on later days. The system marks the affected days for a recalculation, guaranteeing that any changes in hours allocation due to the triggering event will be taken into account. Signoff and Recalculation Unless the signoff fields in the Time record are completely blank, a day is not marked for recalculation, regardless of the trigger situation. This prevents changes to signed-off data by the Time/Labor Recalculation utility. This feature is also useful if manual changes are regularly made to data and the Time/Labor Recalculation utility must also be run regularly. Users can prevent automatic changes by signing off the data they have changed. Needs Recalculation on Reports As you can see from the previous situations, there are times when the hours allocated are in need of a recalculation. This information is stored in the Time record for easy access by the system. Since it is possible that someone may be running reports off from data that is in need of a recalculation, that situation is indicated on the reports and shown by an asterisk in the NR (needs recalculation) column of the reports. For more information see, Recalculation Overview On-Line vs. Fully-Qualified Recalculation Time/Labor Recalculation utility

Triggers-Batch Hours Only

Employees may be configured to have all of their hours data beyond Hours Allocated calculated in batch mode. This may improve processing speed in some cases, and may be useful when a customers Pay Rules are mostly batch-oriented, making the on-line calculations of little value. The Batch-Only feature is described in detail later in this section. It is mentioned here because it
Kronos Incorporated Page 470 of 613

triggers recalculation for employees so configured. On the first clock-in, the employees day is marked for a fully qualified recalculation, causing the hours to be calculated only after the day is over. See Calculating Hours in Batch-Only Mode for a complete description of that feature.

Calculating Hours in Batch-Only Mode

You can configure the ShopTrac Pro system on a per-employee basis, to turn off on-line hours calculations and use the Recalculation utility to perform all hours calculations. This is useful when on-line hours calculations are not needed, or are not usually accurate because many Batch Qualifiers are used. Employees may be configured to be Batch Only through a field in the Employee file. If Batch Hours Only is activated, the calculation of hours based on Pay Rules does not take place on-line; every day is marked for a fully qualified recalculation. Only Hours Allocated is calculated on-line for the employee. If Batch Hours Only is inactive, Hours Allocation takes place on-line. Recalculation takes place only if one of the Recalculation Triggers marks the day for recalculation. When the Batch Hours Only field is activated, these features are "turned off": On-line application of Pay Rules Generation of Hours records Premium Zone changes

In this configuration, the application of Pay Rules and the generation of LHours records is deferred to a fully qualified recalculation by the Time/Labor Recalculation utility (or the Time/Labor Editor, if recalculated manually). When a "Batch Only" employee clocks in, the day is immediately marked for a fully qualified recalculation. All other system logic is applied as usual. The Hours Allocated field in the Labor record is still calculated on-line, providing a basic view of the employees hours and supporting efficiencies and other report data. It is only the application of Pay Rules, which generate the Hours records, that does not take place.

Change of hours allocation data at log-off-only log-off

Log-Off-Only employees specify all data for a job when they log off. This includes data that affects the hours allocation for the record. Because the employee has had a default job open since the last log-off (or Clock-In) that may have had hours allocated to it, the day may need a recalculation if the data entered at the Log-Off differs from what was stored in the default job. The recalculation takes place on-line for the Day for which the transaction was processed. The system always opens a default job for the employees when they are not logged on a job. Log-off employees never log on at the beginning of their jobs, they just log off at the end. This
Kronos Incorporated Page 471 of 613

means that for the duration of the job the system shows only the default job in progress. When the employee logs off, the data in the default job is overwritten with the data the user entered at the Log-Off prompts:
Clock-in Job 1 Log off Job 1

It is possible that hours have already been allocated to the Labor record before the employee logs off. For example, if the employee does a Lunch Out/In while on the job:
Clock-in Default Job Hours Allocated Lunch Out Lunch In

The Lunch Out allocates hours to the open default job. When the employee logs off and changes data that affects hours allocation, hours that have already been allocated to the job have to be revised, as follows:
Clock-in Default Job Hours must be reallocated Lunch Out Lunch In Log off Job 1

The hours before the Lunch Out are allocated to the Labor record, using the hours allocation data filled in when the default job was created. If the employee changes that data when logging off, the hours must be reallocated. The data that triggers this recalculation are: Hours Requirement Weighting Factor Weighting Value

Changes to these values at Log-Off time may result in a recalculation. Specifically, this logic is executed when the Labor record in question is closed: If Hours Requirement is different, or Weighting Factor is different, or Weighting Value different, Hours Allocated in the Labor record is not zero,

And

Then Mark the day for on-line recalculation. The default job functionality gives users visibility at all times to employee activity, even when they are not logged on a job. Log-off-only employees may also clock out while on their jobs,
Kronos Incorporated Page 472 of 613

without having the system close the portion of the job before the clock-out and recording the time to the default job. These features combined with the automatic recalculation whenever the hours allocation data is changed, provide a full-featured and lower maintenance workflow for Log-off-only employees.

Change of weighting data at multiple-job log-off

This system supports Weighted Hours allocation, which allows an employees open Labor records to receive hours divided by a number of different factors, rather than just evenly divided hours as in previous releases. There is the ability to change Weighting data at log-off time. In a multiple-job situation, changes to this data require a recalculation if hours have already been allocated to the Labor record in question. The recalculation is triggered on-line for the day for which the transaction was processed. The data that trigger this recalculation are: Weighting Factor Weighting Value

Changes to these values at log-off time may result in a recalculation. Specifically, this logic is executed when the Labor record in question is closed: If And Weighting Factor changed, or Weighting Value changed, The Last Update Time is after the start of the Labor record,

Then Mark the day for on-line recalculation. The ability to change weighting data at log-off time allows the user to use the Quantity Completed as the weighting factor. By triggering a recalculation if the hours are affected, the system automatically handles the ramifications of changing weighting data after the job already had some hours allocated to it. Back

Clocking in with a previous day marked for recalculation

This situation can be considered an extension of Hours Allocation on previous days. If a previous day that may affect the new days hours allocation is marked for recalculation, any new day, on which the employee clocks in, will be marked. The recalculation is done on-line for the day the employee is clocking in. On the first clock-in on a new day, the system analyzes previous days to get consecutive day counts and period hours toward the various overtime limits. It searches back to the earliest of these three dates: Beginning of overtime reset period

Kronos Incorporated

Page 473 of 613

Beginning of consecutive day reset period (if there is one) Earliest consecutive day (if there is no consecutive day reset period)

As the system analyzes these days, the system also looks at each days Hours recalculation needed field of the Time record. If any of the days are marked for any recalculation, the new day is marked for an on-line recalculation.

Electronic Timecard
Transactions entered through Electronic Timecard prompt only for Hours Allocated, and flag the day for a recalculation that generates the days remaining hours. It is mentioned here because it triggers a recalculation for any day for which it is used. The recalculation is triggered if any Premium Zone uses Batch Qualifiers. It is on-line if no Batch Qualifiers are used. Note: Electronic Timecard is an add-on, optional module for ShopTrac Pro. To learn more about it, contact your sales representative.

Extra Hours recorded at beginning of day

This is another situation involving the addition of hours to a day before other hours. As in the other cases, adding Extra Hours at the beginning of the day marks the day for an on-line recalculation. The addition of Extra Hours at the beginning of the day, rather than at the end, is usually intended to influence the allocation of the remaining hours in the day.

Hours Allocation on previous days

When hours are allocated on a day, all future days may be affected, so they are all marked for recalculation. This causes an on-line recalculation for all days after the day when the hours were reallocated. An example of this situation is the addition of Holiday pay for a Monday when the employee has already worked Tuesday through Friday. Before the Holiday hours are added, the employees week looks like this: Monday Time record 08:00-16:30 Days marked The hours on Monday may have affected the hours allocation on Tuesday through Friday. When the Holiday hours are added to Monday, Tuesday through Friday are marked for recalculation: Monday
Kronos Incorporated

Tuesday 08:00-16:30

Wednesday 08:00-16:30

Thursday 08:00-16:30

Friday 08:00-16:30

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Page 474 of 613

Time record 08:00-16:30 Days marked

08:00-16:30 A

08:00-16:30 A

08:00-16:30 A

08:00-16:30 A

Another example is a supervisor clock-out for a previous day after the employee has hours for later days. Suppose an employee forgot to clock out on Wednesday, and it is now Friday afternoon: Monday Time record 08:00-16:30 Days marked On Friday afternoon the employees supervisor clocks him out for Wednesday. Thursday and Friday are marked for an on-line recalculation: Monday Time record 08:00-16:30 Days marked ClockOut DailyChg LogOn LogOff LogOffAl LogJob TeamOn TeamOff TeamChg PtlDyAbs ExtraHrs Tuesday 08:00-16:30 Wednesday 08:00-16:30 Thursday 08:00-16:30 A Friday 08:00-16:30 A Tuesday 08:00-16:30 Wednesday 08:00-16:30 Thursday 08:00-16:30 Friday 08:00-16:30

The following transactions and utilities mark all later days for on-line recalculation:

Each of these programs allocates hours, which may affect the hours on later days. The system keeps track of this situation automatically and, if configured to do so, recalculates later days as needed. Users may now pass transactions, run the Nightly Batch, etc., without being required to know the impact on later days. It is important to note that all later days are marked, not just the days in the current week, work schedule, overtime cycle or whatever. You must take this into account when configuring the Time/Labor Recalculation utility, so that the dates it recalculates match the earliest dates for
Kronos Incorporated Page 475 of 613

which you regularly make corrections.

Late labor rounding at clock-out time

The Clock-Out transaction can handle "late labor", or labor data that is between the employee's Shift End Time and the Late Out Variance. It is mentioned here because the employees day is marked for recalculation. This situation occurs when an employee logs on or off jobs within the Late-Out variance:
Clock-in Job 1 Shift End Job 2 Late-out variance

If the employee clocks out within the variance, the clock-out is rounded back to a time before the labor transactions.
Clock-in Job 1 Shift End Rounded Job 2 Late-out variance Actual Clock-out

The ShopTrac Pro system rounds all times back, including all Labor times, and marks the day for recalculation, providing a "clean" end to the employee's day in all situations.
Clock-in Job 1 Shift End Job 2 Late-out variance Rounded Actual Clock-out

This situation requires a recalculation in order to revise the hours in the Labor records that were rounded. In the example above, the hours would be less in Job A after the recalculation, and Job B would no longer have any hours at all.

Partial Day Absence Tardy Period

When the Partial Day Absence transaction is used to fill in tardy hours, those hours are inserted at the beginning of the day and may have an effect on hours later in the day. Whenever tardy hours are filled in, the system marks the day for an on-line recalculation. The situation is illustrated below.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 476 of 613

Revised Clock-in

Original Clock-in

Tardy Hours

Previously Allocated Hours

The day is flagged for a recalculation so that any previously allocated hours will be recalculated, taking into account the added tardy hours.

Use of Premium Zones with Batch Qualifiers

Batch Qualifiers can be evaluated only after an employee's day is over, so the day is immediately marked for a fully qualified recalculation. On an employee's initial clock-in for the day, any Premium Zones in the employee's Shift are analyzed for Batch Qualifiers. Specifically, this logic is carried out for each Premium Zone: If And Authorization is not required, or Authorization is required and present in Daily Assignments. Qualifying Hours in Zone is greater than zero, or Qualifying Hours in Day is greater than zero, or "Must End Day" Clock-Out range is defined.

If any Zone meets these conditions, the day is marked for a fully qualified recalculation. When the Time/Labor Recalculation utility runs after this day is over, it will fully analyze all qualifiers for the Premium Zones and allocate hours accordingly. Hours are still allocated by transactions during the day, even though the system knows the day will later be recalculated. The system uses the On-Line Assumption to decide whether to apply Premium Zones with Batch Qualifiers.

Use of Premium Zones with Expansion Zones

The use of Expansion Zone before a Premium Zone may trigger an on-line recalculation in some cases. The use of an Expansion Zone after a Premium Zone always triggers a fully qualified recalculation. Both situations are described below. An Expansion Zone before a Premium Zone is designed to extend the Premium Zone back to the employees last clock-in, if it is within the Expansion Zone. This prevents a small amount of non-Premium Zone time if the employee clocks in close to the Premium Zone. When the system executes the Zone Change that begins the Premium Zone, it checks the employees last clock-in to see if it is within any Expansion Zone. If it is, then the employees clock-in time is used as the beginning time for the Premium Zone. For example, suppose an employee clocks in within the Expansion Zone and later, after the Premium Zone has started, the employee passes a LON (logon) transaction. The LON allocates the hours from the Clock-In time to the time of the LON, executing a Zone Change at the
Kronos Incorporated Page 477 of 613

beginning of the Premium Zone. The Zone Change detects that the Clock-In is within the Expansion Zone and uses the Premium Zones Pay Rules for all of the hours since the Clock-In, as follows:
Clock-in Zone Change LON

Expansion

Premium Zone Start of Premium Zone set to Clock-in time

However, if hours have been allocated since the Clock-In, they have to be recalculated using the Premium Zones Pay Rules, since they were originally allocated without them. In this situation, the system uses the employees Last Update Time as the beginning of the Premium Zone and marks the day for an on-line recalculation, as follows:
Clock-in Job 1 Zone Change LON

Expansion

Premium Zone Start of Premium Zone set to Last Update time day marked for on-line recalculation

The system uses the Premium Zone from the earliest time possible -- the Last Update Time, but the day still needs a recalculation to take care of the hours allocated to job A. The recalculation starts the Premium Zone at the employees Clock-In time and allocates the hours for the day properly. The use of an Expansion Zone after a Premium Zone always triggers a fully qualified recalculation for the day the transaction was processed. Expansion Zones after a Premium Zone are designed to prevent small amounts of non-Premium Zone time between the end of the Premium Zone and the employees next Clock-Out. If the Clock-Out happens within the defined Expansion Zone, then all of the time up to the Clock-Out is to be allocated using the Premium Zone. However, when a Premium Zone ends, the system does not "remember" it. So, when the ClockOut processes, there is no record of which Premium Zones Expansion Zone you might be in, so it cannot check. Checking at Clock-In time for Zones that use an Expansion Zone after the Premium Zone, and flagging the day for a fully qualified recalculation handle the situation. Specifically this logic is carried out for each Premium Zone: If And Authorization is not required, or Authorization is required and present in Event Scheduling, An Expansion Zone after the Premium Zone is defined.
Page 478 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

If any Zone meets these conditions, the day is marked for a fully qualified recalculation. When the Time/Labor Recalculation utility runs after this day is over, it will handle any Expansion Zones after their respective Premium Zones.

CLEAR LOCAL TEMP FILES

Clearing Temporary Files
The ShopTrac Pro system uses temporary files to store short-term data needed by certain programs while they are being run. Normally this data is cleared when the program is ended, but if the program should end abnormally (such as a power outage), this data can remain erroneously in the temporary file. In certain situations, it is possible for temporary data that is no longer associated with an active program to cause errors or unexpected results. Therefore, we have provided utilities to manually clear all data from the temporary files should it be necessary. The temporary files on the ShopTrac Pro system are divided into two types, Shared and Local. Shared temporary files reside on the main ShopTrac Pro server and Local temporary files reside on each ShopTrac Pro client computer. On the Utilities Menu there are selections for clearing both types of temporary files. Following is information on the process of clearing data from each type using the selections on the Utilities Menu (located under the Miscellaneous selection). Clear Local Temp Files This utility clears all data from the following local temporary files (which affects only the computer on which the utility is being run): [Link] [Link] [Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]

Please make sure that all ShopTrac Pro programs except the Main Menu and the Utilities Menu are closed on the local computer prior to running this utility. As a preventative measure, it is a good practice to run this utility weekly on each ShopTrac Pro client.

Clean-Up Shared Temp Files

The ShopTrac Pro system uses temporary files to store short-term data needed by certain programs while they are being run. Normally this data is cleared when the program is ended, but
Kronos Incorporated Page 479 of 613

if the program should end abnormally (such as a power outage), this data can remain erroneously in the temporary file. In certain situations, it is possible for temporary data that is no longer associated with an active program to cause errors or unexpected results. Therefore, we have provided utilities to manually clear all data from the temporary files should it be necessary. The temporary files on the ShopTrac Pro system are divided into two types, Shared and Local. Shared temporary files reside on the main ShopTrac Pro server and Local temporary files reside on each ShopTrac Pro client computer. On the Utilities Menu there are selections for clearing both types of temporary files. Following is information on the process of clearing data from each type using the selections on the Utilities Menu (located under the Miscellaneous selection). Cleanup Shared Temp Files This utility clears all data from the two shared temporary files, which are: tblEMPLIST This file stores information used by the Time Labor Editor program and keeps track of which employees and records are being used by each Time Labor Editor session. tblRETRIES This file stores information used by the Automatic Recalculation Utility. It is extremely important that ALL users be completely out of Time Labor Editor and that the Automatic Recalculation utility is not being run either from the menu or from Event Manager when Cleanup Shared Temp Files is selected.

Note:

CLOCK-IN/CLOCK-OUT STATUS
This is a program that can be used to check the status of any employee for any given day. It shows actual, adjusted clock-in, and clock-out times for a single employee for a selected day. To search the status of an employee: Step 1. Step 2. Step 3. Enter the employee number or select from the employee list by pressing the drop-down button. Enter the desired date or select from the system calendar by pressing the drop-down button. After the information is selected, press Tab and the system will search for a record of that employee for the requested date.

If the system finds a record, it is displayed and pressing Print can print this single record. If the system does not find a record, a message "Time Record not Found for employee (number) on (date)" is displayed.

PURGE UTILITY
Kronos Incorporated Page 480 of 613

File maintenance frequency is a company policy decision, determined by the length of time you want to have information available for review, personal preference, and disk space. Audit Data Batch Log Transaction Log Clear Transaction Log Daily Assignments Labor Event Orphans Labor Events Machine Utilization Time Records Transaction Log Work Orders

Use the following schedule for purging and packing files. It can serve as a guideline to establish procedures for your own facility.

FILE
Barcode Log Labor/Events file Machine time records Time file Work Order file Daily Assignments file Audit Data files Batch Log

WEEKLY
X

MONTHLY
X X X

YEARLY

AS NEEDED

X X X X

The File Purge feature deletes file records determined by date range. Purge files periodically to eliminate unwanted or old data that takes up computer space and slows processing time. To purge files, data collection cannot be in process. If you are running the system on a network, you must have full network supervisor rights, and all other system users must be logged off the system. Do not allow system users back on the system until the purge has finished processing.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 481 of 613

Audit Data
The Audit Trail Purge deletes records from all Audit Trail files. The user specifies the dates through which audit records are to be deleted, or the purge date defaults to the current date less the number of days set in the audit trail configuration of the time and labor files. If no value is entered in the configuration, the system provides no default values and the records are deleted from the date entered by the user. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

You can use this option to purge both Time and Labor audit data, or only one, if desired. Enter a date according to the explanation below of the options. Purge Time Audit Records Dated: From...To Enter a date prior to the current date for which the records are to be deleted. This deletes records from the two Audit files. If no default value is set in the Configuration files, the system deletes the records on/before the date entered. If a value is set in the Configuration file, the system defaults from the current date less the number of days set. For example, if todays date is July 1 and the value in the Configuration file is 120, the system deletes the records on and before March 4, which is 120 days prior to the current date. Purge Labor Audit Records Dated: From...To Enter a date prior to the current date for which the records are to be deleted. This deletes records from the two Audit files. If no value is set in the Configuration files, the system deletes the records on/before the date entered. If a default value is set in the Configuration file, the system defaults from the current date less the number of days set. For example, todays date is July 1 and the value in the Configuration file is 120. The system deletes the records on and before March 4, which is 120 days prior to the current date. If the default value is set to Y in the Configuration file, the system replaces the date entered by the user with the calculated default date in the Labor audit purge record cycle field. This date can be modified by the user if needed, as it is a changeable default. Start the record purge by clicking the OK button. The lower portion of the screen displays the status of the files during and after the purge process. Each file is highlighted as the purge is taking place and displays the number of records deleted. The processing may be interrupted at any point by clicking the Cancel button. Any records not yet deleted remain in their respective files. Records already deleted cannot be retrieved. To exit without completing the process, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

Batch Log
Kronos Incorporated Page 482 of 613

Each time you run batch processing, the system records the batch numbers in the Batch Log file. You need to purge this file annually. Before running the purge, run a Batch Log report so that you can see the relationship between the Batch Numbers and the date. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

Enter the desired purge batch number range in the Purge Batch Numbers field and click the OK button. While the system is running, it keeps a running total of records deleted in the lower right corner of the screen.

Clear Transaction Log

The Transaction Log collects all the transactions performed at data devices throughout the facility. Since this file grows rapidly, purge it weekly, or even daily, depending on the size of the facility and the available disk storage. Some of the transactions may be created without dates. The Purge Transaction Log utility will only select records within a date range, and those without a date will never be selected. This Clear Transaction Log utility will purge all records with a blank date field. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

The program will delete all records with no date in the date field by pressing the OK button. While the system is running, it keeps a running total of records deleted in the lower right corner of the screen.

Daily Assignments
The Daily Assignments file collects all the assigned events created in the system. Purge this file as needed. Once you run the Nightly Batch for a given date, the Daily Assignments file is no longer needed because all the events scheduled have occurred or have been processed by Nightly Batch. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING!
Kronos Incorporated Page 483 of 613

Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

Enter the desired purge batch number range in the Purge Batch Numbers field and click the OK button. While the system is running, it keeps a running total of records deleted in the lower right corner of the screen.

Labor Event Orphans

In the course of normal operations, it is possible to delete Work Orders from the system and leave records without a reference to the Work Order. The following files could contain such records: Labor Labor Text (requires Electronic Timecard module) Operations Operation Work Instructions LHours

Use the Purge Labor/Events Orphans utility to search the listed files for references to work orders that no longer exist in the system. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

As a result of the purge operation, a file will be created that contains a listing of the deleted records. Enter the desired purge filename in the Purge Labor/Event Output File field and click the OK button. While the system is processing, it keeps a running total of records deleted for each of the active file categories, at the bottom of the screen.

Labor/Events
The Labor/Events file contains the event records created in the ShopTrac Pro system. This purge feature deletes all Labor/Events records. Select to purge for all records by date range, all records for a specific work order, or for Absence or Downtime type or Indirect work order records by date range. Purge this file on a monthly basis, depending on how much data you want to keep in the system. Ask yourself, what is the earliest date for which I would want to run a report? It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.
Kronos Incorporated Page 484 of 613

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

Select the desired records to purge from the drop-down list. Depending on your selection, additional information will be requested. Once completed, click the OK button.

PURGE

SELECTION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUESTED

Enter the range of dates that will be used to purge all records within the range.

Purge by all records

Purge by downtime, Enter the range of dates that will be used to purge all etc. records labor records that have a Type field set to A (Absence) or D (Downtime) and labor records that contain an indirect work order (those beginning with the letter "I"). Purge by work order number Specify the work order to purge labor records from. This may eliminate a part of an employee's daily labor records if the employee has a labor record for this work order.

While the system is running, it keeps a running total of records deleted in the lower right corner of the screen.

Machine Utilization
It is suggested that you purge the machine time records at the same time you purge the Labor/Events file. However, company policy will dictate how long you need to keep your data. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

Select the desired records to purge by completing the fields below. Once completed, click the OK button.

PURGE

SELECTION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUESTED

Enter the range of dates that will be used to purge machine time records within the range. Check this box to allow open machine records to be included in the purge of records created before or on the purge date. Leave clear if open records will not be included in the purge.

Purge machine utilization dated Purge open records

While the system is running, it keeps a running total of records deleted in the lower right corner of the screen.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 485 of 613

Time Records
The Time file collects all the time records created in the system. Purge this file monthly, depending on how much data you want to keep in the ShopTrac Pro system. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

The Archive: Off/On field reflects the configuration default set in the Event Scheduling file. Enter the desired purge Time records date range and click the OK button. If the From date field is left blank, all records dated prior or equal to the To date field entry will be included in the purge. While the system is running, it keeps a running total of records deleted in the lower right corner of the screen.

Transaction Log
The Transaction Log collects all the transactions performed at data devices throughout the facility. Since this file grows rapidly, purge it weekly, or even daily, depending on the size of the facility and the hard disk. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

Enter the desired purge date range in the Purge Transaction Log Dated field and press the OK button. While the system is running, it keeps a running total of records deleted in the lower right corner of the screen.

Work Order
The Work Order file collects all the work order records created in the ShopTrac Pro system. Purge this file on a monthly basis, depending on how much data you want to keep in the system. It is worth repeating the warning message that is displayed in RED on all the purge screens including this one.

WARNING! Deleted records CANNOT be RECOVERED!

Kronos Incorporated Page 486 of 613

Select the desired records to purge from the drop-down list. Depending on your selection, additional information will be requested. Once completed, click the OK button.

PURGE

SELECTION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REQUESTED

Enter the range of dates that will be used to purge all records within the range. Check this box to include canceled jobs (those with an 'X' Status) in the purge of records during the date range. Leave clear if canceled jobs will not be included in the purge.

Purge work order data dated Purge all canceled jobs

While the system is running, it keeps a running total of records deleted in the lower right corner of the screen.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 487 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Page 488 of 613

CHAPTER 9 USING MACHINE TIME EDITOR AND TRANSACTION ENTRY

MACHINE TIME EDITOR

The Machine Utilization option stores the collected machine data in the Machine Time file. Once machines are set up, and on a job, the elapsed time, work order, quantity data, etc. is stored in a machine time record. Machine Start and Machine Stop transactions create these machine time records. Entering the data though the Machine Time Editor can also create machine Time records. The opening screen in the editor displays a field for selecting a machine and a listing of all the time records for any selected machine. Those fields are as follows:

FIELD
Machine name

DESCRIPTION
Use the drop-down list to select the machine that will be edited. Only machines that are already set up will be listed. This is the date when the machine time record was started. This is the time on that date when the machine time record was started. This is the system-generated identifying number for the machine time record. This is the date when the machine time record ended. This is the time on that date when the machine time record ended. This is the work order number that the machine was assigned to for this time record. This is the operation and function of that work order number that the machine was assigned to for this record. This is the work center the machine was assigned to for this time record. This is the machine time type assigned to the machine for this time record.

Start Date Start Time ID Number Stop Date Stop Time Work Order number Operation /Function Work Center Machine time type

Creating or editing a Machine Time record When a machine is selected, any existing time record displayed on the record list can be edited or deleted. New time records can also be created.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 489 of 613

To create a new record, click the New button at the bottom of the record list. Complete the fields as described below and click Save. To edit an existing record, highlight the record to change and click the Edit button. Enter your changes, making sure to click Save before exiting. To copy and existing record to use as a template for another record, highlight the record to copy and click the Copy button. Enter new dates and times and any other changes to the new record, and click Save before exiting. To delete an existing record, highlight the record and click the Delete button. Confirm the deletion when the prompt is displayed. The record will be deleted.

Complete the following fields to create or edit a machine time record:

FIELD
Machine name Actual: Start Date Actual: Start Time Actual: Stop Date Actual: Stop Time Actual: Elapsed time ID Number Batch number Transaction code Labor count

DESCRIPTION
The machine selected on the opening screen. To view the machine setup information, click the View button. This is the actual date when the machine time record was started. This date cannot be changed. This is the actual time on that date when the machine time record was started. This time cannot be changed. This is the end date originally recorded for the machine time record. This date can be altered. This is the end time originally recorded for the machine time record. This time can be altered. This is the difference between the Start time and Stop time entries. If the Stop Time is altered, this data will change to reflect the new elapsed time. This is the system-generated identifying number for the machine time record. It cannot be changed. A number assigned by the system when time records are processed. This field cannot be changed. The specific transaction that generated this record. It can be changed. A four-digit field (no decimals) that reflects the number of employees logged onto this machine and job. It can be changed. This field is used to identify the status of the machine. It can be changed. Options are: Blank - Machine is available to be run. H - Machine is on a Hold status S - Machine is on a Suspended status

Time status

Kronos Incorporated

Page 490 of 613

Quantity completed

The quantity completed when the employee stopped this machine. When multiple employees are logged onto this machine, the quantities completed are added to the existing quantities when the others logged off. The quantity scrapped when employee stopped this machine. When multiple employees are logged onto this machine, the quantities scrapped are added to the existing quantities when the others logged off. This is the machine time type assigned to the machine for this time record. It can be changed. This is the work center the machine was assigned to for this time record. It can be changed. The part number contained in the work order file or defaulted to the time file. This is the work order number that the machine was assigned to for this time record. This is the operation and function of that work order number that the machine was assigned to for this record. This is the completion code the machine was assigned for this time record. It can be changed. The last scrap code entered when the machine was stopped. The last scrap work center entered when the machine was stopped.

Quantity scrapped

Machine time type Work Center Part number Work Order number Operation /Function Completion code Scrap code Scrap work center

Kronos Incorporated

Page 491 of 613

TRANSACTION ENTRY
The Transaction Entry program allows any PC that uses ShopTrac Pro to accept transactions just like a device primary purpose for this program is to provide a convenient way to perform the same transaction for several individuals at one time, instead of performing individual transactions at the data collection devices. The user, normally a supervisor, can select a transaction, specify the affected employees, complete the prompts, and then process that transaction in one operation. The Transaction Entry program requires that a device be defined in the Device file in the Data Collection Manager (DCM). Function keys can be assigned to the device you set up, just as for other devices. The device should be marked as "Inactive" in the Device record. It is possible to define more devices to use with Transaction Entry. The Transaction Entry utility can be used with any transaction that prompts for the employee ID. These are typically supervisor transactions. Transactions will include all those that are standard in the ShopTrac Pro system and any that have been created. The system will request additional information depending on the prompts that have been defined for each transaction. Enter the appropriate information on the Selection screen fields below:

FIELD
Employee ID

DESCRIPTION
Enter your employee ID number. Must be valid or entry is denied. When a valid ID is entered, the employee's name appears in the box to the right of the ID field. Enter your PIN number. If invalid, an error message box will appear and you must reenter the correct number. Enter the desired transaction code you wish to perform by either entering the three-letter code or clicking the pop-up list button and making a selection from the valid codes. Check this box if you want the system to check the transaction validity prior to actual processing. If invalid, error messages will be displayed. This permits you to correct errors before the transaction is processed. Leave clear if you don't want the transaction to be preprocessed. Click on the desired function key that has been defined for specific transactions. Status messages will appear here after the transaction has been processed. Transaction Complete-Thank You indicates that the transaction processed successfully. If there are errors, the message will be xx Errors have
Page 492 of 613

Pin Number TRX (Transaction) Code

Preprocess transaction

F1-F12 Transaction Status

Kronos Incorporated

occurred during processing-Press any key to continue. Errors can be viewed on the employee list. Depending on the transaction code selected, additional information will be requested by the system. Example one: To process a Daily Change (DCH) transaction, the system will request information for the following fields:

PROMPT
Departments Groups Work centers Labor code Job class Rates Rate Classes

DESCRIPTION
A range of department numbers to include. If left blank, the system reports for all departments. A range of groups to include. If left blank, the system reports for all groups. A range of work centers to include. If left blank, the system reports for all work centers. A range of labor codes to include. If left blank, the system reports for all labor codes. A range of job classes to include. If left blank, the system reports for all job classes. A range of pay rates to include. If left blank, the system reports for all rates. A range of rate classes to include. If left blank, the system reports for all classes.

When the information is complete, click Process to post the transaction. Example two: To process a Schedule Absence Day (ABS) transaction, the system will request information for the following fields: Employee ID (Employee List) From Date To Date Absence Code Select from the employee list for the transaction. Select one or more than one employee from the list. This is a mandatory field and therefore, it cannot be left blank. A mandatory field; enter the date to be charged with the absence. This field is only necessary if the absence will cover more than one day. Select the appropriate absence code from the list.

Once the date(s) and absence code is entered, click [Employee Selection] and complete the appropriate fields below to complete the selection: ID Select a specific or a range of employee IDs from the employee list. If left blank, all employees who meet
Page 493 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

other criteria will be selected. Departments Groups Work centers Labor code Job class Work schedules Teams A range of department numbers to include. If left blank, the system reports for all departments. A range of groups to include. If left blank, the system reports for all groups. A range of work centers to include. If left blank, the system reports for all work centers. A range of labor codes to include. If left blank, the system reports for all labor codes. A range of job classes to include. If left blank, the system reports for all job classes. A range of work schedules to include. If left blank, the system reports for all work schedules. A range of teams to include. If left blank, the system reports for all teams.

When the fields above have been completed click OK and a list of selected employees will be displayed. Select a specific employee by clicking on the list line or click Select all to select all the displayed employees. If the list is long and the desired employee(s) is at the bottom, click Invert selections to reverse the list for easier viewing. After making your selection, click OK to process the transaction.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 494 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Page 495 of 613

CHAPTER 10 USING SHOPTRAC PRO ADD-ON PROGRAMS

TEAM BUILDER -- ADD-ON
Once Teams have been set up in Labor/WIP>Teams in the Setup menu option, individual employees can be assigned to each team. There are three methods for assigning employees to a team collectively or individually. Assign a default team to each employee in the Employee file. Assign default membership only to those employees who will be a team member most of the time. Default team members can be individually assigned to a team, using the Team Builder. Employees can be collectively added from the same screen (see Employee section below). Any employee can join any team by performing a 'join team' transaction when he or she clocks in or logs onto a job. Team members can also individually leave a team or join another team at the device.

When supervisors access the Team Builder option from the main menu, they can select the team they wish to edit. If their security access is to only one team, that team name appears in the Team field. It is greyed since the supervisor cannot change it. To build a team, follow these steps: Once the team, schedule and shift are selected, press [Add Default List] to display all employees who are assigned to this team. To add an employee, press [Add Employee] and select an additional team member. From the list displayed, check the team members that will be assigned to the team. To select all the displayed employees, press [Select All]. To start over, press [Unselect All]. Although employees may be assigned to a team as a default member, they do not necessarily have to be selected. If an employee, who is not clocked in, is selected, an error message will be displayed. This will not occur if the Shift has been set up with an Auto Clock-in setting. Complete the fields described below:

FIELD
Team Work schedule

DESCRIPTION
The selected team is displayed. The default work schedule assigned to this team is displayed. It can be changed by selecting another schedule from the drop-down list. The default shift for the work schedule selected above is displayed. It can be changed by selecting another shift from the drop-down list.

Shift

Kronos Incorporated

Page 496 of 613

Clock-In Date

The current date. This only affects employees who will be clocked in as a result of this team building transaction using the auto clock-in feature. The default clock-in time for the selected shift, plus any pre-shift overtime authorized for the employee. This only affects employees who will be clocked in as a result of this team building transaction using the auto clock-in feature. This field can be changed to reflect the team's clock-in time. The number of employees selected for team assignment. This will be updated as employees are added to the list.

Clock-In Time

Selected Employees Section

FIELD
Select Emp ID Employee name

DESCRIPTION
Check this box to add a team member, unselect to clear the employee. Select an employee from the drop-down list or enter the employee number. The employee's name is displayed after the ID number is selected. Use this field to determine if the correct employee is selected. The employee's assigned department. The employee's assigned group. The employee's default team assignment. If the employee is currently clocked in, a Y will be displayed in this field. If the employee is currently assigned to a team, the team name will be displayed. If the field is blank, the employee is not assigned to a team.

Dept Group Default team In Current team

After all team members have been selected, click [Process] to send the information to the transaction file for processing. Or press [Exit] to leave the Team Builder screen without processing the team information. Team Building may be used at any time during the employee's shift to assign members to a team. If the employee is currently assigned to another team, that employee will be logged off all jobs currently on, and his or her current team will be recorded on the new team.

TIME-BASED VS. HOURS-BASED

The Electronic Timecard option creates labor records for each job entered by the user, and a time record is generated for the day. The Work Order and Operation are marked with a start date, if
Kronos Incorporated Page 497 of 613

this is the first work performed on them. The Transaction Option lets employees enter their daily Labor data by telling the system how many hours they spent on which jobs. The Electronic Timecard option is hours-based entry that differs from the Log-on/Log-off pattern of recording labor with the data collection device.

ELECTRONIC TIMECARD -- ADD-ON

The Electronic Timecard option supports hours-based entries on a computer terminal rather than time-based transactions on a device. Users of the Electronic Timecard method specify the jobs they were on and the number of hours worked. Individuals who would use this method of time accounting are not subject to the normal clock-in and clock-out restrictions or enforcements. The classification of these workers is typically at a professional or engineering level. Their time is not necessarily entered on a daily basis, but may be entered only once each pay period. This option creates labor records on hours based rather than time-based entries. Time-based entries are made at the device when clock-in or clock-out transactions are made. For more information, see Time-Based vs. Hours-Based data. When implementing this Electronic Timecard, keep the following in mind: To use this option, users must have access to computer terminals, properly configured and easily accessible. Which personnel will be using this option? When will the entries be made? What level of security is necessary to protect access?

Access to this option can be limited in the Security program. The security should be set to ensure that only the supervisor and/or the employee could have access to each employee's labor record. Complete the following information to enter a timecard record:

FIELD
Date

DESCRIPTION
The date for which you are entering data. The default is the current date, but can be changed by clicking on the pop-up window button to the right of the date box. A calendar is displayed from which a date can be selected. The employee's identification number used to enter the option screen. The name of the employee that matches the ID is displayed to the right of the ID field. The employee's department as set in the employee record. The employee's group as set in the employee record. The employee's work schedule as set in the employee d
Page 498 of 613

Employee ID

Department Group Work Schedule

Kronos Incorporated

record. Total Hours The hours field is maintained by the system and cannot be edited from this screen. They are totals for the Labor records for the day according to how the employee hours were set up.

Labor Information Click the New or Edit button to display the following: At the top of the screen are Employee ID, Date and Daily Total hours information from the previous screen. Labor information details are included on the Time, Assignments, Work Instructions and Labor Text tabs. There is a Opn History button at the bottom of this screen which, when clicked, displays any Instructions which may have been added to this Operation in the past along with the employee name, start date and time and cumulative hours. This is separate from the Labor Text tab, which can be used to enter a current comment. Complete the necessary information as follows: Time

FIELD
Date/Time Work Order Number Operation Function Hours Completion code Quantities completed

DESCRIPTION
The date and time of the record. The Work Order number used for this labor record. Work orders may be either Direct or Indirect. The operation for this labor record. The function for this operation. The accumulated total labor hours for this operation. The code assigned to this operation. To learn more about these codes, see Completion Codes. This is the cumulative total as found in the Operation record. The format of this field depends on the number of decimal places allowed.

Quantities scrapped This is the cumulative total of scrapped units, as found in the operation record. The format of this field depends on the number of decimal places allowed. Scrap code Scrap work center Assignments Department The department responsible for this work order. This is the scrap code assigned to this work order. These codes are set up in the Code Tables. The work center assigned to receive the scrap materials.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 499 of 613

Group Work Center Machine Labor Code Project Misc fields 1-4 Work Instructions

The group responsible for this work order. The work center assigned to this work order. The machine assigned to this operation/function. The labor code assigned to this operation/machine. The project that contains this work order. Fields that can be set up to contain any information useful to the further define this labor record.

This screen displays any detailed work instructions that may have been entered in the work order for each operation. Labor Text This screen can be used to enter any new information related to the selected operation. This information will be added to the work order record.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 500 of 613

Terminal Emulator -- ADD-ON

The Terminal Emulator program enables you to set up a PC to be used like another device. It can perform all the functions of a device and can be configured the same as other devices or have its own configuration. The emulator PC must be set up in ShopTrac Pro in the same way as a device. Once set up, the screen is very similar to that of the Transaction Entry program.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 501 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Page 502 of 613

APPENDIX A ACCESS PROFILES AND REPORT PARAMETERS

SECURITY ACCESS PROFILE PARAMETERS
The parameters included here can be used to more precisely define ShopTrac Pro security access operations. Select the desired menu item below to view a list of parameters for each program segment. These parameters are used to create profiles in the Access Profiles option on the Security menu. Once created, these profiles can be used to specify access criteria for groups or individual employees. Many of the reports have parameters that could be used to eliminate the retyping of values each time the report is run. For more information, see Automatic Report Processing. If an option is not listed, the only available parameter is VIEWONLY, which permits the user to view the screens, but not make changes. Many reports and utilities allow the use of variables for different dates in the system. For more information on these variables, see Date Range Variables. NOTE: Group Selection Criteria allow users to select individual items/numbers, several separated items/numbers or a range of items/numbers (Department #s, Employee ID #s, Work Order #s, Part #s, etc.) depending on the individual requirements. When selecting these items from the Report window use the Ctrl Key and the mouse for making multiple selections. Making a selection from the parameter window, each item must be separated by a comma (,) and ranges are separated by double hyphens (--) and no spaces. NOTE: Parameters that require a Yes or No value currently require a 1 (Yes) or 0 (No) for a response when setting up a report parameter. Parameters are categorized as follows: Time/Labor Editor Reports Employees Setup Utilities Transaction Entry Transaction Processing Automatic Recalculation Electronic Timecard

Kronos Incorporated

Page 503 of 613

TIME/LABOR EDITOR PARAMETERS

The following is a listing of program function parameters and a short description, used in the Access Profiles option on the Security menu. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SEL FROMDEPARTMENT SEL TODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE SELFROMTEAMNAME SELTOTEAMNAME SELEXCEPTIONTYPES

xxx xxxxx

xxxxx xxx xxxxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 504 of 613

Selection Criteria SELUNSIGNEDONLY and System defaults View options AUTOEMPLIST

x (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (y/n) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (b/l) (b=employee, l=employee list) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (b/d/l) (b=beginning of edit range, d=displayed reference date, l=latest reference date) x (d/l) (d=displayed reference date, l=latest reference date) [Link] (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/n/u) (a=automatic print, b=auto print errors only, n=no auto print, u=ask user)

View options

INITDISPLAY

View options Quantity synching Quantity synching Hours recalculation

ONSAVEEMPLIST QUANTITYSYNCHING ADJUSTWEIGHINGDATA DEFAULTFROMDATE

Hours recalculation

DEFAULTTODATE

Hours recalculation Hours recalculation Hours recalculation Hours recalculation Hours recalculation Hours recalculation Hours recalculation

FULLQUALHRS ONMANUALASK LATESTDAY PREVIOUSDAY ALLOWMIDDAY AUTOPROCESSMARKED PRINTOPTION

Kronos Incorporated

Page 505 of 613

Error checking

GAP

x (a/b/c) (a=fill gap with default job, b=move labor stop forward, c=move labor start backward) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b) (a=move clock in back, b=move pre=clock in forward)

Error checking Error checking Error checking Error checking

GAPMARK ACTIVEBEFOREFIRSTIN

ACTIVE (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or BEFOREFIRSTINMARKED a Yes value.) MID DAYOUTOPENLABOR x (a/b/c) (a=split labor record in two, b=move labor start time forward, c=move labor stop time backward) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/c) (a=split labor record in two, b=move labor start time forward, c=move labor stop time backward)

Error checking Error checking

MIDDAYOUTOPEN LABORMARKED MIDDAYOUTONDT

Error checking Error checking

MIDDAYOUTONDTMARK (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) DTSTARTEDOPENLABOR x (a/b/c) (a=split labor record in two, b=move labor start time forward, c=move labor stop time backward) DTSTARTED OPENLABORMARK ACTIVEONDT (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b) (a=move labor start time forward, b=move period stop time backward) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.))

Error checking Error checking

Error checking Error checking

ACTIVEONDTMARK

OUTFORDAYOPENLABOR x (a) (a=close labor record at out time)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 506 of 613

Error checking Error checking Error checking Error checking

OUTFOR DAYOPENLABORMARK ACTIVEAFTERLASTOUT ACTIVEAFTER LASTOUTMARK MISSINGCLOCKOUT

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b) (a=move clock out forward, b=move post clock out back) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b) (a=clock out at last activity, b=clock out at shift end) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b) (a=close at last activity, b=close at shift end) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/n/u) (a=automatic print, n=no automatic print, u=ask user) x (a/n/y) (a=auto, prompt for access to fix, n=don't sign off on save, y=auto, don't stop on errors) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Error checking Error checking

MISSING CLOCKOUTMARK DAYLEFTOPEN

Error checking Work in progress adjustments Work in progress adjustments Work in progress adjustments Work in progress adjustments Work in progress adjustments Sign off options

DAYLEFTOPENMARK WIP INCLUDEQUANTITIES WIPAUTOMARK WIPAUTOPROCESS WIPAUTORETURN WIPPRINTOPTION AUTOSIGNONSAVE

Sign off options

EDITSIGNEDOFF

Kronos Incorporated

Page 507 of 613

Sign off options

SIGNOFFOPTION

x (a/b) (a=sign off highlighted day, b=sign off all days in range) x (a/b) (a=sign off all non-error days, b=don't sign off any days) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t/x) (b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team, x=exception tab) xxxx (o/r/e/w) (o=options, r=recalculation, e=error checking, w=work in process) x (e/s) (e=all employees, s=supervisors only) xxx (t/l/h) (t=time, l=labor, h=hours)

Sign off options

ALLDAYSOPTION

System defaults (If used with signoff, a value of B means employees can only sign off their own record.)

EMPIDFILL

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

Security (restricts RESSCR access to the selection/configurati on screens) System defaults (Specify who can view signoff config screen) System defaults (View-only privileges; no editing) SIGNOFF

NOEDIT

Kronos Incorporated

Page 508 of 613

System defaults System defaults System defaults Automatic processing

SHOWDAYCLR PROMPTLABORTEXT ONSAVERECALC AUTO

xxx (62,30,63) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/n/u)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 509 of 613

REPORT TABLE LISTING

Audit Trail Labor Audit by ID Labor Audit by Date Labor Audit Whole Record Time Audit by ID Time Audit by Date Time Audit Whole Record Barcodes Departments Employee Badge Labels Employee ID Labels Job Class Labor Code Labor Code Labels Machine Rate Class Reason Codes Transactions Travelers Work Center Work Order Work Order Labels Daily Assignment Assignment Schedule Chart Assignment Schedule Summary Personnel Archive Chart Exceptions Daily Exceptions ADM900 PRS090 PRS092 PRS080 DPT020 EMP033 EMP031 JCL020 LBRC020 LBRC030 MAC020 RCL020 COD020 TRX020 TRV015 WKC020 TRV020 TRV030 AUD301 AUD300 AUD305 AUD311 AUD310 AUD315

Kronos Incorporated

Page 510 of 613

Sign-Off Exceptions Labor Events Employee Activity Labor Hours Summary Period Timecard Rate Detail by ID & Date Rate Detail by ID & Work Order Team Status Work Order Detail Lists Access Profile Listing Customer Device Listing Employees Export Format Listing Import Format Listing Pay Rule Profiles Prompts Shifts Detail Transactions Transaction Programs User Profile Listing Work Schedules Detail Logs Transaction Log Batch Log by Date Run Machine Utilization History by Work Center In Progress by Work Center Usage by Machine

TAA560 LAB420 LAB475 LAB451 LAB423 LAB427 LAB440 LAB402 ACCESSPR CUSTOLS1 TTX917 EMPLOLS1 EXFMTLS2 IMPFMLS1 PRPROLS1 PROMPLST SHIFTLS2 TRANSLST TTX920 USERPR WRKSCLS BCL015 BCH070 MAC211 MAC213 MAC218

Kronos Incorporated

Page 511 of 613

Quality Control By Employee ID By Scrap Code By Scrap Code Summary By Work Center By Work Order By Work Order Summary Time and Attendance Absentee Approaching Overtime Clock In Detail Pay Category Amounts Summary Weekly Schedule Accruals Detail Work In Progress WIP by Work Center WIP Hours & Efficiencies WIP Movement WIP Summary W/O Top Assembly WIP105 WIP111 WIP112 WIP103 WIP199 TAA510 TAA519 TAA500 TAA132 TAA133 ACR001 QC353 QC351 QC381 QC352 QC354 QC384

Kronos Incorporated

Page 512 of 613

REPORT PARAMETERS
Audit Trail
Labor Audit by ID Labor Audit by Date Labor Audit Whole Record Time Audit by ID Time Audit by Date Time Audit Whole Record AUD301 AUD300 AUD305 AUD311 AUD310 AUD315

Labor Audit By Date Parameter (AUD300) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection criteria

KEY
SELAUDITDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx

Selection criteria

SELLARORREFDATE

Selection criteria

SELREASONCODE

Kronos Incorporated

Page 513 of 613

Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Format Format Processing

SELAUDIREMPID SELLABOREMPID SELADDEDEVENT SELUPDATEDEVENT SELDELETEDEVENT SELPAGEBREAK ONSUDITDATE AUTO

xxxxx xxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Labor Audit By ID Parameter (AUD301) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection criteria

KEY
SELAUDITDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters.

Selection criteria

SELLARORREFDATE

Kronos Incorporated

Page 514 of 613

Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Format Format Processing

SELAUDITEMPID SELLABOREMPID SELREASONCODE SELADDEDEVENT SELUPDATEDEVENT SELDELETEDEVENT SELPAGEBREAKONID AUTO

xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Labor Audit Whole Record Parameter (AUD305) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection criteria

KEY
SELAUDITDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables

Selection criteria

SELLARORREFDATE

Kronos Incorporated

Page 515 of 613

Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Format Format Processing

SELAUDITEMPID SELLABOREMPID SELREASONCODE SELADTLBRIDNUMBER SELUPDATEDEVENT SELDELETEDEVENT SELPAGEBREAKONID AUTO

Parameters. xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Time Audit By Date Parameter (AUD310) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection criteria

KEY
SELAUDITDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables

Selection criteria

SELTIMEREFDATE

Kronos Incorporated

Page 516 of 613

Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Format Format Processing

SELAUDITEMPID SELTIMEEMPID SELREASONCODE SELADDEDEVENT SELUPDATEDEVENT SELDELETEDEVENT SELPAGEBREAKON AUDITDATE AUTO

Parameters. xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Time Audit By ID Parameter (AUD311) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection criteria

KEY
SELAUDITDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are

Selection criteria

SELTIMEREFDATE

Kronos Incorporated

Page 517 of 613

Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Format Format Processing

SELAUDITEMPID SELTIMEEMPID SELREASONCODE SELADDEDEVENT SELUPDATEDEVENT SELDELETEDEVENT SELPAGEBREAKONID AUTO

located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Time Audit Whole Record Parameter (AUD315) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection criteria

KEY
SELAUDITDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date

Selection criteria

SELTIMEREFDATE

Kronos Incorporated

Page 518 of 613

Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Format Format Processing

SELAUDITEMPID SELTIMEEMPID SELREASONCODE SELADDEDEVENT SELUPDATEDEVENT SELDELETEDEVENT SELPAGEBREAKONID AUTO

Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 519 of 613

Barcodes
Departments Employee Badge Labels Employee ID Labels Job Class Labor Code Labor Code Labels Machine Rate Class Reason Codes Transactions Travelers Work Center Work Order Work Order Labels Department Parameter (DPT020) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. DPT020 EMP033 EMP031 JCL020 LBRC020 LBRC030 MAC020 RCL020 COD020 TRX020 TRV015 WKC020 TRV020 TRV030

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDEPARTMENT SELCUSTOMERNUMBER

VALUE
xxxxx xxx...x - 30 Characters

Employee Badge Labels Parameter (EMP033) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELBADGE SELLABELSPERID

VALUE
xxxxxx x (1 or 3)

Employee ID Labels Parameter (EMP031) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELEMPID

VALUE
xxxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 520 of 613

Selection Criteria

SELLABELSPERID

x (1 or 3)

Job Class Parameter (JCL020) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELJOBTYPE SELJOBCLASS SELPAGEHEADING

VALUE
xxx...x - 30 characters xxxxxx xxx...x - 30 characters

Labor Code Parameter (LBRC020) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELLABORCODE SELLAOBRTYPE

VALUE
xxxxx x (a/b/d/l/m/x) a=Absence b=Break d=Default l=Direct/Indirect Labor m=Meals x=Extra Hours Labor Record Sequential selection allowed, i.e., a, d, m up to all.
xxx x - 30 Characters

Selection Criteria

SELPAGEHEADING

Labor Code Labels Parameter (LBRC030) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELLABORCODE SELLAOBRTYPE

VALUE
xxxxx x (a/b/d/l/m/x) a=Absence b=Break d=Default l=Direct/Indirect Labor m=Meals x=Extra Hours Labor Record Sequential selection allowed, i.e., a, d, m up to all.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 521 of 613

Selection Criteria

SELLABELSIZE

x (1, 2, N) 1=1 1/2" X 4" Labels 2=2" X 4" labels N=No Labels

Machine Parameter (MAC020) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELMACHINE SELMACHINETYPE

VALUE
xxxxx x (d/e/l/m) d=Drill e=EDM l=Lathe m=Mill Sequential selection allowed, i.e., d, m up to all. xxxxx
xxx x - 30 Characters

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELWORKCENTER SELPAGEHEADING

Rate Class Parameter (RCL020) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

KEY
SELRATECLASS SELPAGEHEADING AUTO

VALUE
xxxxx
xxx x - 30 Characters

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Reason Code Parameter (COD020) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELCODENAME SELCODETYPE

VALUE
xxxxx x (a/c/d/e/f/m/r/s/u/v/w) a=Absence Code c=Completion Code d=Audit Trail Reason Code e=Serial Number Status Code f=Serial Number Move Code

Kronos Incorporated

Page 522 of 613

m=Machine Status Code r=General Reason Code s=Scrap Code u=Customer Status v=Automatic Deduction Override w=W/O Status Code Sequential selection allowed, i.e., a, c, m up to all. Selection Criteria SELPAGEHEADING
xxx x - 30 Characters

Transaction Barcodes Parameter (TRX020) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELTRXTYPES

VALUE
x (a/e/s) (a=administrative transaction e=employee transaction s=supervisor transactions) xxx xxxxxxxx xxx...x - 30 characters

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELTRANSCODE SELTRXPROGRAM SELPAGEHEADING

Travelers Parameters (TRV015) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELWORKORDER SELCUSTOMERNUMBER SELPARTNUMBER SELWOTYPES SELWOSTATUSES SELDATE

VALUE
xxx...x - 15 characters xxx...x - 20 characters xxx...x - 20 characters xxxxx xxxxx MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date
Page 523 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Printing

SELOPERATION SELFUNCTION SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxx xx x (p/w) (p=part number, w=work order number) x (a/b) (a=default breaks, b=one operation per page) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (2/3) x (a/b/n) (a=print at top of every page, b=top of first page only, n=dont print) x (a/b/n) (a=print at top of every page, b=top of first page only, n=dont print) x (a/b/n) (a=print at top of every page, b=top of first page only, n=dont print) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (b/c/d/e/m/x/v/w/x) (b=operation user-defined field,

Printing

SELPAGEBREAKS

Processing Format Format

AUTO SELBARCODEHEIGHT SELPRINTPART NUMBERATTOP

Format

SEL PRINTQUANITY BARCODES SEL PRINTWORK ORDERINFO SELPRINTOPNINFO SELPRINTSTANDARDS INOPNINFO SELUNPRINTONLY SEL PRINTWORK INSTRUCTIONS SELSTAGGEROPN FUNCBARCODES SELOPNLINEDATA

Format

Format Format Format Format

Format Format

Kronos Incorporated

Page 524 of 613

c=scheduled completion date, d=department and group, e=employee standard, m=machine, o=none, s=scheduled start date, u=unit of measure and multipliers, v=validation and variation limit, w=work order, x=machine standard)

Work Center Barcodes Parameter (WKC020) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELWORKCENTER SELPAGEHEADING

VALUE
xxxxx xxx...x - 30 characters

Work Order Barcodes Parameter (TRV020) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELWORKORDER SELWOTYPES

VALUE
xxx...x - 15 characters x (d/i/p) (d=direct i=indirect p=production) xxx...x - 30 characters

Selection Criteria

SELPAGEHEADING

Work Order Labels Parameter (TRV030) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELWORKORDER SELLABELSIZE

VALUE
xxx...x - 15 characters x (1, 2, N) 1=1 1/2" X 4" Labels 2=2" X 4" labels N=No Labels xxxxx

Selection Criteria

SELWOTYPES

Kronos Incorporated

Page 525 of 613

Daily Assignment
Assignment Schedule Chart Assignment Schedule Summary Personnel Archive Chart PRS090 PRS092 PRS080

Assignment Schedule Chart Parameters (PRS090) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x (a/b/c) (a=print summary data only, b=print detail data only, c=print both summary and detail data) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or Y l )

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection

SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELLABORCODE SELJOBCLASS SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELSUMMARYDATA

Format Selection
Kronos Incorporated

SELDOUBLESPACE
Page 526 of 613

a Yes value.) Format Selection Format Selection SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/d) (a=alphabetic, b=employee ID, d=department) x (a/b) (a=default breaks, b=break on employee ID) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection

SELPAGEBREAKS

System defaults

EMPIDFILL

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

Automatic processing

AUTO

Assignment Schedule Summary Parameters (PRS092) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date
Page 527 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection

SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELLABORCODE SELJOBCLASS SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELSUMMARYDATA

Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x (a/b/c) (a=print summary data only, b=print detail data only, c=print both summary and detail data) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/d) (a=alphabetic, b=employee ID, d=department) x (a/b) (a=default breaks, b=break on employee ID) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, k

Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection

SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

Format Selection

SELPAGEBREAKS

System defaults

EMPIDFILL

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

Kronos Incorporated

Page 528 of 613

Automatic processing

AUTO

w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Personnel Archive Chart Parameter (PRS080) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx (Up to 260 characters) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Automatic processing

SELEMPID SELPURGEFILENAME SELPAGEBREAKSONID AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 529 of 613

Exceptions
Daily Exceptions Sign-Off Exceptions Daily Exceptions Parameters (ADM900) The following parameters can be used with the Daily Exceptions report to create an access profile. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. ADM900 TAA560

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection

SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELLABORCODE SELJOBCLASS SELWORKSCHEDULE SELSHIFT SELTEAMNAME SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELDOUBLESPACE SHOWHOURS SELLASTNAMEFIRST

Kronos Incorporated

Page 530 of 613

Format Selection

SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

x (a/b/d) (a=alphabetic, b=employee ID, d=department, group, employee ID) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=break on department or employee ID, c=break on group) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection (choices are dependent on Sequence selection above) System defaults

SELPAGEBREAKS

EMPIDFILL

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

Automatic processing

AUTO

Signoff Exceptions Parameters (TAA560) The following is a listing of program function parameters and a short description, used in the Access Profiles option on the Security menu. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or

Kronos Incorporated

Page 531 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SEL MISSINGEMPSIGNOFF SEL MISSINGSUPSIGNOFF SELPAGEBREAKON DEPARMENT SELSHIFT SELTEAMNAME SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME AUTO

Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 532 of 613

Labor Events
Employee Activity Labor Hours Summary Period Timecard Rate Detail by ID & Date Rate Detail by ID & Work Order Team Status Work Order Detail Employee Activity (LAB420) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. LAB420 LAB475 LAB451 LAB423 LAB427 LAB440 LAB402

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria
Kronos Incorporated

SELEMPID SELEMPDEPARTMENT SELEMPGROUP SELEMPWORKCENTER SEL EMPWORKSCHEDULE SELEMPTEAMNAME SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE
Page 533 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection

SELTEAMNAME SELSHIFT SELWORKORDER SELOPERATION SELFUNCTION SEL WOUSERDEFINED1 SELLABORTYPES SEL LABORUSERDEFINED1 SEL LABORUSERDEFINED2 SELPARTNUMBER SELCUSTOMERNAME SELROUTER SEL WORKORDERTYPE SELPARTTYPE SELPRINTLABORTEXT SEL PRINTLHOURSLABOR SEL PRINTLHOURSEMPL SEL PRINTHOURSGRAND SELLHOURSOTHER SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SEL OUTPUTSEQUENCE

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x x (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (Y/N) x (Y/N) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (Y/N) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/d) (a=alphabetic, b=employee ID, d=department) x (a/b/c) ( d f l b k

Format Selection
Kronos Incorporated

SELPAGEBREAKS
Page 534 of 613

(a=default breaks, b=break on employee ID, c=break on date) Format Selection PRINTNOQUANITIES x (y/n) If Y, the Earned Hours, Efficiency, Quantities, Scrap Work Center and Adjustment quantities will not print on the report. If N, these quantities will be included. xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/s/t/hd/hg/hw/hs/ht) (b=employee ID, d=labor department, g=labor group, w=labor work center, s=labor schedule, t=labor team, hd=home department, hg=home group, hw=home work center, hs=home schedule, ht=home team) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/s/t/h/1/2/hd/hg/hw /hs/ht) (b=employee ID, d=labor department, g=labor group, w=labor work center, s=labor schedule, t=labor team, 1=misc1, 2=misc2, hd=home department, hg=home group, hw=home work center, hs=home schedule, ht=home team) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

System defaults

EMPIDFILL

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

Automatic processing

AUTO

Labor Hours Summary (LAB475) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY

Kronos Incorporated

Page 535 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELEMPID SELEMPDEPARTMENT SELEMPGROUP SELEMPWORKCENTER

or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx

SELEMPWORKSCHEDULE xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx SELEMPTEAMNAME SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELSHIFT SELWORKORDER SELOPERATION SELFUNCTION SELWOUSERDEFINED1 SELLABORTYPES SEL LABORUSERDEFINED1 SEL LABORUSERDEFINED2 SELPARTNUMBER SELCUSTOMERNAME SELROUTER xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 536 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection

SELWORKORDERTYPE SELPARTTYPE SELPRINTLABORTEXT DISPLAYCOST DISPLAYCOST SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELPAYCATSORT SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

x x (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) Using this indicator assumes a Yes value.) Using this indicator assumes a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/c/d/e) (a=employee ID, date, b=home department, group, employee ID, date, c=labor department, group, employee ID, date, d=home work center, employee ID, date, e=labor work center, employee ID, date) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=break on employee ID, c=break on date) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection

SELPAGEBREAKS

System defaults Automatic processing

DISPLAYCOST AUTO

Period Timecard (LAB451) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or

Kronos Incorporated

Page 537 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SSELLABORCODE SELJOBCLASS SEL PRINTLHOURSLABOR SEL PRINTLHOURSEMPL SEL PRINTHOURSDAILY SEL PRINTlHOURSGRAND

MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxx...x - 15 Characters xxxx xxx x (Y/N) x (Y/N) x (Y/N) x (Y/N) x (Y/N)

Format Selection SELALTTIMEFORMAT (Used to select a time format defined in Export Formats. Otherwise the system format is used.) Format Selection SELALTLABORFORMAT (Used to select a labor format defined in Export Formats. Otherwise the system format is used.) Format Selection (Ti l f h )
Kronos Incorporated

x (Y/N)

SELREPORTTITLE
Page 538 of 613

(Up to 50 characters)

(Title of the report.) Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELPRINTPERIOD HEADERONALLPAGES SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/d/t) (a=alphabetic, b=employee ID, d=department, group, employee ID, t=default team, employee ID) x (a/b) (a=default breaks, b=break on date) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=work schedule, t=team) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=work schedule, t=team) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection

SELPAGEBREAKS

Printing Format Selection

SEL PRINTSIGNATURELINE EMPIDFILL

Format Selection (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

System defaults (Labor rates are displayed instead of adjustments.) Automatic i

Kronos Incorporated

SHOWRATE

AUTO

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or Y l )

Page 539 of 613

processing

a Yes value.)

Rate Detail by ID, Date (LAB423) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx [Link] (default 1.0) [Link] (default 1.5) [Link] (default 2.0) Using this indicator assumes a Yes value.) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b l ID

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Processing Processing Processing Format Selection Format Selection
Kronos Incorporated

SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELSHIFT SELWORKORDER SELOPERATION SELFUNCTION SELWOUSERDEFINED1 SELLABORTYPES SEL LABORUSERDEFINED2 MULTIPLIER1 MULTIPLIER2 MULTIPLIER3 DISPLAYCOST EMPIDFILL
Page 540 of 613

(b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=work schedule, t=team) Format Selection (prevents user from changing selection criteria) RESSEL xxxxxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t/h/1/2) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=work schedule, t=team, h-shift, 1=misc1, 2=misc2) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=break on department, c=break on group) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection

SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELPAGEBREAKS

Automatic processing

AUTO

Rate Detail by ID, Work Order (LAB427) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or
Page 541 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Processing Processing Processing Format Selection Format Selection

SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELSHIFT SELWORKORDER SELOPERATION SELFUNCTION SELWOUSERDEFINED1 SELLABORCODE SEL LABORUSERDEFINED1 SEL LABORUSERDEFINED2 SELPARTNUMBER SELCUSTOMERNAME SELROUTER SELWORKORDERTYPE SELPARTTYPE SELLABORTYPES SELJOBCLASS MULTIPLIER1 MULTIPLIER2 MULTIPLIER3 DISPLAYCOST DISPLAYCOST

Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x x xxx...x - up to 10 xxx [Link] (default 1.0) [Link] (default 1.5) [Link] (default 2.0) Using this indicator assumes a Yes value.) Using this indicator assumes a Yes l )

Kronos Incorporated

Page 542 of 613

value.) Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/c/d/e/f/g) (a=work order, employee Id, b=work order type, work order, employee ID, c=misc1, work order, employee ID, d=part #, work order, employee ID, e=part type, part #, work order, employee ID, f=customer, work order, employee ID, g=router, work order, employee ID) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=break on department, or work order, or work order type, or misc1, or part #, or part type, or customer, router, c=break on work order, or part #, d=work order) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee, d=department, g=group w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) xxxxxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t/h/1/2) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=work schedule, t=team, h-shift, 1=misc1, 2=misc2)
Page 543 of 613

Format Selection

SELPAGEBREAKS

System defaults

EMPIDFILL

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

Kronos Incorporated

Automatic processing

AUTO

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Team Status Parameters (LAB440) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field

USED FOR
Selection criteria

KEY
SLEPASSEDDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxx...x - 15 Characters (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection criteria Format Processing

SEL PAGEBREAKONTEAM SELTEAMNAME AUTO

Work Order Detail Parameters (LAB402) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 544 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELSHIFT SELWORKORDER SELOPERATION SELFUNCTION SELPARTNUMBER SELCUSTOMERNAME SELLABORTYPES

xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx (Up to 10) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection SELOUTPUTOPN (Select N to suppress HEADERONNONDIRECT printing of blank operation headers on non-direct work orders.) Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection SELPRINTWORK INSTRUCTIONS SELPRINTLABORTEXT SELHEADERSONALLPGS SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELPAGEBREAKS

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=break on work order, c=break on operations) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, d=department,

System defaults

EMPIDFILL

Kronos Incorporated

Page 545 of 613

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) xxxxxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t/h/1/2) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team, h=shift, 1=misc1, 2=misc2) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Automatic processing

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 546 of 613

Lists
Access Profile Listing Customer Device Listing Employees Export Format Listing Import Format Listing Pay Rule Profiles Prompts Shifts Detail Transactions Transaction Programs User Profile Listing Work Schedules Detail ACCESSPR CUSTOLS1 TTX917 EMPLOLS1 EXFMTLS2 IMPFMLS1 PRPROLS1 PROMPLST SHIFTLS2 TRANSLST TTX920 USERPR WRKSCLS

Access Profile Listing Parameter (ACCESSPR) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Automatic processing

KEY
SELACCESSPROFILE AUTO

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Customer Parameter (CUSTOLS1) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELSUTOMERNAME SELCUSTOMERNUMBER SELCUSTOMERTYPE

VALUE
xxx...x - 30 Characters xxxxx x (a/b/c) a=Exceptional Customer b=Great Customer c=Average Customer x (a/u) a=name u=number

Selection Criteria

SELSORTBY

Kronos Incorporated

Page 547 of 613

Device File Parameters (TTX917) These parameters are used to generate a list of system devices. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

KEY
SELDEVICEID SELACTIVEONLY AUTO

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxx x (y/n) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Employee Listing (EMPLOLS1) These parameters are used when generating an Employee listing. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELHIREDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx mm/dd/yy xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria
Kronos Incorporated

SELEMPID SELBADGE SELLASTNAME SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELHIREDATE SELLABORCODE
Page 548 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection

SELJOBCLASS SELWORKORDER SELDEVICEID SELACCESSLEVELS SELEMPSTATUSES SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST

xxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxx (up to 5) xxxxx (up to 5) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) x (a/b/d/n/t) (a=alphabetic, b=employee, d=department, n=badge, t=team) x (a/b/c) (a=default break, b=employee ID or department or team, c=group) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

System defaults EMPIDFILL (prompts for badge/pin/ group/work center/ labor code/job code/ shift/team and fills data) Format Selection SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

Format Selection SELPAGEBREAKS (options available depend on Sequence selection above) Ability to view pay rate Automatic processing SHOWRATE AUTO

Export Formats Listing (EXFMTLS2) These parameters are used with the Export Formats option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection criteria

KEY
SELDATAFORMAT

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 549 of 613

Selection criteria Automatic processing

SELSOURCEFILENAME AUTO

xxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Import Format Listing Parameter (IMPFMLS1) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELASCIIFORMAT SELIMPORTFORMAT SELTARGETDATAFILE

VALUE
(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxx...x - 30 characters xxx...x - 30 characters

Pay Rule Profiles (PRPROLS1) These parameters are used when generating a list of Pay Rule Profiles. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection

KEY
SELPROFILE SELPAYCATEGORY SELPROFILETYPES SELAPPLYPAYRULE SELOVERRIDEGENERAL SELPAGEBREAKON PAYRULEPROFILE SELPRINTERRORSONLY SELPAGEBREAKS

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxx x
(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b) (a=default breaks, b=break on pay rule profile) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Automatic processing

AUTO

Prompts Parameter (PROMPLST) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Kronos Incorporated

KEY
Page 550 of 613

VALUE

Selection Criteria

SELPROFILETYPES

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELPROMPTDATATYPES SELPROMPTNUMBER

x, (a/b/d/n/t) a=Alpha-Numeric b=Formatted Badge Prompt d=Date (xx/xx/xxxx) n=Numeric Only t=Time (hh:mm:ss) xxx xxx

Shifts Listing Parameters (SHIFTLS2) These parameters are used when generating a list of Shifts. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Omits definition explanation Automatic processing

KEY
SELSHIFT SELFROMTIMEBEGIN SELTOTIMEBEGIN SELFROMTINEND SELTOTINEND SELPROFILE SELSHIFTTYPES SELEMPSTATUS SELFLEXHOURS SELNEXTDAY SELAUTOINOUT SEL WKPDENFROCEMENT SELPROFILEUSAGE NOLEGEND AUTO

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx
xxxxx

xxxxxxxxxx xxxx (up to 4) xxxxx (up to 5) x (y/n) x (y/n) x (y/n) x (y/n) xxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Transactions Listing Parameter (TRANSLST) These parameters are used when generating a list of Transactions. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.
Kronos Incorporated Page 551 of 613

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELTRXPROGRAM SELACCESSLEVELS

VALUE
xxxxxxxx x (a/b/n) (a=supervisor b=lead person n=no special access) xxx x (a/e/s) (a=administrative transaction e=employee transaction s=supervisor transaction) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELTRANSCODE SELTRXTYPE

Automatic processing

AUTO

Transaction Programs Listing Parameters (TTX920) These parameters are used when generating a list of Transactions. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Data destination Automatic processing

KEY
SELTRXPROGRAM SELMAPPINGSLIST SELEXOPTIONSLIST SELTRANSLIST FILENAME AUTO

VALUE
xxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

User Profile Listing Parameter (USERPR) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELPROFILE

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxx

Work Schedules Detail Listing Parameters (WRKSCLS1) These parameters are used when generating a list of Work Schedules. The value entry indicates
Kronos Incorporated Page 552 of 613

both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELWORKSCHEDULE SELANCHORDATE

VALUE
xxxxx MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx x (a/d/n/w) (a=afternoon schedule d=day schedule n=night schedule w=7 day schedule) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELDAYSINCYCLE SEL WORKSCHEDULETYPES

Automatic processing

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 553 of 613

Logs
Transaction Log Batch Log by Date Run Transaction Log Parameters (BCL015) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. BCL015 BCH070

Used for
Selection criteria

Key
SLEPASSEDDATE

Value
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xx:xx:xxxx MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xx:xx:xxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxxxxx (n/b/d/g/s) (n=none, b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, s=schedule) xxxxxxxx (n/b/d/g/s) (
Page 554 of 613

Selection criteria Selection criteria

SELPASSEDTIME SELPOLLEDDATE

Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Format Format Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria Selection criteria System defaults (prompts for badge/pin/group/ work center/ labor code/job code/shift/ team and fills data) System defaults ( f
Kronos Incorporated

SELPOLLEDTIME SELTRANSCODE SELTRXTYPE SELDEVICEID SELERRORSONLY SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELBADGE SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKSCHEDULE EMPIDFILL

RESSEL

(prevents user from changing selection criteria)

(n=none, b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, s=schedule) SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE x (b/d/n) (b=employee ID, poll date, transaction#, d=poll date, transaction #, n=badge#, poll date, transaction #) x (a/b/c) (a=alphabetic, b=employee ID, d=department) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format

Format

SELPAGEBREAKS

Processing

AUTO

Batch Log by Date Run (BCH070) The Batch Log has only one parameter that can be used to create a user or group profile. That parameter is:

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)
value.)

Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Automatic P i

Kronos Incorporated

SELLABORBATCH SELNIGHTLYBATCH

SELPAGEBREAKONDATE (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes SELTABATCH AUTO (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) Automatically begins processing

Page 555 of 613

Processing

Kronos Incorporated

Page 556 of 613

Machine Utilization
History by Work Center In Progress by Work Center Usage by Machine MAC211 MAC213 MAC218

History by Work Center Parameter (MAC211) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxx...x - 30 characters xxxxx (requires SELWORORDER field) xxxxx (requires SELWORORDER field) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection

SELMACHINE SELFUNCTION SELOPERATION SEL PAGEBREAKON WORKCENTER SELPARTNUMBER SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER

Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

Machine In Progress by Work Center Parameter (MAC213) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR

KEY

VALUE

Kronos Incorporated

Page 557 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELMACHINE SELFUNCTION SELOPERATION SELPAGEBREAKON WORKCENTER SELPARTNUMBER SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER

xxx...x - 30 characters xxxxx (requires SELWORORDER field) xxxxx (requires SELWORORDER field) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxx xxxxx

Usage by Machine Parameter (MAC218) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxx...x - 30 characters xxxxx (requires SELWORORDER field) xxxxx (requires SELWORORDER field) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Selection Criteria

SELMACHINE SELFUNCTION SELOPERATION SELPAGEBREAKON MACHINE SELPARTNUMBER SELWORKCENTER

Kronos Incorporated

Page 558 of 613

Selection Criteria

SELWORKORDER

xxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 559 of 613

Quality Control
By Employee ID By Scrap Code By Scrap Code Summary By Work Center By Work Order By Work Order Summary QC353 QC351 QC381 QC352 QC354 QC384

Quality Control By Employee/ID Parameter (QC353) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xx (Requires Work Order selection.) xxxx (Requires Work Order selection.) xxxxx xxxxx xxx...x - 15 Characters (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELDEPARTMENT SELFUNCTION SELOPERATION SELSCRAPCODE SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER AUTO

Quality Control By Scrap Code Parameter (QC351) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Kronos Incorporated

KEY
Page 560 of 613

VALUE

Selection Criteria

SELDATE

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELDEPARTMENT SELFUNCTION SELOPERATION SELPAGEBREAKON SCRAPECODE SELSCRAPCODE SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER AUTO

MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xx (Requires Work Order selection.) xxxx (Requires Work Order selection.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxx xxxxx xxx...x - 15 Characters (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Quality Control By Scrap Code Summary Parameter (QC381) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 561 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELDEPARTMENT SELFUNCTION SELOPERATION SELPAGEBREAKON SCRAPECODE SELSCRAPCODE SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER AUTO

xxxxx xx (Requires Work Order selection.) xxxx (Requires Work Order selection.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxx xxxxx xxx...x - 15 Characters (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Quality Control By Work Center Parameter (QC352) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xx (Requires Work Order selection.) xxxx (Requires Work Order selection.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxx xxxxx xxx...x - 15 Characters (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or Y l )
Page 562 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic i
Kronos Incorporated

SELDEPARTMENT SELFUNCTION SELOPERATION SELPAGEBREAKON WORKCENTER SELSCRAPCODE SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER AUTO

processing

a Yes value.)

Quality Control By Work Order Parameter (QC354) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xx (Requires Work Order selection.) xxxx (Requires Work Order selection.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxx xxxxx xxx...x - 15 Characters (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELDEPARTMENT SELFUNCTION SELOPERATION SELPAGEBREAKON WORKORDER SELSCRAPCODE SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER AUTO

Quality Control By Work Order Summary Parameter (QC384) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or
Page 563 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELDEPARTMENT SELFUNCTION SELOPERATION SELPAGEBREAKON WORKORDER SELSCRAPCODE SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER AUTO

Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xx (Requires Work Order selection.) xxxx (Requires Work Order selection.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxx xxxxx xxx...x - 15 Characters (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 564 of 613

Time and Attendance

Absentee Approaching Overtime Clock In Detail Pay Category Amounts Summary Weekly Schedule Accruals Detail Absentee Parameter (TAA510) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. TAA510 TAA519 TAA500 TAA132 TAA133 ACR001

Used for
Selection Criteria

Key
SELDATE

Value
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection System defaults

SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELSHIFT SELLABORCODE SELJOBCLASS SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST EMPIDFILL

Kronos Incorporated

Page 565 of 613

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

Format Selection

SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t/h) (b=employee ID, d=department, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) x (a/b/d/t) (a=alphabetic, b=employee ID, d=department, group, employee ID, t=default team, employee ID) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=break on department or team, c=group) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection (options depend on Sequence selection above) Automatic processing

SELPAGEBREAKS

AUTO

Approaching Overtime Parameters (TAA519) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection

KEY
SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SLEWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELHOURSUNTILOT SELSHOWALREADYINOT SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST

VALUE
xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx [Link] (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 566 of 613

System defaults

EMPIDFILL

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

Format Selection

SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t/h) (b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team, h=shift) x (a/b/d/t) (a=alphabetic, b=employee ID, d=department, group, employee ID, t=default team, employee ID) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=break on department or team, c=group) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection

SELPAGEBREAKS

Automatic processing

AUTO

Clock In Detail (TAA500) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are
Page 567 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection

SELEMPID SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKSCHEDULE SELTEAMNAME SELSHIFT SELLABORCODE SELJOBCLASS SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELPRINTHOURSEMPL

located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xxxxx xxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

SELPRINTHOURSGRAND (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) SELPRINTHOURMISC SELPRINTONLYWITH SELECTEDEXCEPTIONS SELPRINTHOURSOTHER SELPRINTHOURSTIME (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) (b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t/h) (b l ID

System defaults EMPIDFILL (prompts for badge/pin/ group/work center/ labor code/job code/ shift/team and fills data) System defaults ( f
Kronos Incorporated

RESSEL
Page 568 of 613

(prevents user from changing selection criteria)

Format Selection

SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

(b=employee ID, g=group, w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team, h=shift) x (a/b/d) (a=alphabetic, b=employee ID, d=department, group, employee ID) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=break on employee ID or department, c=group) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection

SELPAGEBREAKS

Automatic processing

AUTO

Reports T A Pay Category Amounts Summary Parameter (TAA132) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE SELDEPARTMENT SELEMPID SELGROUP SELJOBCLASS SELLABORCODE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxx xxxxxx xxx xxx xxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/c/d/e) (a=alphabetic, b=department, group c=work center d=labor code e=job class) x (a) (a=default breaks) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection

Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

Kronos Incorporated

SELPAGEBREAKS SELTEAMNAME SELWORKCENTER

Page 569 of 613

Automatic processing

AUTO

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Reports T A Weekly Schedule Parameter (TAA133) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELDATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxx xxxxxx xxx xxx xxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/b/c/d/e) (a=alphabetic, b=department, group c=work center d=labor code e=job class) x (a) (a=default breaks) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection

SELDEPARTMENT SELEMPID SELGROUP SELJOBCLASS SELLABORCODE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELPAGEBREAKS SELTEAMNAME SELWORKCENTER AUTO

Accruals Detail Parameter (ACR001) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELACCRUALCODE SELACCRUALDATE

VALUE
xxxxxx MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no

Kronos Incorporated

Page 570 of 613

Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Selection Criteria

SELEMPID

spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxxx

SEL (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or NEGACCRUALBALANCES a Yes value.) SELPAGEBREAKONID SELSCHEDULEDATE (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection Format Selection Automatic processing

SELSHOWDETAIL SELSHOWSCHEDULE AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 571 of 613

Work In Progress
WIP by Work Center WIP Hours & Efficiencies WIP Movement WIP Summary W/O Top Assembly WIP105 WIP111 WIP112 WIP103 WIP199

WIP by Work Center Parameter (WIP105) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELCUSTOMERNAME SELDATE

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxx xxx xxxx x (d/i/m/p) (d=drilling i=issue m=milling p=plating) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELOPERATION SELOPERATIONTYPES

Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELPAGEBREAKON WORKCENTER SELPARTNUMBER SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER SELWOUSERDEFINED1 AUTO

WIP Hours and Efficiencies (WIP111) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Kronos Incorporated

KEY
Page 572 of 613

VALUE

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection

SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER SELOPERATION SELFUNCTION SELPARTNUMBER SELCUSTOMERNAME SELWOUSERDEFINED1 SELWORKORDERTYPE SELPARTTYPE SELWOTYPES SELWOSTATUSES SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx xx x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

xxxxxxxxxx

x x xxxxx xxxxx x (p/w) (p=part number, w=work order number) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=work order or part number, c=work order) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection (options depend on Sequence selection above) Automatic processing

SELPAGEBREAKS

AUTO

WIP Movement Parameter (WIP112) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELCUSTOMERNAME SELDATE

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY--MM/DD/YYYY (for a fixed range of dates, no spaces) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date
Page 573 of 613

Kronos Incorporated

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELOPERATION SELOPERATIONTYPES

Other variables may be used and are located under Date Range Variables Parameters. xxxxx xxx xxxx x (d/i/m/p) (d=drilling i=issue m=milling p=plating) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a Yes value. (Using this indicator assumes a Yes value. (Using this indicator assumes a Yes value. xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

SELPAGEBREAKON WORKORDER SELPARTNUMBER SEL PRINTDIRECTJOBONLY SELPRINTLABORTEXT SELPRINTWORK INSTRUCTIONS SELSHIFT SELWORKCENTER SELTEAMNAME SELWORKORDER SELWORKSCHEDULE AUTO

WIP Summary Parameters (WIP103) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria
Kronos Incorporated

KEY
SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELWORKCENTER SELWORKORDER
Page 574 of 613

VALUE
xxxxx xxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection

SELOPERATION SELFUNCTION SELPARTNUMBER SELCUSTOMERNAME SELWOUSERDEFINED1 SELWORKORDERTYPE SELPARTTYPE SELWOTYPES SELWOSTATUSES SELOUTPUTSEQUENCE

xxxx xx x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxx

x x xxxxx xxxxx x (p/w) (p=part number, work order, operation, w=work order, operation) x (a/b/c) (a=default breaks, b=work order or part number, c=work order) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Format Selection

SELPAGEBREAKS

Automatic processing

AUTO

Reports WIP W/O Top Assembly Parameter (WIP199) The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Automatic processing

KEY
SELDEPARTMENT SELGROUP SELSHOWPARTNUMBER SELSHOWTOTALHOURS SELSHOWWORK ORDERSTATUS SELWORKORDER AUTO

VALUE
xxxxx xxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 575 of 613

FILEMODE PARAMETER
This parameter can be used to default the overwrite/append option for the FileName parameter, or to prevent users from saving disk files altogether. The three valid responses are: O Overwrite The existing file is replaced with the report currently being generated and the user is not prompted. Append The current report is appended at the end of the existing file and the user is not prompted. No file output available Prevents users from running any reports to disk.

FILENAME PARAMETER
This parameter may be used to default the file name. This is useful when a report is usually run to the same file. If the file specified already exists, the employee is prompted to determine whether the existing file should be overwritten or appended to the existing file. The three valid responses are: O Overwrite The existing file is replaced with the report currently being generated. Append The current report is appended at the end of the existing file. Change file The report does not process and the cursor moves to the Save File field, allowing the user to select a different file name.

A C

Kronos Incorporated

Page 576 of 613

SETUP PARAMETERS
Select the desired Setup menu item below to view a list of program parameters. If an option is not listed, the only available parameter is VIEWONLY, which permits the user to only view the screens, but not make changes. Device Configuration Devices (See Reports > Lists > Device Listings TTX917 for details.) Transactions (See Reports > Lists > Transaction Programs TTX920 for details.) Pay Rule Profiles (See Reports > Lists > Pay Rules Profiles PRPROLS1 for details.) Schedules Shifts

Hours Allocation Rules

Work Schedules

Work Schedules File Parameters

These parameters are used with the Work Schedules option.

USED FOR

KEY

VALUE
(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Access only to view, VIEWONLY cannot change data Automatic processing AUTO

Shifts File Parameters

These parameters are used with the Shifts option.

USED FOR
Access only to view, cannot change data Automatic processing

KEY
VIEWONLY

VALUE
(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 577 of 613

UTILITIES PARAMETERS
Select the desired Utilities menu item below to view a list of program parameters. If an option is not listed, the only available parameter is VIEWONLY, which permits the user to only view the screens, but not make changes. Importing Import Data Formats Time Labor Labor Hours Machines Employees Hours Pay Categories Work Schedules Nightly Batch Mark Records for Recalculation Exporting

Miscellaneous

Kronos Incorporated

Page 578 of 613

Schedules (stExportWrkSch.vd5) - Parameter

These parameters are used with the Work Schedules Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) and Gatekeeper Central (GKC).

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROM WORKSCHEDULE SELTO WORKSCHEDULE

VALUE
xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Action when user input is required Automatic processing

SEL WORKSCHEDULETYPES SEL PRIMARYSCHEDFILE SELSCHEDSHIFTFILE AUTOCFG

xxxxx (up to 5) xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) Leave the KEY field blank for AUTO. AUTO in the KEY field will start the Automatic processing.

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 579 of 613

Employees (stExportEmp.vd5) - Parameter

The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT), Gatekeeper Central (GKC) and NexTrak.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SELFROMDEPARTMENT SELTODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE

VALUE
xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Processing KAT exports

SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS SELEMPSTATUS SELOUTPUTFILE KAT

xxxxx xxx xxxxx (up to 5) xxxxxxxx Leave the KEY field blank for GKC. KAT in the KEY field will export in a format acceptable for KAT and NexTrak. x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) Leave the KEY field blank for AUTO. AUTO in the KEY field will start the Automatic processing.

Actions when user input is needed. Automatically begin processing

AUTOCFG

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 580 of 613

Hours KAT (stExportKAT.vd5) - Parameter

These Parameters are used with the Hours Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT).

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SELFROMDEPARTMENT SELTODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria
Kronos Incorporated

SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS SELFROMSHIFT SELTOSHIFT SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELOUTPUTFILE

xxxxx xxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx

SEL x (y/n) UPDATEBATCHNUMBER SELEXCLUDEMARKED SELCLOCKEDOUTONLY SELAFTERSHIFTONLY SELHOURSAFTER

Page 581 of 613

x (y/n) x (y/n) x (y/n) [Link]

Actions when user input is needed. Automatic processing

AUTOCFG

x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) Leave the KEY field blank for AUTO. AUTO in the KEY field will start the Automatic processing.

AUTO

Pay Categories (stExportPayCat.vd5) - Parameter

These Parameters are used with the Pay Categories option.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SEL FROMPAYCATEGORY SEL TOPAYCATEGORY

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELCATEGORYTYPES SELOUTPUTFILE

xxxxx (up to 5) Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. DO NOT include a file extension; the system will automatically assign the extension (.TXT). The default file name is [Link] x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) Leave the KEY field blank for AUTO. AUTO in the KEY field will start the Automatic processing.

Action when user input is required Automatic processing

AUTOCFG

AUTO

The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT).

Kronos Incorporated

Page 582 of 613

Schedules (stExportWrkSch.vd5) - Parameter

These parameters are used with the Work Schedules Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT), Gatekeeper Central (GKC) and NexTrak.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROM WORKSCHEDULE SELTO WORKSCHEDULE

VALUE
xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Action when user input is required Automatic processing

SEL WORKSCHEDULETYPES SEL PRIMARYSCHEDFILE SEL SCHEDSHIFTFILE AUTOCFG

xxxxx (up to 5) xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) Leave the KEY field blank for AUTO. AUTO in the KEY field will start the Automatic processing.

AUTO

Hours NexTrak (stExportNxtHrs.vd5) - Parameter

These parameters are used with the Hours Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT).

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx xxxxx xxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SELFROMDEPARTMENT SELTODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP

Kronos Incorporated

Page 583 of 613

Selection Criteria

Selection Criteria

SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE

xxxxx

xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Actions when user input is needed. Automatic processing

SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS SELFROMSHIFT SELTOSHIFT SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELFROMBATCH SELTOBATCH SELOUTPUTFILE

xxxxx xxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxx

SEL x (y/n) UPDATEBATCHNUMBER SELEXCLUDEMARKED SELCLOCKEDOUTONLY SELAFTERSHIFTONLY SELEXCLDSTATUS SELHOURSAFTER AUTOCFG x (y/n) x (y/n) x (y/n) x (y/n) [Link] x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) Leave the KEY field blank for AUTO. AUTO in the KEY field will start the Automatic processing.

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 584 of 613

Pay Categories NexTrak (stExportNxtPCAbs.vd5) - Parameter

These parameters are used with the Pay Categories option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos NexTrak application.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SEL FROMPAYCATEGORY SEL TOPAYCATEGORY SEL FROMABSENCECODE SEL TOABSENCECODE SELCATEGORYTYPES SELOUTPUTFILE

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria

xxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

xxxxx (up to 5) Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. DO NOT include a file extension; the system will automatically assign the extension (.TXT). The default file name is [Link] x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) Leave the KEY field blank for AUTO. AUTO in the KEY field will start the Automatic processing.

Action when user input is required Automatic processing

AUTOCFG

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 585 of 613

Schedules NexTrak (stExportNxtSch.vd5) - Parameter

These parameters are used with the Work Schedules Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT), Gatekeeper Central (GKC) and NexTrak.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SELFROMDEPARTMENT SELTODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS SELFROMSHIFT SELTOSHIFT SELFROM WORKSCHEDULE SELTO WORKSCHEDULE

xxxxx xxx xx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SEL WORKSCHEDULETYPES SEL PRIMARYSCHEDFILE

xxxxx (up to 5) xxxxxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 586 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SEL SCHEDSHIFTFILE SELOUTPUTFILE

xxxxxxxx Enter the name of the file that will be exported to the external system. DO NOT include a file extension; the system will automatically assign the extension (.TXT). The default file name is [Link] x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) Leave the KEY field blank for AUTO. AUTO in the KEY field will start the Automatic processing.

Action when user input is required Automatic processing

AUTOCFG

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 587 of 613

HOURS EXPORT
This utility is used to export hours records. It can also be used with the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) to gather records of all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several sources to KAT. There are four different exports from the ShopTrac Pro system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedule Export Hours Export Pay Category Export

Hours Export
This Export provides basic information from the LHours records and calculated exception information, based on the configuration of the exceptions in the Shift record. This Export utility works like the ShopTrac Pro Time Export utility. All Time records exported may be marked with a Batch number, therefore, users may use the Reprocess Batch functionality and they may select to exclude marked records when using this utility. The Batch Log record created by the export will have Batch Type "T". The output file name is defaulted to [Link]. There are three different types of records exported: Hours Record: The HRS identifier identifies hours records. There may be several "HRS" records per Employee per day. There will be one "HRS" record for each LHours record if the corresponding Labor is not an Absence record. The ABS identifier identifies absence records. The information for this record comes from LHours records if the corresponding Labor record is an Absence record. There may be more than one Absence record for Employee per day. The EXP identifier identifies exception records. There may be several exception records per Employee per day. For example, if an Employee is late-in and early-out, there will be one record for the late-in exception and one record for the early-out exception.

Absence Record:

Exception Record:

This export can be run as often as needed. It has no effect on any data files. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the fields displayed on two tabs, Selection Criteria and Selection Criteria 2.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 588 of 613

Selection Criteria

FIELD
Reference Dates from...to Shifts from...to Departments from...to Groups from...to Work Centers from...to Employee ID from...to Work Schedules from...to Labor Codes from...to Job Classes from...to Reprocess Batches from...to

DESCRIPTION
Enter the range of dates for the LHours records you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all records regardless of date. Enter the range of shifts you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all shifts. Enter the range of departments you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all departments. Enter the range of groups you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all groups. Enter the range of work centers you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work centers. Enter the employee ID or range of ID numbers that you want to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all employees. Enter the range of work schedules you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work schedules. Enter the range of labor codes you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all labor codes. Enter the range of job classes you want to include. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all work classes. If you want to export LHours records that have already been processed in a previous batch, assign this upload a reprocessing batch number. If the records have not previously been processed in a batch, skip this field.

Selection Criteria 2

FIELD
Select exceptions

DESCRIPTION
Select up to 15 time and attendance exceptions to include in the export. Leave the box clear to include all exceptions. Select the file name for the file that will be exported to the external system. This file name can be any name up

Output file name

Kronos Incorporated

Page 589 of 613

to eight characters long. A cryptic naming scheme including the date and batch number (e.g., L0527003) aids file identification. Update batch number Required field. Check this box if you want to update the batch number with the number of this Batch. If you don't want to update this number, leave the box clear. It may be desirable to upload a group of LHours records but not update their Batch Numbers so it does not appear later as already uploaded. Check this box if you want to exclude previously sent records in this export. Previously uploaded records are marked with a batch number update. If you don't want to exclude any records, leave the box clear. Check this box if only employees clocked out at the time of this upload are included. Clocked out status is not just gone for the day; clocked out in the middle of the day would be included. Because the employee is clocked-out at the time of the upload, it is assured that the Labor hours have been rounded to match the Time hours, whether the employee returns on this day or not. Leave clear if employees are included regardless of whether their Time record is open or not. Specify how long past Shift End Time, records will not be selected. Valid entries are 0 (zero) to 99.99. For example, an entry of 2.00 means that an upload will not consider any labor records for employees whose shift end time, including any authorized overtime, is less than two hours before the time the upload is run. Check this box to restrict the output to only Labor records for shifts that have already ended. Shift End is defined for each employee as the end time of the shift, or the end of any authorized post-shift overtime period. Leave clear if selection of Labor records should not consider the employee's scheduled Shift End time when considering Labor records for export.

Exclude marked records

Clocked-out only

Hours [after]

After shift only

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.
Kronos Incorporated Page 590 of 613

Pay Categories Export

This utility is used to export pay category records. It can also be used with the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) to gather records of all types of absences, exceptions, pay categories and hours. As a part of this interface, the ShopTrac Pro system exports information from several sources to KAT. There are four different exports from the ShopTrac Pro system to KAT: Employee Export Work Schedule Export Hours Export Pay Category Export

Pay Category Export This export provides basic information from the pay category records. This export can be run as often as needed. It has no effect on any data files. To create the export, narrow the range of data selected by entering values in any of the following fields:

FIELD
Pay Category from...to Pay Category Types Output File Name

DESCRIPTION
Enter the pay category range to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all categories. Enter the pay category types range to include in the export. If you leave this field blank, the system generates an export of all category types. Enter the name of the file that will be exported o the external system. Do not include a file extension, as the system automatically assigns the extension .TXT; the default file name is [Link]

Once the export is launched, the records processing is displayed on the screen. Included in this information is the name of the file the export is generated from, the number of records selected and processed and the total records exported. Start the export by clicking the OK button. If the export is stopped for any reason and you want to begin the export again, click the Restart button. Clicking Cancel will stop the export. Click Layout to preview or print the exported records. To exit without completing the export, click the Close button. For more information, click the Help button.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 591 of 613

Importing
Import Data File Parameters These parameters are used with the Import Data option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
System Default System Default System Default (prevents user from changing selection criteria) System Default Processing

KEY
SELFORMATNAME SELINPUTFILE RESSEL

VALUE
xxxxx xxxxxxxx xx (f/i) (f=user cannot change format, i=user cannot change input file) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (This parameter must be set up in the access profile for a UPD transcode to use any defaults values that may have been entered for any field.) xx (position one, y/n, print or don't print; position two, a/b, a=continue, d=don't continue) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

ERRORCHECKING UPDDEF

System Default

AUTOCFG

Automatic processing

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 592 of 613

Exporting
Export Formats File Parameters These parameters are used when generating a list of Export Formats. By using the indicators below,

USED FOR
System Default System Default

KEY
ALLFIELDS VIEWONLY

RESULTS
Include all fields in the format on the list. Make the fields viewable, but not changeable.

Time Export Parameters These are the parameters used with the Export Time option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SELFROMDEPARTMENT SELTODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS

xxxxx xxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 593 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria System defaults Automatic processing

SELFROMSHIFT SELTOSHIFT SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELDATAFORMAT SELOUTPUTFILE

xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx

SEL (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or UPDATEBATCHNUMBER a Yes value.) SELEXCLUDEMARKED SELCLOCKEDOUTONLY SELAFTERSHIFTONLY SELHOURSAFTER SELPRINTERRORS AUTOCFG AUTO (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) [Link] (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 594 of 613

Labor Export Parameters These are the parameters used with the Export Labor option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT).

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SELFROMDEPARTMENT SELTODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS SELFROMSHIFT SELTOSHIFT SELFROMTEAMNAME SELTOTEAMNAME SELWORKORDER SELFROMWORKORDER SELTOOPERATION

xxxxx xxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 595 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFUNCTION SELFROM WOUSERDEFINED1 SELTO WOUSERDEFINED1 SELFROMLABORTYPES SELTOLABORTYPES SELFROM LABORUSERDEFINED1 SELTO LABORUSERDEFINED1 SELFROM LABORUSERDEFINED2 SELTO LABORUSERDEFINED2 SELFROMPARTNUMBER SELTOPARTNUMBER SELFROM CUSTOMERNAME SELTO CUSTOMERNAME SELFROMROUTER SELTOROUTER SELFROM WORKORDERTYPE SELTO WORKORDERTYPE SELFROMPARTTYPE SELTOPARTTYPE SELEMPSTATUS SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELOUTPUTFILE SELDATAFORMAT

xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria

xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria

Selection Criteria

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Selection Criteria

x xxxxxxxxxx (up to 5) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 596 of 613

Selection Criteria

SELFROM REPOROCESSBATCH SELTO REPORCESSBATCH

xxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Action when user input is needed Automatic processing Processing

SEL (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or UPDATEBATCHNUMBER a Yes value.) SELEXCLUDEMARKED SELCLOCKEDOUTONLY SELAFTERSHIFTONLY SELHOURSAFTER SELPRINTERRORS AUTOCFG (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

AUTO KAT

Kronos Incorporated

Page 597 of 613

Labor Hours Export Parameters These parameters are used with the Labor Hours Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SELFROMDEPARTMENT SELTODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS SELFROMSHIFT SELTOSHIFT SELFROM PAYCATEGORY SELTO PAYCATEGORY SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELFROMLABORTYPES SELTOLABORTYPES

xxxxx xxx xx xxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 598 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELEMPSTATUS SELPAYCATTYPE SELFROM REPOROCESSBATCH SELTO REPORCESSBATCH

xxxxx (up to 5) x xxxxxxxx

Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria System defaults

SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELDATAFORMAT

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxxxxxx

SEL (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or UPDATEBATCHNUMBER a Yes value.) SELEXCLUDEMARKED SELCLOCKEDOUTONLY SELAFTERSHIFTONLY SELHOURSAFTER SELPRINTERRORS AUTOCFG (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) [Link] (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Automatic processing

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 599 of 613

Machines Export Parameters These parameters are used with the Machines Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
FILENAME FROMDATE

VALUE
xxxxxxxx MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx

Processing

TODATE

Processing

REPROCESS

Employees Export Parameters The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used to export to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) and to Gatekeeper Central (GKC).

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SELFROMDEPARTMENT SELTODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE

VALUE
xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria

SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE

xxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 600 of 613

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Format Selection Selection Criteria Processing Criteria Actions when user input is needed

SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS SELEMPSTATUS SELOUTPUTFILE SETEXCLDSTATUS KAT AUTOCFG

xxx xxxxx (up to 5) xxxxxxxx x (y/n/blank)

x (a/o) (a=abort, 0=overwrite) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Automatically begin AUTO processing

Kronos Incorporated

Page 601 of 613

Hours Export Parameters These parameters are used with the Hours Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT).

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date xxxxxx xxxxx xxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMEMPID SELTOEMPID SELFROMDEPARTMENT SELTODEPARTMENT SELFROMGROUP SELTOGROUP SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELFROMLABORCODE SELTOLABORCODE SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOJOBCLASS SELFROMSHIFT SELTOSHIFT SELFROM REPOROCESSBATCH SELTO REPORCESSBATCH

xxxxx xxx xx xxxxxxxx

Kronos Incorporated

Page 602 of 613

Selection Criteria Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Format Selection Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

SELEXCEPTIONTYPES SELDOUBLESPACE SELLASTNAMEFIRST SELOUTPUTFILE

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) xxxxxxxx

SELUPDATEBATCHNUMB (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or ER a Yes value.) SELEXCLUDEMARKED SELCLOCKEDOUTONLY SELAFTERSHIFTONLY SELHOURSAFTER (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) [Link] x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Actions to take when AUTOCFG input from user is required Automatic processing Processing AUTO KAT

Kronos Incorporated

Page 603 of 613

Pay Categories Export Parameters These parameters are used with the Pay Categories Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT).

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROM PAYCATEGORY SELTO PAYCATEGORY SELCATEGORYTYPES AUTOCFG AUTO KAT

VALUE
xxxxxxxxxx

Selection Criteria Automatic processing Automatic processing Processing

xxxxx (up to 5) x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Work Schedules Export Parameters These parameters are used with the Work Schedules Export option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field. Used for exporting to the Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT) and Gatekeeper Central (GKC).

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SELFROM WORKSCHEDULE SELTO WORKSCHEDULE SEL WORKSCHEDULETYPES SELSCHESHIFTFILE AUTOCFG AUTO KAT

VALUE
xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Action when user input is required Automatic processing Processing

xxxxx (up to 5)

SELPRIMARYSCHEDFILE xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx x (a/o) (a=abort, o=overwrite)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 604 of 613

Miscellaneous
Nightly Batch File Parameters These parameters are used with the Nightly Batch option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
System Default (From date) System Default (To date) System Default (Process Shift Time) System Default (Absence records) System Default (Process Clock out) System Default (Full-day absence)

KEY
FDT TDT TIM ABS OUT FDY

VALUE
MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY xx:xx x (y/n) x (y/n) x (y/n) x (y/n) x (y/n)

System Default (Print PRT [Link] file) System Default (Process missing clock-outs) CLK

ACCROVERIDE Automatic processing AUTO (If used, no other parameters are required. Default values are used.)

(Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Kronos Incorporated

Page 605 of 613

Mark Records for Recalculation - Parameters These parameters are used with the Mark Records for Recalculation option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection criteria

KEY
SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

VALUE
Specify date range for calculation (mm/dd/yyyy) or Today for current date or Today-1 for yesterday's date Use only if you want the program to automatically run when accessed from Utilities menu

Automatic processing

AUTO

Kronos Incorporated

Page 606 of 613

TRANSACTION ENTRY
These parameters are used with access to the Transaction Entry option. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
SEL TODEPARTMENT SEL FROMDEPARTMENT SELTOGROUP SELFROMGROUP SEL TOWORKCENTER SEL FROMWORKCENTER SEL TOWORKSCHEDULE SEL FROMWORKSCHEDULE SEL TOLABORCODE SEL FROMLABORCODE SELTOJOBCLASS SELFROMJOBCLASS SELTOBADGE SELFROMBADGE SELTOTEAMNAME SELFROMTEAMNAME NOEMPIDVAL

VALUE
xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

xxx xxxxx

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria

xxxxx

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

xxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Disables employee badge validation, except when mapping is activated and badges with more than 6 characters are used. Assumes a yes value, searches for employee ID, not badge number Disable selection/employee list functionality. Turns prompt position check/stripping off.

Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

EMPLOYEEIDONLY NOEMPLIST NOPOSCHECK

Kronos Incorporated

Page 607 of 613

Format Selection KRONOS3OF9 (for use with Kronos standard 3 of 9 badges) Format Selection KRONOS2OF5 (for use with Kronos standard 2 of 5 badges) System defaults System defaults DEVICEID EMPIDFILL xxxxxx (1-999989) xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) b=employee, d=department, g=group w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team xxxxxxxx (b/d/g/w/l/j/s/t) b=employee, d=department, g=group w=work center, l=labor code, j=job code, s=schedule, t=team (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

System defaults (prevents user from changing selection criteria)

RESSEL

Enables debugging

DEBUG

AUTOMATIC RECALCULATION PARAMETERS

These parameters are used with access to the Automatic Recalculation (AutoCalc) utility. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria

KEY
ID

VALUE
Numeric identifier for each AutoCalc process. Enter a two-digit code between 01 and 99. MM/DD/YYYY or Today for current date or Today1 for yesterday's date

Selection Criteria

SELFROMDATE SELTODATE

Kronos Incorporated

Page 608 of 613

Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria

FULLQUALHRS LATESTDAY PREVIOUSDAY ALLOWMIDDAY REPEAT

Define number of hours to qualify for Premium Zone. (hh:mm:ss) Process if latest day is still open? (Y/N) Process if previous day is still open? (Y/N) Allow mid-day clock out with labor record open? (Y/N) Scan file repeatedly until interrupted? (Y/N) No means that the time file will be scanned once and stop. If Repeat is set at Y, this parameter governs whether the date range will roll forward when processing passes midnight. (Y/N) If Repeat is set at Y, specify number of hours to wait before days with errors (which are skipped) will be recalculated. Define specific time to stop processing and close utility. (hh:mm:ss) Define specific date to stop processing and close utility. (mm/dd/yyyy) Stop processing when this usercreated file is detected. File is deleted after detection. Used to initial an action other than with a date or time. Maximum file length is 20. If Exit At... or Exit File is specified, this text will be passed to the system for execution. Used to run a process before AutoCalc closes itself. Max = 20 characters. Do you want a log printed at the end of processing? (Y/N)

Processing Criteria

ROLLDATES

Processing Criteria

RETRYHOURS

Processing Criteria

EXITATTIME

Processing Criteria

EXITATDATE

Processing Criteria

EXITFILE

Processing Criteria

EXITSCRIPT

Print Criteria Automatic P i

Kronos Incorporated

PRINTOPTION AUTO
Page 609 of 613

Processing

TRANSACTION PROCESSOR
These parameters are used with access to the Transaction Processor utility. The value entry indicates both the format and the maximum character-length of the field.

USED FOR
Selection Criteria Selection Criteria

KEY
EMPIDLENGTH DOMAIN

VALUE
Length of Employee ID in use. Default is 9. Network domain name to locate data files. Maximum field length is 8. Define specific time to stop processing and close utility. (hh:mm:ss) Define specific date to stop processing and close utility. (MM/DD/YYYY) Stop processing when this usercreated file is detected. File is deleted after detection. Used to initial an action other than with a date or time. Maximum file length is 20. Define exit file path. Maximum length is 20 characters. Start data collection when utility is opened or wait for response. (Y/N) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.) (Using this indicator assumes a 1 or a Yes value.)

Processing Criteria

EXITATTIME

Processing Criteria

EXITATDATE

Processing Criteria

EXITFILE

Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Enables debugging Automatic Processing

EXITFILELOC STARTDC DEBUG AUTO

ELECTRONIC TIMECARD PARAMETERS

These parameters are used with the Electronic Timecard add-on program. When used, this indicator assumes a Yes value or a 1.

USED FOR
Kronos Incorporated

KEY
Page 610 of 613

RESULTS

Selection Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria Processing Criteria

FULLTAA NOEDIT NODELETE STARTTIME AUTOTEXT FULLWIP CREATEOPN EDITOPNWI

Maintains time record to match labor as closely as possible. Prevents employees from editing labor records. Prevents employees from deleting labor records. Allow users to enter adjusted time and dates. Brings up the labor text window after each save. Permits full WIP functionality. Allows creation of new operations. Allows user to edit operation WIP from labor window.

Kronos Incorporated

Page 611 of 613

DATE RANGE VARIABLES

The Date Range variables can be used in parameter files created in Access Profiles for the automatic completion of date selections in several operations. Many reports and utilities in the ShopTrac Pro system allow the use of variables for different dates in the system. This makes it easy to select relative dates instead of fixed dates. Relative dates are compared to the current date in the system, e.g., if the current date is September 1, a variable called TODAY-3 is August 29. NOTE: Date range variable parameters are interchangeable with each other as long as the proper format is followed. Each parameter group is separated by double hyphens (--) and no spaces are used. This is the criterion that the fixed date ranges use for reports.

TODAY
The TODAY relative date is available in many reports and utilities in the system. TODAY can be modified by adding or subtracting whole numbers from the current system date. Example: If the current date is August 15,

PARAMETER
TODAY -1 TODAY-7 TODAY+10

DATE
August 14 August 8 August 25

MONTHBEG and MONTHEND

These variables represent the beginning and end of the month. The beginning of the month is always the 1st, but the end of the month depends on the number of days in the month. The system selects the correct ending date, based on the month. Adding or subtracting whole numbers from them can modify either of these variables. Example: If the current date is August 15, 1999

PARAMETER
MONTHBEG MONTHBEG-2 MONTHBEG-12 MONTHBEG+12 MONTHEND MONTHEND-2 MONTHEND-4

DATE
August 1, 1999 June 1, 1999 August 1, 1998 August 1, 2000 August 31, 1999 June 30, 1999 April 30, 1999

Kronos Incorporated

Page 612 of 613

YEARBEG and YEAREND

These variables represent the beginning and end of the year. The beginning of the year is always January 1 and the end is always December 31. Adding and subtracting whole numbers from them can modify either of these variables. Example: If the current date is August 15, 1999

PARAMETER
YEARBEG YEARBEG-2 YEAREND YEAREND-2 YEAREND+1

DATE
January 1, 1999 January 1, 1997 December 31, 1999 December 31, 1997 December 31, 2000

DRBEG and DREND

These variables are used to call the Date Ranges that were defined earlier. The format is: DRBEG (daterangename) DREND (daterangename)

These can also use whole number values that can be added to or subtracted from. Example: If you define a date range named WEEK, which begins on Sunday and has a period length of seven days, this date range can be referenced using the DRBEG and DREND variables as below,

PARAMETER
DRBEG (WEEK)-1 DREND (WEEK)-1

DATE
Sunday of last week Saturday of last week

Kronos Incorporated

Page 613 of 613

INDEX
A About ShopTrac Pro, x Absentee (TAA510), 392 Absentee Parameter, 575 Access Profile Listing (ACCESSPR), 360 Access Profile Listing Parameter, 557 Access Profiles, 513 ACCESSPR, 557 ACCROVERRIDE, 278 Accruals Details (ACR001), 403 Accruals Functionality, 277 Accruals Reporting, 278 ACR001, 580 add a flag, 43 ADM900, 540 als Detail Parameter, 580 Approaching Overtime (TAA519), 394 Approaching Overtime Parameters, 576 Assignment Schedule Chart (PRS090), 320 Assignment Schedule Chart Parameters, 536 Assignment Schedule Summary (PRS092), 322 Assignment Schedule Summary Parameters, 537 AUD300, 523 AUD301, 524 AUD305, 525 AUD310, 526 AUD311, 527 AUD315, 528 Audit Trail, 18, 289 Automatic Functionalities Clock-In/Out, 156 Configuring Quantity Complete, 160 Quantity Complete, 159 Recalculation Utility, 161 Report Processing, 164 Report Processing with a Shortcut, 167 Report Processing with Event Manager, 166 Automatic Recalculation, 513 Automatic Recalculation Parameters, 618 B B2B, 32 Barcodes, 19, 289, 530 Batch Log by Date Run, 565 Batch Log by Date Run (BCH070), 375 BCH070, 565 BCL015, 564 By Employee/ID (QC353), 383 By Scrap Code (QC351), 384 By Scrap Code Summary (QC381), 386 By Work Center (QC352), 387 D Daily Assignment, 19, 289, 536 Daily Exceptions (ADM900), 354 Daily Exceptions Parameters, 540 Data Collection Device, x Data Collection Manager, 12 Database Builder, 419 Database Explorer, 420 Date Determination Flex Shifts, 63 By Work Order (QC354), 388 By Work Order Summary (QC384), 390 C Calculating Hours in Batch-Only Mode, 481 Change of hours allocation data at log-off-only logoff, 481 Change of weighting data at multiple-job log-off, 483 Change Password, 22, 286 Clock In Detail, 577 Clock In Detail (TAA500), 396 Clock-In/Clock-Out Status, 490 Clock-In/Out Overtime Considerations, 159 Clocking in previous day marked recalculation, 483 COD020, 532 Code Tables, 107 Absence, 116 Accrual, 118 Audit Trail Reason, 119 Automatic Deduction Override, 122 Completion, 118 Customer Status, 121 Department/Groups, 108 Job Classes, 110 Labor, 111 Machine Status, 119 Rate Class Usage, 113 Rate Classes, 112 Scrap, 121 Work Center, 114 Work Order Status, 122 Combining EMPIDFILL and RESSEL, 166 Configuring Hours Allocation, 134 copy a flag, 43 Counting Towards Limits, Examples, 141 Creating a user-defined prompt, 102 CUSTOLS1, 557 Custom Codes, 106 Customer (CUSTOLS1), 360 Customer Parameter, 557

Kronos Incorporated

Next Day Shift, 64 Date Determination, 61 Date Range Variables DRBEG and DREND, 623 MONTHBEG and MONTHEND, 622 TODAY, 622 YEARBEG and YEAREND, 623 Date Range Variables, 622 DCM, 15 Default Transaction Code Table, 146 Defaults, 65 Daily Schedule, 72 Employee, 66 Operation, 70 Pay Rule, 84 Schedule, 81 Shift, 72 Transaction, 86 Work Order, 68 Define Access Profiles Preferences, 282 delete a flag, 44 Department Parameter, 530 Departments (DPT020), 304 Device configuration Import Devices, 90 Device Configuration Transactions Adding a New Transaction, 97 Breakpoints, 100 Prompts, 99 Transaction Programs, 95 Transactions Prompts and Breakpoints, 97 Device Configuration, 90 Devices, 91 Export Transaction Assignments, 92 Transaction Mapping, 105 Transaction Prompts, 101 Transactions, 93 Device File Parameters, 558 Device Listing (TTX917), 361 DPT020, 530 DRBEG, 623 DRBEG and DREND, 623 DREND, 623 E edit a flag, 43 Editing Labor Records, 254 Editing Multiple Records, 243 Editing or deleting a user-defined prompt, 104 Editing Time Records, 245 Electronic Timecard, 25, 264, 480, 484, 494, 508, 513, 620 EMP031, 530 EMP033, 530

EMPACCR01, 278 EMPIDFILL, 165 EMPLOLS1, 558 Employee Activity, 543 Employee Activity (LAB420), 327 Employee Badge Labels (EMP033), 305 Employee Badge Labels Parameter, 530 Employee Display, 230 Employee Export, 431 Employee ID Labels (EMP031), 305 Employee ID Labels Parameter, 530 Employee ID Number Logic, 277 Employee Listing, 558 Employees Absence Tab, 271 Accruals Tab, 273 Details Tab, 270 Home Tab, 271 Labor Tab, 272 Miscellaneous Tab, 273 Employees, 22, 268, 513 Employees (EMPLOLS1), 361 Employees (stExportEmp.vd5) - Parameter, 590 Event Manager Adding an event, 33 Event Manager, 33 Event Scheduling Configuration Default Prompts, 58 General Flags, 54 Nightly Batch, 55 Personnel Archive, 57 Rules for archiving, 57 Event Scheduling Configuration, 54 Exceptions, 19, 289 EXFMTLS2, 559 Export Employees, 590 Export Field Listing (EXFILLS1), 363 Export Format Listing (EXFMTLS2), 364 Export Formats Listing, 559 Export Hours KAT, 591 Export Pay Categories, 592 Export Schedules, 589, 593 Exporting Custom Fields, 446 Formats, 435 Labor, 450 Labor Hours (Payroll), 454 Machines, 457 Time, 448 Work Schedules, 458 Exporting Employees Export Parameters, 610 Export Formats File Parameters, 603 Hours Export Parameters, 612 Labor Export Parameters, 605 Labor Hours Export Parameters, 608

Kronos Incorporated

Machines Export Parameters, 610 Pay Categories Export Parameters, 614 Time Export Parameters, 603 Work Schedules Export Parameters, 614 Exporting, 433, 588, 603 Extra Hours, 117, 484 F FileMode Parameter, 586 FileName Parameter, 586 Flags, 123 Customer, 125 Daily Schedule, 124 Date Range, 125 Employee Access, 126 Job Class, 126 Labor Code, 126 Machine, 127 Operation, 127 Part Number, 128 Pay Rule Profile, 128 Rate Class, 129 Schedule Characters, 129 Shift, 130 Team, 130 Transaction, 130 Work Center, 131 Work Order, 131 Work Schedule, 132 G Gatekeeper Central (GKC), 432 GKC Export Employees, 460 Group Profile Listing (GROUPPR), 366 H History by Work Center (MAC211), 377 History by Work Center Parameter, 567 Hours Allocation, 133, 484 Consecutive Day Scale, 135 Daily Schedule Scale, 135 Day of Week Scale, 136 Pay Categories, 136 Pay Rule Profiles, 142 Pay Rules, 139 Work Order, Absence Code Pay Scale, 144 Hours Allocation Issues, 133 Hours Categories, 138 Hours Export Absence Record, 598 Exception Record, 598 Hours Record, 598 Pay Categories, 601

Hours Export, 598 Hours KAT (stExportKAT.vd5) - Parameter, 591 Hours Level and Pay Category Tab, 144 Hours NexTrak, 593 Hours NexTrak (stExportNxtHrs.vd5) - Parameter, 593 I IMPFMLS1, 560 Import Employees Parameters, 421 Import Format Listing (IMPFMLS1), 366 Import Format Listing Parameter, 560 Importing Import Data File Parameters, 602 Importing, 588, 602 Importing Guidelines, 431 Importing Utilities Data, 426 Employees, 427 Formats, 422 Operations, 429 Work Order, 428 Importing Utilities, 422 Employees - Accruals, 430 In Progress by Work Center (MAC213), 379 J JCL020, 531 Job Class (JCL020), 306 Job Class Parameter, 531 K KAT Exports Employee, 461 KAT Hours, 463 KAT Pay Categories, 466 KAT Work Schedules, 463 KEEPTRAC Key Transactions, 36 Keyless Transaction, 37 Supervisor Transactions, 37 Transactions, 37 KEEPTRAC, 36 Kronos Attendance Tracker (KAT), 432 L LAB402, 554 LAB420, 543 LAB423, 550 LAB427, 551 LAB440, 554 LAB451, 547 LAB475, 545 Labor, 289

Kronos Incorporated

Labor Audit by Date (AUD300), 294 Labor Audit By Date Parameter, 523 Labor Audit by ID (AUD301), 292 Labor Audit By ID Parameter, 524 Labor Audit Whole Record (AUD305), 295 Labor Audit Whole Record Parameter, 525 Labor Code (LBRC020), 307 Labor Code Labels Parameter, 531 Labor Code Parameter, 531 Labor Configuration Audit Trail, 49 General Flags, 48 Sign Off, 49 Timecard, 50 Labor Events, 543 Labor Hours Summary, 545 Labor Hours Summary (LAB475), 333 Labor Reports, 20 Labor Rounding, 486 Labor/WIP Machines, 200 Part Numbers, 181 Rework Operation, 201 Routers, 192 Suppliers, 181 Teams, 196 Unit of Measure Conversions, 182 Work Order Split, 201 Work Orders, 182 Labor/WIP Customers, 180 Labor/Work In Process, 179 LBRC020, 531 LBRC030, 531 Link Access Profiles to User Profiles, 284 Listing Audit Trail, 520 Barcodes, 520 Daily Assignment, 520 Exceptions, 520 Labor Events, 521 Lists, 521 Logs, 521 Machine Utilization, 521 Quality Control, 522 Time and Attendance, 522 Work In Progress, 522 Lists, 20, 289 Logs, 20, 289 M MAC020, 532 MAC211, 567 MAC213, 567 MAC218, 568

Machine (MAC020), 309 Machine In Progress by Work Center Parameter, 567 Machine Parameter, 532 Machine Time Editor Creating/editing Machine Time Record, 499 Machine Time Editor, 25, 499 Machine Utilization, 21, 289, 377 Machine Utilization Configuration, 59 Maintaining Employee Files, 268 Menu Option Restrictions versus Access Profiles Linking, 284 Miscellaneous Mark Records for Recalculation - Parameters, 616 Nightly Batch File Parameters, 615 Miscellaneous, 615 Utilities Parameters, 588 Miscellaneous Utilities Clean-Up Shared Temp Files, 489 Clearing Temporary Files, 489 Mark Records for Calculation, 476 Miscellaneous Utilities, 475 MONTHBEG, 622 MONTHBEG and MONTHEND, 622 MONTHEND, 622 N NEW/EDIT CUSTOM CODES, 106 NexTrak Exports Employees, 468 Hours, 471 Pay Categories, 474 Schedule, 470 Nightly Batch Utility, 475 O On-Line vs. Fully-Qualified Recalculation, 478 P Parameters Automatic Recalculation, 618 Date Range Variables, 622 Electronic Timecard, 620 Employees Export, 610 Export Formats File, 603 Exporting, 603 Hours Export, 598, 612 Import Data File, 602 Importing, 602 Labor Export, 605 Labor Hours Export, 608 Machines Export, 610 Mark Records for Recalculation, 616 Nightly Batch File, 615 Pay Categories Export, 601, 614

Kronos Incorporated

Time Export, 603 Transaction Entry, 617 Work Schedules Export, 614 Parameters Transaction Processor, 620 Partial Day Absence Tardy Period, 486 Partial Day Absences (PDA), 274 Pay Categories (stExportPayCat.vd5) - Parameter, 592 Pay Categories NexTrak, 595 Pay Categories NexTrak (stExportNxtPCAbs.vd5) Parameter, 595 Pay Category Amounts Summary (TAA132), 400 Pay Rule Defaults Hours Level/ Pay Category, 85 Pay Rule Defaults Pay Rule, 84 Pay Rule Profiles, 560 Pay Rule Profiles (PRPROLS1), 367 Pay Rule Tab, 143 Pay Rules Additive Rules, 141 PDA Logic, 275 Period Timecard, 547 Period Timecard (LAB451), 336 Personnel Archive Chart (PRS080), 324 Personnel Archive Chart Parameter, 539 Prameters Time/Labor Editor, 514 Premium Zones w/Batch Qualifiers, 487 Premium Zones w/Expansion Zones, 487 PROMPLST, 560 Prompts (PROMPLST), 368 Prompts Parameter, 560 PRPROLS1, 560 PRS080, 539 PRS090, 536 PRS092, 537 Purge Audit Data, 492 Batch Log, 492 Clear Transaction Log, 493 Daily Assignments, 493 Labor Event Orphans, 494 Labor/Events, 494 Machine Utilization, 495 Time Records, 496 Transaction Log, 496 Work Order, 496 Q QC351, 570 QC352, 572 QC353, 570 QC354, 573

QC381, 571 QC384, 573 Quality Control, 21, 289 Quality Control By Employee/ID Parameter, 570 Quality Control By Scrap Code Parameter, 570 Quality Control By Scrap Code Summary Parameter, 571 Quality Control By Work Center Parameter, 572 Quality Control By Work Order Parameter, 573 Quality Control By Work Order Summary Parameter, 573 Query Transactions, 168 QUERYDAY, 170 QUERYWIP, 175 R Rate Class (RCL020), 310 Rate Class Parameter, 532 Rate Detail by Employee ID & Date (LAB423), 340 Rate Detail by ID & Work Order (LAB427), 343 Rate Detail by ID, Date, 550 Rate Detail by ID, Work Order, 551 RCL020, 532 Reason Code Parameter, 532 Reason Codes, 120 Reason Codes (COD020), 311 Recalculate Hours Error Checking, 152 Recalculate Hours, 150 WIP Adjustments, 154 Recalculation Overview, 477 Recalculation Triggers, 479 Report Parameters Audit Trail, 523 Labor Audit By Date Parameter (AUD300), 523 Labor Audit By ID Parameter (AUD301), 524 Labor Audit Whole Record Parameter (AUD305), 525 Time Audit By Date Parameter (AUD310), 526 Time Audit By ID Parameter (AUD311), 527 Time Audit Whole Record Parameter (AUD315), 528 Barcodes, 530 Department Parameter (DPT020), 530 Employee Badge Labels Parameter (EMP033), 530 Employee ID Labels Parameter (EMP031), 530 Job Class Parameter (JCL020), 531 Labor Code Labels Parameter (LBRC030), 531 Labor Code Parameter (LBRC020), 531 Machine Parameter (MAC020), 532 Rate Class Parameter (RCL020), 532 Reason Code Parameter (COD020), 532 Transaction Barcodes Parameter (TRX020), 533 Travelers Parameters (TRV015), 533

Kronos Incorporated

Work Center Barcodes Parameter (WKC020), 535 Work Order Barcodes Parameter (TRV020), 535 Work Order Labels Parameter (TRV030), 535 Daily Assignment, 536 Assignment Schedule Chart Parameters (PRS090), 536 Assignment Schedule Summary Parameters (PRS092), 537 Personnel Archive Chart Parameter (PRS080), 539 Daily Exceptions, 540 Daily Exceptions (ADM900), 540 Signoff Exceptions Parameters (TAA560), 541 Labor Events, 543 Employee Activity (LAB420), 543 Labor Hours Summary (LAB475), 545 Period Timecard (LAB451), 547 Rate Detail by ID, Date (LAB423), 550 Rate Detail by ID, Work Order (LAB427), 551 Team Status Parameters (LAB440), 554 Work Order Detail Parameters (LAB402), 554 Lists, 557 Lists Access Profile Listing Parameter (ACCESSPR), 557 Customer Parameter (CUSTOLS1), 557 Device File Parameters (TTX917), 558 Employee Listing (EMPLOLS1), 558 Export Formats Listing (EXFMTLS2), 559 Import Format Listing Parameter (IMPFMLS1), 560 Pay Rule Profiles (PRPROLS1), 560 Prompts Parameter (PROMPLST), 560 Shifts Listing Parameters (SHIFTLS2), 561 Transactions Listing Parameter (TRANSLST), 561 User Profile Listing Parameter (USERPR), 562 Work Schedules Detail Listing Parameters (WRKSCLS1), 562 Logs, 564 Batch Log by Date Run (BCH070), 565 Transaction Log Parameters (BCL015), 564 Machine Utilization, 567 History by Work Center Parameter (MAC211), 567 Machine In Progress by Work Center Parameter (MAC213), 567 Usage by Machine Parameter (MAC218), 568 Quality Control, 570 Quality Control By Employee/ID Parameter (QC353), 570 Quality Control By Scrap Code Parameter (QC351), 570 Quality Control By Scrap Code Summary Parameter (QC381), 571

Quality Control By Work Center Parameter (QC352), 572 Quality Control By Work Order Parameter (QC354), 573 Quality Control By Work Order Summary Parameter (QC384), 573 Time and Attendance, 575 Absentee Parameter (TAA510), 575 Accruals Detail Parameter (ACR001), 580 Approaching Overtime Parameters (TAA519), 576 Clock In Detail (TAA500), 577 Reports T A Pay Category Amounts Summary Parameter (TAA132), 579 Reports T A Weekly Schedule Parameter (TAA133), 580 Work In Progress, 582 Reports WIP W/O Top Assembly Parameter (WIP199), 585 WIP by Work Center Parameter (WIP105), 582 WIP Hours and Efficiencies (WIP111), 582 WIP Movement Parameter (WIP112), 583 WIP Summary Parameters (WIP103), 584 Report Parameters, 513, 523 Report Printing Options, 290 Report Table Listing, 520 Reports Audit Trail, 290 Barcodes, 303 Daily Assignment, 320 Exceptions, 354 Labor, 327 Lists, 360 Logs, 372 Quality Control, 383 Time & Attendance, 392 Work In Process (WIP), 404 Reports, 18, 289, 513 Reports T A Pay Category Amounts Summary Parameter, 579 Reports T A Weekly Schedule Parameter, 580 Reports WIP W/O Top Assembly Parameter, 585 RESSEL, 166 S Schedule Defaults Consecutive Day Pay Scales, 83 Day of Week Pay Scales, 84 Schedule Defaults General, 82 Schedules (stExportWrkSch.vd5) - Parameter, 589, 593 Schedules NexTrak, 596 Schedules NexTrak (stExportNxtSch.vd5) Parameter, 596

Kronos Incorporated

Security, 279 Security Access Profile Parameters, 513 Security Access Profiles, 279 Security Group Profiles, 280 Security User Profiles, 283 Selection Criteria Window, 234 set up accruals, 278 Setup Flags, 43 Labor, 48 Overview, 39 Reports, 48 System Configuration, 41 Time & Attendance, 45 Setup, 22, 39, 513 Audit Trail, 46 Pay Rules, 47 Setup Parameters, 587 Shift Defaults Exceptions, 78 Meal/Breaks, 76 Premium Zone, 78 Restriction/Enforcement, 77 Rounding, 75 Shift Defaults Rules, 73 Shift File Screens Exceptions, 223 Meals/Breaks, 215 Non-worked hours, 219 Premium Zone Details, 221 Premium Zones, 219 Restrictions/Enforcement, 217 Rounding, 214 Rules, 212 Shift File Screens, 211 Shift Restriction-Enforcement Daily Overtime, 227 Period Overtime, 227 Shift Restriction-Enforcement, 227 SHIFTLS2, 561 Shifts Detail (SHIFTLS2), 368 Shifts File Parameters, 587 Shifts Listing Parameters, 561 ShopTrac Pro Add-On Programs, 506 ShopTrac Pro Menus, 14, 18 Signoff Exceptions (TAA560), 358 Signoff Exceptions Parameters, 541 stExportEmp.vd5, 590 stExportKAT.vd5, 591 stExportNxtHrs.vd5, 593 stExportNxtPCAbs.vd5, 595 stExportNxtSch.vd5, 596 stExportPayCat.vd5, 592 stExportWrkSch.vd5, 589, 593 SUPERUSER, 286

Superuser Access, 286 Supervisor Cards (SupvCard), 312 T T & A Only Access Profiles, 30 Import Utility, 29 Menu Items Removed, 27 Setup, 29 Time Labor Editor, 29 Transactions, 27 TAA132, 579 TAA133, 580 TAA500, 577 TAA510, 575 TAA519, 576 TAA560, 541 [Link], 489 [Link], 489 [Link], 489 [Link], 489 [Link], 489 [Link], 489 Team Builder, 25, 506, 507 Team Status (LAB440), 348 Team Status Parameters, 554 Terminal Emulator, 511 Time & Attendance, 21, 289 Time and Attendance Only, 27 Time Audit by Date (AUD310), 299 Time Audit By Date Parameter, 526 Time Audit by ID (AUD311), 297 Time Audit By ID Parameter, 527 Time Audit Whole Record (AUD315), 300 Time Audit Whole Record Parameter, 528 Time Files, 252 Time/Labor Editor Audit Trail, 264 Automatic Hours Recalculation, 265 Electronic Signoff, 266 Error Checking, 240 Exceptions, 235 Labor, 232 Labor File, 261 LHours File, 263 Period Hours, 233 Quantity Synching, 263 Recalculate Hours, 238 Selecting Employees, 234 Time/Labor Editor, 51, 230, 513 Time/Labor Editor Configuration, 52 Time/Labor Editor Parameters, 514 Time/Labor Editor:, 18 Time-Based vs. Hours-Based, 507 TODAY, 622

Kronos Incorporated

Transaction Barcodes Parameter, 533 Transaction Defaults Employee Access, 87 Transaction Defaults General, 86 Transaction Entry, 26, 115, 203, 205, 251, 270, 274, 499, 502, 513, 617 Transaction Log (BCL015), 372 Transaction Log Parameters, 564 Transaction Mappings, 106 Transaction Mappings and Custom Codes NEW/EDIT CUSTOM CODES, 106 Transaction Mappings and Custom Codes, 106 Transaction Processing, 513 Transaction Processor, 16, 620 Transaction Programs (TTX920), 370 Transaction Programs Listing Parameters, 562 Transaction Programs Listing Parameters (TTX920), 562 Transactions (TRANSLST), 370 Transactions (TRX020), 313 Transactions during Recalculation, 479 Transactions Listing Parameter, 561 TRANSLST, 561 Travelers (TRV015), 314 Travelers Parameters, 533 Triggers-Batch Hours Only, 480 TRV015, 533 TRV020, 535 TRV030, 535 TRX020, 533 TTX917, 558 TTX920, 562 U Usage by Machine (MAC218), 380 Usage by Machine Parameter, 568 User Profile Listing (USERPR), 371 User Profile Listing Parameter, 562 User-Defined Labels, 44 Department, 44 Function, 44 Group, 44 Job Class, 44 Labor Code, 44 Operation, 44 Work Center, 44 Work Order, 44 USERPR, 562 Utilities Adding Delimiters, 419 GKC Export, 460 KAT Exports, 461 NexTrak Exports, 467 Utilities, 25, 419, 513

Purge, 490 Utilities Overview, 419 Utilities Parameters, 588 V Validation, 105 W W/O Top Assembly (WIP199), 415 WEB Reporting, 31 Weekly Schedule (TAA133), 401 WIP by Work Center (WIP105), 404 WIP by Work Center Parameter, 582 WIP Hours & Efficiencies (WIP111), 406 WIP Hours and Efficiencies, 582 WIP Movement (WIP112), 409 WIP Movement Parameter, 583 WIP Summary (WIP103), 413 WIP Summary Parameters, 584 WIP103, 584 WIP105, 582 WIP111, 582 WIP112, 583 WIP199, 585 WKC020, 535 Work Center (WKC020), 317 Work Center Barcodes Parameter, 535 Work In Process, 21, 289 Work Order (TRV020), 317 Work Order Barcodes Parameter, 535 Work Order Detail (LAB402), 349 Work Order Detail Parameters, 554 Work Order Labels (TRV030), 318 Work Order Labels Parameter, 535 Work Order Query - Loop, 175 Work Period Enforcement, 88 Work Schedules Absence Scheduling, 205 Daily Assignment, 203 Date Ranges, 205 Premium Zone, 228 Schedules, 206 Shifts, 211 Work Schedules, 202 Work Schedules Detail (WRKSCLS1), 371 Work Schedules Detail Listing Parameters, 562 Work Schedules File Parameters, 587 WRKSCLS1, 562 Y YEARBEG, 623 YEARBEG and YEAREND, 623 YEAREND, 623

Kronos Incorporated

Kronos Incorporated